OWNER'S MANUAL
VÄLKOMMEN!
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The
car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your pas-
sengers. Volvo is one of the world's safest passenger vehicles. Your
Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that
you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's
manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo
Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com).
2
INTRODUCTION
This is how you find owner's information
14
Digital owner's manual in the car
15
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
16
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
18
Volvo Cars support site
19
Reading the owner's manual
19
Recording data
22
Important information on accesso-
ries, extra equipment and diagnostic
socket
23
Volvo ID
23
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
25
IntelliSafe-driver support
28
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
29
The owner's manual and the environment
32
Windows, glass and mirrors
32
Overview of the centre display
33
Operating the centre display
36
Navigating in the centre display's views
40
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
45
Change settings for the centre display
46
Function view with buttons for car
functions
47
Using the keyboard in the centre display
49
Writing characters/words by hand on
the screen
53
SAFETY
Safety
56
Safety during pregnancy
56
Whiplash Protection System
57
Seatbelt
58
Seatbelt tensioner
59
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt
60
Door and seatbelt reminder
61
Airbags
63
Driver and passenger airbags
63
Activating/deactivating the passen-
ger airbag*
65
Side airbag
68
Inflatable curtain
68
Safety mode
69
Starting/moving the car after safety
mode
70
Child safety
71
Child seats
71
Upper mounting points for child seats
74
Lower mounting points for child seats
74
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
76
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
78
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
79
Table for location of i-Size child seats
82
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car
84
Instruments and controls, right-hand
drive car
85
Driver display
88
Driver display settings
92
Indicator symbols in the driver display
93
Warning symbols in the driver display
95
Outside temperature gauge
96
Clock
97
Fuel gauge
97
License agreement for the driver display
98
Application menu in the driver display
103
Using the application menu in the
driver display
104
Messages in the driver display and
the centre display
105
Managing messages in the driver
display and the centre display
107
Managing messages saved from the
driver display and centre display
108
Head-up display*
110
Voice recognition
113
Using voice recognition
114
Settings for voice recognition
115
Voice recognition control of the phone
116
Voice recognition control of radio
and media
116
Voice recognition control of climate
control
117
Voice recognition and map navigation
118
Manual front seat
119
Power front seat*
120
Adjusting the power front seat*
120
Using the memory function in the
power front seat*
121
Multi-functional front seat*
122
Adjusting functions in the multi-func-
tional front seat*
122
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
124
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
125
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
126
Steering wheel
129
Adjusting the steering wheel
130
Lighting control
131
Headlamp levelling
132
Position lamps
133
Daytime running lights
134
Dipped beam
134
Activating/deactivating main beam
135
Active bending lights*
138
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
138
Rear fog lamp
139
Brake lights
140
Hazard warning flashers
140
Using direction indicators
141
Passenger compartment lighting
141
Home safe light duration
144
Approach light duration
144
Using windscreen wipers
145
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
145
Windscreen and headlamp washers
146
Rear window wiper and washer
147
Power windows
148
Operating power windows
148
Adjusting the door mirrors
149
Interior rearview mirror
151
Compass*
152
Calibrating the compass*
153
Panorama roof*
154
Operating the panorama roof*
155
HomeLink
®
*
158
Programming HomeLink
®
*
159
Trip computer
161
4
Show trip data in the driver display
163
Show trip statistics in the centre display
164
Settings in the centre display
165
Categories in the settings menu
166
Changing system settings in the set-
tings menu
168
Resetting settings in the settings menu
169
Driver profiles
169
Selecting driver profile
170
Editing a driver profile
171
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
172
Changing settings for apps
173
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
173
CLIMATE CONTROL
Climate control
176
Climate control - sensors
177
Perceived temperature
177
Air quality
178
Passenger compartment filter
179
Clean Zone Interior Package*
179
Interior Air Quality System*
179
Climate controls
180
Climate controls in the centre display
181
Climate controls at the rear of the
tunnel console*
182
Auto-regulating the climate
183
Activating/deactivating air conditioning
184
Regulating the temperature
185
Regulating the fan level
187
Activating/deactivating defrost of
windows and door mirrors
188
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
191
Air distribution
191
Changing the air distribution
192
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
193
Table of air distribution options
195
Activating/deactivating heating of
the seats*
197
Activating/deactivating ventilation of
the seats*
198
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel*
199
Parking climate*
200
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
201
Timer for preconditioning*
202
Setting the timer for preconditioning*
202
Activating/deactivating the timer for
preconditioning*
204
Starting/switching off climate com-
fort retention*
204
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
206
Heater*
207
Parking heater*
208
Additional heater*
209
5
LOADING AND STORAGE
Passenger compartment interior
212
Tunnel console
212
Electrical sockets
214
Using the glovebox
218
Sun visors
219
Cargo area
219
Recommendations for loading
219
Load retaining eyelets
221
Bag hooks
221
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
222
Cargo cover*
222
Safety net*
224
Safety grille*
226
LOCKS AND ALARM
Remote control key
230
Remote control key range
232
Red Key - Restricted remote control key*
233
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
234
Locking/unlocking from the outside
235
Indication on locking/unlocking the car
237
Locking/unlocking from the inside
239
Deadlocks*
241
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
242
Using private locking
244
Detachable key blade
245
Locking/unlocking with the detacha-
ble key blade
246
Power operated tailgate*
247
Opening/closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
250
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
252
Immobiliser
255
Child safety locks
256
Alarm*
257
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
259
Disarming the alarm* without work-
ing remote control key
259
Detection of unknown car component*
259
Type approval for the remote control
key system
260
6
DRIVER SUPPORT
Speed-dependent steering force
270
Stability system
270
Electronic Stability Control ESC
271
Sport mode for electronic stability control
272
Symbols and messages for elec-
tronic stability control
273
Speed limiter*
275
Activating and starting the Speed limiter
276
Managing speed for the Speed limiter
276
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed
Limiter
277
Switching off the speed limiter
278
Automatic speed limiter*
279
Activating/deactivating the automatic
speed limiter
280
Changing the tolerance for the Auto-
matic speed limiter
281
Cruise control
282
Activating and starting the Cruise control
283
Managing speed for the Cruise control
284
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise
control
285
Deactivating Cruise Control
286
Distance Warning*
287
Activating and setting the time inter-
val for Distance warning*
288
Limitations of Distance Warning*
289
Adaptive cruise control*
290
Activating and starting the Adaptive
cruise control*
294
Managing the speed of the Adaptive
cruise control*
295
Setting the time interval for the
adaptive cruise control*
296
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive
cruise control*
298
Overtaking assistance with adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist*
300
Change of target and automatic
braking with the Adaptive Cruise Control
301
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
302
Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control*
303
Symbols and messages for the
Adaptive cruise control*
305
Pilot Assist*
307
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
311
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
313
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
314
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
315
Change of target and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist*
317
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
319
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
320
Radar unit
322
Limitations of the radar unit
324
Type approval for radar units
328
Camera unit
332
Limitations of the camera unit
333
City Safety
336
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
339
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
340
City Safety in cross traffic
342
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres
343
City Safety when evasive manoeu-
vres are prevented
345
Limitations of City Safety
346
Messages for City Safety
348
Rear Collision Warning
349
BLIS*
349
Activate/deactivate BLIS*
351
Limitations of BLIS*
351
Cross Traffic Alert*
352
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
353
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
354
Messages for BLIS* and Cross
Traffic Alert*
356
7
Road Sign Information*
357
Sign display with Road Sign Information
358
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
360
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information*
361
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
362
Driver Alert Control
363
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
364
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
365
Lane Keeping Aid
365
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
368
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
369
Assistance upon risk of collision
371
Symbols and messages for assis-
tance upon risk of collision
372
Steering assistance upon risk of lane
departure
373
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
375
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
376
Park Assist*
378
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
380
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
381
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot*
383
Park assist camera*
384
Park assist lines and fields for the
park assist camera*
386
Starting the Park assist camera*
388
Limitations for park assist camera*
389
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera*
391
Park Assist Pilot*
393
Parking with Park Assist Pilot*
394
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
397
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
400
STARTING AND DRIVING
Alcohol lock*
402
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
402
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
402
Ignition positions
403
Starting the car
404
Switching off the car
405
Steering lock
406
Using jump starting with another battery
406
Gearbox
407
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
408
Manual gearbox
410
Gear shift indicator*
410
Gear selector inhibitor
412
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
413
Start/Stop
414
Using the Start/Stop function
414
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
416
Drive modes*
418
Drive mode ECO
421
Level control* and shock absorption
423
All-wheel drive*
425
Brake functions
425
Foot brake
425
8
Emergency brake lights
427
Brake assistance
427
Auto braking after a collision
428
Parking brake
428
Using the parking brake
429
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
431
Hill start assist
431
Automatic braking when stationary
432
Low speed control*
433
Hill descent control*
434
Driving in water
435
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
436
Overloading the starter battery
437
Preparations for a long trip
437
Winter driving
438
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
and refuelling
439
Handling of fuel
440
Petrol
441
Diesel
442
Empty tank and diesel engine
443
Diesel particulate filter
443
Economical driving
444
Towing bracket*
445
Extendable/retractable towing brackets*
445
Towing bracket specifications*
447
Driving with a trailer
448
Trailer lamps
450
Trailer Stability Assist*
451
Towing eye
452
Towing
453
Recovering the car
454
AUDIO AND MEDIA
Audio and media
456
Apps
456
Audio settings
457
Radio
458
Changing and searching radio stations
458
RDS radio
460
Digital radio
461
Linking between different radio
bands FM and DAB
461
Settings for radio
462
Media player
463
Media playback
463
Gracenote
®
466
Searching media
466
CD player*
467
Media via Bluetooth
®
467
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
468
Media via USB port
468
Connecting a device via USB port
468
video
469
Audio settings for media
469
TV*
470
Using the TV*
470
Apple CarPlay*
471
9
Using Apple CarPlay*
472
Settings for Apple CarPlay*
473
Android Auto*
473
Settings for Android Auto*
475
Technical specifications for media
475
Phone
477
Connect phone
478
Connecting/disconnecting the phone
479
Managing phone calls
480
Managing text messages
481
Managing the phone book
482
Settings for phone
483
Settings for text messages
483
Bluetooth
®
settings
483
Online car*
484
Connecting the car
484
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot
486
No or poor connection
487
Remove Wi-Fi network
488
Wi-Fi technologies and security
488
Settings for car modem*
488
Downloading, updating and uninstal-
ling apps
489
License agreement for audio and media
491
Terms and conditions for services
and Customer Privacy Policy
501
WHEELS AND TYRES
Tyres
504
Tyres' rotation direction
505
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
506
Checking the tyre pressures
506
Tyre monitoring*
507
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre
monitoring system*
509
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre
monitoring*
510
Calibrating tyre monitoring*
511
Emergency puncture repair kit
512
Using the emergency puncture repair kit
513
Inflate tyres with the compressor
from the emergency puncture repair kit
516
When changing wheels
517
Removing a wheel
518
Fitting the wheels
519
Wheel bolts
520
Spare wheel*
520
Winter wheels
521
Tool kit
522
Warning triangle
523
Jack*
523
First aid kit
524
Dimension designation for wheel rim
524
10
Dimension designation for tyre
525
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
Volvo service programme
528
Car status
528
Book service and repair
528
Remote updates
531
System updates
531
Raise the car
533
Opening and closing the bonnet
535
Engine compartment overview
536
Engine oil
537
Checking and filling with engine oil
539
Topping up coolant
540
Servicing the climate control system
542
Bulb replacement
542
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
544
Replacing the main beam lamp
545
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
545
Replacing the front direction indica-
tor bulb
546
Bulb specifications
546
Wiper blades in service position
547
Replacing a wiper blade
548
Filling washer fluid
549
Starter battery
550
Symbols on the batteries
552
Support battery
553
Fuses
554
Replacing a fuse
555
Fuses in engine compartment
556
Fuses under glovebox
559
Fuses in cargo area
563
Cleaning the exterior
567
Polishing and waxing
569
Rustproofing
570
Cleaning the interior
570
Cleaning the centre display
572
Paint damage
573
Repairing paint damage
573
11
SPECIFICATIONS
Type designations
576
Dimensions
579
Weights
581
Towing capacity and towball load
582
Engine specifications
584
Engine oil — specifications
585
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
586
Coolant — specifications
587
Transmission fluid — specifications
587
Brake fluid — specifications
587
Fuel tank - volume
588
Air conditioning — specifications
588
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
590
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
593
Load index and speed rating
594
Approved tyre pressures
595
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Alphabetical Index 597
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
14
This is how you find owner's
information
Owner's information is available in several differ-
ent product formats, both digital and printed.
The owner's manual is available in the car's cen-
tre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo
Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a
supplement to the owner's manual available in
the glovebox, with specifications and fuse infor-
mation, amongst other things. A printed owner's
manual can be ordered.
The car's centre display
1
In the centre display, drag down
the top view and tap on
Owner's manual. Available
here are options for visual navi-
gation with exterior and interior
images of the car. The informa-
tion is searchable and is also
divided into categories.
Mobile app
In App Store or Google Play,
search for "Volvo Manual",
download the app to your
smartphone or tablet and select
the car. Available in the app are
video tutorials and options for
visual navigation with exterior
and interior images of the car. It is easy to navi-
gate between the different sections in the
owner's manual and the content is searchable.
Volvo Cars support site
Go to support.volvocars.com
and select your country. Here
you can find owner's manuals,
both online and in PDF format.
On the Volvo Cars support site
there are also video tutorials
and further information and
help regarding your Volvo and your car owner-
ship. The page is available for most markets.
Printed information
There is a supplement to the
owner's manual
1
in the glove-
box that contains information
on fuses and specifications, as
well as a summary of important
and practical information.
There is also a Quick Guide available in printed
format that helps you to get started with the most
commonly used functions in the car.
Depending on equipment level selected, market,
etc. additional owner's information may also be
available in printed format in the car.
A printed owner's manual and associated supple-
ment can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to
order.
Changing the language in the car's
centre display
Changing the language in the centre display may
mean that some owner's information does not
correspond to national or local laws and regula-
tions. Don't change to a language that's difficult
to understand, it may then be difficult to find your
way back in the structure on the screen.
1
A complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display.
INTRODUCTION
}}
15
IMPORTANT
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven safely in traffic and that applica-
ble laws and regulations are followed. It is
also important that the car is maintained and
handled in accordance with Volvo's recom-
mendations in the owner's information.
If there should be a difference between the
information in the centre display and the prin-
ted information then it is always the printed
information that applies.
Related information
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
•
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)
Digital owner's manual in the car
A digital
2
version of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car's centre display.
The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
To open the digital owner's manual - drag down
the top view in the centre display and tap on
Owner's manual.
NOTE
The digital owner's manual is not available
while driving.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the digital owner's manual. The
options can be reached from the start page of
the owner's manual. One way is from the top
menu, with a tap on
.
Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
manual menu
Leads to the start page of
the Owner's Manual.
Articles grouped by cate-
gory. The same article may
appear in several catego-
ries.
Leads to a Quick Guide
page with links for a selec-
tion of articles that can be
particularly useful to read.
Provides answers to com-
mon questions about the
car.
2
Applies for most markets.
||
INTRODUCTION
16
Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
manual menu
Exterior and interior over-
view images of the car. Dif-
ferent parts are designated
with hotspots that lead to
articles about those parts
of the car.
All articles that have been
favourited are compiled
here.
Symbols and their meaning in the owner's
manual menu
Leads to short video tutori-
als for different functions in
the car.
Indicates what version of
the Owner's Manual is
available in the car and pro-
vides other useful informa-
tion.
Related information
•
Navigating in the digital owner's manual
(p. 16)
Navigating in the digital owner's
manual
The digital owner's manual can be accessed
from the centre display in the car. The content is
searchable and it is easy to navigate between
different sections.
The digital owner's manual is accessed from the top
view.
Open the digital owner's manual
–
To open the digital owner's manual - drag
down the top view in the centre display and
tap on
Owner's manual.
There is a range of different options for finding
information in the digital owner's manual. To
access the owner's manual menu – press
in
the upper bar of the owner's manual.
INTRODUCTION
}}
17
Searching using categories
The articles in the owner's
manual are structured into
main categories and subcate-
gories. The same article can be
found in several appropriate
categories in order to be found
more easily.
1.
Press
and then select Categories.
> The main categories are shown in a list.
2.
Tap on a main category (
).
>
A list of subcategories (
) and articles
(
) is shown.
3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back,
press the back arrow.
Hotspots for exterior and interior
Exterior and interior overview
images of the car. Different
parts are designated with hot-
spots that lead to articles about
those parts of the car.
1.
Press
and then select Exterior/
Interior.
> Exterior/interior images are shown with
so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot
leads to articles about the corresponding
part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the
screen to browse among the images.
2. Tap on a hotspot.
> The title of the article about the area is
shown.
3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go
back, press the back arrow.
Learn about the car's most common
functions with the Quick Guide
Leads to a page with links for a
selection of articles that can be
particularly useful to read in
order to get to know the most
common functions of the car.
The articles can also be
accessed via categories, but
are collected here for quick access. Tap on an
article in order to read it in its entirety.
Favourites
Located here are the articles
that have been saved as
favourites. Tap on an article in
order to read it in its entirety.
Saving/deleting articles as favourites
Save an article as favourite by pressing at the
top right when an article is open. When an article
has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in:
.
To remove an article as a favourite, press the star
again in the current article.
Video
Leads to short video tutorials
for different functions in the
car.
Information
Tap on the symbol to obtain
information about which version
of the owner's manual is availa-
ble in the car as well as other
useful information.
||
INTRODUCTION
18
Start page
Tap on the symbol to go back
to the start page in the owner's
manual.
Using the search function
1.
Tap on
in the top menu of the owner's
manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part
of the screen.
2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt".
> Suggestions for articles and categories
are shown while letters are being entered.
3. Tap on the article/category to access it.
Related information
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
Owner's Manual in mobile devices
The owner's manual is available as a mobile
app
3
from both the App Store and Google Play.
The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets.
The owner's manual can be
downloaded as a mobile app
from the App Store or Google
Play. The QR code provided
here takes you directly to the
app. Alternatively, you can
search for "Volvo manual" in
the App Store or Google Play.
The app contains a video along with exterior and
interior images where different parts of the car
are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which
lead to articles about the area in question. It is
easy to navigate between the different sections
in the owner's manual and the content is search-
able.
The mobile app is available from both the App Store and
Google Play.
Related information
•
Reading the owner's manual (p. 19)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
3
For certain mobile devices.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
19
Volvo Cars support site
More information on your car is available on the
Volvo Cars website and support site.
Support on the Internet
Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The
support site is available for most markets.
It contains support for functions such as web-
based services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the
navigation system* and apps. Videos and step-
by-step instructions explain different procedures,
e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a
mobile phone.
Downloadable information
Maps
For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation, there
is the facility to download maps from the support
page.
Owner's manuals as PDF
Owner's manuals are available for download in
PDF format. Select car model and model year to
download the manual as required.
Contact
The support site contains contact details to cus-
tomer support and your nearest Volvo dealer.
Log in to Volvo Cars website
Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to
www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is
possible to get an overview of service, agree-
ments and warranties. Here there is also informa-
tion about accessories and software adapted for
your car model.
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 23)
Reading the owner's manual
A good way of getting to know your new car is
to read the owner's manual, ideally before your
first journey.
Reading the owner's manual is a good way to
become familiar with new functions, get advice
on how best to handle the car in different situa-
tions and learn how to make the best use of all
the car's features. Please pay attention to the
safety instructions contained in the owner's man-
ual.
Development work is constantly underway in
order to improve our product. Modifications may
mean that information, descriptions and illustra-
tions in the owner's manual differ from the equip-
ment in the car. We reserve the right to make
modifications without prior notice.
Do not remove this manual from the car - if prob-
lems should arise then the necessary information
about where and how to seek professional help
will be missing.
© Volvo Car Corporation
Options/accessories
In addition to standard equipment, the owner's
manual also describes options (factory fitted
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted
extra equipment).
All types of option/accessory are marked with an
asterisk: *.
||
INTRODUCTION
20
The equipment described in the owner's manual
is not available in all cars - they have different
equipment depending on adaptations for the
needs of different markets and national or local
laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard
or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts appear if there is a risk of
injury.
IMPORTANT
"Important" texts appear if there is a risk of
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate
the use of e.g. features and functions.
Footnote
The owner's manual contains information in cer-
tain locations in the form of a footnote at the bot-
tom of the page or at the end of a table. This
information is an addition to the text that it refers
to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a
table then letters are used instead of numbers
for referral.
Message texts
There are displays in the car that show menu and
message texts. In the owner's manual the
appearance of these texts differs from the normal
text. Examples of menu texts and message texts:
Phone, New message.
Decals
The car contains different types of decal which
are designed to convey important information in a
simple and clear manner. The decals in the car
have the following descending degree of impor-
tance for the warning/information.
Warning of personal injury
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white
text/image on black message field. Used to indi-
cate the presence of danger which, if the warning
is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or
fatality.
Risk of property damage
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if
the warning is ignored, may result in damage to
property.
INTRODUCTION
21
Information
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and location in
the car. The information that applies to your
particular car is available on the respective
decals for your car.
Procedure lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a cer-
tain sequence are numbered in the owner's man-
ual:
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is num-
bered in the same way as the corresponding
illustration.
Lists of letters appear adjacent to the series
of illustrations where the order of the instruc-
tions is not significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered
and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the relative order is of no
relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-by-
step instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used in
overview images where different components
are pointed out. The number recurs in the
position list featured in connection with the
illustration that describes the item.
Bulleted lists
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
Example:
•
Coolant
•
Engine oil
Related information
Related information refers to other articles con-
taining closely associated information.
Images
Illustrations used in the owner's manual are
sometimes schematic and are intended to pro-
vide an overall picture or example of a certain
function. Illustrations may deviate from the car's
appearance depending on equipment level and
market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to the
right when an article continues on the following
page.
Continued from previous page
|| This symbol is located furthest up to the left
when an article continues from the previous
page.
Related information
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
•
Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 18)
•
Volvo Cars support site (p. 19)
INTRODUCTION
22
Recording data
As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance,
certain information about the vehicle's operation,
functionality and incidents are recorded in the
car.
This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data
Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to regis-
ter and record data related to traffic accidents or
collision-like situations, such as times when the
airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle
in the road. The data is recorded in order to
increase understanding of how vehicle systems
work in these types of situations. The EDR is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short time,
usually 30 seconds or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record
data related to the following in the event of traffic
accidents or collision-like situations:
•
How the various systems in the car worked
•
Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts
were fastened/tensioned
•
The driver's use of the accelerator or brake
pedal
•
The travel speed of the vehicle
This information can help us better understand
the circumstances in which traffic accidents, inju-
ries and damage occur. The EDR only records
data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs.
The EDR does not record any data during normal
driving conditions. Similarly, the system never
registers who is driving the vehicle or the geo-
graphic location of the accident or near-miss sit-
uation. However, other parties, such as the police,
could use the recorded data in combination with
the type of personally identifiable information
routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special
equipment and access to either the vehicle or the
EDR is required to be able to interpret the regis-
tered data.
In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a
number of computers designed to continually
check and monitor the function of the car. They
can record data during normal driving conditions,
but in particular register faults affecting the vehi-
cle's operation and functionality, or upon activa-
tion of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g.
City Safety and the auto brake function).
Some of the recorded data is required to enable
service and maintenance technicians to diagnose
and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehi-
cle. The registered information is also needed to
enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out
in laws and by government authorities. Informa-
tion registered in the vehicle is stored in its com-
puter until the vehicle is serviced or repaired.
In addition to the above, the registered informa-
tion can be used in aggregate form for research
and product development with the aim of contin-
uously improving the safety and quality of Volvo
cars.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described
information being disclosed to third parties with-
out the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with
national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be
forced to disclose information of this nature to
the police or other authorities who may assert a
legal right to access such. Special technical
equipment which Volvo and workshops that have
entered into agreements with Volvo have access
to is required to be able to read and interpret the
recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the infor-
mation, which is transferred to Volvo during serv-
icing and maintenance, is securely stored and
managed and that its management complies with
relevant legal requirements. For further informa-
tion - contact a Volvo dealer.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
23
Important information on
accessories, extra equipment and
diagnostic socket
Incorrect connection and installation of accesso-
ries, extra equipment or software/diagnostic
tools may have a negative effect on the car's
electronic system.
Certain accessories only function when associ-
ated software is installed in the car's computer
system. Volvo therefore recommends always
making contact with an authorised Volvo work-
shop before the installation of accessories or
extra equipment that are connected to or affect
the electrical system.
Connection of equipment to the car's
diagnostic socket
WARNING
Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the conse-
quences if unauthorised equipment is con-
nected to the On-board Diagnostic socket
(OBDII). This socket should only be used by
trained and qualified Volvo service techni-
cians.
Data link connector OBDII is under the instrument panel
on the driver's side
Volvo ID
Volvo ID provides access to a wide range of per-
sonalized Volvo services
4
online.
It is possible to create a Volvo ID from the car,
volvocars.com or Volvo On Call app
5
. Certain
functions and services require that the car is reg-
istered to a personal Volvo ID. Registering the
Volvo ID to the car makes a wide range of Volvo
services available directly from the car.
Examples of services:
•
Volvo On Call* - Volvo ID is used when log-
ging in to the Volvo On Call app.
•
Send to Car - Makes it possible to send an
address from an Internet map service directly
to the car.
•
Book Service and Repair - Register your pre-
ferred workshop/dealer at volvocars.com to
be able to book service directly from the car.
Creating a Volvo ID
It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different
ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com
or with Volvo On Call app, the Volvo ID must also
be registered to the car to enable use of the vari-
ous Volvo ID services.
4
The services available may vary over time and vary depending on equipment level and market.
5
If you have Volvo On Call*.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
24
With the Volvo ID app
1.
Download the Volvo ID app from
Download
Centre in the centre display's app view.
2. Start the app and register a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created and
automatically registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
On Volvo Cars website
1.
Go into www.volvocars.com and log in
6
using
the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo
ID.
2. Enter a personal email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
With Volvo On Call mobile app
7
1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On
Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App
Store, Windows Phone or Google Play.
2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's
start page and enter a personal email
address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the specified email address.
> A Volvo ID has now been created. Read
below to learn how to register the ID to
the car.
Registering your Volvo ID to the car
If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the
Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as fol-
lows:
1. If not done already, download the Volvo ID
app from
Download Centre in the app view.
NOTE
To download apps, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your
email address.
3. Follow the instructions that are automatically
sent to the email address linked to your
Volvo ID.
> Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car.
Volvo ID services can now be used.
Advantages of Volvo ID
•
One user name and one password to access
online services, i.e. only one username and
one password to remember.
•
If the username/password for a service (e.g.
Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also
changed automatically for other services.
Related information
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
6
Available in certain markets.
7
If you have Volvo On Call*.
INTRODUCTION
}}
25
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure
Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on
the development of safer and more efficient
products and solutions in order to reduce the
negative impact on the environment.
Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core val-
ues and influences all operations. The environ-
mental work is based on the whole life cycle of
the car and takes into account the environmental
impact it has, from design to scrapping and recy-
cling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new
product developed must have less impact on the
environment than the product it replaces.
Volvo's environmental management work has
resulted in the development of more effective
and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal
environment is also important to Volvo - the air
inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air
outside thanks to the climate control system.
Your Volvo complies with stringent international
environmental standards. All Volvo's manufactur-
ing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this
supports a systematic approach to the opera-
tion's environmental issues, which leads to con-
tinuous improvement with reduced environmental
impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means
that environmental laws and regulations in force
are complied with. Volvo also requires that its
partners must also meet these requirements.
Fuel consumption
Since a large part of a car's total environmental
impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo
Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel con-
sumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air
pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel con-
sumption in each of their respective classes.
Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
26
Contributing to a better environment
An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only
contributes to a reduced impact on the environ-
ment, but also means reduced costs for the
owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to
reduce fuel consumption and thereby save
money and contribute to a better environment -
here is some advice:
•
Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds
above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph)
and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to
increased energy consumption.
•
Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's
recommended intervals for service and main-
tenance of the car.
•
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the
engine when stationary for longer periods.
Pay attention to local regulations.
•
Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops
and uneven speed contribute to increased
fuel consumption.
•
Use preconditioning* before starting in cold
conditions - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather. The engine
reaches normal operating temperature more
quickly, which decreases consumption and
reduces emissions.
Also remember to always dispose of environmen-
tally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult a work-
shop in the event of uncertainty about how this
type of waste should be discarded - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept
"Clean inside and out" – a concept that encom-
passes a clean interior environment as well as
highly efficient emission control. In many cases
the exhaust emissions are well below the applica-
ble standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compart-
ment via the air intake.
The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures
that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the
traffic outside.
The system cleans the air in the passenger com-
partment from contaminants such as particles,
hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the
air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic,
queues and tunnels for example.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Pack-
age (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that
allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked
with the remote control key.
Interior
The material used in the interior of a Volvo is
carefully selected and has been tested in order to
be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details
are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer-
ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is
monitored in order not to emit strong odours or
substances that cause discomfort in the event of
e.g. high heat and bright light.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a
long service life and low fuel consumption for
your car. In this way you also contribute to a
cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops
are entrusted with the service and maintenance
of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system.
Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in
which workshop premises shall be designed in
order to prevent spills and discharges into the
environment. The workshop staff have the knowl-
edge and the tools required to guarantee good
environmental care.
Recycling
Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it
is also important that the car is recycled in an
environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is
therefore requested to contact a dealer for refer-
ral to a certified/approved recycling facility.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
28
IntelliSafe-driver support
IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept concerning
car safety. It comprises a number of systems,
both standard and optional, that contribute to
making a car journey safe, to the prevention of
injuries and to the protection of passengers and
other road users.
Support
There are systems incorporated in IntelliSafe that
help the driver to drive the car in a safe manner.
The driver support functions incorporated in the
car include e.g. adaptive cruise control*, which
ensures that a constant distance is held between
the car and the vehicle in front.
Pilot Assist* helps the driver to keep the car
between the lane's edge markings, combined
with maintaining a preset time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
Park Assist Pilot* helps the driver park the car by
sensing the area around it.
Other examples of systems that help the driver
are the Active main beam, Cross Traffic Alert
(CTA)* and Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* sys-
tems.
Prevention
An example of a function that helps to prevent
accidents is City Safety. The function warns the
driver of risks of collision with another vehicle,
pedestrians, cyclists or larger animals. If the driver
does not react to the warning and the risk of col-
lision is imminent then City Safety can automati-
cally brake the car.
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA)* is another example of a
function that helps to prevent accidents by warn-
ing the driver and giving corrective steering inter-
ventions if the car is about to cross a lane side
line.
Also available is the steering assistance function,
whose purpose is to reduce the risk of the car
unintentionally leaving the road and actively steer
the car back onto the road.
Protection
To protect the driver and passengers, the car is
equipped with seatbelt tensioners which can ten-
sion the seatbelts in critical situations and in col-
lisions. It also has airbags and inflatable curtains,
as well as Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS)
which protects against whiplash injuries.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
•
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135)
•
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Stability system RSC
1
(p. 270)
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Airbags (p. 63)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
1
Roll Stability Control
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
29
Sensus - online connectivity and
entertainment
Sensus makes it possible to surf the Internet,
use different types of apps and make the car a
Wi-Fi hotspot.
This is Sensus
Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online
connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive
navigation structure makes it possible to receive
relevant support, information and entertainment
when it is necessary, without distracting the
driver.
Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are
connected with entertainment, online connectiv-
ity, navigation* and the user interface between
driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communi-
cation possible between you, the car and the out-
side world.
Information when it is needed, where it
is needed
The different displays in the car provide informa-
tion at the right time. The information is shown in
different locations based on how it should be pri-
oritised by the driver.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
30
Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised.
Head-up display*
The head-up display shows selected information
that the driver should deal with as soon as possi-
ble. Such information includes traffic warnings,
speed information and navigation* information.
Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls
are also shown in the head-up display. The dis-
play is operated via the right-hand steering wheel
keypad and via the centre display.
Driver display
12-inch driver display.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
31
8-inch driver display.
The driver display shows information on speed
and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being
played. The display is operated via the two steer-
ing wheel keypads.
Centre display
Many of the main functions of the car are con-
trolled from the centre display, a touch screen
which reacts to touch. The number of physical
buttons and controls in the car is therefore mini-
mal. The screen can even be operated while
wearing gloves.
From here, for example, you can control the cli-
mate control system, the entertainment system
and seat position*. The information that is shown
in the centre display can be acted on by the
driver or someone else in the car when the
opportunity arises.
Voice recognition system
The voice recognition system
can be used without the driver
needing to take his/her hands
off the steering wheel. The sys-
tem can understand natural
speech. Use voice recognition
to, for example, play back a
song, call someone, increase the temperature or
read out a text message.
For more information about all functions/
systems, see the relevant section in the owner's
manual or its supplement.
Related information
•
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Audio and media (p. 456)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
32
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Owner's Manual is printed on paper origi-
nating from controlled forests.
The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)
®
symbol
shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's
manual comes from FSC
®
-certified forests or
other controlled sources.
Related information
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)
Windows, glass and mirrors
The car contains controls for windows, glass
and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are
reinforced with lamination, which makes the pas-
senger compartment more soundproof, amongst
other things.
Laminated glass
The windscreen and panorama* roof have lamina-
ted glass. The glass is reinforced, which provides
better protection against break-ins and improved
sound insulation in the passenger compartment.
Laminated glass is available as an option for cer-
tain other glass surfaces.
The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is
laminated
9
.
Related information
•
Panorama roof* (p. 154)
•
Power windows (p. 148)
•
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
•
Interior rearview mirror (p. 151)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
•
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
9
Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol.
INTRODUCTION
}}
33
Overview of the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled from
the centre display. Presented here is the centre
display and its options.
||
INTRODUCTION
34
Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively
10
.
Function view - car functions that are acti-
vated/deactivated with a press. Certain func-
tions are also so-called trigger functions,
which means they open a window with set-
ting options. Examples of such are
Camera
and parking functions. Settings for the head-
10
The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars.
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
35
up display* are also made from the function
view, but adjustments are made using the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
Home view - the first view that is shown
when the screen is started.
Application view (app view) - apps that have
been downloaded (third-party apps) and
apps for embedded functions, such as
FM
radio
. Tap on an app icon to open the app.
Status bar - the activities in the car are
shown right at the top of the screen. Net-
work/connection information is shown on the
left-hand side of the status bar, while media-
related information, the clock and indication
about on-going background activity are
shown on the right.
Top view - drag the tab down in order to
access the top view.
Settings, Owner's
manual
, Profile and the car's saved mes-
sages are accessed from here.
Navigation - leads to map navigation, with
e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview
to expand it.
Media - recently used apps associated with
media. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Phone - the phone function can be reached
from here. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Extra subview - recently used apps/car func-
tions that do not belong in any of the other
subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it.
Climate row - information and direct interac-
tion to set temperature, seat heating level*
and fan speed. Tap on the symbol in the cen-
tre of the climate row in order to open the
climate view with more setting options.
Related information
•
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
•
Changing settings for apps (p. 173)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
36
Operating the centre display
Many of the car's functions are controlled and
regulated from the centre display. The centre
display is a touch screen that reacts to touch.
Using the touch screen functionality in
the centre display
The screen reacts differently depending on
whether you press, drag or swipe across it.
Actions such as browsing between different
views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and mov-
ing apps can be performed by touching the
screen in different ways.
An infrared film enables the screen to detect a
finger that is just in front of the screen. This tech-
nology makes it possible to use the screen even
with gloves on.
Two people can interact with the screen at the
same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver
and passenger side respectively.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
The table below presents the different proce-
dures for operating the screen:
Procedure Execution Result
Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function.
Press twice in quick suc-
cession.
Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map*.
Press and hold.
Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map*. Press and hold your finger against
the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location.
Tap once with two fingers.
Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map*.
INTRODUCTION
}}
* Option/accessory.
37
Procedure Execution Result
Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move
apps or map points on the map*. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen.
Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the
screen.
Drag apart Zooms in.
Drag together Zooms out.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
38
Turn off the screen and reactivate it
Home button for the centre display.
When the centre display is switched off, the
screen is dimmed so as not to be disruptive
whilst driving. The climate row will still be visible,
and apps and other functions connected to the
screen will continue to run.
1. Give a long press on the physical home but-
ton below the screen.
> The screen goes dark except for the cli-
mate row, which continues to be shown.
All functions continue to run, such as cli-
mate control, audio, guiding* and apps. In
this mode, the screen can be cleaned with
the cloth supplied; see the section
"Cleaning the centre display".
2. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the
home button.
> The view that was displayed before the
screen was switched off will be shown
again.
NOTE
The screen cannot be deactivated when a
prompt to perform an action is shown on the
screen.
NOTE
The centre display deactivates automatically
when the engine is off and the driver's door is
opened.
Returning to home view from another
view
1. Briefly press the home button.
> The last position of the home view is
shown.
2. Briefly press again.
> All subviews of the home view are set to
their default mode.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
Moving apps and buttons for car
functions
The apps and buttons for car functions in the app
view and function view respectively can be moved
and organised as desired.
1. Tap on an app/button and hold depressed.
> The app/button changes size and
becomes slightly transparent. It is then
possible to move it.
2. Drag the app/button to a vacant space in the
view.
The maximum number of rows available for use in
order to position apps/buttons is 48. To move an
app/button outside the visible view, drag it to the
bottom of the view. New rows are then added,
where the app/button can be located.
An app/button can thus be located further down
and is then not visible in the normal mode for the
view.
Swipe across the screen to scroll upward/down-
ward in the view.
INTRODUCTION
39
NOTE
Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by
moving them to the bottom, off the visible
screen. This way it will be easier to find the
apps you use more often.
Scrolling in a list, article or view
When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it
is possible to scroll downward or upward in the
view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the
view.
The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it
is possible to scroll in the view.
Using the controls in the centre display
Temperature control.
The control is used for many of the car's func-
tions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one
of the following:
•
drag the control to the desired temperature,
•
tap on
+/− in order to raise/lower the tem-
perature gradually, or
•
tap on the desired temperature on the con-
trol.
Related information
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Change settings for the centre display
(p. 46)
INTRODUCTION
40
Navigating in the centre display's
views
There are five different basic views in the centre
display: home view, top view, climate view, appli-
cation view (app view) and function view. The
screen is started automatically when the driver's
door is opened.
Home view
Home view is the view that is shown when the
screen is started. It consists of four subviews:
Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra sub-
view.
An app/car function selected from the app/func-
tion view starts in the respective subview of the
home view. For example FM radio starts in the
Media subview.
The extra subview contains the last used app/car
function that is not associated with any of the
other three areas.
The subviews show brief information about each
different app.
NOTE
The first time the car is used, some of the
home view's subviews have no content.
NOTE
In home view standard mode - briefly press
the home button. An animation that describes
access to the different views is shown on the
screen.
INTRODUCTION
}}
41
Expanding a subview from default mode
Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display.
||
INTRODUCTION
42
Expanding a subview:
–
For subview one, two and three: Press any-
where on the subview. When a subview is
expanded, the fourth subview in the home
view is temporarily forced away. The other
two are minimised and only certain informa-
tion is shown. When the fourth sub view is
pressed, the other three subviews are mini-
mised and only certain information is dis-
played.
The expanded view provides access to the
basic functions of the app.
Closing an expanded subview:
–
The subview can be closed in three different
ways.
•
Tap on the upper part of the expanded
subview.
•
Tap on another subview (that subview will
then open in expanded mode instead).
•
Briefly press the physical home button
below the centre display.
Opening/closing a subview in full screen
mode
The extra subview and the subview for
Navigation can be opened out in full screen
mode, with even more information and more set-
ting options.
When a new subview is opened in full-screen
mode, no information from the other subviews is
shown.
In expanded mode, open the
app in full screen - press on
the symbol.
Press on the symbol to go back
to the expanded mode, or press
the home button at the bottom
of the screen.
Home button for the centre display.
There is always the option to go back to home
view by pressing the home button. Go back to the
home view's standard view from full screen mode
- press twice on the home button.
Status bar
The activities in the car are shown at the top of
the screen. Network/connection information is
shown on the left-hand side of the status bar,
while media-related information, the clock and
indication that background activity is in progress
are shown on the right.
Top view
Top view dragged down.
A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at
the top of the screen. Open the top view by
pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from
the top downwards across the screen.
INTRODUCTION
}}
43
In the top view, access is always available to:
•
Settings
•
Owner's manual
•
Profile
•
The car's saved messages.
In the top view, access is given to the following in
some cases:
•
Contextual setting (e.g.
Navigation
Settings)
•
Contextual owner's manual (e.g.
Navigation
Manual).
Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on
the home button or at the bottom of the top view
and drag upward. The underlying view is then visi-
ble and available for use again.
NOTE
The top view is not available during starting/
shutdown or when a message is shown on
the screen. It is also not available when cli-
mate view is shown.
Contextual setting and owner's manual
Drag the top view down when an app (e.g. navi-
gation) is running:
•
When contextual setting is available, it is
shown to the right of
Settings in the top
view. Press on the contextual setting to
access settings that are related to the con-
tent that is shown on the screen. E.g. press
Navigation Settings - settings that are
related to navigation are shown.
•
When the contextual owner's manual is avail-
able, it is shown to the right of
Owner's
manual in the top view. Press on the con-
textual owner's manual to access articles in
the digital owner's manual that are related to
the content that is shown on the screen. E.g.
press Navigation Manual - an article that is
related to navigation opens.
This only applies to some of the apps in the car.
For third party apps that are downloaded, it is not
possible to access app-specific articles or set-
tings, for example.
Climate view
The climate row is always visible at the bottom of
the screen. The most common climate settings
can be made directly there, such as setting tem-
perature, seat heating and fan.
Press the symbol in the centre of the
climate row to open the climate view
and gain access to more climate set-
tings.
Press the symbol to close the climate
view and return to the previous view.
Application view
Application view with the car's apps.
Swipe from right to left
11
across the screen in
order to access the application view (app view)
from the home view. Apps that have been down-
loaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded
functions, such as
FM radio, are found here. Cer-
tain apps show brief information directly in the
11
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
||
INTRODUCTION
* Option/accessory.
44
app view, such as the number of unread text
messages for
Messages.
Tap on an app to open it. It then opens in the
subview to which it belongs, such as
Media.
Depending on the amount of apps, it is possible
to scroll downward in the app view. Do this by
swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
To move an app:
1. Tap on the app and hold depressed.
> The app becomes slightly transparent and
larger when it is ready to be moved.
2. Drag the app to the desired location.
NOTE
Apps and car function buttons cannot be
added to locations that are already occupied.
Go back to the home view again by swiping from
left to right
11
across the screen, or by pressing
the home button.
Function view
The function view with buttons for different car func-
tions.
Swipe from left to right
11
across the screen in
order to access the function view from the home
view. From here you can activate/deactivate dif-
ferent car functions, e.g.
Lane Departure
Warning
, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*.
Depending on the amount of functions, it is also
possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do
this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up.
Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with
a press, a function is activated/deactivated by
pressing the relevant function button. Some func-
tions (trigger functions) open in a new window
when pressed.
Just as in app view, it is possible to move the
function buttons around and arrange them in the
desired order.
Related information
•
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
•
Digital owner's manual in the car (p. 15)
•
Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
•
Changing settings for apps (p. 173)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
11
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
INTRODUCTION
45
Symbols in the centre display's
status bar
Overview of the symbols that can be shown in
the centre display's status bar.
The status bar shows activities in progress and, in
some cases, their status. Not all symbols are
shown all the time due to the limited space in the
status bar.
Symbol Specification
Connected to the Internet.
Connection to the Internet failed.
Roaming activated.
Signal strength in mobile phone net-
work.
Bluetooth device connected.
Bluetooth activated but no device
connected.
Information sent to and from GPS.
Connected to Wi-Fi network.
Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot).
The car then shares the available
connection.
Symbol Specification
Car modem activated.
USB sharing active.
Process in progress.
Timer for preconditioning active.
Audio source being played back.
Audio source stopped.
Phone call in progress.
Audio source muted.
News is received from the radio
channel.
Traffic information is received.
Clock.
Related information
•
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 105)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 105)
INTRODUCTION
46
Change settings for the centre
display
The centre display is started automatically when
the driver's door is opened. The settings can be
changed for the centre display to personalise
sound and themes. The screen can be switched
off so as not to be disruptive whilst driving.
Switching off/changing the system
sounds volume in the centre display.
The system sounds volume in the centre display
can be adjusted or switched off:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Sound System Volumes.
3.
Under
Touch Sounds, drag the control to
change the volume/switch off screen touch
sounds. Drag the control to the desired vol-
ume.
Changing the appearance of the screen
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays Display
Themes
.
3.
Then select theme, e.g.
Minimalistic or
Chrome Rings.
As a supplement to these appearances, it is pos-
sible to choose between
Normal and Bright.
With Normal, the screen background is dark and
the text is light. This alternative is the default for
all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in
which the background is light and the text is dark.
This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong day-
light.
This alternative is always available for the user
and is not affected by the surrounding lighting.
Related information
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
•
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
INTRODUCTION
}}
47
Function view with buttons for car
functions
All the buttons for car functions are located in
the function view, one of the centre display's
basic views. Navigate to the function view from
home view by swiping from left to right across
the screen
12
.
Different types of buttons
There are three different types of buttons for car
functions; see below:
Type of button Property Affects car function
Function buttons Have on/off positions.
When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button.
Press the button to activate/deactivate a function.
Most buttons in function view are
function buttons.
Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions.
When a trigger button is pressed, a window for the function opens. For example, it may be a
window for changing a seat's position.
•
Camera
•
Headrest fold
•
Head-up display adjustments
Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes.
Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning.
•
Park In
•
Park Out
12
Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction.
||
INTRODUCTION
48
The buttons' different modes
When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a
function or parking button, the function is acti-
vated. When a function is activated, extra text
with an explanation for certain functions is
shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and
then the button is shown with the LED indicator
illuminated.
For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at
certain speeds is shown, for example, when the
button is depressed.
Briefly tap on the button once in order to acti-
vate/deactivate the function.
The function is deactivated when the LED indica-
tor is extinguished.
When a warning triangle is shown in the right-
hand section of the button there is something not
working as intended.
Related information
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
INTRODUCTION
}}
49
Using the keyboard in the centre
display
The centre display keyboard makes it possible
make entries using keys. It is also possible to
"draw in" letters and characters on the screen
by hand.
Making entries with the keyboard
The keyboard can be used to enter characters,
letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages
from the car, enter passwords or search for arti-
cles in the digital owner's manual.
The keyboard is only shown when entries can be
made on the screen.
||
INTRODUCTION
50
The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the
keyboard is being used.
INTRODUCTION
}}
51
Row of suggested words or characters
13
.
The suggested words are adjusted as new
letters are being entered. Browse among the
suggestions by pressing on the right and left
arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note
that this function is not supported by all lan-
guage selections. If not available, the row will
not be shown on the keyboard.
The characters available on the keyboard
depend on which language was selected
(see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it.
The button works in different ways, depend-
ing on the context in which the keyboard is
used - either to enter @ (when an email
address is entered) or to create a new row
(for normal text input).
Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Used to enter capital letters. Press again to
enter one capital letter and then continue
with lower-case letters. Another press makes
all letters capital letters. The next press
restores the keyboard to lower-case letters.
In this mode, the first letter after a full stop,
exclamation mark or question mark is a capi-
tal letter. The first letter in the text field is
also a capital letter. In text fields intended for
names or addresses, each word automatically
starts with a capital letter. In text fields for
password, web address or email address
entry, all letters are automatically lower case
unless otherwise set with the button.
Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then
shown with numbers. Press
, which in
number mode is shown instead of
, to
return to the letter keyboard, or
to
open the keyboard with special characters.
Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The
available characters and word suggestions
(1) vary depending on the selected language.
One long press opens a list of languages
and then tap on the language to be used. A
short press changes to the next language on
the list without showing the list. To add addi-
tional languages in the keyboard - see the
heading "Changing keyboard language"
below.
Space.
Undoes entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character at a time. Hold the button
depressed to delete characters more quickly.
Changes keyboard mode to write letters and
characters by hand instead. Read more in the
section "Writing characters/letters by hand
on the screen".
Press the confirmation button above the key-
board (not visible in the image) to confirm the
entered text. The appearance of the button dif-
fers depending on context.
Changing the keyboard language
To make it possible to switch between different
languages for the keyboard, the languages must
first be added under
Settings.
Adding/deleting languages in settings
The keyboard is automatically set to the same
languages as the system language. The keyboard
language can be manually adapted without
affecting the system language.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System System Languages and
Units
Keyboard Layouts.
3. Select one or more languages from the list.
> It is now possible to switch between the
selected languages directly from the key-
board for text input.
If no languages have been actively selected
under
Settings, the keyboard uses the same lan-
guage as the car's system language; see the
section "Changing system settings in the set-
tings menu".
13
Applies to Asiatic languages.
||
INTRODUCTION
52
Switching between different languages in
the keyboard
When a number of languages
have been selected in
Settings, the keyboard button
(shown in context as number 7
in the illustration above) is used
to switch between different lan-
guages.
To change keyboard language with list:
1. One long press on the button (see image
above).
> A list opens.
2. Select the required language. If more than
four languages have been selected under
Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list
from the keyboard.
> The keyboard is adapted to the selected
language and other word suggestions are
given.
To change the keyboard language without dis-
playing the list:
–
One short press of the button.
> The keyboard is adapted to the next lan-
guage in the list without displaying the list.
Variants of a letter or character
To enter a variant of a letter/character, e.g. é or
è:
1. Press and hold the letter/character.
> A box with possible variants of the letter/
character opens.
2. Press the required variant. If none of the vari-
ants are selected, the original letter/charac-
ter is entered.
Related information
•
Writing characters/words by hand on the
screen (p. 53)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Operating the centre display (p. 36)
•
Managing text messages (p. 481)
•
Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
INTRODUCTION
}}
53
Writing characters/words by hand
on the screen
The centre display keyboard allows you to enter
characters, letters and words on the screen by
"drawing" by hand.
Press the button on the key-
board to change from typing
with the keys to entering letters
and characters by hand.
Area for writing characters/letters/words/
parts of word.
The text field where the characters or word
suggestions appear as they are written on
screen (1).
Suggestions for characters/letters/word/
part of word. It is possible to scroll through
the list.
Space. A space can also be created by
entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-writ-
ten letters (1). See the heading "Entering a
space in the free text field with handwriting
recognition" below.
Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete
one character/one letter at a time. Wait a
moment before pressing again to delete the
next character/letter, etc.
Return to the keyboard with regular charac-
ter input.
Switch off/on sound when entering.
Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the
button is not shown.
Change text input language.
Writing characters/letters/words by hand
1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of
a word in the area for hand-written letters
(1). Write a word or parts of a word above
each other or on a line.
> A number of suggested characters, letters
or words is shown (3). The most likely
choice is found at the top of the list.
IMPORTANT
Do not use sharp objects on the screen as
they may scratch it.
2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a
moment.
> The character/letter/word at the top of
the list is entered. It is also possible to
select a different character by pressing
the required character, letter or word in
the list.
||
INTRODUCTION
54
Deleting/changing characters/letters written
by hand
Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping
across the handwriting field (1).
–
There are several options for deleting/
changing characters/letters:
•
Press the intended letter or word in the
list (3).
•
Press the text undo button (5) to delete
the letter and begin again.
•
Swipe horizontally from right to left
14
over
the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete
multiple letters by swiping over the area
several times.
•
Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes
all of the entered text.
Changing row in the free text field with
handwriting
Change row by hand by drawing the above character in
the handwriting field
15
.
Entering a space in the free text field with
handwriting recognition
Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right
16
.
Related information
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Managing text messages (p. 481)
•
Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
14
For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space.
15
For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed.
16
For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left.
SAFETY
SAFETY
56
Safety
The vehicle is equipped with several safety sys-
tems that work together to protect the vehicle's
driver and passengers in the event of an acci-
dent.
The car is equipped with a number of sensors
that react in the event of an accident and activate
different safety systems, such as different types
of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on
the specific accident situation, such as collisions
at different angles, rollover or driving off the road,
the systems react in different ways to provide the
best protection.
There are also mechanical safety systems such
as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also
constructed so that a large part of the force of a
collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof
and other parts of the body.
The car's safety mode may be activated after a
collision if an important function in the car has
been damaged.
Warning symbol in driver display
The warning symbol is illuminated in
the driver display when the car's elec-
trical system is set in ignition position
II. The symbol is extinguished after
approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is
fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol remains illuminated or
is switched on during driving and the mes-
sage
SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to
workshop is shown in the driver display, it
means that part of one of the safety systems
does not have full functionality. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo workshop
should be contacted as soon as possible.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the car's various safety
systems yourself. Defective work in one of the
systems can cause malfunction and result in
serious personal injury. Volvo recommends
that an authorised Volvo workshop should be
contacted.
If the specific warning symbol is broken
then the general warning symbol is illu-
minated instead and the driver display
shows the same message.
Related information
•
Safety during pregnancy (p. 56)
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
•
Airbags (p. 63)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
•
Safety mode (p. 69)
•
Child safety (p. 71)
Safety during pregnancy
It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly
during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers
adjust their seating position.
Seatbelt
The diagonal section should wrap over the shoul-
der then be routed between the breasts and to
the side of the abdomen.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and
as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must
never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the
slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as
close to the body as possible. In addition, check
that there are no twists in the seatbelt.
Seating position
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers
must adjust the seat and steering wheel such
that they can easily maintain control of the vehi-
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
57
cle as they drive (which means that they must be
able to easily operate the foot pedals and steer-
ing wheel). The aim should be to position the
seat with as large a distance as possible between
abdomen and steering wheel.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
•
Manual front seat (p. 119)
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
Whiplash Protection System
Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces
the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists
of energy-absorbing backrests and seat cush-
ions, and specially designed head restraints in
the front seats.
WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the colli-
sion and the nature of the colliding vehicle all
have an influence.
When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat back-
rests are lowered backward and the seat cush-
ions move downward to change the seating posi-
tion of the driver and front seat passenger. Its
movement helps to absorb some of the forces
that can arise and cause whiplash.
WARNING
WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
yourself. Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop should be contacted.
If the front seats have been subjected to a
major load, such as in conjunction with a colli-
sion, the seats must be replaced. Some of the
seats' protective properties may have been
lost even if they do not appear damaged.
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under
the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent
WHIPS from functioning.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
58
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat's back-
rest.
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then
any load must be secured to prevent it from
sliding up to the front seat backrest in the
event of a collision.
WARNING
If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a
rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat,
the corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not make contact with
the lowered backrest or child seat.
Seating position
For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver
and passenger must have the correct seating
position and make sure that the system's func-
tion is not obstructed.
Set the correct seating position in the front seat
before driving starts.
Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible
between the head and the head restraint.
WHIPS and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by WHIPS.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Manual front seat (p. 119)
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
•
Child seats (p. 71)
Seatbelt
Heavy braking can have serious consequences
if the seatbelts are not used.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against the
body so it can provide maximum protection. Do
not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is
designed to protect in a normal seating position.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat-
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
59
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
•
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
Seatbelt tensioner
The car is fitted with pyrotechnic and electric
seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seat-
belts in critical situations and collisions.
Seatbelt tensioner during collision
All the seatbelts are equipped with a pyrotechnic
seatbelt tensioner.
The pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioner tensions the
seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient
force in order to more effectively restrain the
occupant.
Seatbelt tensioner during critical
situations*
The driver and front passenger seatbelts are
equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner.
The seatbelt tensioners work together and can
be activated together with the driver support sys-
tems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In
critical situations, such as panic braking, driving
off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off
the ground or hits something in the terrain), skid-
ding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be ten-
sioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor.
The electric seatbelt tensioner adjusts the occu-
pant to a better position, reducing the risk of
striking the car's interior and improving the effect
of safety systems, such as the car's airbags.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner
Once the critical situation has passed, the seat-
belt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset
automatically.
If the belt still remains tensioned:
1. Stop the car at a safe place.
2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it.
> The seatbelt and electric seatbelt ten-
sioner are reset.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself.
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted.
If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision,
the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of
the seatbelt's protective properties may have
been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear
damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced
if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new
seatbelt must be type-approved and designed
for installation at the same location as the
replaced seatbelt.
||
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
60
Related information
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
•
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
•
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt
Make sure that all passengers have fastened
their seatbelts before starting to drive.
Fastening a seatbelt
1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it
is not twisted or damaged.
NOTE
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
•
during braking and acceleration
•
if the car leans heavily.
2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in
the intended buckle.
> A loud "click" indicates that the belt has
locked.
WARNING
Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into
the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts
and buckles would otherwise possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
3. In the front seats the seatbelt can be
adjusted for height.
Press together the seat mounting and move
the seatbelt up or down.
Position the belt as high as possible without
it chafing against your throat.
SAFETY
}}
61
The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over
the arm).
4. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling
the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the
shoulder.
The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the
abdomen).
WARNING
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
WARNING
Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to
hooks or other interior fittings, as this pre-
vents the belt from tightening properly.
WARNING
Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The
seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not
function as intended in the event of a colli-
sion. There is a risk of serous injury.
Unfastening a seatbelt
1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract.
2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in
by hand so that it does not hang loose.
Related information
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
Door and seatbelt reminder
The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear
a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door,
bonnet, tailgate or fuel filler flap.
Driver display graphics
Graphics in the driver display with different types of
warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is
dependent on the vehicle's speed.
The driver display's graphics show which seats in
the car are occupied by belted and unbelted pas-
sengers.
The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tail-
gate, fuel filler flap or any door is open.
The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing
the O button on the right-hand steering wheel
keypad.
||
SAFETY
62
Seatbelt reminder
Visual reminder in the roof console.
A visual reminder is given in the roof console and
by means of the warning symbol in the driver dis-
play.
The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed,
driving time and distance.
The belt status of the driver and passengers is
shown in the driver display graphics when a belt
is buckled or unbuckled.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
Front seat
A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver
and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if
either of them is not wearing one.
Rear seat
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
•
Provides information on which seatbelts are
being used in the rear seat. The driver dis-
play's graphics are shown when the seatbelts
are in use.
•
Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is
unfastened during a journey by means of a
visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder
will cease once the seatbelt has been put on
again.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is
not closed properly, the driver display's graphics
show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place
as soon as possible and close the source of the
warning.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's information symbol illu-
minates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the
driver display's warning symbol illumi-
nates.
Related information
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
•
Fastening/unfastening a seatbelt (p. 60)
SAFETY
}}
63
Airbags
The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable
curtains for driver and passengers.
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is located
in the centre console. If the centre console is
drenched with water or other liquid, discon-
nect the cables to the starter battery. Do not
attempt to start the car since the airbags may
deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recom-
mends that it is transported to an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Deployed airbags
If any of the airbags have deployed, the following
is recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it
is transported to an authorised Volvo work-
shop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised
Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of
components in the car's safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They can
make steering difficult. Other safety systems
may also be damaged. The smoke and dust
created when the airbags are deployed can
cause skin and eye irritation/injury after inten-
sive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with
cold water. The rapid deployment sequence
and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin
burns.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Driver and passenger airbags (p. 63)
•
Side airbag (p. 68)
•
Inflatable curtain (p. 68)
Driver and passenger airbags
As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is
equipped with airbags on the driver and passen-
ger sides in the front seat.
Driver and passenger airbags
1
.
In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help
to protect the head, face and chest of the driver
and passenger as well as the knees and legs
1
of
the driver.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag
cushions the initial collision impact for the occu-
pant. The airbag deflates when compressed by
the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes
into the car. This is completely normal. The entire
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
||
SAFETY
64
process, including inflation and deflation of the
airbag, occurs within tenths of a second.
NOTE
The detectors react differently depending on
the nature of the collision and whether or not
the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt
positions.
It is therefore possible that only one (or none)
of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The
detectors sense the force of the collision on
the vehicle and the action is adapted accord-
ingly so that none, one or more airbags are
deployed.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt
is not used or is used incorrectly, this may
diminish the protection provided by the airbag
in the event of a collision.
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and backs
against the backrest.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious per-
sonal injury.
Driver airbags
Airbag in the steering wheel
This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering
wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG.
Knee airbag
1
The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the
instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover
panel is marked AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not place or attach any object on the top
or front of the panel where the knee airbag is
stowed.
Passenger airbag
The airbag is folded up into a compartment
above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
1
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
SAFETY
}}
* Option/accessory.
65
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 63)
•
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)
Activating/deactivating the
passenger airbag*
The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the
car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag
Cut Off Switch (PACOS).
Switch
The switch for the passenger airbag is located on
the passenger end of the instrument panel and is
accessible when the passenger door is open.
Check that the switch is in the required position.
ON - the airbag is activated and all front-fac-
ing passengers (children and adults) can sit
safely on the passenger seat.
OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children
in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the
passenger seat.
||
SAFETY
66
WARNING
If the car is not equipped with a switch to acti-
vate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the air-
bag will always be activated.
Activating the passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF
(B) to ON (A).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag on Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a warning symbol in
the roof console indicate that the airbag
for the front passenger seat is activated.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat when the airbag is activated.
The passenger airbag must always be acti-
vated when front-facing passengers (children
and adults) are sitting in the front passenger
seat.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
SAFETY
67
Deactivating the passenger airbag
Pull the switch outward and turn from ON
(A) to OFF (B).
> The driver display shows the message
Passenger airbag off Please
acknowledge.
NOTE
If the passenger airbag has been activated/
deactivated with the car in ignition position I
or lower, a message is shown in the driver
display and the following indicator in the roof
console approx. 6 seconds after the car's
electrical system has been set in ignition
position II.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> A text message and a symbol in the roof
console indicate that the airbag for the
front passenger seat is deactivated.
WARNING
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the passenger seat when
the airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the
electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger
side will also be deactivated.
Related information
•
Driver and passenger airbags (p. 63)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
•
Child seats (p. 71)
SAFETY
68
Side airbag
The side airbags on the driver and passenger
seats protect the chest and hip in the event of a
collision.
The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest
frames of the front seats and help to protect the
driver and passengers in the front seat.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag
inflates between the occupant and the door
panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The
airbag deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on the
side of the collision.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the side airbag system
could cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
WARNING
Do not put objects in the area between the
outside of the seat and the door panel, since
this area is required by the side airbag.
Volvo recommends the use only of car seat
covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers
may impede the operation of the side airbags.
WARNING
Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
Side airbag and child seats
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is
not diminished by the side airbag.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 63)
•
Child seats (p. 71)
Inflatable curtain
The inflatable curtain, Inflatable Curtain (IC),
helps to prevent the driver and passengers from
striking their heads on the inside of the car dur-
ing a collision.
The inflatable curtain is mounted along both
sides of the headlining and helps protect the
driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The
panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the inflatable curtain is inflated.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo
workshop should be contacted for repair.
Defective work in the inflatable curtain system
can cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
SAFETY
69
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hooks are only
designed for light coats and jackets (not for
solid objects such as umbrellas).
Do not screw or install anything onto the car's
headlining, door pillars or side panels. This
could compromise the intended protection.
Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine
parts that are approved for fitting within these
areas.
WARNING
Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the
load and the side windows if the car is loaded
to above the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Related information
•
Airbags (p. 63)
Safety mode
Safety mode is a protective state that is trig-
gered when a collision may have damaged any
of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines,
sensors for any of the safety systems, or the
brake system.
If the car has been in a collision, the message
Safety mode See Owner's manual may be
shown on the driver display with a warning sym-
bol as long as the display is not damaged and the
car's electrical system is still in working order.
This message means that the car has reduced
functionality.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset the
electronics yourself if the car has been in
safety mode. This could result in personal
injury or the car not functioning as normal.
Volvo recommends that engaging an author-
ised Volvo workshop to check and restore the
car to normal status after
Safety mode See
Owner's manual has been shown.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Starting/moving the car after safety mode
(p. 70)
•
Recovering the car (p. 454)
SAFETY
70
Starting/moving the car after safety
mode
If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to
attempt to reset the system in order to start and
move the car for a short distance, if in a danger-
ous traffic situation for example.
Starting the car after safety mode
1. Check the general damage situation of the
car and whether any fuel has been leaking.
There must be no smell of fuel either.
If there is only minor damage and a check
has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be
attempted.
WARNING
Never, under any circumstances, attempt to
restart the car if it smells of fuel when the
Safety mode See Owner's manual mes-
sage is shown in the driver display. Leave the
car at once.
2. Turn the start knob clockwise to switch off
the car.
3. Then try to start the car.
> The car's electronics carry out a systems
check and then try to resume normal sta-
tus.
IMPORTANT
If the message Safety mode See Owner's
manual is still shown on the display the car
must not be driven or towed but a vehicle
recovery service must then be used instead.
Even if the car appears to be driveable, hid-
den damage may make the car impossible to
control once moving.
Moving the car after safety mode
1. If the driver display shows the message
Normal mode The car is now in normal
mode after a start attempt, the car can be
carefully moved if standing in a dangerous
position.
2. Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its loca-
tion. Volvo recommends that it is transported
to an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Safety mode (p. 69)
•
Recovering the car (p. 454)
SAFETY
}}
71
Child safety
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions and attachment devices)
which is designed for fitting in this particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment, the opti-
mum conditions are obtained for the child to
travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety
equipment fits well and is simple to use.
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to
sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo recommends that children travel in rear-
facing child seats until as late an age as possible,
at least up to 3-4 years of age, and then in front-
facing booster cushions/child seats until the
child is 140 cm tall.
NOTE
Legal provisions about the type of child seat
that must be used for children of different
ages and heights vary from country to coun-
try. Check what does apply.
NOTE
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer for
clearer instructions.
Related information
•
Safety (p. 56)
•
Child seats (p. 71)
Child seats
The position of a child in the car and the choice
of equipment are dictated by the child's weight
and size.
Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make
sure that the child seat is being used correctly.
Look in the installation instructions for the child
seat for the correct fitting.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is impor-
tant to read the installation instructions
included.
NOTE
Never leave a child seat unsecured in the car.
Always secure it according to the instructions
for the child seat, even when it is not in use.
||
SAFETY
72
Location of child seats
Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible.
Always fit rear-facing child seats in the rear seat
if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is
sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she
could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.
If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rear-
facing child seats can be fitted on the front pas-
senger seat.
NOTE
Regulations regarding the placement of chil-
dren in cars vary from country to country.
Check what does apply.
WARNING
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of
the front passenger seat.
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the airbag is activated.
Front-facing passengers (children and adults)
must never sit on the front passenger seat if
the passenger airbag is deactivated.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
endanger life or lead to serious personal
injury.
Child seat installation
The following points are important to consider
when a child seat is being fitted in the car.
WARNING
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could rest
on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must
not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt
buckle to open accidentally.
Do not secure the straps for the child seat
into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in
springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp
edges may damage the straps.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
Installation in the front seat
•
When fitting rear-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is deactivated.
•
When fitting front-facing child seats, check
that the passenger airbag is activated.
•
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when
the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console
2
accessory.
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, Volvo recommends that the lower
mounting points are used with these
2
.
•
The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to
facilitate child seat installation.
2
The accessory range varies depending on market.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
73
Installation in the rear seat
•
Only use child seats that are recommended
by Volvo, are universally approved or are
semi-universal, and where the car is included
on the manufacturer's vehicle list.
•
A child seat with support legs must not be
fitted in the centre seat.
•
The outer seats are equipped with the
ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for i-
Size
3
.
•
The outer seats are equipped with upper
mounting points. Volvo recommends that
child seat's upper straps should be pulled
through the hole in the head restraint before
being tensioned at the mounting point. If this
is not possible, follow the recommendations
from the child seat manufacturer.
•
If the child seat is equipped with lower
straps, never adjust the position of the seat
in front after the straps have been fitted in
the lower mounting points. Always remember
to remove the lower straps when the child
seat is not installed.
Label for passenger airbag
Label on the passenger side's sun visor.
Label on the passenger side's door pillar. The label
becomes visible when the passenger door is opened.
The warning label for the passenger airbag is
positioned as shown above.
Related information
•
Child safety (p. 71)
•
Upper mounting points for child seats
(p. 74)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 74)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
•
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)
3
Varies depending on market.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
74
Upper mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with upper mounting points
for child seats on the rear seat's outer seats.
The upper mounting points are primarily intended
for use with front-facing child seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
upper mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on
the rear of the backrest.
The mounting points are located on the rear of
the rear seat's outer seats.
WARNING
The child seat's upper straps must be routed
through the hole in the head restraint leg
before they are tensioned at the mounting
point. If this is not possible, follow the recom-
mendations from the child seat manufacturer.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate
fitting this type of child seat in cars with fold-
ing head restraints on the outer seats.
NOTE
In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage
compartment, this must be removed before
child seats can be attached to the securing
points.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 71)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats
(p. 74)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 76)
Lower mounting points for child
seats
The car is equipped with lower mounting points
for child seats in the front seat* and the rear
seat.
The lower mounting points are designed to be
used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child
seats.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
lower mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations in the front seat.
The mounting points in the front seat are located
on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom.
SAFETY
* Option/accessory.
75
The mounting points in the front seat are only
mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch
to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*.
Mounting point locations in the rear seat.
The mounting points in the rear seat are located
on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 71)
•
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 76)
•
Activating/deactivating the passenger air-
bag* (p. 65)
SAFETY
76
Table for location of child seats
using the car's seatbelts
The table gives a recommendation for which
child seats suit which locations, and for what
size of child.
NOTE
Always read the section "Child seats" before
fitting a child seat in the car.
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
U
A, B
X
U
B
U
B
Group 0+
max 13 kg
U
A, B
X
U
B
U
B
Group 1
9-18 kg
L
C
UF
A, D
U
D
, L
C
U
D
Group 2
15-25 kg
L
C
UF
A, E
U
E
, L
C
U
E
SAFETY
77
Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing
child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing
child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 3
22-36 kg
X
UF
A, E
U
E
U
E
U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats.
L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories.
X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group.
A
Adjust the backrest to a more upright position.
B
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146).
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212).
D
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
E
Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312).
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 71)
•
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 82)
SAFETY
78
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points
The car is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX
4
mount-
ing points for child seats in the rear seat.
i-Size/ISOFIX is a fixture system for car child
seats that is based on an international standard.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to the
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points.
The location of the mounting points
Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols
4
on
the upholstery of the backrest.
The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are
located behind covers in the lower section of the
rear seat's backrest, in the outer seats.
Lift the covers in order to access the mounting
points.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 71)
•
Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
•
Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 74)
•
Table for location of i-Size child seats
(p. 82)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
4
Names and symbols change depending on market.
SAFETY
}}
79
Table for location of ISOFIX child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which
ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be
included in the manufacturer's vehicle list.
NOTE
Always read the section "Child seats" before
fitting a child seat in the car.
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag, only rear-facing child
seats)
B
Front seat (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing child
seats)
B
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 0
max 10 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, C
, X
D
X
IL
C
X
Group 0+
max 13 kg
E Rear-facing infant seat
IL
B, C, E
, X
D
X
IL
C
XC Rear-facing child seat
D Rear-facing child seat
||
SAFETY
80
Weight
Size class
A
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated air-
bag, only rear-facing child
seats)
B
Front seat (with activated air-
bag, only front-facing child
seats)
B
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
Group 1
9-18 kg
A Front-facing child seat
X
IL
B, E, F
, X
D
IL
F
, IUF
F
XB Front-facing child seat
B1 Front-facing child seat
C Rear-facing child seat
IL
B, E
, X
D
X IL X
D Rear-facing child seat
IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal catego-
ries.
IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group.
X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems.
A
For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label.
B
Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market).
C
Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146).
D
Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket.
E
Adjust the backrest so that the head restraint does not touch the child seat.
F
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group.
WARNING
Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front
passenger seat if the passenger airbag is
activated.
NOTE
If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size
classification, the car model must be included
on the vehicle list for the child seat.
NOTE
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo dealer for information about which i-
Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends.
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 71)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
SAFETY
82
Table for location of i-Size child
seats
The table gives a recommendation for which i-
Size child seats suit which locations, and for
what size of child.
The child seat must be approved in accordance
with UN Reg R129.
NOTE
Always read the section "Child seats" before
fitting a child seat in the car.
Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-
facing child seats)
Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-fac-
ing child seats)
Outer rear seat Centre rear seat
i-Size child seats X X
i-U
A, B
X
i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing.
X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
B
Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X2 i-Size (type approval E4-129R-000002).
Related information
•
Child seats (p. 71)
•
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points (p. 78)
•
Table for location of ISOFIX child seats
(p. 79)
•
Table for location of child seats using the
car's seatbelts (p. 76)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
84
Instruments and controls, left-hand
drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
Display/function/control
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Steering wheel adjustment
Horn
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Bonnet opening
Display lighting, tailgate unlocking, tail-
gate opening/closing*, halogen head-
lamp levelling
Display/function/control
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror
Display/function/control
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
Gear selector
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
85
Display/function/control
Start knob
Drive mode control*
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Display/function/control
Memory for setup of:
•
Power front seat*
•
Door mirrors
•
Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
doors and tailgate
Display/function/control
Power windows, door mirrors
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
Steering wheel (p. 129)
•
Manual front seat (p. 119)
•
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Instruments and controls, right-
hand drive car
The overviews show where the displays and
controls near the driver are located.
Display/function/control
Position lamps, daytime running lights,
dipped beam, main beam, direction indi-
cators, front fog lamps/cornering lights*,
rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter
Steering wheel paddles for manual gear
changing in an automatic gearbox*
Head-up display*
Driver display
Wipers and washing, rain sensor*
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
86
Display/function/control
Right-hand steering wheel keypad
Display lighting, unlocking the tailgate,
opening/closing the tailgate*
Bonnet opening
Horn
Steering wheel adjustment
Left-hand steering wheel keypad
Display/function/control
Front reading lamps and interior lighting
Panorama roof*
Display in roof console
Manual dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror
Display/function/control
Centre display
Hazard warning flashers, max defroster/
heated windscreen*, media, glovebox
door opening
Gear selector
Display/function/control
Start knob
Drive mode control*
Parking brake
Automatic braking when stationary
Display/function/control
Memory for setup of:
•
Power front seat*
•
Door mirrors
•
Head-up display*
Door opening, locking/unlocking of side
doors and tailgate
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
87
Display/function/control
Power windows, door mirrors
Adjusting front seat
Related information
•
Steering wheel (p. 129)
•
Manual front seat (p. 119)
•
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
88
Driver display
The driver display shows information about the
car and driving.
The driver display contains gauges, indicators and
indicator and warning symbols. The content of
the driver display depends on the car's equip-
ment, settings and which functions are active at
that time.
The driver display is available in two versions, 12-
inch* and 8-inch.
WARNING
In the event of a fault in the driver display the
information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other
safety systems may not be shown. In which
case, the driver cannot check the status of
the car's systems or receive current warnings
and information.
WARNING
If the driver display should extinguish, not illu-
minate on activation/start or be fully or parti-
ally illegible, the car must not be used. You
should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo workshop.
Driver display, 12-inch*
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols
Tachometer/ECO gauge
A
Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator
Odometer
B
Clock Drive mode
(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
89
On the left In the middle On the right
Road Sign Information*
Door and seatbelt information Status of the Start/Stop function
– Media player Distance to empty tank
–
Navigation map*
Instantaneous fuel consumption
– Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
– Voice recognition –
–
Compass
A
–
A
Depends on drive mode selected.
B
Accumulated mileage.
Driver display, 8-inch
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
90
Location in the driver display:
On the left In the middle On the right
Fuel gauge Speedometer Media player
Drive mode
(Comfort, Off Road, Eco, Dynamic or Individual)
Road Sign Information*
Phone
Gear shift indicator Cruise control and speed limiter information
Navigation information*
Tachometer/ECO gauge
A
Door and seatbelt information Clock
Distance to empty tank Status of the Start/Stop function App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad)
Outside temperature gauge – Instantaneous fuel consumption
Indicator and warning symbols –
Odometer
B
– – Trip meter
– – Indicator and warning symbols
– – Voice recognition
– – Engine temperature gauge
– – Messages, in some cases with graphics
– –
Compass
A
A
Depends on drive mode selected.
B
Accumulated mileage.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
91
Dynamic symbol
The dynamic symbol in its basic
form.
The centre of the driver display contains a
dynamic symbol that changes appearance for dif-
ferent types of message. It can show an indicator
or warning symbol, or consist of an image
sequence that starts from this position and is
then converted to a larger image to clarify infor-
mation.
Example of indicator symbol in the 12-inch driver display.
Activating the driver display
The driver display is activated as soon as a door
is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver
display extinguishes after a while if it is not used.
To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following:
•
Depress the brake pedal.
•
Turn the ignition knob to ignition position to I.
•
Open one of the doors.
Related information
•
Driver display settings (p. 92)
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display
(p. 93)
•
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 95)
•
Application menu in the driver display
(p. 103)
•
Fuel gauge (p. 97)
•
License agreement for the driver display
(p. 98)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
92
Driver display settings
Settings for the driver display can be made in
the driver display's application menu and in the
centre display's
Settings menu.
Settings in the app menu
In the app menu, you can choose which informa-
tion is shown on the driver display from
•
trip computer
•
media player
•
phone
•
navigation system*.
The application menu in the driver display is
opened and navigated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad, see the section "Using the
application menu in the driver display".
Settings in the centre display
Selecting information type
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays Driver
Display Information
.
3. Select what should be shown in the back-
ground:
•
Show no information in background
•
Show information for current playing
media
•
Show navigation even if no route is
set
1
.
The 12-inch driver display* shows the infor-
mation in the centre, and the 8-inch driver
display shows the information in the top
right-hand field.
Selecting theme
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on
My Car Displays Display
Themes
3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver
display:
•
Glass
•
Minimalistic
•
Performance
•
Chrome Rings.
Selecting language
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on
System System Languages and
Units
System Language to select lan-
guage.
> A change will affect the language in all
displays.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Application menu in the driver display
(p. 103)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
1
The map is only shown with 12-inch driver display*. In the 8-inch driver display, only guidance is shown. For more information, see the section "Displays and controls for map navigation" and "Map navigation in
the driver display".
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
93
Indicator symbols in the driver
display
The indicator symbols alert the driver that a func-
tion is activated, that a system is operating, or
that a fault or abnormal condition exists.
Symbol Specification
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended, this
information symbol illuminates and
a text appears on the driver display.
The information symbol can also
illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Fault in brake system
The symbol lights up when there is
a fault in the parking brake.
ABS fault
If this symbol illuminates then the
system is not working. The car's
regular brake system continues to
work, but without the ABS function.
Symbol Specification
Automatic brake on
The symbol illuminates when the
function is activated and the foot
brake or parking brake is acting.
The brake holds the car stationary
when it has stopped.
Tyre pressure system
The symbol illuminates when tyre
pressure is too low. If there is a
fault in the tyre pressure system,
the symbol will flash for approx. 1
minute and then illuminate with a
constant glow. This may be
because the system cannot detect
or warn of low tyre pressure as
intended.
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates after the
engine has been started then it
may be due to a fault in the car's
emissions system. Drive to a work-
shop for checking. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Symbol Specification
Left and right-hand direction
indicator
The symbols flash when the direc-
tion indicators are used.
Position lamps
The symbol lights up when the
position lamps are switched on.
Fault in the headlamp system
The symbol illuminates if a fault
has occurred in the ABL function
(Active Bending Lights) or if
another fault has occurred in the
headlamp system.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when the
automatic main beam is on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
the automatic main beam is off.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
94
Symbol Specification
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main
beam is on and with main beam
flash.
Active main beam on
The symbol lights up blue when
active main beam is on. Position
lamps are switched on.
Active main beam off
The symbol lights up white when
active main beam is off. Position
lamps are switched on.
Main beam On
The symbol lights up when main
beam and the position lamps are
switched on.
Front fog lamps on
This symbol illuminates when the
front fog lamp is switched on.
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the
rear fog lamp is switched on.
Symbol Specification
Rain sensor on
This symbol illuminates when the
rain sensor is on.
Preconditioning on
The symbol illuminates when the
engine block and passenger com-
partment heater/air conditioning
are preconditioning the car.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that
the stability system is operating. If
the symbol illuminates with con-
stant glow then there is a fault in
the system.
Stability system, sport mode
The symbol illuminates when the
sport mode is activated. Sport
mode allows for a more active driv-
ing experience. The system then
detects whether the accelerator
pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than
in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding of the rear sec-
tion up to a certain level before it
intervenes and stabilises the car.
Symbol Specification
Lane assistance
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Yellow symbol: Lane assistance
warns/intervenes.
Lane assistance and rain sensor
White symbol: Lane assistance is
on and road lines are detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on
but road lines are not detected.
Rain sensor is on.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
closed properly then the information or warning
symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis-
play.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Warning symbols in the driver display
(p. 95)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
95
Warning symbols in the driver
display
The warning symbols alert the driver that an
important function is activated or that a serious
fault or condition exists.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the
brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further
before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated
by a workshop. Volvo recommends contacting
an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the
same time, there is a risk that the rear end will
skid during heavy braking.
Symbol Specification
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates
when a fault has been indicated
which could affect the safety
and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the
driver display at the same time. The
warning symbol can also illuminate
in conjunction with other symbols.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol flashes if someone in
a front seat has not put on their
seatbelt or if someone in a rear
seat has taken off their seatbelt.
Airbags
If the symbol remains illuminated or
illuminates while driving, a fault has
been detected in one of the car's
safety systems. Read the message
in the driver display. Volvo recom-
mends that an authorised Volvo
workshop is contacted.
Symbol Specification
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake
fluid level may be too low. Visit the
nearest authorised workshop to
have the brake fluid level checked
and rectified.
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a con-
stant glow when the parking brake
is applied.
A flashing symbol means that a
fault has arisen. Read the message
in the driver display.
Low oil pressure
If this symbol illuminates during
driving then the engine's oil pres-
sure is too low. Stop the engine
immediately and check the engine
oil level, top up if necessary. If the
symbol illuminates and the oil level
is normal, contact a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
96
Symbol Specification
Alternator not charging
This symbol illuminates during driv-
ing if a fault has occurred in the
electrical system. Visit a workshop.
Volvo recommends that an author-
ised Volvo workshop is contacted.
Collision risk
City Safety warns of a risk of colli-
sion with other vehicles, pedes-
trians, cyclists or large animals.
Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate
and fuel filler flap
If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or door is not
closed properly then the information or warning
symbol and graphics illuminate in the driver dis-
play.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 93)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
•
Safety (p. 56)
Outside temperature gauge
The outside temperature gauge is shown in the
driver display.
A sensor detects the temperature outside of the
car.
Outside temperature gauge location in the 12-inch and
8-inch driver display.
If the car has been stationary, the gauge may dis-
play a temperature reading that is too high.
When the outside temperature is within the range
-5 °C to +2 °C (23 till 36 °F) a snowflake symbol
is also shown in the driver display as a warning
for potentially slippery conditions. The snowflake
symbol is also illuminated briefly in the head-up
display, if the car is equipped with one.
Outside temperature gauge setting
Change the unit for the temperature gauge via
the centre display's top view.
–
Select Settings System System
Languages and Units
Units of
Measurement
and select the required unit
type,
Metric, Imperial or US.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
97
Clock
The clock is shown in both the driver display and
the centre display.
Location
Clock location in the 12-inch and 8-inch driver display.
In the centre display, the clock is located at the
top right of the status bar.
In certain situations, messages and information
may cover the clock in the driver display.
Settings for time and date
Select Settings System Date and Time
in the centre display's top view to change set-
tings for time and date format.
Adjust time and date by pressing the up or down
arrow on the touch screen.
Automatic time for cars with GPS
If the car is equipped with a navigation system
then
Auto Time can be selected. The time zone
is then adjusted automatically based on the loca-
tion of the car. For certain types of navigation
systems, the current location (country) must also
be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time
is not selected, time and data are adjusted with
arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen.
Summer time
In certain countries, it is possible to select auto-
matic setting of summer time with
Auto. For
other countries, summer time can be set with On
or Off.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Fuel gauge
The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the
fuel level in the tank.
Fuel gauge in the 12-inch driver display.
The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the
quantity of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section
"Trip computer".
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
98
Fuel gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
The bars in the fuel gauge indicate the quantity
of fuel in the tank.
When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to
refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and
changes to amber colour. The trip computer also
indicates distance to empty tank, see the section
"Trip computer". When the fuel level is critically
low, only one amber-coloured bar remains. Refuel
the car as soon as possible.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 161)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 439)
License agreement for the driver
display
A license is an agreement for the right to oper-
ate a certain activity or the right to use someone
else's entitlement according to the terms and
conditions in the agreement. The following text is
Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer/devel-
oper.
BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old"
License
Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993
The Regents of the University of California. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features
or use of this software must display the
following acknowledgement: This product
includes software developed by the
University of California, Berkeley and its
contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised"
License
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
99
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the
names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derive from this
software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license
Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
The views and conclusions contained in the
software and documentation are those of the
authors and should not be interpreted as
representing official policies, either expressed or
implied, of the FreeBSD Project.
FreeType Project License
1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg
Introduction The FreeType Project is
distributed in several archive packages; some
of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine, various tools and
contributions which rely on, or relate to, the
FreeType Project. This license applies to all
files found in such packages, and which do
not fall under their own explicit license. The
license affects thus the FreeType font
engine, the test programs, documentation
and makefiles, at the very least. This license
was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
100
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which
all encourage inclusion and use of free
software in commercial and freeware
products alike. As a consequence, its main
points are that: o We don't promise that this
software works. However, we are be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
distribution) o You can use this software for
whatever you want, in parts or full form,
without having to pay us. (`royalty-free'
usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote
this software. If you use it, or only parts of it,
in a program, you must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you've used the FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this software, with or without
modifications, in commercial products,
provided that all warranty or liability claims
are assumed by the product vendor. Legal
Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license,
the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and
`FreeType archive' refer to the set of files
originally distributed by the authors (David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they
named as alpha, beta or final release. `You'
refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where `using' is a generic term
including compiling the project's source code
as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'. This program is referred to as `a
program using the FreeType engine'. This
license applies to all files distributed in the
original FreeType archive, including all source
code, binaries and documentation, unless
otherwise stated in the file in its original,
unmodified form as distributed in the original
archive. If you are unsure whether or not a
particular file is covered by this license, you
must contact us to verify this. The FreeType
project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David
Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner
Lemberg. All rights reserved except as
specified below. 1. No Warranty THE
FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY
THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF
THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not
signed this license, you are not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType project
is copyrighted material, only this license, or
another one contracted with the authors,
grants you the right to use, distribute, and
modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or
modifying the FreeType project, you indicate
that you understand and accept all the terms
of this license.
2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: o Redistribution
of source code must retain this license file
(`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices of the
unaltered, original files must be preserved in
all copies of source files. o Redistribution in
binary form must provide a disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the FreeType Team, in the
distribution documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the
FreeType web page in your documentation,
though this isn't mandatory. These conditions
apply to any software derived from or based
on the FreeType code, not just the
unmodified files. If you use our work, you
must acknowledge us. However, no fee need
be paid to us.
3. Advertising The names of FreeType's authors
and contributors may not be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written
permission. We suggest, but do not require,
that you use one or more of the following
phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation or advertising materials:
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
101
`FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
4. Contacts There are two mailing lists related
to FreeType: o [email protected]
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as future and wanted
additions to the library and distribution. If you
are looking for support, start in this list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation. o [email protected]
Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals,
design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc.
o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current
FreeType web page, which will allow you to
download our latest development version and
read online documentation. You can also
contact us individually at: David Turner
<[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm
<[email protected]> Werner
Libpng License
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for
your convenience. In case of any discrepancy
between this copy and the notices in the file
png.h that is included in the libpng distribution,
the latter shall prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional
notices immediately following this sentence.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through
1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c)
2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with
your enjoyment of the library or against
infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts
or the library will fulfill any of your particular
purposes or needs. This library is provided with all
faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality,
performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through
1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998,
1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following
individuals added to the list of Contributing
Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96,
May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997
Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the
following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88,
January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy
Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors" is defined as the following
set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS".
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
102
merchantability and of fitness for any purpose.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary, or consequential damages,
which may result from the use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the
possibility of such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy,
modify, and distribute this source code, or
portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee,
subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as
such and must not be misrepresented as
being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any source or altered source
distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without fee, and encourage
the use of this source code as a component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this source code in a product,
acknowledgment is not required but would be
appreciated.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about" boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and
"pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software.
OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark
of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected]
April 15, 2002
MIT License
Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders>
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
zlib License
The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year>
<copyright holders>
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied warranty. In no event will the
authors be held liable for any damages arising
from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose, including commercial
applications, and to alter it and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not claim that you
wrote the original software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly
marked as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original
software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered
from any source distribution.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
103
SGI Free Software B License Version
2.0.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0,
Sept. 18, 2008)
Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon
Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is
hereby granted, free of charge, to any person
obtaining a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom
the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions: The above copyright notice
including the dates of first publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of
Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in
advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use
or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
Application menu in the driver
display
Application menu (app menu) in the driver dis-
play provides quick access to commonly used
functions for certain apps.
The app menu in the driver display can be used instead
of using the centre display.
The app menu is shown in the driver display and
is controlled using the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad. The app menu makes it easy to
switch between different apps or functions within
the apps without having to let go of the steering
wheel and take your eyes off the road.
App menu functions
Different apps give access to different types of
functions. The following apps and their associ-
ated functions can be controlled from the app
menu:
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
104
App Functions
Trip com-
puter
Selection of trip meter, selection
of what to show in the driver dis-
play, etc.
Media
player
Selection of active source for
the media player.
Phone Calling a contact from the call
list.
Navigation Pause guide, start guide to
recently used destination, etc.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
Using the application menu in the
driver display
The application menu (the app menu) in the
driver display is operated with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
Open/close
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
Opening/closing the app menu
–
Press on open/close (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must be
confirmed before the app menu can be
opened.)
> The app menu opens/closes.
The app menu closes automatically after a period
of inactivity or after certain options have been
selected.
Navigating and selecting in the app
menu
1. Navigate between the different apps that are
available by tapping on left or right (2).
> Functions for previous/next app are
shown in the app menu.
2. Browse through the functions for the
selected app by tapping on up or down (3).
3. Confirm or highlight an option for the func-
tion by pressing on confirm (4).
> The function is activated and for some
options the app menu then closes.
If the app menu is opened again, the functions of
the most recently selected app are shown first.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
105
Related information
•
Application menu in the driver display
(p. 103)
•
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
Messages in the driver display and
the centre display
The driver display and centre display can show
messages to inform or assist the driver in the
event of different events.
Driver display
Message in the driver display
2
.
Message in the driver display
3
.
The driver display shows messages that are of
high priority for the driver.
The messages can be shown in different parts of
the driver display depending on what other infor-
mation is currently being displayed. After a while,
or when the message has been acknowledged/
action taken if required, the message disappears
from the driver display. If a message needs to be
saved, it is placed in the
Car status app, which is
opened from the app view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons
for acknowledging the message or accepting a
request, for example.
2
With 8-inch driver display.
3
With 12-inch driver display.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
106
Service messages
Shown below is a selection of important service
messages and their meanings.
Message Specification
Stop safely
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Turn off
engine
A
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a work-
shop
B
.
Service urgent
Drive to work-
shop
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car immediately.
Service
required
A
Contact a workshop
B
to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Regular main-
tenance
Book time for
maintenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown before the next
service date.
Regular main-
tenance
Time for main-
tenance
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown at the next service
date.
Message Specification
Regular main-
tenance
Maintenance
overdue
Time for regular service -
contact a workshop
B
.
Shown when the service
date has passed.
Temporarily
off
A
A function has been tem-
porarily switched off and is
reset automatically while
driving or after starting
again.
A
Part of message, shown together with information on where the
problem has arisen.
B
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Centre display
Message in the centre display.
The centre display shows messages that are of
lower priority for the driver.
Most messages are shown above the centre dis-
play's status bar. After a while, or when any
required action related to the message has been
taken, the message disappears from the status
bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is posi-
tioned in the top view in the centre display.
Message composition may vary and they can be
shown together with graphics, symbols or a but-
ton for activating/deactivating a function linked
to the message.
Pop-up messages
In some cases, a message is shown in the form
of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have
higher priority than messages shown in the sta-
tus bar and require acknowledgement/action
before they disappear. Messages that need to be
saved are positioned in the top view in the centre
display.
Related information
•
Driver display (p. 88)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
•
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
•
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 108)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
107
Managing messages in the driver
display and the centre display
Messages in the driver display and centre dis-
play are managed with the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad and in the centre display's
views.
Driver display
Message in the driver display
4
and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Message in the driver display
5
and the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Left/right
Confirm
Some messages in the driver display contain one
or more buttons for acknowledging the message
or accepting a request, for example.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
1. Navigate between the different buttons that
are available by tapping on left or right (1).
2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm
(2).
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by pressing on confirm
(2), or allow the message to close automati-
cally after a while.
> The message disappears from the driver
display.
If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in
the
Car status app, which is opened from the
app view in the centre display. The message Car
message stored in Car Status application is
shown in the centre display in conjunction with
this.
Centre display
Message in the centre display.
Some messages in the centre display have a but-
ton (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for
4
With 8-inch driver display.
5
With 12-inch driver display.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
108
e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to
the message.
Managing a new message
For messages with buttons:
–
Press the button to perform the action or
allow the message to close automatically
after a while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
For messages without buttons:
–
Close the message by tapping on it, or allow
the message to close automatically after a
while.
> The message disappears from the status
bar.
If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned
in the top view in the centre display.
Related information
•
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 105)
•
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 108)
Managing messages saved from
the driver display and centre display
Whether saved from the driver display or the
centre display, messages are managed in the
centre display.
Messages saved from the driver display
Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app.
Messages that are shown in
the driver display and that need
to be saved are added in the
Car status app in the centre
display. The message Car
message stored in Car
Status application is shown
in the centre display in conjunction with this.
Reading a saved message
To read a saved message immediately:
–
Press the button to the right of the Car
message stored in Car Status
application message in the centre display.
>
The saved message is shown in the
Car
status app.
To read a saved message later:
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
> The app is opened in the bottom subview
of the home view.
2.
Select the
Messages tab in the app.
> A list of saved messages is shown.
3. Press on the arrow to the right to maximise/
minimise a message.
> More information on the message is
shown in the list and the image to the left
in the app shows information about the
message graphically.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
109
Managing a saved message
In maximised mode, some messages have two
buttons available to book service or read the
owner's manual.
To book service for a saved message:
–
In maximised mode for the message, press
Request appoint.Call to make
Appointment
6
for help in booking service.
>
With
Request appoint.: The
Appointments tab opens in the app and
creates a request to book service and
repair work.
With
Call to make Appointment: The
phone app is initiated and calls a service
centre to book service and repair work.
To read the owner's manual for a saved mes-
sage:
–
In maximised mode for the message, press
Owner's manual to read about the mes-
sage in the owner's manual.
> The owner's manual opens in the centre
display and shows information linked to
the message.
Saved messages in the app are deleted automat-
ically each time the engine is started.
Messages saved from the centre
display
Saved messages and possible options in the top view.
Messages that are shown in the centre display
that need to be saved are added in the top view
of the centre display.
Reading a saved message
1. Open the top view in the centre display.
> A list of saved messages is shown. Mes-
sages with an arrow to the right can be
maximised.
2. Press on the arrow to maximise/minimise
the message.
Managing a saved message
Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/
deactivating a function linked to the message.
–
Press the button to perform the action.
Saved messages in the top view are deleted
automatically when the car is switched off.
Related information
•
Messages in the driver display and the centre
display (p. 105)
•
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
6
Depending on market.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
110
Head-up display*
The head-up display supplements the car's
driver display and projects information from the
driver display onto the windscreen. The projec-
ted image can only be seen from the driver posi-
tion.
Incoming phone calls.
The head-up display shows warnings and infor-
mation relating to speed, cruise control functions,
navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road
sign information and incoming phone calls are
also shown in the head-up display.
NOTE
The driver's ability to see the information in
the head-up display is impaired by the follow-
ing:
•
use of polarising sunglasses
•
a driving position which means that the
driver is not sitting centred in the seat
•
objects on the display unit's cover glass
•
unfavourable light conditions.
IMPORTANT
The display unit from which the information is
projected is located in the instrument panel.
To avoid damage to the display unit's cover
glass - do not store any objects on the cover
glass and make sure that no objects fall down
onto it.
Examples of what can be shown in the display.
Speed
Cruise control
Navigation
Road signs
A number of symbols can be shown temporarily
in the head-up display, e.g.:
If the warning symbol illuminates - read
the warning message in the driver dis-
play.
If the information symbol illuminates -
read the message in the driver display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
111
NOTE
Certain visual defects may cause headaches
and a feeling of stress during the use of the
head-up display.
City Safety in the head-up display
NOTE
When City Safety* is activated, the informa-
tion in the head-up display is replaced by a
graphic for City Safety. This graphic is illumi-
nated even if the head-up display is switched
off.
The graphic for City Safety flashes in order to catch the
driver's attention.
Activating/deactivating the head-up
display
Press the Head-up display
button in the centre display
function view.
NOTE
Activation/deactivation and adjustment of the
head-up-display can only be performed when
it shows a projected image. The car's engine
must be running.
Settings for head-up display
Select the option and adjust the settings for the
head-up display's projection onto the windscreen.
Selecting display options
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
.
3. Select which functions should be shown:
•
Show Navigation
•
Show Road Sign Information
•
Show Driver Support
•
Show Phone.
The setting can be saved as a personal setting in
the driver profile.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
112
Adjusting brightness and vertical position
1.
Press the
Head-up display adjustments
button in the centre display function view.
2. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of
the projected image in the driver's field of
vision using the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
Reducing the brightness
Increasing the brightness
Raising the position
Lowering the position
Confirm
The brightness of the graphics is automatically
adapted to their background light conditions. The
brightness is also affected by the adjustment of
the brightness in the car's other displays.
The height position can be stored in the memory
function of the power* front seat.
Calibrate the horizontal position
The head-up display's horizontal position may
need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display
unit is replaced. Calibration means that the pro-
jected image is rotated clockwise or anticlock-
wise.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select
My Car Displays Head-Up
Display Options
Head-Up Display
Calibration
.
3. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with
the steering wheel's right keypad.
Rotate anticlockwise
Rotate clockwise
Confirm
Cleaning
Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean
and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly mois-
ten the microfibre cloth.
Never use strong stain removers. A special clean-
ing agent available from Volvo dealers can be
used for more difficult cleaning.
When replacing the windscreen
Cars with head-up display are equipped with a
special type of windscreen that meets the
requirements for displaying the projected image.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
113
When replacing the windscreen - contact an
authorised workshop
7
. The correct version of the
windscreen must be fitted in order that the head-
up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly.
Related information
•
Function view with buttons for car functions
(p. 47)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Steering wheel (p. 129)
•
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 121)
•
Driver display (p. 88)
Voice recognition
8
The voice recognition system allows the driver to
use voice recognition to control certain functions
of the media player, Bluetooth-connected phone,
the climate system and Volvo's navigation sys-
tem*.
Voice commands offer convenience and assist
the driver to not be distracted so that he or she
can concentrate on driving, the road and the traf-
fic situation.
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility
for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and
complying with all applicable rules of the road.
Voice control system microphone
Voice control is done in dialogue form with the
user saying commands and receiving verbal
responses from the system. The voice recognition
system uses the same microphone as the
Bluetooth handsfree system and the voice recog-
nition system's replies come via the car's speak-
ers. In some cases, a text message is also shown
in the driver display. Functions are controlled
from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Set-
tings are made via the centre display.
System updating
The voice recognition system is continuously
improved. Download updates for optimal perform-
ance, see support.volvocars.com.
7
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
8
Applies to certain markets.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
114
Related information
•
Using voice recognition (p. 114)
•
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 117)
•
Voice recognition and map navigation
(p. 118)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
Using voice recognition
9
Basic instructions for using voice recognition
control.
Depress the steering wheel
button for voice recognition
to activate the system and
initiate a dialogue using voice
commands.
Remember the following during communication:
•
For a command - speak after the tone in a
normal voice at normal speed.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands
during this time).
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment by having the doors, windows
and panoramic roof* closed.
Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows:
•
by saying "
Cancel".
•
with a long press on the voice recognition
button on the steering wheel
.
To speed up communication and skip the
prompts from the system, press the steering
wheel button for voice recognition
when the
system voice is speaking and say the next com-
mand.
Example of voice recognition control
Press , say “Call [Forename] [Surname]
[number category]" - calls the selected contact
from the phone book if the contact has more
than one phone number (e.g. home, mobile,
work), e.g.:
Press
, say "Call Robin Smith Mobile".
Commands/phrases
The following commands are always available for
use:
•
"
Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction
in the ongoing dialogue.
•
"
Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue.
•
"
Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system
replies with the commands available in the
current situation, a prompt or an example.
Commands for specific functions are described in
the corresponding sections, e.g. Voice recogni-
tion control of the phone.
9
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
115
Digits
The number commands are stated differently
depending on the function to be controlled:
•
Phone numbers and postcodes must be
spoken individually, number by number, e.g.
zero three one two two four four three
(03122443).
•
House numbers can be spoken individually
or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22).
For English and Dutch, several groups can
be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twenty-
two (22 22). For English, double or triple can
be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can
be given within the range 0-2300.
•
Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight
point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point
two or hundred four point two (104.2).
Related information
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 117)
•
Voice recognition and map navigation
(p. 118)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
Settings for voice recognition
10
Several settings for the voice recognition system
can be made.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Continue to
System Voice Control and
select settings.
•
Repeat Voice Command
•
Gender
•
Speech Rate
Audio settings
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Continue to
Sound System Volumes
Voice Control and select settings.
Change language
Voice recognition is not possible for all lan-
guages. Languages available for voice recogni-
tion are marked with an icon in the language list -
.
Changing the language also affects menu, mes-
sage and help texts.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Continue to
System System Language
and select language.
Related information
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Using voice recognition (p. 114)
•
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 117)
•
Voice recognition and map navigation
(p. 118)
10
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
116
Voice recognition control of the
phone
11
Call a contact, have messages read aloud or
dictate brief messages with voice control com-
mands to a Bluetooth connected telephone.
To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice
recognition command must include contact infor-
mation that is entered in the phone book. If a
contact, e.g.
Robyn Smith, has several phone
numbers then the number category can also be
stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin
Smith Mobile".
Tap on
and say one of the following com-
mands:
•
"
Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact
from the phone book.
•
"
Call [phone number]" - dials the phone
number.
•
"
Recent calls" - displays the call list.
•
"
Read message" - message is read out. If
there are several messages - select which
message should be read out.
•
"
Message to [contact]" users are reques-
ted to say a brief message. The message is
then repeated aloud and the user can
choose to send
12
or revise the message. For
this function to work, the car must be con-
nected to the Internet.
Related information
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Using voice recognition (p. 114)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
Voice recognition control of radio
and media
13
Command for voice recognition control of radio
and media player.
Tap on and say one of the following com-
mands:
•
"
Media" - starts a dialogue for media and
radio and shows examples of commands.
•
"
Play [artist]" - plays back music by the
selected artist.
•
"
Play [song title]" - plays back the selected
song.
•
"
Play [song title] from [album]" - plays
back the selected song from the selected
album.
•
"
Play [TV channel name]" - starts the
selected TV channel.
•
"
Play [radio station]" - starts playing back
the selected radio channel.
•
"
Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected
radio frequency in the current frequency
band. If no radio source is active, the FM
band is started by default.
•
"
Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" -
starts the selected radio frequency in the
selected frequency band.
11
Applies to certain markets.
12
Only certain cars can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com.
13
Applies to certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
117
•
"
Radio" - starts FM radio.
•
"
Radio FM" - starts FM radio.
•
"
Radio AM" - starts AM radio.
•
"
DAB " - starts DAB radio.
•
"
TV" - starts playback from TV*.
•
"
CD" - starts playback from CD*.
•
"
USB" - starts playback from USB.
•
"
iPod" - starts playback from iPod.
•
"
Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Blue-
tooth-connected media source.
•
"
Similar music" — plays back music similar
to the music currently playing back from USB
devices.
Related information
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Using voice recognition (p. 114)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
Voice recognition control of climate
control
14
Voice recognition commands for the climate
control system to e.g. change temperature, acti-
vate a heated seat* or change fan level.
Press and say one of the following com-
mands:
•
"
Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate
control and shows examples of commands.
•
"
Set temperature to X degrees" - sets
the desired temperature.
•
"
Raise temperature"/"Lower
temperature" - raise/lower the temperature
setting one step.
•
"
Sync temperature" - synchronises the
temperature for all climate zones in the car
with the temperature set for the driver's side.
•
"
Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the
desired air flow.
•
"
Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes
the desired air flow.
•
"
Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes
the air flow to Max/Off.
•
"
Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" -
raises/lowers the fan level one step.
•
"
Turn on auto" - activates automatic climate
regulation.
•
"
Air condition on"/"Air condition off" -
activates/deactivates the air conditioning.
•
"
Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" -
activates/deactivates the air circulation.
•
"
Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster"
- activates/deactivates defrosting of windows
and door mirrors.
•
"
Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max
defroster off" - activates/deactivates the
max defroster.
•
"
Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off
electric defroster
" - activates/deactivates
the heated windscreen*.
•
"
Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear
defroster" - activates/deactivates the
heated rear window and door mirrors.
•
"
Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn
steering wheel heat off" - activates/deac-
tivates the heated steering wheel*.
•
"
Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower
steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the
setting for the heated steering wheel* one
step.
•
"
Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat"
- activates/deactivates the heated seat*.
•
"
Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" -
raises/lowers the setting for the heated
seat* one step.
14
Applies to certain markets.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
118
•
"
Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat
ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat
ventilation*.
•
"
Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat
ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for
the ventilated seat* one step.
Related information
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Using voice recognition (p. 114)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
•
Climate control (p. 176)
Voice recognition and map
navigation
15
Several navigation system functions can be acti-
vated with voice commands.
Tap on and say one of the following com-
mands:
•
“
Navigation” - Initiates a navigation dialogue
and shows examples of commands.
•
"
Take me home" - Guidance is given to the
Home position.
•
"
Go to [City]" - Specifies a city as a desti-
nation. Example "Drive to London".
•
"
Go to [Address]" - Specifies an address
as a destination. An address must contain
city and street. Example "Drive to 5 King
Street".
•
"
Add intersection" - Starts a dialogue
where two streets must be specified. The
intersection point of the specified streets
then becomes the destination.
•
"
Go to [Post code]" - Specifies a post
code as a destination. Example "Drive to 1 2
3 4 5".
•
"
Go to [contact]" - Specifies an address
from the phone book as a destination. Exam-
ple "Drive to Robyn Smith".
•
"
Search [POI category]" - Searches for
adjacent points of interest (POI) within a cer-
tain category (e.g. restaurants)
16
. To have the
list sorted along the route - say "
Along the
route" when the results list is shown.
•
"
Search [POI category] in [City]" -
Searches for points of interest (POI) within a
certain category and city. The results list is
sorted according to the city's centre point.
Example "Search for restaurant in London".
•
"
Search [POI name]". Example "Search
Hyde Park".
•
"
Change country/Change state
17,
18
" -
Changes the search area for navigation.
•
"
Show favourites" - Shows favourited posi-
tions in the driver display.
•
"
Clear itinerary" - Erases all the stored
intermediate destinations and final destina-
tion in an itinerary.
15
Applies to certain markets.
16
The user has the option of calling the POI or specifying it as a destination.
17
In European countries, “Country” is used instead of “State”.
18
For Brazil and India, the search area is changed via the centre display.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
119
•
"
Repeat voice guidance" - Repeats the
last spoken guidance.
•
"
Turn off voice guidance" - Switches off
voice guidance.
•
"
Turn on voice guidance" - Starts the
switched-off voice guidance.
Related information
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Using voice recognition (p. 114)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
Manual front seat
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort.
Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cush-
ion* by pumping up/down.
Change the length* of the seat cushion by
pulling the lever up and moving the seat
cushion forward/backward by hand.
Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting
the handle and adjusting the distance to the
steering wheel and pedals. Check that the
seat is locked after the position has been
adjusted.
Change the lumbar support* by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Change the backrest rake by turning the
control knob.
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat before
setting off, never while driving. Make sure that
the seat is in locked position in order to avoid
personal injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Related information
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
120
Power front seat*
The car's front seats have different setting
options for optimum seating comfort. The power
seat can be moved forward/backward and up/
down. The front edge of the seat cushion can be
raised/lowered and the backrest rake can be
changed. The lumbar support can be adjusted
upward/downward/forward/backward.
The power seats have overload protection which
is tripped if a seat is blocked by an object. If this
happens, remove the object and then operate the
seat again.
The seat can be adjusted for a period of time
after unlocking the door without the engine run-
ning. Seat adjustment can always be performed
when the engine is running. Adjustment can also
be performed for a period of time after the
engine has been switched off.
Related information
•
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
•
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 121)
•
Manual front seat (p. 119)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)
Adjusting the power front seat*
Set to desired sitting position using the control
on the front seat's seating section.
Change the lumbar support by pressing the
button upward/downward/forward/back.
Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by
adjusting the control up/down.
Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting
the control up/down.
Move the seat forward/backward by adjust-
ing the control forward/backward.
Change the backrest rake by adjusting the
control forward/backward.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
The backrests of the front seats cannot be low-
ered fully forward.
Related information
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 121)
•
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
121
Using the memory function in the
power front seat*
The memory function stores settings for the seat,
door mirrors, and head-up display*.
It is possible to store two different settings with
the memory function. The memory function key-
pad is located either on one front door or both*.
Button M for storing settings.
Memory button
Memory button
Store setting
1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display
to the desired position.
2.
Push the M button and release. The light
indicator in the button illuminates.
3.
Within three seconds, depress the 1 or 2
button.
> When the position has been stored in the
selected memory button an acoustic sig-
nal sounds and the light indicator in the M
button extinguishes.
If none of the memory buttons is depressed
within three seconds then the M button extin-
guishes and no storing takes place.
The seat must be adjusted again before a new
memory can be set.
Using a stored setting
A stored setting can be used with the front door
either open or closed:
Open front door
–
Depress one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
with a short press. Seat, door mirrors and
head-up display move and then stop at the
positions stored in the selected memory but-
ton.
Closed front door
–
Hold one of the memory buttons 1 or 2
depressed until seat, door mirrors and head-
up display stop in the positions that are
stored in the selected memory button.
If the memory button is released, the movement
of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will
be stopped.
WARNING
•
Because the driver's seat can be adjusted
with the ignition off, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
•
Movement of the seat can be STOPPED
at any time by pressing any button on the
power seat control panel.
•
Do not adjust the seat while driving.
•
Make sure there is nothing under the
seats when they are being adjusted.
Related information
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
122
Multi-functional front seat*
Enhance the seating comfort using the multi-
function control.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
The multi-function control can, in some variants,
be used to adjust the lumbar support*, side sup-
port*, cushion length and massage settings*. Set-
tings made with the multi-function control are
shown in the centre display*. Certain function
selections can also be made directly in the centre
display.
Centre display
The driver and the passenger seat settings that
are made with the multi-function control are
shown in the centre display. If the settings for
only one of the front seats are shown in the cen-
tre display, the settings are positioned centred in
the screen. When it is possible to show setting
options for both the front seats, the driver's set-
ting options are shown in the upper half and the
passenger's in the lower half.
To stop showing the seat settings view in the
centre display, press the home button, which is
located under the centre display.
Related information
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Adjusting functions in the multi-functional
front seat* (p. 122)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)
Adjusting functions in the multi-
functional front seat*
Both the multi-function control on the seat and
the centre display can be used in order to
change the settings. The range of settings is
shown in the centre display*.
Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's
seating section.
To activate the multi-function control, turn the
control upwards/downward.
Adjusting massage settings* in the
front seat
The front seat has massage in the backrest. The
massage is performed by air cushions that can
massage with different settings.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
123
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Massage in the seat settings view.
3. To choose between the different massage
functions, select either directly in the touch
screen or by moving the cursor up/down
using the multi-function control's upper/
lower button. Change the setting in the
selected function by selecting directly in the
touch screen or by pressing the arrows, or by
using the multi-function control's front/rear
button.
Settings for massage
The following setting options are available for
massage:
•
On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch
on/off the massage function.
•
Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage
programs. Select between Swell, Tread,
Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder.
•
Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and
High.
•
Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and
Fast.
Restarting massage
The massage function is deactivated automati-
cally after 20 minutes. The function is reactivated
manually.
–
Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre
display, to restart the selected massage pro-
gram.
> The massage program restarts. If no
action is taken, the message remains
shown in the top view.
It is not possible to use the massage function
when the engine is switched off.
Adjusting side support* in the front seat
backrests
The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to pro-
vide side support.
To adjust the side support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Side bolsters in the seat settings
view.
•
Press the front seat button in order to
increase the side support.
•
Press the rear seat button in order to
reduce the side support.
Adjusting the lumbar support* in the
front seat
The lumbar support can be adjusted upward/
downward/forward/backward.
To adjust the lumbar support:
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
2.
Select
Lumbar in the seat settings view.
•
Press the seat button up/down to move
the lumbar support up/down.
•
Press the front seat button in order to
increase the lumbar support.
•
Press the rear seat button in order to
decrease the lumbar support.
Extending the seat cushion in the front
seat
Seat cushion length can be adjusted by using the
multi-function control on the seat.
1. Activate the multi-function control by turning
the control upward/downward. The seat set-
tings view will be shown on the centre dis-
play.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
124
2.
Select
Cushion extension in the seat set-
tings view.
•
Press the front seat button in order to
extend the seat cushion.
•
Press the rear seat button in order to
retract the seat cushion.
Related information
•
Multi-functional front seat* (p. 122)
•
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 108)
Adjusting the passenger seat from
the driver's seat*
The front passenger seat can be adjusted from
the driver's seat.
Activating the function
The function can be activated in two ways via the
centre display:
Via the function view
Press the Adjust passenger
seat button to activate.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Seats.
3.
Select
Adjust Passenger Seat From
Driver Position to activate.
Adjust passenger seat
From activation of the function, the driver must
adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If
no adjustment is made within this time the func-
tion is deactivated.
The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the
controls on the driver's seat:
Move the passenger seat forward/backward
by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Change the passenger seat's backrest rake
by adjusting the control forward/backward.
Related information
•
Power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Adjusting the power front seat* (p. 120)
•
Seatbelt (p. 58)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
125
Adjusting the head restraints in the
rear seat
Adjust the centre seat head restraint according
to the height of the passenger. Fold down the
outer seat head restraints to improve rearward
visibility.
Adjusting the head restraint, centre
seat
The centre seat's head restraint must be
adjusted according to the passenger's height so
that, if possible, the whole of the back of the
head is covered. Slide it up manually as required.
To lower the head restraint, the button (see illus-
tration) must be depressed while the restraint is
carefully moved down.
WARNING
The centre seat head restraint must be in its
lowest position when the centre seat is not
used. When the centre seat is used, the head
restraint must be correctly adjusted to the
height of the passenger so that it covers the
whole of the back of the head if possible.
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
The outer head restraints can be lowered in two
ways via the centre display:
Via the function view
Press the Headrest fold but-
ton to activate/deactivate low-
ering.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
126
Via settings
The car's electrical system must be in the ignition
position II.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Seats.
3.
Select
Fold Headrest On Second Row
Seats to lower the rear outer head
restraints.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if there
are passengers in any of the outer rear seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
WARNING
The head restraint must be in locked position
after being folded up.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
For cars with electric rear seat folding*, the outer
head restraints are folded manually with the con-
trol on the upper side of the seat; see figure
.
For cars without electric folding, fold down the
outer head restraints with the inner control on the
upper side of the seat; see figure .
Related information
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 126)
Lowering the backrests in the rear
seat
The rear seat's backrest is divided into two
parts. The two parts can be lowered forward
individually.
WARNING
•
Adjust the seat and fix it before driving
away. Take care when adjusting the seat.
Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can
lead to trapping injuries.
•
When loading long objects, they must
always be strapped in securely to avoid
injury and damage during sudden braking.
•
Always switch off the engine and apply
the parking brake when loading and
unloading the car.
•
Set the gear selector in P to prevent it
from being moved by mistake.
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down. The
seat belts must not be connected either. Oth-
erwise there is a risk of damaging the rear
seat upholstery.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
127
IMPORTANT
The armrest* for the centre seat must be
raised before lowering the seat.
If the car has private locking, the tailgate must
be closed before lowering the seat.
NOTE
The front seats may need to be pushed for-
wards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests can
be fully folded forward.
Lowering the backrest
Car with electronic folding
If the car is equipped with electronic folding of
the rear seat* there are buttons located in the
cargo area. The backrests can also be lowered
manually.
WARNING
Pay attention that people are not at risk of
being trapped during the automatic folding of
the rear seat. Since this takes place automati-
cally on the press of a button, no one must be
on or too close to the rear seat.
To facilitate folding of the rear seat, the car must
be stationary and the tailgate open.
For electronically controlled folding of backrests:
1. Ensure that there are no occupants or
objects in the rear seat.
2. Lower the centre seat's head restraint man-
ually.
3. Hold the button for folding depressed. The
buttons are marked L and R for left and
right-hand backrest sections respectively.
4. The backrests are lowered automatically to
horizontal position. The head restraints are
also lowered automatically.
To lower the backrest manually:
1.
Lower the centre head restraint manually
.
2. Pull the handles located in the car's left and
right-hand rear seat backrests forward
.
3. The backrest disengages from the lock and
is automatically lowered to the horizontal
position.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
128
Car without electronic folding
The rear seat consists of two parts:
•
The right-hand seat and centre seat are
folded as one unit.
•
The left-hand seat is folded separately.
If the right-hand section is being lowered -
release and adjust the centre backrest head
restraint.
Pull up the backrest's locking handle
while folding the backrest forward at the
same time. The locking handle for the head
restraints is pulled up automatically when the
backrest is folded. A red indicator on the lock
catch
shows that the backrest is no
longer locked in place.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered, the
head restraints may need to be moved for-
ward slightly so as not to make contact with
the seat cushion.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
When the backrest has been raised, the red
indicator should no longer be showing. If it is
still showing then the backrest is not locked
in place.
WARNING
Check that the backrests and head restraints
in the rear seat are locked properly after
being folded up.
The head restraints of the outer seats must
always be raised when there are passengers
on any of the rear seats.
Raising the backrest
Raising the backrest to upright position is carried
out manually:
1. Move the backrest up/down manually.
2. Press the backrest until the catch engages.
3. The head restraint is raised manually.
4. If necessary, raise the centre seat's head
restraint.
Related information
•
Adjusting the head restraints in the rear seat
(p. 125)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
129
Steering wheel
The steering wheel houses the horn and con-
trols for e.g. the driver support systems and
voice recognition.
Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel.
Controls for driver support systems
19
.
Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in
an automatic gearbox.
Controls for voice recognition, head-up dis-
play settings, and menu, message and phone
handling.
Horn
The horn is located in the centre of the steering
wheel.
Related information
•
Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 130)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of steering
wheel* (p. 199)
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 413)
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
•
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
•
Phone (p. 477)
19
Speed Limiter*, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist*.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
130
Adjusting the steering wheel
The steering wheel can be adjusted in different
positions.
The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for
depth.
Steering wheel adjustment can be made in differ-
ent ways depending on whether or not the car is
equipped with knee airbag
20
.
WARNING
Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before
driving away. The steering wheel must never
be adjusted while driving.
With speed related power steering the level of
steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is
regulated according to the car's speed in order to
give the driver enhanced road responsiveness.
With knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel.
1. Push the lever forwards to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel
in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering
wheel lightly at the same time as you move
the lever back.
Without knee airbag
Adjusting the steering wheel.
1. Pull the lever backwards to release the steer-
ing wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that
suits you.
3. Push the lever forwards to secure the steer-
ing wheel. If the lever is stiff, press the steer-
ing wheel lightly at the same time as you
move the lever back.
Related information
•
Steering wheel (p. 129)
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
20
The car is only equipped with knee airbag in certain markets.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
131
Lighting control
The different lighting controls are used to control
both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand
stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior
lighting. Use the thumbwheel in the instrument
panel to adjust headlamp levelling
21
and the
brightness of the interior lighting.
Exterior lighting
Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch.
When the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the car is running, the follow-
ing functions are available in the rotating ring's
different positions.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights and position
lamps.
Position lamps when the car is
parked
A
.
Main beam flash can be used.
Dipped beam and position lamps.
Main beam can be activated.
Main beam flash can be used.
Position Specification
Daytime running lights and position
lamps.
Dipped beam and position lamps in
weak daylight or darkness, or when
the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
The Active main beam function can
be activated.
Main beam can be activated when
dipped beam is switched on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Active main beam on/off.
A
Also at stationary when the car is running, provided that the
rotating ring is moved to this position from another position.
Volvo recommends that mode is used
when the vehicle is driven.
WARNING
The car's audio system is not able to deter-
mine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently
strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with a beam pattern suit-
able for the traffic situation and in accordance
with applicable traffic regulations.
21
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
132
Thumbwheel in the instrument panel
Thumbwheel for adjusting interior brightness
Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling
A car with LED
22
headlamps* has automatic
headlamp levelling and therefore does not have
the thumbwheel for headlamp levelling.
Adjusting the interior brightness
The lamps inside the car come on differently
depending on the ignition position used.
The thumbwheel adjusts the brightness of display
lighting, control lighting, ambient light and ambi-
ence light*.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical align-
ment of the headlamp beam, which could dazzle
oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the
height of the beam. Lower the beam if the car is
heavily laden.
For different load cases and settings, see the
section "Headlamp levelling".
Related information
•
Passenger compartment lighting (p. 141)
•
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Position lamps (p. 133)
•
Headlamp levelling (p. 132)
Headlamp levelling
Headlamp levelling
23
is adjusted using one of
the thumbwheels in the instrument panel.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the car's
electrical system in ignition position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/lower
beam alignment.
The position in which the thumbwheel should be
set for a number of load cases is shown below.
Examples of thumbwheel position.
Thumbwheel in position 0
Thumbwheel in position 1
22
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
133
Load case Thumb-
wheel
position
Only driver. 0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
0
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
1
Driver and passenger in the front
passenger seat.
Three passengers in the rear
seat.
220 kg load in the cargo area.
1
Driver and maximum load in the
cargo area.
2
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
Position lamps
The position lamps are switched on with the
rotating ring on the stalk switch.
Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position.
Turn the rotating ring to the position - the
position lamps are switched on (number plate
lighting is switched on at the same time).
If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside,
the rear position lamps come on (if not already
switched on) to warn road users approaching
from behind. This takes place irrespective of the
position of the rotating ring or the ignition posi-
tion of the car's electrical system.
When driving for more than 30 seconds at max.
10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed
exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime
running lights are switched on. The driver should
turn to a position other than
.
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
23
Applies to vehicles with halogen headlamps.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
134
Daytime running lights
The car has sensors that detect the light condi-
tions in the surroundings. The daytime running
lights are switched on when the rotating ring on
the stalk switch is in position
, or
as well as when the car's electrical system
is in ignition position II or when the car is run-
ning. In position
, the headlamps change
automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or
darkness.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the
position, the daytime running lights (DRL
24
) are
switched on when the car is driven in daylight.
The car automatically changes lighting from day-
time running light to dipped beam in weak day-
light or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also
takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog
lamp are activated.
At stationary when the car is running, the posi-
tion lamps are switched on instead of other light-
ing, if the rotating ring is moved to the position
for position lamps,
, from another position.
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is too
weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and
rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring
that the car is driven with the correct beam
pattern for the traffic situation and in accord-
ance with applicable traffic regulations.
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Dipped beam (p. 134)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Dipped beam
When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring
in the
position, dipped beam is activated
automatically in weak daylight or darkness.
Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the
position, dipped beam is activated automatically
in weak daylight or darkness, when the car's
electrical system is in ignition position II or when
the car is running.
With the stalk switch's rotating ring in
position, dipped beam is also activated automati-
cally if:
•
the front fog lamps* are activated
•
the rear fog lamp is activated
•
the front and rear fog lamps are activated
24
Daytime Running Lights
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
135
Dipped beam is always switched on when the
rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position
when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion position II or when the car is running.
Tunnel detection
The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel
and switches from daytime running lights to
dipped beam.
Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk
switch must be in
mode for tunnel detec-
tion to work.
Related information
•
Daytime running lights (p. 134)
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Activating/deactivating main beam
Main beam is activated with the stalk switch.
Active main beam is activated with the rotating
ring on the stalk switch.
Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main
beam flash position. Main beam comes on until
the stalk switch is released.
Main beam
Main beam can be activated when the steering
wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
25
or
. Activate main beam by moving
the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving
the stalk switch backwards.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the driver display.
Active main beam
Active main beam is a function which uses a
camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen
to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and
then switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
Main beam is reactivated when the camera sen-
sor no longer sees any oncoming vehicles or
vehicles ahead.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a sec-
ond after the camera sensor no longer detects
the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the
rear lights from vehicles in front.
25
When dipped beam is activated.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
136
Car with LED
26
headlamps*
If the active main beam has the on/off functional-
ity
27
then the lighting returns to main beam about
a second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
If the active main beam has adaptive functional-
ity
27
then, unlike what happens during conven-
tional dimming, the light beam continues to illu-
minate with main beam on both sides of oncom-
ing traffic or vehicles ahead - only the part of the
light beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards
oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both
sides of the vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Activate/deactivate
The function can start while driving in the dark
when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx.
12 mph) or higher.
Activate/deactivate active main beam by turning
the stalk switch's rotating ring to position
and release. If active main beam is deactivated
while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately
reset to dipped beam.
When active main beam is activated, the symbol
illuminates with a white glow in the driver
display.
When main beam is activated, the symbol shines
blue. This also applies for LED headlamps if the
main beam is partially dimmed, i.e. if the light
beam shines with slightly more than dipped
beam.
26
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
27
Depending on the car's equipment level.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
137
Manual operation
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor free from ice, snow, mist and
dirt.
Do not stick or attach anything to the wind-
screen in front of the camera sensor as this
may reduce effectiveness or cause one or
more of the systems dependent on the cam-
era to stop working.
If this symbol is shown in the driver dis-
play, together with the message
Active
High Beam Temporarily
unavailable, then switching between
main and dipped beam must be performed man-
ually. The rotating ring on the stalk switch can still
be in the
position. The symbol extin-
guishes when these message are shown.
The same applies if this symbol is
shown together with the message
Windscreen sensor Sensor
blocked, see Owner's manual.
Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable
e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain.
When active main beam becomes available again,
or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked,
the message goes out and the
symbol illu-
minates.
WARNING
Active main beam is an aid for using the opti-
mum beam pattern when conditions are
favourable.
The driver always bears responsibility for man-
ually switching between main and dipped
beam when traffic situations or weather con-
ditions so require.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching between
main and dipped beam may be required:
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
In freezing rain
•
In snow flurries or slush
•
In moonlight
•
When driving in poorly lit built-up areas
•
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside the
road
•
If there are highly reflective objects such
as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic
is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting roads
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
•
In sharp bends.
Read more about the camera sensor's limitations
in the section "Limitations for City Safety".
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
138
Active bending lights*
Active bending lights are designed to provide
maximum illumination in bends and junctions.
Cars with LED
28
headlamps* can have active
bending lights, depending on the car's equip-
ment level.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and
activated (right) respectively.
Active bending lights follow steering wheel move-
ments to provide maximum illumination in bends
and junctions and can thereby increase safety.
The function is activated automatically when the
car is started. In the event of a fault in the func-
tion, the
symbol illuminates in the driver
display at the same time as the driver display
shows an explanatory text.
The function is only active in weak daylight or
darkness and only when the car is moving and
dipped beam is switched on.
Deactivating/activating the function
The function is in activated mode when the car is
delivered from the factory and can be deacti-
vated/activated via the centre display in two
ways:
Via the function view
Press the Active Bending
Lights button.
Via settings
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Exterior Lights.
3.
Deselect/select
Active Bending Lights.
Related information
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 138)
Front fog lamps/cornering lights*
The front fog lamps have cornering lights that
shine diagonally to the side.
Button for front fog lamps.
The front fog lamps can only be switched on
when ignition position II is active or the car is
running and the rotating ring on the stalk switch
is in position
, or .
Press the on/off button. The
symbol in the
driver display illuminates when the front fog
lamps are switched on.
The front fog lamps switch off automatically when
the start knob it turned clockwise to switch off
the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is set to
the
position.
28
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
139
NOTE
Regulations on the use of fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Cornering lights
The front fog lamps include the cornering lights
function, which temporarily illuminates the area
diagonally in front of the car in the direction the
steering wheel is turned on a sharp bend, or in
the direction shown by the direction indicators.
The function is activated in weak daylight or dark-
ness when the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
the
or position and the speed of the
car is lower than approx. 30 km/h (approx.
20 mph).
In addition, both cornering lights are switched on
as a supplement to the reversing lamp during
reversing.
The function is activated when the car is supplied
from the factory and can be deactivated/acti-
vated via the centre display.
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Rear fog lamp (p. 139)
•
Active bending lights* (p. 138)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than
the normal rear lights and should only be used in
reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or
dust so that other road users have an early warn-
ing of a vehicle ahead.
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp consists of a lamp on the left-
hand side on a left-hand drive car, or on the right-
hand side on a right-hand drive car.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when:
•
ignition position II is active or the car is run-
ning and the stalk switch's rotating ring is in
position
or
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
on.
Press the on/off button. The
symbol in the
driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically
when:
•
the start knob is turned clockwise to switch
off the car or the stalk switch rotating ring is
set to the
position
•
the stalk switch's rotating ring is in position
and the front fog lamps are switched
off.
NOTE
Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary
from country to country.
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (p. 138)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
140
Brake lights
The brake light automatically comes on during
braking.
The brake light is switched on when the brake
pedal is depressed. In addition, it is switched on
when one of driver support systems Adaptive
cruise control*, City Safety or Rear Collision
Warning brakes the car.
Related information
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 427)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
Hazard warning flashers
Hazard warning flashers warn other road users
by means of all the car's direction indicators
being activated simultaneously. The function can
be used to warn in the event of traffic hazards.
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Press the button to activate the hazard warning
flashers.
The hazard warning flashers are automatically
activated when the car brakes so powerfully that
the emergency brake lights are activated and the
speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to
flash after the emergency brake lights have stop-
ped flashing and are then deactivated automati-
cally when the car drives away again or are deac-
tivated if the button is depressed.
NOTE
Regulations for the use of hazard warning
flashers may vary between countries.
Related information
•
Using direction indicators (p. 141)
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 427)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
141
Using direction indicators
The car's direction indicators are operated with
the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times or continuously, depend-
ing on how far up or down the stalk switch is
moved.
Direction indicators.
Short flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the first
position and release. The direction indicator
lamps flash three times. The function can be
activated/deactivated via the centre display.
NOTE
•
This automatic flashing sequence can be
stopped by moving the stalk switch
immediately in the opposite direction.
•
If the symbol for direction indicators in
the driver display flashes more quickly
than normal - see the message in the
driver display.
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to its end
position.
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 140)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Passenger compartment lighting
The passenger compartment lighting is acti-
vated/deactivated with the buttons in the over-
head controls above the front seats and the rear
seat/rear seats*.
All lighting in the passenger compartment can be
switched on and off manually within 7 minutes
from when:
•
the car has been switched off and its electri-
cal system is in ignition position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but it has not
been started.
Front lighting
Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and
passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Passenger compartment lighting
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
142
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Front reading lamps
The reading lamps on the right and left-hand
sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing
the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is
adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Passenger compartment lighting
The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are
switched on or off with a short press on the but-
ton in the roof console.
Auto function for passenger compartment
lighting
The automatic function is activated by a short
press on the AUTO button in the roof console.
The light indicator in the button illuminates when
the automatic function is activated. Press the
AUTO button to switch the passenger compart-
ment lighting on and off in accordance with the
following.
Passenger compartment lighting:
•
illuminates when the car is unlocked and
when it is switched off
•
extinguishes when the car is started and
when it is locked
•
comes on and goes off, respectively, when a
side door is opened or closed
•
remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side
doors is open.
Rear lighting
The rear area of the car has reading lighting,
which is also used as passenger compartment
lighting.
The reading lamps are located in the interior roof.
Reading lamps above the rear seat
29
.
Reading lamp above the rear seat in cars with panorama
roof*.
The reading lamps are switched on or off by
briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Bright-
ness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respec-
tively when the lid is opened or closed.
Vanity mirror lighting*
The lighting for the vanity mirror in the sun visor
is switched on and off respectively when the
cover is opened or closed.
Ground lighting*
The ground lighting is switched on and off when
the corresponding door is opened or closed.
29
In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
143
Lighting in the cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on and
off respectively when the tailgate is opened or
closed.
Ambient light
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting.
3. Choose between the following settings:
•
Under
Ambient Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
•
Under
Ambient Light Level, select from
Reduced and Full.
Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambient light can be adjusted
using the control in the instrument panel:
–
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
Ambience lights*
The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that
make it possible to change the colour of the light.
These lights are switched on when the car is run-
ning.
The ambience lights can be changed via the cen-
tre display:
Changing the brightness of the lights
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Under
Interior Mood Light Intensity, select
from Off, Low and High.
Changing the colour of the light
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting
Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting.
3.
Choose between
By Temperature and By
Colour in order to change the brightness
and colour of the light.
With the
By Temperature option, the
brightness of the light changes according to
the set passenger compartment temperature.
With the
By Colour option, the Theme
Colours subcategory can be used to adjust
further.
Controls located next to the steering wheel.
The intensity of the ambience light can be
adjusted using the controls in the instrument
panel:
–
Turn the thumbwheel to adjust the intensity.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
144
Lighting in storage compartments in
doors
The lighting in storage compartments in doors is
switched on when the car is running. The bright-
ness can be finely adjusted using the control in
the instrument panel.
Lighting in front cup holders in tunnel
console
The lighting in the front cup holders is switched
on when the car is unlocked and is switched off
when the car is locked. The brightness can be
finely adjusted using the control in the instrument
panel.
Related information
•
Lighting control (p. 131)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting after
the car has been locked.
To activate the function:
1. Switch off the car.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward
toward the instrument panel and release.
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
position lamps, lighting in the outside handles*
and number plate lighting are switched on.
The length of time that home safe lighting
remains on can be set via the centre display.
Related information
•
Approach light duration (p. 144)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on when the car is
unlocked and is used to switch on the car's
lighting at a distance.
When the function is activated with the remote
control key during unlocking, the position lamps,
lighting in outer handles*, number plate lighting,
interior roof lighting and floor lighting will switch
on. If a door is opened within the activation time,
the time for the lighting in the outside handles*
and the interior lighting will be extended.
The function can be deactivated/activated via the
centre display.
Related information
•
Home safe light duration (p. 144)
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
145
Using windscreen wipers
The windscreen wiper cleans the windscreen.
Different settings for the windscreen wiper are
made with the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Thumbwheel, used to set rain sensor* sensi-
tivity and wiper swipe frequency.
Single sweep
Lower the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0 to
switch off the windscreen wipers.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time unit
with the thumbwheel when intermittent
wiping is selected.
Continuous wiping
Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to
sweep at normal speed.
Raise the stalk switch further for the wip-
ers to sweep at high speed.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers - ensure that the
wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any
snow or ice on the windscreen and rear win-
dow is scraped away.
IMPORTANT
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen
must be wet when the windscreen wipers are
operating.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 145)
•
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
•
Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
•
Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
Activating/deactivating the rain
sensor
The rain sensor automatically starts the wind-
screen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitiv-
ity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the
right-hand stalk switch.
Right-hand stalk switch.
Rain sensor button
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor
symbol
is shown in the driver display.
Activating the rain sensor
When activating the rain sensor, the car must be
running or the electrical system in ignition posi-
tion I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
146
switch must be in position 0 or in the position for
a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sen-
sor button
.
Press the stalk switch down for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitiv-
ity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra
sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned
upward.
Deactivating the rain sensor
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain
sensor button
or moving the stalk switch
up to another wiper program.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in
ignition position 0 or when the engine is
switched off.
The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when
wiper blades are set in service position. The rain
sensor is reactivated when service position has
been deactivated.
IMPORTANT
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash. Deacti-
vate the rain sensor while the car is running
or when the car's electrical system is in igni-
tion position I or II. The symbol in the driver
display extinguishes.
Activating/deactivating the memory
function
The memory function for the rain sensor can be
activated in such a way that the rain sensor but-
ton does not need to be depressed each time the
car is started:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Rain Sensor Memory to activate/
deactivate the memory function.
Related information
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
•
Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
•
Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
Windscreen and headlamp washers
Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the
windscreen and headlamps. Washing/wiping is
started by means of the right-hand stalk switch.
Starting windscreen and headlamp
washers
Washing function, right-hand stalk switch.
–
Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the
steering wheel to start the windscreen and
headlamp washers.
> The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps once the stalk switch has
been released.
IMPORTANT
Avoid activating the washer system when it is
frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, other-
wise there is a risk of damaging the pump.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
147
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically in
cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from
freezing.
Headlamp washing*
To save fluid, the headlamps are washed auto-
matically at a defined interval when the head-
lamps are switched on.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains in
the reservoir and the message
Washer fluid
Level low, refill
, together with the symbol,
is shown in the driver display, then the supply of
washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off.
This is in order to prioritise cleaning the wind-
screen and the visibility through it.
Related information
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
•
Rear window wiper and washer (p. 147)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
Rear window wiper and washer
Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear
window. Washing/wiping is started and settings
are changed by means of the right-hand steering
wheel stalk switch.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with over-
heating protection which means that the
motor is switched off if it overheats. The rear
window wiper works again after a cooling-
down period.
Using the rear window wiper and
washer
Select for intermittent wiping with the
rear window wiper.
Select for continuous speed with the
rear window wiper.
–
Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk
switch forward to start rear window washing
and wiping.
Activating/deactivating wiping when
reversing
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Wipers.
3.
Select
Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deacti-
vate wiping when reversing.
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wip-
ers are on initiates rear window wiping. The func-
tion stops when reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continu-
ous speed, no change is made.
Related information
•
Using windscreen wipers (p. 145)
•
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
•
Activating/deactivating the rain sensor
(p. 145)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
148
Power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
Driver's door control panel.
Electric child safety locks* that prevent chil-
dren from being able to open the rear doors
from inside and open/close the rear win-
dows.
Controls for rear windows.
Controls for front windows.
Related information
•
Operating power windows (p. 148)
•
Child safety locks (p. 256)
Operating power windows
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors operates the power
window in the individual door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped when the windows are closed
from the driver's door.
WARNING
Check that no children or other passengers
are trapped if/when the windows are closed
using the remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember to
always switch off the power supply to the
power windows by setting the car's electrical
system in ignition position 0 and then take
the remote control key with you when leaving
the car.
WARNING
Never leave children alone in the car.
Operating
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
Using the driver's door control panel, all power
windows can be operated - using the control
panels in the other doors can only operate the
power window in the individual door. Only one
control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used, the
ignition position must be at least I. The power
windows can be operated for a few minutes after
the car has been switched off and after the igni-
tion has been switched off - although not after a
door has been opened.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
149
NOTE
One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise
when the rear windows are open is to also
open the front windows slightly.
NOTE
The windows cannot be opened at speeds
above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph),
but they can be closed.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently. The
power windows move up/down as long as the
control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs auto-
matically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key, door
handle or central locking button
To operate the power windows with the remote
control key, door handles on the outside, or from
the inside with the central locking button, see the
section "Remote control key", "Locking/unlock-
ing from the outside" or "Locking/unlocking from
the inside".
Pinch protection
Closing of the windows is stopped and the win-
dow is opened if anything prevents its movement.
It is possible to override the pinch protection
when closing has been interrupted, e.g. if ice has
formed on the window. After two successive clos-
ing interruptions the pinch protection will be over-
ridden and the automatic function deactivated for
a short while, now it is possible to close by hold-
ing the button in its raised position.
Resetting
If the starter battery is disconnected then the
function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to
raise the window to its end position and hold
it there for one second.
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
A reset must take place for pinch protection
to work.
Related information
•
Power windows (p. 148)
•
Child safety locks (p. 256)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
•
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
Adjusting the door mirrors
The door mirror positions are adjusted with the
joystick in the driver's door control panel.
Controls for door mirrors.
Adjusting
1.
Press the L button for the left-hand door mir-
ror or the R button for the right-hand door
mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3.
Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
WARNING
Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal
vision. Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
150
Memory function in power front seat*
Door mirror positions can be saved in the mem-
ory function of the power front seat.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving
in narrow spaces:
1.
Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously
(ignition position must be at least I).
2. Release them after approximately 1 second.
The mirrors automatically stop in the fully
retracted position.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and
R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automati-
cally stop in the fully extended position.
Angling the door mirror when parking
30
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking
for example.
–
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
approx. 10 seconds, or earlier by pressing the
button labelled L or R respectively.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking
30
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror is
automatically angled down so that the driver can
see the side of the road when parking for exam-
ple. When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position after
a short time.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse,
select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to
activate/deactivate and to select which
review mirror should be angled.
Automatic retraction when locking*
When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote
control key the door mirrors are automatically
retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated via the
centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Select
Fold Mirror When Locked to acti-
vate/deactivate.
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position by
an external force must be reset electrically to the
neutral position for electric retracting/extending
to work correctly:
1.
Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2.
Fold them out again with the L and R but-
tons.
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the interior rearview and door mirrors.
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this function
requires that the interior rearview mirror also has
automatic dimming, see the section "Interior rear-
view mirror".
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
apart from when gearbox reverse position is
selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
three levels and will affect the interior rearview
and the door mirrors.
30
Only in combination with power seat with memory.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
151
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
Settings for this function are set via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
•
Interior rearview mirror (p. 151)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Using the memory function in the power
front seat* (p. 121)
Interior rearview mirror
The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with
a control in the mirror's lower edge. Alternatively,
the rearview mirror dims automatically.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in the
rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dim-
ming with the dimming control when lights from
behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal mode by moving the control
towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed
by the rearview mirror. The control for manual
dimming is not available on mirrors with auto-
matic dimming.
The rearview mirror contains two sensors - one
forward facing and one rearward facing - that
work together to identify and eliminate dazzling
light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient
light, while the rearward facing sensor detects
the light from vehicle headlights behind.
NOTE
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in
the seats or in the cargo area in such a way
that light is prevented from reaching the sen-
sors, then the dimming function of the interior
rearview and door mirrors is reduced.
Automatic dimming is always active while driving,
apart from when gearbox reverse position is
selected. Dimming sensitivity can be adjusted in
three levels and will affect the interior rearview
and the door mirrors.
NOTE
When sensitivity is changed there is no imme-
diately noticeable change in dimming, but the
change will be complete after a while.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
152
Settings for this function are set via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Under
Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming,
select Normal, Dark or Light.
Related information
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
Compass*
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mir-
ror has an integrated display that shows the
compass direction in which the front of the car is
pointing.
Rearview mirror with compass.
Eight different compass directions are shown by
their English abbreviations:
N (north), NE (north
east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW
(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).
Activating/deactivating the compass
The compass is activated automatically when the
car is started.
To deactivate/activate the compass:
–
Depress the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip.
Related information
•
Calibrating the compass* (p. 153)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
153
Calibrating the compass*
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The
compass should be calibrated if the car is
moved between several magnetic zones.
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
1. Stop the car in a large open area free from
steel structures and high-voltage power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and
ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if electri-
cal equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the rear-
view mirror depressed (use a paper clip or
similar) for approx. 3 seconds. The number of
the current magnetic zone is shown.
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (
1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the com-
pass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing the
character C, or hold the button on the under-
side of the rearview mirror depressed for
approx. 6 seconds until the character C is
shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more
than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direc-
tion is shown in the display, indicating that
calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2
circles to fine-tune calibration.
7.
Cars with heated windscreen*: If the char-
acter
C is shown in the display when the
heated windscreen is activated, perform the
calibration in accordance with point 6 above
with the heated windscreen activated.
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
Related information
•
Compass* (p. 152)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
154
Panorama roof*
The panorama roof is divided into two glass sec-
tions. The front section can be opened vertically
at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizon-
tally (open position). The rear section is fixed
roof glass.
The panoramic roof has a wind deflector.
The panorama roof has a sun blind made of per-
forated fabric and located under the glass roof to
provide extra protection from factors such as
strong sunlight.
The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated
with a control located in the roof.
The control is activated when the car's electrical
system is in ignition position I or II.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts.
•
Always operate the panoramic roof with
caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
•
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panoramic roof by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
•
Never put an object or part of the body
through the panoramic roof, even if the
car's electrical system is fully discon-
nected.
IMPORTANT
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
Wind deflector
The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is
raised when the panorama roof is in the open
position.
Related information
•
Operating the panorama roof* (p. 155)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
155
Operating the panorama roof*
When operating with the control in the roof, the
panoramic roof is first opened horizontally to a
comfort position.
In ventilation position, the front glass cover in the
roof is raised at the rear.
WARNING
Children, other passengers or objects may be
trapped by the panoramic roof's moving parts.
•
Always operate the panoramic roof with
caution.
•
Do not allow children to play with the
controls.
•
Never leave children alone in the car.
•
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the panoramic roof by setting
the car's electrical system in ignition posi-
tion 0, and then take the remote control
key with you when leaving the car.
•
Never put an object or part of the body
through the panoramic roof, even if the
car's electrical system is fully discon-
nected.
IMPORTANT
•
Do not open the panoramic roof when
load carriers are fitted.
•
Do not place any heavy objects on the
panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
•
Remove ice and snow before opening the
panoramic roof.
•
Do not operate the panoramic roof if it
has frozen closed.
In order that the panoramic roof and sun blind
can be operated, the car's electrical system must
be in at least ignition position I. Turn the start
knob clockwise and then release it. The panor-
amic roof and sun blind are operated using the
control in the ceiling.
Ventilation position
Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the control upward.
Close by pressing the control forward/down-
ward.
When the ventilation position is selected the front
glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun
blind is fully closed when ventilation position is
selected, then it opens automatically approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches).
The sun blind follows automatically if the panor-
amic roof is closed from ventilation position.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
156
Operating with the control in the roof
Opening, manual
Opening, automatic
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Manual operation
1. To open the sun blind - press the control
backwards to the position for manual open-
ing. The sun blind moves towards maximum
opening position for as long as the control is
held depressed rearward.
2. Open the panorama roof - press the control
backwards a second time to the position for
manual opening. The panoramic roof first
reaches comfort position
31
. In order to open
to maximum opening position - press the
control backwards a third time.
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the manual closing position
instead.
The movement of the roof is stopped if the con-
trol is released or when the glass reaches the
comfort position or the maximum opening or
closing position. The movement is also stopped if
the control is operated again in the opposite
direction to the direction of movement in pro-
gress.
NOTE
For manual opening, the sun blind must be
fully open before the panoramic roof can be
opened. When the procedure is reversed, the
panoramic roof must be fully closed before
the sun blind can be fully closed.
Automatic operation
1. Open the sun blind to maximum position -
press the control backward to the position
for automatic opening and release.
2. To open the panorama roof, press the control
backwards a second time to the position for
automatic opening and release. The panor-
amic roof first reaches comfort position
31
. To
open to the maximum opening position -
press the control a third time backward to
the position for automatic opening and
release.
Close the roof/blind by repeating the preceding
procedure in reverse order - press the control
forward/downward to the automatic closing posi-
tion instead.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the
glass reaches the comfort position or the maxi-
mum opening or closing position. The movement
is also stopped if the control is operated again in
the opposite direction to the direction of move-
ment in progress.
The movement of the roof is not stopped when
the glass reaches the comfort position when
closing from maximum opening position.
31
Comfort position is an open position for the glass cover, where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
157
Automatic operation - rapid opening/closing
The panorama roof and sun blind can be
opened/closed simultaneously:
–
To open - press the control rearward to the
automatic operation position twice and
release.
–
To close - press the control forward/down-
ward to the automatic operation position
twice and release.
The movement of the roof is stopped when the
glass reaches the comfort position or the closing
position. When closing from maximum opening
position, the movement is not stopped at comfort
position. The movement of the blind is not stop-
ped when the roof reaches comfort position. The
movement is also stopped if the control is oper-
ated again in the opposite direction to the direc-
tion of movement in progress.
Automatic closing of the sun blind
When the car is parked in hot weather, the sun
blind closes automatically 15 minutes after the
car has been locked. This is in order to lower the
passenger compartment temperature and protect
the car upholstery from being bleached by the
sun.
The function is deactivated when the car is sup-
plied from the factory and can be activated/deac-
tivated:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
My Car Locking.
Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to
activate/deactivate.
Closing using the remote control key,
central locking button or door handles
Remote control key
–
Give a long press on the remote control key's
lock button
until the panorama roof and
sun blind start moving towards the closed
position. Then release the lock button.
Movement stops if the remote control key's lock
button is pressed again or when the roof/blind
has reached the closed position.
Central locking button
Central locking button.
When the car's electrical system is set in at least
ignition position I, the central locking button in
the driver's door or passenger door* can be used
to close the panoramic roof.
–
Give a long press on the central locking but-
ton
until the panorama roof and sun blind
start moving towards the closed position.
Then release the button.
Movement stops if the central locking button is
pressed again or when the roof/blind has
reached the closed position.
Door handle
Cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*
have a touch-sensitive recess on the outer part of
the outside door handle.
–
Place your finger against the touch-sensitive
recess on the outside of one of the door
handles until the panorama roof and sun
blind start moving towards the closed posi-
tion. Then remove your finger from door han-
dle's recess.
Movement stops if you place your finger against
the door handle recess again or once the roof/
blind has reached the closed position.
WARNING
If the panorama roof is closed with the remote
control key, the central locking button or door
handle, check that no one risks being trapped.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
158
IMPORTANT
Check that the panoramic roof is properly
closed when closing.
Pinch protection
The panorama roof has pinch protection that is
triggered if the glass cover or the sun blind is
blocked by an object during closing. In the event
of blocking, the glass cover or sun blind stops
and is then opened automatically to approx.
50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked posi-
tion (or to full ventilation position). The pinch pro-
tection is also active when the glass cover or sun
blind is opened.
If the pinch protection has deployed then it is still
possible to operate the glass cover and/or sun
blind once more in the same direction without
pinch protection, if this is done within 10 seconds
after pinch protection deployment. It is therefore
possible to override the pinch protection when
closing has been interrupted e.g. if ice has
formed around the glass cover, by continually
pressing the control forward/downward until the
glass cover and/or sun blind is closed.
Related information
•
Panorama roof* (p. 154)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
•
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
HomeLink
®
*
32
HomeLink
®
is a programmable remote control
that is integrated into the car's electrical system.
General
Button 1
Button 2
Button 3
Indicator lamp
HomeLink
®33
is a programmable remote control
that can remotely control up to three different
devices (e.g., garage door openers, alarm sys-
tems, outdoor and indoor lighting, etc.) and thus
replace their remote controls. HomeLink
®
is sup-
plied built into the interior rearview mirror. The
HomeLink
®
panel consists of three programma-
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
159
ble buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror
glass.
For more information about HomeLink
®
, visit
www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/
HomeLinkGentex or call the toll-free number
00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number
+49 6838 907 277).
WARNING
•
If HomeLink
®
is used to control a garage
door or gate, ensure that nobody is near
the door or gate while it is in motion.
•
While programming HomeLink, the
garage door or gate being programmed
may activate. For this reason, make sure
that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or
gate while programming is in progress.
•
The car should be outside the garage
while a garage door opener is being pro-
grammed.
•
Do not use HomeLink
®
for any garage
door that does not have safety stop and
safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future pro-
gramming (e.g. when changing to another car or
for use in another vehicle). It is also recom-
mended that the programming for the buttons is
deleted when the car is sold; see the section
"Programming HomeLink
®
".
Related information
•
Programming HomeLink
®
* (p. 159)
Programming HomeLink
®
*
34
Instructions for programming HomeLink
®
.
Programming HomeLink
®
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position" before
HomeLink
®
can be programmed or used.
Preferably fit new batteries in the remote con-
trol that will be replaced by HomeLink
®
for
faster programming and improved transmis-
sion of the radio signal. The HomeLink
®
but-
tons should be reset before programming,
see the heading "Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons". When the reset is complete,
HomeLink
®
is set in "learn mode" and ready
for programming.
1.
Press the button
35
on HomeLink
®
you want
to program. The indicator lamp
35
on
HomeLink
®
should flash yellow once per
second. It is not necessary to hold the button
depressed.
32
Applies to certain markets.
33
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
160
2. Aim the remote control towards the
HomeLink
®
button to be programmed and
hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches)
from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator
lamp on HomeLink
®
.
Note: The ability of some remote controls to
program HomeLink
®
is improved at a dis-
tance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12
inches). Bear this in mind if you encounter
problems during programming.
3. Press and hold the button on the original
remote control to be programmed on
HomeLink
®
and keep an eye on the indicator
lamp. Do not release the button until the
indicator lamp has switched from flashing
yellow once per second to either flashing
green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow. The button on the
remote control can be released once the
indicator lamp flashes or illuminates in green.
Note: For some receivers, programming step
3 may need to be replaced with the instruc-
tions in step 4.
4. Press and release the button on the original
remote control every other second until the
indicator lamp has changed from flashing
yellow once per second to either flashing
green 10 times per second or illuminating in
a constant green glow.
5.
Depress the programmed HomeLink
®
button
and check the indicator lamp.
>
Constant green glow: If the indicator
lamp illuminates in a constant green glow,
programming is complete. The garage
door, gate or similar should now be acti-
vated when the programmed button is
depressed.
Flashes green 10 times per second:
Depress the button being programmed,
hold it depressed for 2 seconds and
then release it. Repeat the sequence of
pressing/holding/releasing a second time
and, depending on the receiver model,
even a third time. Programming should
now be complete and the garage door,
gate or similar should now be activated
when the programmed button is
depressed.
If the receiver is still not activated:
Continue with programming steps 6-8 to
complete programming.
6.
Locate programming button
36
on the
receiver for the garage door or similar. It is
normally located near the antenna bracket on
the receiver.
7. Depress and release the receiver's program-
ming button. Step 8 must be completed
within 30 seconds of the button being
depressed.
8.
Depress the button being programmed, hold
it depressed for 2 seconds and then
release it. Repeat the sequence of press-
ing/holding/releasing a second time and,
depending on the receiver model, even a
third time. Programming is now be com-
plete and the garage door, gate or similar
should now be activated when the pro-
grammed button is depressed.
34
Applies to certain markets.
35
See section "HomeLink
®
*" for the location of buttons and indicator lamp.
36
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
* Option/accessory.
161
Operation
When HomeLink
®
is fully programmed it can be
used in place of the separate original remote
controls.
Depress the programmed button. The garage
door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated
(may take a few seconds). If the button is
depressed for more than 20 seconds then the
programming is deleted. The indicator lamp illu-
minates or flashes when the button has been
depressed. Naturally the original remote controls
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink
®
if
required.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink
®
will
work for 30 minutes after the driver's door
has been opened.
In the event of programming problems, contact
HomeLink
®
at www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink
®
buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink
®
buttons at the same time, not each button indi-
vidually. However, individual buttons can be
reprogrammed; see the section "Programming
individual buttons" below.
1.
Depress buttons 1 and 3 on HomeLink
®
and
hold them depressed until the indicator lamp
begins flashing green (about 10 seconds).
2. Release the buttons.
>
HomeLink
®
is now set to "learn mode"
and is ready to be reprogrammed; see the
section "Programming HomeLink
®
"
above.
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink
®
button,
proceed as follows:
1.
Depress the required button and do not
release.
2. After approx. 20 seconds when the indicator
lamp on HomeLink
®
starts to flash yellow,
start with step 1 from the section "Program-
ming HomeLink
®
" above.
Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is
not programmed with a new unit, it will
resume the previously saved programming.
For more information or to provide feedback
about HomeLink
®
, visit www.HomeLink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or call the
toll-free number 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the
toll number +49 6838 907 277).
Related information
•
HomeLink
®
* (p. 158)
Trip computer
The car's trip computer records and calculates
vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption
and average speed whilst driving.
In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, informa-
tion is recorded about both instantaneous and
average fuel consumption. The information from
the trip computer can be shown in the driver dis-
play.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
162
12-inch driver display*.
8-inch driver display.
The following meters are included in the trip
computer:
•
Trip meter
•
Odometer
•
Instantaneous fuel consumption
•
Distance to empty tank
•
Tourist - alternative speedometer
Trip meter
There are two trip meters, TM and TA.
TM can be reset manually and TA is reset auto-
matically if the car is not used for at least four
hours.
The following information is registered while driv-
ing:
•
Mileage
•
Driving time
•
Average speed
•
Average fuel consumption.
The values apply from the trip meter's latest
reset.
Odometer
The odometer records the car's total mileage.
This value cannot be reset to zero.
Instantaneous fuel consumption
This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the
car has at the moment. The value is updated
approximately every second.
Distance to empty tank
The trip computer calculates the remaining mile-
age with the fuel available in the tank.
The calculation is based on the average fuel con-
sumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
When the gauge shows "----", there is not
enough fuel left to be able to calculate the
remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible.
NOTE
There may be a slight deviation if the driving
style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in a
longer driving distance.
Tourist - alternative speedometer
The alternative digital speedometer makes it eas-
ier to drive in countries where speed limit signs
are in a different unit than that shown in the car's
instruments.
The digital speed is then shown in the opposite
unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer.
If the analogue speedometer is graduated in
mph, the digital speedometer shows the corres-
ponding speed in km/h and vice versa.
Related information
•
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 163)
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 164)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
163
Show trip data in the driver display
The trip computer's recorded and calculated val-
ues can be shown in the driver display.
The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via
the app menu, you can choose which information
is shown on the driver display.
Open and navigate in the app menu
37
using the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
App menu
Left/right
Up/down
Confirm
1. Open the app menu in the driver display by
pressing (1).
(It is not possible to open the app menu
while there is an unacknowledged message
in the driver display. The message must be
confirmed before the app menu can be
opened.)
2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or
right with (2).
> The top four menu rows show measured
values for trip meter TM. The next four
menu rows show measured values for trip
meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with
(3).
3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select
which information to show in the driver dis-
play:
•
Distance to empty tank
•
Odometer
•
Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no dis-
play of mileage
•
Instantaneous fuel consumption, average
consumption for TM or TA, alternatively,
no display of fuel consumption
•
Tourist (alternative speedometer).
Select or deselect an option with the O but-
ton (4). The change is made immediately.
Resetting the trip meter
–
Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e.
mileage, average consumption, average
speed and driving time) with a long press on
the RESET button on the left-hand stalk
switch.
A short press on the RESET button resets
only the mileage.
Trip meter TA only has automatic resetting. The
meter is reset if the car is not used for four hours
or more.
Change unit
Change the units for mileage, speed, etc. via the
centre display as follows:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
37
The appearance of the display may vary depending on instrument variant.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
164
2.
Press
System System Languages and
Units
Units of Measurement.
3.
Select the required unit standard:
Metric,
Imperial or US.
NOTE
In addition to in the trip computer, these units
are also changed in Volvo's navigation sys-
tem*.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 161)
•
Show trip statistics in the centre display
(p. 164)
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
Show trip statistics in the centre
display
Trip statistics from the trip computer are dis-
played graphically in the centre display and pro-
vide an overview that facilitates more fuel-effi-
cient driving.
Open the Driver performance
app in app view in order to
show the trip statistics.
Each bar in the diagram sym-
bolises a distance of 1, 10 or
100 km, alternatively miles. The
bars are filled in from the right as driving pro-
gresses. The bar on the far right shows the value
for the current distance.
The average fuel consumption and total driving
time are calculated since the last time the trip
statistics were reset.
Trip statistics from the trip computer
38
.
Settings for trip statistics
Press Preferences to
•
change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10
or 100 km/miles for the bar.
•
reset data after every trip. Performed when
the car has been stationary for more than
4 hours.
•
reset data for the current trip.
Trip statistics, calculated average consumption
and total driving time are always reset simultane-
ously.
Change unit
Change the unit for mileage, fuel consumption,
etc. via the centre display as follows:
38
The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on selected unit standard or updated software.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
165
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System System Languages and
Units
Units of Measurement.
3.
Select the required unit standard:
Metric,
Imperial or US.
Related information
•
Trip computer (p. 161)
•
Show trip data in the driver display (p. 163)
Settings in the centre display
Settings and information for many of the car's
functions can be managed in the centre display
settings menu.
Opening/closing and navigating in the
settings
Top view with button for Settings.
1. Open the top view by pressing the tab or by
dragging/swiping across the screen from the
top down.
2.
Press
Settings to open the settings menu.
3. Press one of the categories shown and navi-
gate to subcategories and respective set-
tings by pressing again.
4.
Press
Back to go back in the settings menu.
Press Close to close the settings menu.
Changing a setting
A subcategory in the settings menu with different types
of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio but-
tons).
1. Press on categories and subcategories to
navigate to the required setting.
2. Change one or more settings. Different types
of settings are changed in different ways
(see the table below for a description of each
type).
> The changes are saved immediately.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
166
Types of settings
There are several different types of settings:
Setting
type
Description
Trigger
function
Starts an app or separate view
for more advanced settings
through a press on the text, e.g.
to connect a device with
Bluetooth
®
.
Radio but-
ton
Select a setting from several
options by pressing the required
radio button, e.g. to select a sys-
tem language.
Multi-
selector
button
Select a level for something by
pressing the required part of the
button, e.g. to select a sensitivity
level for City Safety.
Checkbox Activate/deactivate a function by
pressing on the box to select/
deselect it, e.g. to select auto-
matic start of seat heating.
Slider Select a level for something
within an interval by pressing and
dragging the slider, e.g. to select
volume level.
Display of
informa-
tion
No actual setting. Shows infor-
mation about something, e.g. the
car's identification number.
Related information
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
•
Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
Categories in the settings menu
The settings menu in the centre display has a
number of main categories and subcategories
where settings and information for many of the
car's functions are collected.
There are 7 main categories under settings: My
Car, Sound, Navigation, Media,
Communication, Climate and System.
In turn, each category contains a number of sub-
categories and setting options. The tables below
show the first level of subcategories. The setting
options for a function or area are described in
more detail in the corresponding section of the
owner's manual. For system settings not descri-
bed in the corresponding section, see the section
"Changing system settings in the settings menu".
Some settings are personal, which means that
they can be saved to
Driver Profiles. Other set-
tings are global, which means they are not linked
to a driver profile. The tables below provide an
overview showing whether a category's settings
are personal, global or a mixture of both.
My Car
Subcategories Settings
Displays
Personal
IntelliSafe
Mixed
Drive Mode/Individual Drive
Mode
*
Mixed
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
167
Subcategories Settings
Lights and Lighting
Mixed
Mirrors and Easy Entry
Mixed
Locking
Mixed
Parking Brake and Suspension
Global
Wipers
Personal
Sound
Subcategories Settings
Tone
Personal
Balance
Personal
System Volumes
Mixed
Navigation
Subcategories Settings
Map
Personal
Route and Guidance
Personal
Traffic
Personal
Media
Subcategories Settings
AM/FM radio
Personal
DAB
Personal
Gracenote®
Personal
TV*
Personal
Video
Personal
Communication
Subcategories Settings
Phone
–
Text Messages
–
Android Auto*
–
Apple CarPlay*
–
Bluetooth Devices
–
Wi-Fi
Global
Car Wi-Fi Hotspot
Global
Car Modem Internet*
Global
Volvo On Call*
–
Volvo Service Networks
Global
Climate
The main category Climate has no subcatego-
ries.
System
Subcategories Settings
Driver Profile
Personal
Date and Time
–
System Languages and Units
Personal
Keyboard Layouts
Global
Voice Control*
Personal
Factory reset
–
System Information
Global
Related information
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
168
Changing system settings in the
settings menu
The
System category in the centre display set-
tings menu collects general settings and infor-
mation for car systems, such as language and
units.
The system settings under Driver Profile, Date
and Time, System Languages and Units,
Keyboard Layouts, Voice Control, Factory
reset and System Information are described in
the corresponding section of the owner's manual.
Changing system language
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to
System System Languages
and Units
.
3. Select system language. Languages that
support voice recognition have a voice recog-
nition symbol.
> The language in the driver display, centre
display and head-up display is changed.
Changing system units
Changing length and volume units
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to
System System Languages
and Units
Units of Measurement.
3. Select from the following unit standards:
•
Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees
Celsius.
•
Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees
Celsius.
•
US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahren-
heit.
> The units in the driver display, centre dis-
play and head-up display are changed.
See storage information
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to
System System
Information
Storage.
> Storage information for the car's hard disk
is shown, including total capacity, available
capacity and how much space installed
applications are using.
See the car's vehicle identification
number
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to
System System
Information
Vehicle Identification
Number
.
> The car's vehicle identification number
(VIN
39
) is shown.
Related information
•
Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
•
Clock (p. 97)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
•
System updates (p. 531)
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
•
Book service and repair (p. 528)
39
Vehicle Identification Number.
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
}}
169
Resetting settings in the settings
menu
It is possible to reset all modified settings in the
centre display settings menu to their default val-
ues at once.
Types of resets
There are two different types of resets for set-
tings in the settings menu:
•
Factory Reset - clears all data and media
and resets all settings to their default values.
•
Reset Personal Settings - clears personal
data and resets personal settings to their
default values.
Resetting settings
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Continue to
System Factory reset.
3. Select the required reset type.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Press
OK to confirm the reset.
For Reset Personal Settings, the reset
must be confirmed by pressing Reset for
the active profile or Reset for all profiles.
> Selected settings are reset.
Related information
•
Changing system settings in the settings
menu (p. 168)
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
•
Resetting user data for change of ownership
(p. 173)
Driver profiles
Many of the settings made in the car can be
adapted according to the driver's personal pref-
erences and can be saved in one or more driver
profiles.
The personal settings are automatically saved in
the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to
a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the
car is adapted to the settings of that specific
driver profile.
What settings are saved in the driver
profiles?
Many of the settings made in the car will be auto-
matically saved in the active driver profile if the
profile is not locked; see the section "Editing a
driver profile". Settings made in the car are either
personal or global. Only personal settings are
saved in driver profiles.
Settings that can be saved in a driver profile
include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors,
front seats, navigation, audio and media system,
language and voice control.
Some settings, referred to as global settings, can
be changed but are not saved to a specific driver
profile. Changes to global settings affect all pro-
files.
||
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
170
Global settings
The global settings and parameters are not
changed when changing between driver profiles.
They remain the same regardless of which driver
profile is active.
Keyboard layout settings are an example of
global settings. If driver profile X is used to add
additional languages to the keyboard, these
remain available for use even if driver profile Y is
used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved
to a specific driver profile - the settings are
global.
Personal preferences
If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre dis-
play brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by
this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X -
the brightness setting is a personal setting.
Refer to the section "Categories in the settings
menu" for more information on which settings
are personal and which are global.
Related information
•
Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
•
Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 170)
Selecting driver profile
The last used driver profile is the one selected
when the car is unlocked. It is possible to
change to another driver profile after the car has
been unlocked.
When the centre display has been started, the
selected driver profile is shown at the top of the
screen. The driver profile last used is the one that
will be active next time the car is unlocked. How-
ever, if the remote control key has been linked to
a driver profile then this is what is selected when
the car is started. See "Linking remote control
key to driver profile".
There are two options for changing to another
driver profile.
Option 1:
1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown
in the top of the centre display when the dis-
play has been started.
> A list of selectable driver profiles is shown.
2. Select the driver profile required.
3.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Option 2:
1. Drag down the top view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Profile.
> The same list as for Option 1 is shown.
3. Select the driver profile required.
4.
Press
Confirm.
> The driver profile is selected and the sys-
tem loads the settings for the new driver
profile.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
•
Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
•
Linking remote control key to driver profile
(p. 172)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
171
Editing a driver profile
It is possible to change the name of the different
driver profiles used in the car.
All types of changes to driver profiles are made
from the top view in the centre display -
Settings
System Driver Profiles.
Renaming a driver profile
Rename a driver profile starting from the Driver
Profile window:
1.
Press
Edit Profile.
> A menu opens, where the profile can be
edited.
2.
Tap in the box
Profile Name.
> A keyboard appears, and it is possible to
change the name. Tap on
to close
the keyboard.
3.
Save the name change by tapping on
Back/
Close.
> The name has now been changed.
NOTE
A profile name cannot start with a space, as
the profile name will not then be saved.
Resetting settings in the driver profiles
Settings that have been saved to one or more
driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary.
NOTE
Factory reset is only possible when the car
is stationary.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Factory Reset Reset
Personal Settings
.
3.
Select one of the options
Reset for the
active profile, Reset for all profiles or
Cancel.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Selecting driver profile (p. 170)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
172
Linking remote control key to driver
profile
It is possible to link your key to a driver profile.
The driver profile along with all of its settings will
then be automatically selected every time the car
is used with that specific remote control key.
The first time the remote control key is used, it is
not linked to any specific driver profile. When the
car is started, the
Guest profile will automatically
be activated.
A driver profile can be selected manually without
linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked,
the last active driver profile is activated. Once the
key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver
profile does not need to be selected when that
specific key is used.
Linking a remote control key to a driver
profile
First select the profile to be linked to the key, if
the profile to be linked is not already active. The
active profile can then be linked to the key.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
System Driver Profiles.
3. Select the desired profile. The display returns
to the home view. The
Guest profile cannot
be linked to a key.
4. Drag down the top view again and tap on
Settings System Driver Profiles
Edit Profile.
5.
Select
Connect key to link the profile with
the key. It is not possible to link a driver pro-
file to a different key than the one currently
being used in the car. If there are multiple
keys in the car, the message More than one
key is found, put the key you want to
connect on backup reader will be dis-
played.
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
>
When the message
Profile connected
to key is shown, the key and the driver
profile are linked.
6.
Press
OK.
> This key is now linked to the driver profile
and will remain linked as long as the
Connect key box is not unticked.
Related information
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
•
Editing a driver profile (p. 171)
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS
* Option/accessory.
173
Changing settings for apps
All of the car's apps are listed in the app view.
The app settings that relate to the car's embed-
ded functions can be changed from the centre
display's top view.
Apps for embedded functions - basic
apps
The apps installed in the car from the beginning,
e.g.
FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and
are part of the car's embedded functions. Set-
tings for these apps can be changed directly in
the top view in the centre display.
Change the settings for a basic app
1.
Tap on the app, e.g.
FM radio.
2. Drag down the top view.
3.
Press
FM Radio Settings.
4. Change settings as desired and confirm the
selections.
5. Press either the physical home button or the
virtual close button.
Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual
setting option, but not all. Refer to the section
"Categories in the settings menu" for more infor-
mation on how settings are changed.
Third party apps
Third party apps are not included in the car's sys-
tem from the beginning, but are the type that can
be downloaded e.g.
Volvo ID. Here the settings
are always made inside the app and not from the
top view.
Related information
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
Settings in the centre display (p. 165)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
•
Categories in the settings menu (p. 166)
Resetting user data for change of
ownership
In the event of a change of ownership, user data
and system settings should be restored to fac-
tory settings.
The settings in the car can be reset at different
levels. Restore all user data and system settings
to the original factory settings in the event of a
change of ownership. In the event of a change of
ownership it is also important to change the
owner of the Volvo On Call* service.
Related information
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
•
Volvo ID (p. 23)
CLIMATE CONTROL
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
176
Climate control
The car is equipped with electronic climate con-
trol. The climate control system cools or heats as
well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger
compartment.
2-zone climate
Climate zones with 2-zone climate.
With 2-zone climate, the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
tons in the centre console.
4-zone climate*
Climate zones with 4-zone climate.
With 4-zone climate the temperature in the pas-
senger compartment can be set separately for
the left and right-hand sides in both the front and
rear seat.
All climate control system functions are con-
trolled from the centre display and physical but-
tons in the centre console. The functions for the
rear seat can also be controlled from the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 177)
•
Air quality (p. 178)
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Air distribution (p. 191)
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Voice recognition control of climate control
(p. 117)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
177
Climate control - sensors
The climate control system has a number of sen-
sors to help control the climate in the car.
Sensor location
Moisture sensor - in the casing by the inte-
rior rearview mirror.
Outside temperature sensor - in the right-
hand door mirror.
Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instru-
ment panel.
Temperature sensor for the passenger com-
partment - by the physical buttons in the
centre console.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with cloth-
ing or other objects.
With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also
an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate
control system air intake.
Related information
•
Climate control (p. 176)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 177)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
Perceived temperature
The climate control system regulates the climate
in the passenger compartment based on the
perceived temperature, not on actual tempera-
ture.
The temperature you select in the passenger
compartment corresponds to the physically per-
ceived temperature as affected by factors such
as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity,
solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the
time.
The system includes a sun sensor which detects
on which side the sun is shining into the passen-
ger compartment. This means that the tempera-
ture can differ between the right and left-hand
side's air vents despite the controls being set for
the same temperature on both sides.
Related information
•
Climate control (p. 176)
•
Climate control - sensors (p. 177)
•
Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
178
Air quality
The materials selected for the passenger com-
partment and the air cleaning system ensure that
the air quality in the passenger compartment is
high.
Materials in the passenger
compartment
The interior of the passenger compartment is
designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even
for people with contact allergies and for asthma
sufferers.
Tested materials have been developed in order to
minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger
compartment and to contribute to making the
passenger compartment easier to keep clean.
The carpets in both the passenger compartment
and the cargo area are removable and easy to
remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products rec-
ommended by Volvo to clean the interior.
Air cleaning system
In addition to the passenger compartment filter,
Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air
Quality System* also help to maintain high air
quality in the passenger compartment.
Clean Zone*
The Clean Zone function checks whether or not
all conditions have been met for good air quality
in the passenger compartment.
The indicator is visible in the climate view in
the centre display.
The indicator is visible in the climate row
when the climate view is not open.
If the conditions have not been met then the
Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions
have been met, this is indicated by the text
changing colour to blue.
Conditions that are checked:
•
That all doors and the tailgate are closed.
•
That all side windows and the panorama
roof* are closed.
•
That the air quality system Interior Air Quality
System* is activated.
•
That the ventilation fan is activated.
•
That the air recirculation is deactivated.
NOTE
Clean Zone does not indicate that the air
quality is good. It only indicates that the con-
ditions for good air quality have been met.
Related information
•
Climate control (p. 176)
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 570)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
179
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment
is cleaned with a filter.
Replacing the passenger compartment
filter
To maintain high climate system performance,
the filter must be changed at regular intervals.
Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the rec-
ommended replacement intervals. If the car is
used in a severely contaminated environment, it
may be necessary to replace the filter more often.
NOTE
There are different types of passenger com-
partment filter. Make sure that the correct fil-
ter is fitted.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 178)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
•
Volvo service programme (p. 528)
Clean Zone Interior Package*
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises
a series of modifications that keep the passen-
ger compartment even clearer from allergy and
asthma-inducing substances.
The following is included:
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is unlocked with
the remote control key. The fan fills the pas-
senger compartment with fresh air. The func-
tion starts when required and is disengaged
automatically after a time or when one of the
passenger compartment doors is opened.
The amount of time the fan runs is reduced
gradually due to reduced need up until the
car is 4 years old.
•
The fully automatic air quality system Interior
Air Quality System (IAQS).
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 178)
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
•
Interior Air Quality System* (p. 179)
Interior Air Quality System*
Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully auto-
matic air quality system that separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours and
contaminants in the passenger compartment.
IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior
Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passen-
ger compartment from contaminants such as par-
ticles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-
level ozone.
If the air quality sensor senses that the outside
air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and
air recirculation is activated.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled
to ensure the best air in the passenger com-
partment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as
to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the defrost functions
for windscreen, side windows and rear win-
dow should be used.
Activating/deactivating the air quality
sensor
It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor
should be activated/deactivated.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
180
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Air Quality Sensor to activate/deac-
tivate the air quality sensor.
Related information
•
Air quality (p. 178)
•
Passenger compartment filter (p. 179)
•
Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 179)
•
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)
Climate controls
The climate control system's functions are con-
trolled from the centre display, physical buttons
in the centre console and the climate panel at
the rear of the tunnel console*.
Overview of climate controls
Climate controls in the centre display.
Defrost buttons in the centre console.
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console*.
Related information
•
Climate control (p. 176)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)
•
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
181
Climate controls in the centre
display
All climate functions can be regulated from the
climate row and the climate view in the centre
display.
Climate row
The most common climate functions can be
regulated from the climate row.
Temperature controls for driver and passen-
ger side.
Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver
and front passenger seat, as well as heated
steering wheel*.
Button for access to the climate view. The
graphic on the button shows activated cli-
mate settings.
Climate view
One tap on the centre button in the climate row
gives access to the climate view. The climate view
is divided into the tabs
Main climate, Rear
climate
* and Parking climate*. Change
between the tabs by swiping left/right or by
pressing the respective heading.
Main climate
In addition to the climate row's functions, other
main climate functions can also be controlled in
the
Main climate tab.
Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting
the windows and door mirrors.
AC - Controls for air conditioning.
Recirc - Controls for air recirculation.
Controls for air distribution.
Fan control for front seat (with 2-zone cli-
mate, the control is shared with the rear
seat).
AUTO - Auto regulating the climate.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
182
Rear climate control*
All climate functions for the rear seat can be
regulated in the
Rear climate tab.
2nd row climate - Controls for climate func-
tionality in the rear seat. Fan controls for rear
seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Parking climate*
The car's parking climate control can be regula-
ted in the
Parking climate tab.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
•
Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 184)
•
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)
•
Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
•
Regulating the fan level (p. 187)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
•
Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)
•
Activating/deactivating ventilation of the
seats* (p. 198)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of steering
wheel* (p. 199)
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
Climate controls at the rear of the
tunnel console*
The rear seat's climate functions are controlled
from the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel
console.
Controls for heated rear seat*.
Fan controls for rear seat.
Temperature controls for rear seat.
Locking/unlocking button on the climate
panel.
If the car is not equipped with a climate panel at
the rear of the tunnel console, but has heated
rear seats*, there are physical buttons at the rear
of the tunnel console for controlling these.
The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent
unintentional change of fan speed and tempera-
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
183
ture. When the screen is locked, only the seat
controls* and the unlocking button are shown.
After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature
can be changed via the climate panel and all
selected climate settings are shown. The screen
locks automatically after a period of inactivity.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Activating/deactivating heating of the seats*
(p. 197)
•
Regulating the fan level (p. 187)
•
Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
Auto-regulating the climate
With auto climate control activated, multiple cli-
mate functions are controlled automatically.
Auto-regulation button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Give a short or long press on
AUTO.
•
Short press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically.
•
Long press - air recirculation, air condi-
tioning and air distribution are controlled
automatically, temperature and fan level
are changed to standard settings: 22
°C/72 °F and level
3 (level 2 in the rear
seat
1
).
> Auto-regulation of the climate is activated
and the button illuminates.
NOTE
Temperature and fan speed can be changed
without deactivating the automatically-regula-
ted climate control system. The automatically-
regulated climate control system is deacti-
vated when the air distribution is changed
manually or when maximum defroster is acti-
vated.
Related information
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Activating/deactivating air conditioning
(p. 184)
1
For cars with 4-zone climate*.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
184
•
Activating/deactivating air recirculation
(p. 191)
•
Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
•
Regulating the temperature (p. 185)
•
Regulating the fan level (p. 187)
Activating/deactivating air
conditioning
The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies
incoming air as required.
Activating/deactivating the main air
conditioning
The air conditioning button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
AC.
> The air conditioning is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
When the air conditioning is activated, the
climate control system automatically con-
trols starting and switching off as
required.
NOTE
Close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* for air conditioning to work optimally.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate the air condition-
ing when the fan control is in
Off position.
Related information
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
185
Regulating the temperature
The temperature can be set separately for the
left and right-hand sides. With 4-zone climate*
the temperature can also be set separately for
the front and rear seats.
Regulating temperature for front seat
2
Temperature buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button in the centre display's climate row to
open the controls.
Temperature control.
2. Regulate the temperature by either of the
following:
•
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture, or
•
press
+/− to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
Synchronising the temperature
Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature
controls.
1. Press the driver's side temperature button in
the centre display's climate row in order to
open the controls.
2.
Press
Synchronise temperature.
> The temperature for all zones in the car is
synchronised with the temperature set for
the driver's side and the synchronisation
symbol is shown adjacent to the tempera-
ture button.
Synchronisation is stopped by a further press on
Synchronise temperature or by changing the
passenger side or rear seat* temperature set-
tings.
2
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
186
Regulating temperature for rear seat*
From the front seat
Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2. Press the left or right-hand side temperature
button to open the control.
Temperature control.
3. Regulate the temperature by means of the
following:
•
drag the control to the desired tempera-
ture
•
press
+/− to raise/lower the temperature
gradually.
> The temperature changes and the button
shows the set temperature.
From the rear seat
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel
console climate panel to access the controls.
Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of
the tunnel console.
2.
Press the left or right-hand side
</> buttons
on the tunnel console's climate panel in
order to lower/raise the temperature gradu-
ally.
> The temperature changes and the screen
in the climate panel shows the set tem-
perature.
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher or lower temperature than
the actual desired temperature.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
187
•
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
•
Perceived temperature (p. 177)
Regulating the fan level
The fan can be set to five different automatic fan
levels as well as
Off and Max. With 4-zone cli-
mate* the fan level can be set separately for the
front and rear seats.
Regulating fan level for front seat
3
Fan control buttons in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
Off, 1-5 or Max.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
IMPORTANT
If the fan is fully switched off then the air con-
ditioning is not engaged, which results in a
risk of misting on the insides of the windows.
Regulating fan level for rear seat*
From the front seat
The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the
climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
1-5.
The rear seat's fan level can be switched off
by tapping on
2nd row climate.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
3
For 2-zone climate, also rear seat.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
188
From the rear seat
1. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel
console climate panel to access the controls.
Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tun-
nel console.
2.
Tap on the desired fan level,
1-5.
> Fan level is changed and the buttons for
the selected level illuminate.
NOTE
The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if
the fan level for the front seat is in position
Off.
The rear seat fan speed can only be switched
off from the climate view in the centre display.
NOTE
The climate control system automatically
adjusts the air flow within the selected fan
level based on requirements. This means that
the fan speed may change even though the
fan level is the same.
Related information
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Climate controls at the rear of the tunnel
console* (p. 182)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
Activating/deactivating defrost of
windows and door mirrors
The three functions max defroster, heated wind-
screen*, and heated rear window and door mir-
rors are used to quickly remove misting and ice
from the windows and door mirrors.
From physical buttons in the centre
console
The centre console contains physical buttons for
quick access to the defrost functions.
With heated windscreen* the max defroster can
only be activated individually from the climate
view in the centre display.
Physical buttons in the centre console.
Button for heated windscreen* and max
defroster.
Button for heated rear window and door mir-
rors.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
189
Cars without heated windscreen:
–
Press the button (1).
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Cars with heated windscreen:
–
Press the button (1) repeatedly in order to
switch between the three levels:
•
Activated heated windscreen
•
Activated heated windscreen and max
defroster
•
Deactivated.
> Heated windscreen and max defroster are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
NOTE
Max defroster starts with a certain delay in
order to avoid a short increase in fan level if
the heated windscreen is deactivated by two
quick presses of the button.
Rear window and door mirror defrosters:
–
Press the button (2).
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
From the climate view in the centre
display
Activating/deactivating max defroster
Max defroster button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Max.
> Max defroster is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation
of the climate and air recirculation, acti-
vates air conditioning and changes the
fan level to
5 and the temperature to HI.
When max defroster is deactivated, the
climate control system returns to the pre-
vious settings.
NOTE
Changing the fan level to 5 increases the
noise level.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
190
Activating/deactivating heated windscreen*
The button for heated windscreen in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Electric.
> Heated windscreen is activated/deacti-
vated and the button illuminates/extin-
guishes.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
NOTE
The heated windscreen may affect the per-
formance of transponders and other commu-
nication equipment.
NOTE
If the heated windscreen is activated when
the Start/Stop function has auto-stopped the
engine then the engine will be restarted.
Activating/deactivating heated rear window
and door mirrors
The button for heated rear window and door mirrors in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Rear.
> Heated rear window and door mirrors are
activated/deactivated and the button illu-
minates/extinguishes.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of heated windows
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated windscreen* and heated rear window and
door mirrors should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start when there is a risk of
ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The
heating switches off automatically when the
windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the
ice or misting is gone.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Auto Front Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated wind-
screen.
Select
Auto Rear Defroster to activate/
deactivate automatic start of heated rear
window and door mirrors.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
191
Activating/deactivating air
recirculation
Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust
gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate
control system reusing the air in the passenger
compartment.
The air recirculation button in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Press
Recirc.
> Air recirculation is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car is recirculated for too long
then there is a risk of misting on the insides
of the windows.
NOTE
It is not possible to activate air recirculation
when max defroster is activated.
Activating/deactivating the timer for air
recirculation
It is possible set whether the air recirculation
timer should be activated/deactivated. When the
timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically
switched off after 20 minutes.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Recirculation Timer to activate/
deactivate the air recirculation timer.
Related information
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
Air distribution
The climate control system distributes the
incoming air via a number of different vents in
the passenger compartment.
Overview of air distribution
Air distribution in the passenger compartment with 4-
zone climate.
Automatic and manual air distribution
With auto-regulated climate running the air distri-
bution takes place automatically. If necessary, the
air distribution can be controlled manually.
Adjustable air vents
There are 6 or 8* adjustable air vents in the pas-
senger compartment depending on the number
of climate zones.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
192
Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger com-
partment.
With 2-zone climate - four on the instrument
panel and one on each of the door pillars
between the front and rear doors.
Addition with 4-zone climate* - two at the
rear of the tunnel console.
Related information
•
Climate control (p. 176)
•
Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
•
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 193)
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 195)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
Changing the air distribution
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required.
The air distribution buttons in the climate view.
Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents
Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel
and centre console
Air distribution - air vents in the floor
1.
Open the climate view in the centre display.
2. Press one or more of the air distribution but-
tons in order to open/close the correspond-
ing air flow.
> The air distribution is changed and the
buttons illuminate/extinguish.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 191)
•
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 193)
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 195)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Auto-regulating the climate (p. 183)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
193
Opening/closing and aiming the air
vents
Some air vents in the passenger compartment
can be opened, closed and aimed individually.
If the door pillar vents and instrument panel outer
vents are aimed toward the side windows, then
misting can be removed.
If the door pillar vents are aimed inwards then, in
a hot climate, a comfortable environment is
obtained in the passenger compartment.
Opening/closing the air vents
Air vents for the front seat:
Air vent knob
4
.
–
Turn the knob in order to open/close the air
flow from the vent.
The air flow is at maximum when the marking
on the knob is in vertical position.
Air vents for the rear seat:
The air vent's thumbwheel
4
.
–
Roll the thumbwheel in order to open/close
the air flow from the nozzle.
The longer the white lines on the thumb-
wheel that are visible, the higher the air flow.
4
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
194
Aiming the air vents
The air vent's lever
4
.
–
Move the lever sideways/vertically in order to
aim the air flow from the nozzle.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 191)
•
Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
•
Table of air distribution options (p. 195)
4
The illustration is schematic - nozzle design varies depending on location.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
195
Table of air distribution options
The air distribution can be changed manually if
required. The following options are available for
setting.
Air distribution Purpose
If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control.
Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate
(to achieve this, fan level must not be low).
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from
other air vents.
Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate.
Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air
vents.
Provides heat or cooling to the floor.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
196
Air distribution Purpose
Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel.
Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates.
Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air
flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or
humid climate.
Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the
floor. Some air flows from other air vents.
Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor
temperatures.
Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument
panel and air vents at the floor.
Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment.
Related information
•
Air distribution (p. 191)
•
Changing the air distribution (p. 192)
•
Opening/closing and aiming the air vents
(p. 193)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
197
Activating/deactivating heating of
the seats*
The seats can be heated in order to increase
comfort for driver and passengers when it is
cold.
Activating/deactivating heating of the
front seat*
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with ventilated
seats or heated steering wheel, the button
for heated seats is immediately available in
the climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Activating/deactivating heating of the
rear seat*
From the front seat*
Buttons for heated seats in the group Rear climate in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display
and select the tab for
Rear climate.
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats
in order to change between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
From the rear seat
With 2-zone climate:
Buttons for heated seats at the rear of the tunnel con-
sole.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's physical buttons for heated seats at
the rear of the tunnel console to switch
between the four levels:
Off, High, Medium
and Low.
> The level changes and the LEDs in the
button show the set level.
With 4-zone climate*:
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
198
Seat heating indication and controls on the climate
panel at the rear of the tunnel console.
–
Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand
side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel
console's climate panel to switch between
the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the screen in the
climate panel shows the set level.
WARNING
Heated seats must not be used by people
who find it difficult to perceive an increase in
temperature due to a lack of sensation or who
otherwise have problems operating the con-
trols for the heated seats. Otherwise they may
suffer burn injuries.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of heated seats
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated seats should be activated/deactivated
when the engine is started. With automatic start
activated, heating will start in the event of low
ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Under
Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and
Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level,
select Off, Low, Medium or High in order to
activate/deactivate the automatic starting of
the heating for the driver and passenger
seats and to select the level.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
Activating/deactivating ventilation of
the seats*
The seats can be ventilated to provide increased
comfort in a hot climate, for example.
The ventilation system consists of fans in the
seats and backrests that draw air through the
seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the
cooler the passenger compartment air becomes.
The system can be activated when the engine is
running.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
199
Activating/deactivating ventilation of
the front seat*
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering
wheel and seat button in the climate row in
the centre display in order to open the con-
trols for seat and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or heated steering wheel, the button for ven-
tilated seats is immediately available in the
climate row.
2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated
seats in order to change between the four
levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel*
The steering wheel can be heated in order to
increase comfort for the driver when it is cold.
Activating/deactivating heating of
steering wheel
Steering wheel and seat buttons in the climate row.
1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and
seat button in the climate row of the centre
display in order to open the controls for seat
and steering wheel.
If the car is not equipped with heated seats
or ventilated seats, the button for heated
steering wheel is immediately available in the
climate row.
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
200
2. Repeatedly press the button for heated
steering wheel in order to change between
the four levels:
Off, High, Medium and Low.
> The level changes and the button shows
the set level.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
of heated steering wheel
It is possible to set whether automatic start of
heated steering wheel should be activated/deac-
tivated when the engine is started. With auto-
matic start activated, heating will start in the
event of low ambient temperature.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Under
Auto Steering Wheel Heating
Level, select Off,Low,Medium or High in
order to activate/deactivate the automatic
starting of steering wheel heating and to
select the level.
Related information
•
Climate controls (p. 180)
•
Climate controls in the centre display
(p. 181)
•
Steering wheel (p. 129)
Parking climate*
The climate of the car's passenger compartment
can be preconditioned or maintained while the
car is parked.
Preconditioning and climate comfort retention are con-
trolled from the Parking climate tab in the centre dis-
play's climate view.
Preconditioning
Preconditioning of the car before driving can
reduce wear and energy needs during a journey.
Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via
the timer.
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
•
The parking heater*, in a cold climate, warms
up both the passenger compartment and the
engine.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort
temperature and not the temperature set in
the climate control system.
Climate comfort retention
The climate in the car's passenger compartment
can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if
the engine needs to be switched off but the
driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car
and maintain the level of climate comfort.
Starting climate comfort retention is only possible
via direct start.
CLIMATE CONTROL
}}
* Option/accessory.
201
The function utilises several systems in different
cases:
•
Residual heat from the engine, in a cold cli-
mate, heats the passenger compartment to
comfort temperature.
•
When it is warm, the ventilation cools the
passenger compartment by blowing in air
from outside the car.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
•
Climate control (p. 176)
•
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
•
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
•
Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 204)
•
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 206)
•
Heater* (p. 207)
•
Parking heater* (p. 208)
Starting/stopping preconditioning*
Preconditioning warms the passenger compart-
ment and engine or airs the passenger compart-
ment before driving. The function can use direct
start from the centre display or a mobile phone.
Starting/stopping from the centre
display
Preconditioning button in the Parking climate tab in
the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Preconditioning.
> Preconditioning is started/switched off
and the button is illuminated/extin-
guished.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the pas-
senger compartment.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Starting from the app*
Start of preconditioning and information about
the selected settings can be managed from a
device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Precondi-
tioning heats the passenger compartment to a
comfortable temperature or ventilates the pas-
||
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
202
senger compartment by blowing in air from out-
side.
The passenger compartment can also be precon-
ditioned with the car remote start function
(Engine Remote Start - ERS)
5
via the Volvo On
Call* app.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
•
Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 204)
•
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 206)
•
Heater* (p. 207)
Timer for preconditioning*
The timer can be set so that the preconditioning
is finished at a predetermined time.
The timer can handle up to 8 different settings
for:
•
A time on a single date
•
A time on one or more days of the week, with
or without repetition.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Setting the timer for preconditioning*
(p. 202)
•
Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
ditioning* (p. 204)
•
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
•
Symbols and messages for parking climate
control* (p. 206)
Setting the timer for
preconditioning*
The timer for preconditioning can manage up to
8 time settings.
Adding a time setting
The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate
tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
5
Certain markets.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
203
3.
Press
Add timer.
> A pop-up window is shown.
NOTE
It is not possible to add a time setting if there
already are 8 settings entered for the timer.
Delete a time setting in order to be able to
add a new one.
4.
Tap on
Date to set the time for a single date.
Tap on Days to set the time for one or more
days of the week.
With
Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by
ticking/unticking the box for Repeat
weekly.
5.
With
Date: Select the date for precondition-
ing by scrolling the date list with the arrows.
With
Days: Select the days of the week for
preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for
the days of the week.
6. Set the time when the preconditioning
should be finished by scrolling with the
arrows.
7.
Tap on
Confirm in order to add the time set-
ting.
> The time setting is added to the list and is
activated.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Editing a time setting
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Press the time setting that is to be changed.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4. Edit the time setting in the same way as
described in "Adding a time setting" above.
Deleting a time setting
The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting
in the tab Parking climate in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Edit list.
4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list.
>
The icon changes to the text
Delete.
5.
Press
Delete to confirm.
> The time setting is removed from the list.
Related information
•
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
•
Activating/deactivating the timer for precon-
ditioning* (p. 204)
•
Heater* (p. 207)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
204
Activating/deactivating the timer for
preconditioning*
A time setting in the timer for preconditioning
can be activated or deactivated based on need.
The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the cli-
mate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping
on the timer button to the right of the setting.
> The time setting is activated/deactivated
and the button illuminates/extinguishes.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
Related information
•
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
•
Setting the timer for preconditioning*
(p. 202)
•
Heater* (p. 207)
Starting/switching off climate
comfort retention*
Climate comfort retention maintains the climate
in the passenger compartment after driving. The
function can use direct start from the centre dis-
play.
Button for climate comfort retention in the Parking
climate tab in the climate view.
1. Open the climate view in the centre display.
2.
Select the
Parking climate tab.
3.
Press
Keep climate comfort.
> Climate comfort retention is started/
switched off and the button illuminates/
extinguishes.
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
205
NOTE
It is not possible to start climate comfort
retention if there is not enough residual heat
in the engine to maintain the passenger com-
partment climate, or if the outside tempera-
ture is above approx. 20 °C.
NOTE
Climate comfort retention is switched off
when the car is locked from the outside to
avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use
of the function is intended to maintain climate
comfort when driver or passengers remain
inside the car.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
206
Symbols and messages for parking
climate control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
parking climate control can be shown in the
driver display.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
Symbol Message Specification
Parking climate
Service required
Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshop
A
to check the function as soon as possible.
Parking climate
Temporarily unavailable
Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a work-
shop
A
to check the function.
Parking climate
Unavailable Fuel level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater*. Fill-
ing the vehicle's normal fuel tank.
Parking climate
Unavailable Charge level too low
Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the starter battery is too low to start the
parking heater*. Charging the battery.
A
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Starting/stopping preconditioning* (p. 201)
•
Starting/switching off climate comfort reten-
tion* (p. 204)
•
Timer for preconditioning* (p. 202)
•
Heater* (p. 207)
•
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
207
Heater*
The heater helps the engine and passenger
compartment reach the correct temperature
before and during driving.
The heater has two subfunctions:
•
Parking heater - heats the engine and pas-
senger compartment, if necessary, when the
parking climate control's preconditioning* is
activated.
•
Additional heater - heats the passenger
compartment and engine, if necessary, dur-
ing driving.
The heater is fuel-driven and is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
Battery and charging
The heater is powered by the car's starter battery.
If the charge level of the starter battery is too low,
then the heater is switched off automatically and
the driver display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
battery if the heater needs to be used.
Fuel and refuelling
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel
tank.
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the
car should point downhill to ensure that there is a
supply of fuel to the heater.
If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the
heater is switched off automatically and the driver
display shows a message.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the heater needs to be
used.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch
off the fuel-driven heater before starting to
refuel.
Check in the driver display that the
heater is switched off. This symbol
is lit when it is working as a parking
heater.
Related information
•
Parking heater* (p. 208)
•
Additional heater* (p. 209)
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
208
Parking heater*
The parking heater heats the passenger com-
partment as necessary before driving if the car's
preconditioning is activated.
The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of
the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front
right-hand wheel housing.
This symbol illuminates in the driver
display when the parking heater is
active.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
The parking heater starts automatically if the
parking climate's preconditioning* is activated
and the passenger compartment needs to be
heated up.
It is switched off automatically when the right
temperature, the time of a set timer or the heat-
er's maximum running time has been reached.
The heater's maximum running time is
40 minutes.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the parking heater needs
to be used.
Make sure that there is enough charge in the
starter battery if the parking heater needs to
be used.
IMPORTANT
Repeated use of the parking heater combined
with short journeys may discharge the battery
and impair starting.
If the heater is used on a regular basis, then
the car should be driven for the same amount
of time that the heater is used in order to
ensure that the car's battery is recharged with
the same amount of energy as consumed by
the parking heater. The parking heater is used
for a maximum of 40 minutes each time.
WARNING
Do not use preconditioning if the car is equip-
ped with a heater*:
•
In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust
gases are emitted if the heater starts.
•
In locations with combustible or flamma-
ble material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass,
sawdust, etc. may ignite.
•
When there is a risk that the heater’s
exhaust line may be blocked. For exam-
ple, deep snow inside the front right-hand
wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s
ventilation.
Remember that the preconditioning can be
started by a timer that has been set for a long
time in advance.
WARNING
If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of
smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds com-
ing from the parking heater, switch off the
heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo
recommends that an authorised Volvo work-
shop should be contacted for repair.
Related information
•
Heater* (p. 207)
•
Additional heater* (p. 209)
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 556)
CLIMATE CONTROL
* Option/accessory.
209
Additional heater*
The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger
compartment and engine while driving.
The additional heater is one of two subfunctions
of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the
front right-hand wheel housing.
NOTE
When the heater is running, smoke may be
emitted from the right-hand front wheel hous-
ing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking
sound from the fuel pump may also be heard
from the rear section of the car. This is per-
fectly normal.
The additional heater starts and is controlled
automatically when heating is required while the
car is being driven.
It switches off automatically when the car is
switched off.
NOTE
Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's
normal fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs
to be used.
Activating/deactivating automatic start
for the additional heater
It is possible to set whether automatic start for
the additional heater should be activated/deacti-
vated.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view in the centre
display.
2.
Press
Climate.
3.
Select
Additional Heater to activate/deac-
tivate automatic start of the additional heater.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the automatic start
for the additional heater should be switched
off for short driving distances.
Related information
•
Heater* (p. 207)
•
Parking heater* (p. 208)
LOADING AND STORAGE
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
212
Passenger compartment interior
Overview of the passenger compartment's inte-
rior and storage locations.
Front seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, glovebox and
sun visor.
Storage spaces with cup holder, electrical socket and
USB port in the tunnel console.
Rear seat
Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in
the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front
seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel
console, as well as storage compartment under the seat.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile phones,
cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc.
in the glove compartment or other compart-
ments. Otherwise they may injure people in
the car in the event of sudden braking or a
collision.
Related information
•
Tunnel console (p. 212)
•
Using the glovebox (p. 218)
•
Sun visors (p. 219)
•
Electrical sockets (p. 214)
Tunnel console
The tunnel console is located between the front
seats.
Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch
is opened/closed with a push on the handle.
Storage compartment with cup holder for
driver and passenger as well as 12V socket.
Storage compartment and USB port under
the armrest.
Climate controls for the rear seat climate
functions* or storage compartment.
NOTE
One of the detectors for the alarm* is located
under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid
leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in
the cup holder, since this may trigger the
alarm.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
214
Electrical sockets
In the tunnel console there are two 12 V electri-
cal sockets and one 230 V electrical socket*, in
the cargo area there is one 12 V electrical
socket*.
For the sockets to supply current, the car's elec-
trical system must be set in the lowest ignition
position I. The sockets are then active as long as
the starter battery level does not become too low.
If the engine is switched off and the car is locked,
the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is
switched off and the car is not locked, or is
locked with blocked lock position temporarily
deactivated, then the sockets continue to be
active for a further ten minutes.
NOTE
Remember that use of the electrical socket
with the engine switched off entails a risk of
discharging the starter battery, which can limit
functionality.
Accessories that are connected to the electri-
cal sockets may be activated even when the
car's electrical system is disconnected or if
preconditioning is used. For this reason, dis-
connect the connectors when they are not in
use in order to avoid the starter battery being
discharged.
Electrical socket in the tunnel console -
rear seat*
Electrical socket in the tunnel console, rear seat.
The socket can be used for various accessories
requiring a 230 V supply, e.g. chargers and lap-
top computers.
Using the socket
1. Pull down the socket cover and insert the
accessory's plug.
>
The LED
1
lamp on the socket indicates
the status.
2. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a
steady green light - only then is current avail-
able at the socket.
3. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the
plug - do not pull on the cable.
Pull up the cover when the socket is not
being used or the socket is left unattended.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 150 W.
IMPORTANT
•
Do not use accessories with large or
heavy connectors - they can damage the
socket or come loose when driving.
•
Do not use accessories that can cause
interference to the car's radio receiver or
electrical system for example.
•
Position the accessory so that it is not at
risk of injuring the driver or passengers in
the event of heavy braking or collision.
•
Keep an eye on connected accessories
as they can generate heat that can burn
passengers or the interior.
WARNING
•
Only use accessories that are undam-
aged and fault-free. The accessories
must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with
connectors designed for the socket. The
1
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
215
accessories must have a CE marking, UL
marking or an equivalent safety marking.
•
Never allow sockets, connectors or
accessories to come into contact with
water or other liquids. Do not touch or
use the socket if it appears to be dam-
aged or has come into contact with water
or other liquid.
•
Do not connect junction sockets, adapt-
ers or extension cables to the socket as
these can override the socket's safety
features.
•
The socket is equipped with a protective
cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or
damages the socket preventing the cover
from doing its job. Do not leave children
in the car unsupervised when the socket
is active.
Failure to follow the advice given above can
lead to severe or fatal electric shocks.
Status indication
An LED
2
lamp on the socket indicates the status
of the socket:
Status indication Reason Action
Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None.
2
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
216
Status indication Reason Action
Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for
example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compart-
ment is too warm).
Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool
down before reinserting the plug.
The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continu-
ously) or is defective.
None. The accessory cannot be connected to the
socket.
Extinguished lamp The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the
socket.
The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest igni-
tion position I.
The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery.
If the problem persists, contact a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the 230 V electrical
socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an
authorised Volvo workshop should be contac-
ted.
12 V electrical socket
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat.
12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
217
12 V electrical socket in cargo area*.
The sockets can be used for various accessories
designed for 12 V, such as music players, cooler
boxes and mobile phones.
IMPORTANT
Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per
socket.
Using the sockets
1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console)
or fold down the cover (cargo area) and plug
in the accessory.
2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit
the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up
the cover (cargo area) when the socket is
not being used or if the socket is left unat-
tended.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
218
Using the glovebox
The glovebox is located on the passenger side.
The printed owner's manual and maps can be
kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also a
pen holder on the inside of the lid. There is also a
card holder at the upper edge of the glovebox.
Locking/unlocking the glovebox*
The glovebox can be locked, e.g. when the car is
taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The
glovebox can only be locked/unlocked with the
accompanying key.
The key's designated storage space
Locking the glovebox:
Insert the key in the glovebox lock cylinder.
Turn the key 90 degrees clockwise.
Pull out the key.
–
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse order.
Using the glovebox as a cooled area*
The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g.
drinks or food. The cooling works when the cli-
mate control system is active (i.e. when the car is
set in ignition position II or when the engine is
running).
Cooling activated
Cooling deactivated
–
Activate/deactivate the cooling by moving
the control to the end position toward the
passenger compartment/glovebox.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
•
Using private locking (p. 244)
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
* Option/accessory.
219
Sun visors
The rear of each sun visor includes a vanity mir-
ror with card holder.
Vanity mirror with lighting plus card holder.
The vanity mirror lighting* is switched on auto-
matically when the lid is lifted.
The vanity mirror frame incorporates a holder for
e.g. cards or tickets.
Related information
•
Passenger compartment interior (p. 212)
Cargo area
The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it
possible to transport and secure large objects.
By folding down the backrests in the rear seat,
the cargo area can become quite spacious. To
facilitate loading and unloading, the rear section
of the car can be lowered with the level control
function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag hold-
ers to secure the load, and the extendable cargo
cover* to conceal the load if desired.
The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit or
spare wheel* are stored under the cargo area
floor.
Related information
•
Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 222)
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 126)
•
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423)
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
Recommendations for loading
There are a number of things to remember when
loading the car.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories reduces the car's payload by a cor-
responding weight.
WARNING
The car’s driving properties change depend-
ing on the weight and positioning of the load.
Loading in the cargo area
•
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
•
Centre the load.
•
Heavy objects should be placed as low as
possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on low-
ered backrests.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets
with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds)
can, in a frontal collision at a speed of
50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an
item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds).
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
220
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable cur-
tain in the headlining may be compromised or
eliminated by high loads.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy braking
the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to
the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking
brake when loading/unloading long items.
Otherwise you may accidentally knock the
gear lever or gear selector with the load into a
drive position - and the car could then move
off.
Increasing the space in the cargo area
To expand the cargo area and simplify loading,
the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note
that objects must not prevent the function of the
WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the
rear seat's backrests is folded down.
A through-load hatch in the rear seat can be
folded down for carrying long and narrow loads.
Level control of the car's rear section*
The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in
order to create a better working height for the
car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall
be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*.
Level control is performed via a control at the
rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's
side panel.
Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section.
The control consists of two buttons - one button
that lowers and one button that raises the rear
section of the car. For raising or lowering, each
button must be held depressed until the rear sec-
tion has reached the desired level.
It is not possible to raise the car's rear section
higher than its normal level.
During driving, the rear section height will return
to the normal level.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the height of the
rear section when one or more of the doors
or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to
the tailgate.
WARNING
Pay attention to ensure that there is no per-
son, animal or object under the car when low-
ering. This would involve danger to life and
damage to the car or object.
Roof load and loading on load carriers
For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers
3
that Volvo have developed are recommended.
This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in
order to achieve the maximum possible safety
during a journey.
Carefully follow the installation instructions sup-
plied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers and
load are properly secured. Lash the load
securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load carri-
ers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.
3
Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
221
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind, and
therefore fuel consumption, increase with the
size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy
braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving charac-
teristics are altered by roof loads.
Read about maximum permitted roof load in
the section on Weights.
Related information
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
•
Through-load hatch in the rear seat (p. 222)
•
Lowering the backrests in the rear seat
(p. 126)
•
Safety grille* (p. 226)
•
Safety net* (p. 224)
•
Cargo cover* (p. 222)
•
Weights (p. 581)
Load retaining eyelets
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which pro-
trude may cause injury under violent braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects with a
seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
Related information
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Bag hooks (p. 221)
•
Safety grille* (p. 226)
•
Safety net* (p. 224)
•
Cargo cover* (p. 222)
Bag hooks
Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and pre-
vent them from overturning and spreading their
contents across the cargo area.
Along the sides
There is a bag hook in the side panel on each
side of the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The bag hooks may be loaded with a maxi-
mum of 5 kg (11 lbs).
Related information
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Safety grille* (p. 226)
•
Safety net* (p. 224)
•
Cargo cover* (p. 222)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
222
Through-load hatch in the rear seat
The hatch in the rear seat's backrest can be
opened to transport long narrow items, e.g. skis.
1. In the cargo area, grip the hatch's handle and
fold down the hatch.
2. Fold forward the armrest in the rear seat.
If the private locking* function is used then the
hatch must be closed.
Related information
•
Using private locking (p. 244)
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
Cargo cover*
In the extended position, the cargo cover and
the rear panel prevent visual access to the cargo
area.
Installation
Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in
the recess in the side panel in the cargo
area.
Then insert the other end piece in the recess
in the side panel on the opposite side.
Ensure that the front panel is pointing down
behind the backrests before the cassette is
put in place.
Press down the end pieces on both sides -
one by one.
> When a "click" is heard and the red mark-
ing on each end piece has disappeared,
the cargo cover is attached - check that it
is affixed securely.
Usage
There are two extended positions for the cargo
cover - a full-cover position and a loading posi-
tion, where it is partially extended to make it eas-
ier to reach further into the cargo area.
LOADING AND STORAGE
}}
223
Full-cover position
Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out
to the end position.
Hook the attachment pins into the recesses
at the cargo area's rear pillars.
> The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover
position.
Cargo cover in full-cover position.
The rear panel fitted to the inside of the tailgate comple-
ments the cargo cover.
Loading mode
From the full-cover position:
–
Press the cargo cover's handle section
upwards slightly.
> The cover goes up until it stops in the
loading position.
Returning to full-cover position from loading posi-
tion:
1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover
down to the end position. To facilitate, angle
up the handle slightly so that the attachment
pins pass the stops.
2. Release the handle so that the attachment
pins engage.
> The cover is locked in the full-cover posi-
tion.
IMPORTANT
The cargo cover may obscure the view to the
rear when in the loading position. Make sure
the cargo cover is fully extended or fully
retracted when driving.
||
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
224
Retracting
1. From the full-cover position:
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the cargo cover's attachment pins
and then release.
From loading position:
Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover
in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position.
Lift up the handle and pull it backward to dis-
engage the attachment pins and then
release.
2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins
outside of the side panels until it stops in the
retracted position.
Removal
In retracted position:
1. Depress the button on one of the retracted
cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that
end.
2. Angle the cover up/out carefully.
> The other end piece loosens automatically
and the cover can be lifted out of the
cargo area.
Related information
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Safety net* (p. 224)
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
Safety net*
The safety net prevents loads from being thrown
forward in the passenger compartment in the
event of sudden braking.
The safety net is fitted into four mounting points.
For reasons of safety, the safety net must always
be fastened and anchored as described below.
The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can
be secured two different locations in the car:
•
Rear fitting - behind the rear seat.
•
Front fitting - behind the front seats.
WARNING
Loads in the luggage compartment must be
anchored well, and also using a correctly fit-
ted safety net.
Installation
WARNING
It is necessary to ensure that the upper secur-
ing points of the safety net are fitted correctly
and that the puller-straps are hooked in prop-
erly.
Damaged safety nets must not be used.
NOTE
With forward mounting, the safety net is most
easily mounted via one of the rear doors.
1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the
split upper rod in the net is locked in its
extended position.
2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the
front or rear roof mounting with the anchor-
ing strap locks turned towards you.
3. Hook the net's other retaining hook into the
roof mounting on the opposite side - the
telescopic spring-loaded retaining hooks
facilitate alignment.
Take care to press forward the net's retain-
ing hooks for each respective roof moun-
ting's front end position.
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
225
4. Rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear
roof mountings, hook the safety net's anchor-
ing straps into the front floor eyes in the
cargo area.
Rear fitting.
Front fitting: With the net fitted in the front
roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps
into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat
slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are
straightened and the seats are moved for-
ward slightly.
Front fitting.
Pay attention to make sure that you do not
press the seat/backrest hard against the net
when the seat/backrest is moved back again
- only adjust until the seat/backrest makes
contact with the net.
5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring
straps.
IMPORTANT
If the seat/backrest is pressed hard back-
wards against the safety net then the net
and/or its roof mountings could be damaged.
Removing and storing
The safety net can be easily removed and folded
up.
1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the
button in the anchoring strap lock and feed-
ing out a little of the anchoring strap on each
side.
2. Press in the catches and detach both of the
anchoring strap's hooks.
3. Undo the upper attachments and release the
net from the roof mountings.
4. Press the red button on the rod to enable
folding and then roll up the net.
Related information
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Cargo cover* (p. 222)
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
LOADING AND STORAGE
* Option/accessory.
226
Safety grille*
The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the
cargo area from being thrown forward in the
passenger compartment.
The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance
with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils
Volvo's strength requirements.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must always
be attached and anchored correctly.
WARNING
Under no circumstances may anybody remain
in the cargo area while the car is moving. This
is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking
or an accident.
Installation
IMPORTANT
The safety grille must only be used in the rear
position (behind the rear seat) described
here.
Before first installing the safety grille, the existing
plastic roof mountings must be replaced with
steel roof mountings. Volvo recommends that
replacing roof mountings is performed at an
authorised Volvo workshop or dealer.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward.
2. Make sure that the safety grille is turned in
the right direction. Lift in the safety grille
through one of the rear side doors.
3. Position the safety grille's brackets on the
roof mountings.
The next step is facilitated if two people hold
the safety grille in the right position.
4. Insert the supplied screw and tighten using
the supplied 6 mm Allen key. Repeat on the
other side. Recommended tightening torque:
20 Nm.
> Check that the safety grille is properly fit-
ted.
5. Restore the backrest to the upright position.
For more information about the tools required
and methods for fitting/removal, see the installa-
tion instructions that were included with the initial
purchase.
IMPORTANT
The protective grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
Related information
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Load retaining eyelets (p. 221)
LOCKS AND ALARM
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
230
Remote control key
The remote control key locks/unlocks the doors,
tailgate and fuel filler flap. The remote control
key needs to be inside the car for it to be
started.
Remote control key, on left, and button-less key (Key
Tag), on right.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting since the car is equipped with sup-
port for keyless starting (Passive Start) as stand-
ard. The key needs to be located in the front of
the passenger compartment, e.g. in the driver’s
pocket or in the cup holder in the tunnel console,
to be able to start the car. See the section "Star-
ting the engine".
As an option, keyless locking/unlocking of doors
and tailgate (Passive Entry*) is also available. The
key then has a range extending in a semicircle
with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres (5 feet) out
from the driver's door and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) out from the tailgate respectively. See
the section "Remote control key range".
With keyless starting and keyless locking/unlock-
ing, the remote control key can be located any-
where in the passenger compartment or the
cargo area and maintain the functionality to start
the car.
Each of the remote control keys that are supplied
with the car can be linked to a driver profile with
unique settings for the car. When a key with a
specific profile is used, the car's settings are
adjusted to match the settings for that profile.
See the section "Driver profiles".
Button-less key (Key Tag)
For cars equipped with keyless locking/unlock-
ing*, a slightly smaller, lighter and button-less key
(Key Tag) is supplied. It works the same way as
the normal remote control key when it comes to
keyless starting and locking/unlocking
1
. It has no
detachable key blade and the battery cannot be
replaced. A new key tag can be ordered from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Ordering additional keys
The car is supplied with two remote control keys
- one key tag is supplied if the car is equipped
with keyless locking/unlocking*. Additional keys
can be ordered. A total of twelve keys can be
programmed and used for one single car. If addi-
tional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles
are added - one per new remote control key. This
also applies for the key tag.
In the event of a lost key, see the heading "Loss
of a remote control key" below.
Remote control key buttons
The remote control key has four buttons - one on the
left-hand side and three on the right-hand side.
Locking - Pressing the button locks the
doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also
arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all
of the windows and the panorama roof*
simultaneously. See the section "Locking/
1
The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes, which makes it suitable for use in activities in and around water.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
231
unlocking from the outside" and "Locking/
unlocking from the inside".
Unlocking - Pressing the button unlocks
the doors and tailgate and also disarms the
alarm. A longer press opens all the windows
simultaneously, also called Global opening
2
.
See the section "Locking/unlocking from the
outside".
Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and
disarms its alarm. On cars with power oper-
ated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened auto-
matically when the button is held depressed.
The tailgate is also closed with a long press -
acoustic warning signals sound. See the sec-
tion "Power operated tailgate".
Panic function – Used to attract attention
in an emergency. Press and hold the button
for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within
3 seconds to activate the direction indicators
and the horn. The function can be turned off
with the same button once it has been active
for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the func-
tion switches off automatically after
3 minutes.
WARNING
If anyone is left in the car, make sure the
power windows and sunroof are de-energised
by always taking the remote control key with
you when you leave the car.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
Interference
Remote control key functions for keyless starting
and keyless locking/unlocking* can be disrupted
by electromagnetic fields and screening.
NOTE
Avoid storing the remote control key close to
metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers -
preferably no closer than 10-15 cm
(4-6 inches).
If there is still interference - use the remote con-
trol key's key blade and then place the key in the
backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the
car. See section "Locking/unlocking with the
detachable key blade".
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
Loss of a remote control key
If you lose a remote control key then a new one
can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining
remote control keys must be taken to the work-
shop. The code of the missing key must be
erased from the system as a theft prevention
measure.
The current number of keys registered to the car
can be checked in the centre display's top view.
Related information
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 245)
2
Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
232
•
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 252)
•
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
•
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
•
Red Key - Restricted remote control key*
(p. 233)
Remote control key range
In order for the remote control key to work prop-
erly it needs to be within a certain distance from
the car.
For manual use
The remote control key's functions for e.g. lock-
ing/unlocking that are activated by pressing on
or have a range that extends approx.
20 metres (65 feet) from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being pressed -
move closer and try again.
For keyless use
3
The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered
by the system's antennas.
For keyless use, a remote control key or the but-
ton-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicir-
cular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres
(5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre
(3 feet) from the tailgate.
NOTE
The remote control key functions may be dis-
rupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings,
topographical conditions, etc. The car can
always be locked/unlocked with the key
blade.
If the remote control key is removed
from the car
If the remote control key is removed
from the car when the engine is run-
ning, the warning message
Car key
not found Removed from car is
shown in the driver display and an acoustic
reminder sounds when the last door is closed.
The message extinguishes when the key is
returned to the car, followed by a press of the
right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last
door is closed.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Antenna locations for the start and lock sys-
tem (p. 234)
3
Only applies to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
233
Red Key - Restricted remote control
key*
A Red Key enables the car owner to set limits for
certain car properties. The restrictions are
intended to promote safe driving of the car, e.g.
when it is loaned out.
For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's
maximum speed, set speed reminders and deter-
mine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume.
In addition, some of the car's driver support sys-
tems will always be active. Other functions of the
key are the same as those of a normal remote
control key.
One or more Red Keys can be ordered from a
Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restric-
tions can be programmed and used for a single
car - at least one must be a normal remote con-
trol key.
The settings for Red Key are made by the user of
the normal remote control key from the centre
display's top view; go to:
Settings System
Driver Profiles Red Keys
Some of the car's driver support functions cannot
be deactivated by the user of a Red Key.
The restrictions are intended to act as measures
to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it
feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young dri-
vers, valet parking or a workshop. The settings
cannot be changed by the person using a Red
Key.
Possible settings
The following settings can be made to apply for a
Red Key:
Speed limiter (Speed Limiter)
4
(On/Off):
•
Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph)
•
Setting during first use is 120 km/h
(75 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
The driver display shows the symbol
and message
Red key Speed limitation cannot
be exceeded.
Speed reminder
4
(On/Off):
•
Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph)
•
Setting during first use is: 50, 70 and
90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph)
•
Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph)
•
Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6
Muted max. volume
4
(On/Off):
•
Setting at first use: On
Adaptive cruise control*:
•
Setting at first use: Longest intervals
•
See the section "Adaptive cruise control" for
more information
Driver support functions
The following driver support functions will always
be active for the user of a Red Key:
•
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* - see section
"Blind Spot Information"
•
Lane assistance (LDW and LKA)* - see sec-
tion "Lane assistance"
•
Distance warning* - see section "Distance
warning"
•
City Safety - see section "City Safety"
•
Driver Alert Control (DAC)* - see section
"Driver Alert Control"
•
Road Sign Information* - see section "Road
Sign Information".
4
Option, only available with Red Key.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
234
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Driver profiles (p. 169)
Antenna locations for the start and
lock system
The car is equipped with a keyless start and lock
system
5
and therefore has a number of built-in
antennas positioned at different locations in the
car.
Under the cup holder in the front section of
the tunnel console
In the upper front section of the left-hand
rear door
6
In the upper front section of the right-hand
rear door
6
In the cargo area
6
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should not
come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the
keyless system's antennas with their pace-
maker. This is to prevent interference
between the pacemaker and the keyless sys-
tem.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
5
The keyless lock system only applies to cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
6
Only in cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
235
Locking/unlocking from the outside
The car is locked/unlocked from the outside
using buttons on the remote control key or with
the door or tailgate handles if the car is equip-
ped with keyless locking/unlocking (Passive
Entry)*. The tailgate can be operated via power
operation* and/or foot movement*.
Locking/unlocking with the remote
control key
The buttons on the remote control key can be
used to lock/unlock all doors and the tailgate
simultaneously.
Locking
The driver's door must be closed in order for the
lock sequence to be activated. If any of the other
doors or the tailgate is open, then these are not
locked and their alarms armed* until they are
closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are
activated when all the doors and the tailgate are
closed and locked.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key/Key Tag in the car.
A remote control key/Key Tag left in the car
will be deactivated when the car is locked and
the alarm is armed using another valid key.
The "Deadlock" function is also deactivated.
The deactivated key is reactivated when the
car is unlocked.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Unlocking
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the remote
control key, the battery may be discharged - in
which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with
the detachable key blade. See the section
"Detachable key blade" for more information.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
Settings for remote-controlled unlocking
It is possible to select different sequences for
unlocking.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Locking Remote and
Interior Unlock
.
3. Select option:
•
All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
•
Single Door
- unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of
the doors requires two presses on the
remote control key's unlock button.
The settings made for the Remote and Interior
Unlock function also affect central unlocking via
opening handles from the inside. For more infor-
mation about how unlocking from the inside is
affected, see the section "Locking/unlocking
from the inside".
Keyless* locking/unlocking
If the car is equipped with keyless locking/
unlocking*, it is sufficient to have the remote con-
trol key in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag,
making it more convenient to open the car if your
hands are full. For information on the system's
range, see the section "Remote control key
range".
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
236
Touch-sensitive surfaces
The outside of the door handles contains a
recess for locking, while the inside contains a
touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. The tail-
gate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that
is only used for unlocking.
Touch-sensitive recess for locking
Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking
NOTE
It is important that only one touch-sensitive
surface is activated at a time. Gripping the
handle while touching the lock surface risks
giving double commands. This means that the
requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not
be executed, or will be executed with a delay.
NOTE
Be aware that the system may be activated in
connection with car washing if the remote
control key is in range.
Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate used for
unlocking only.
Keyless locking
All side doors must be closed to be able to lock
the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be
open when locking the car with a side door han-
dle.
–
Touch the marked surface towards the rear
on the outside of a door handle after the
door has been closed, or press the lock
7
but-
ton on the bottom edge of the tailgate before
closing it.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen starts
to flash to indicate the car is locked.
To close all side windows and the panoramic
roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the
touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door
handle until all side windows and the panoramic
roof* have been closed.
Keyless entry
–
Grasp a door handle or press the rubberised
pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to
unlock the car.
> The lock indicator in the windscreen extin-
guishes to confirm the car is unlocked -
open the doors or tailgate as usual.
7
See section "Power operated tailgate".
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
237
Settings for Keyless entry
It is possible to select different sequences for
Keyless entry.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Tap on
My Car Locking Keyless
Unlock
3. Select option:
•
All Doors
- unlocks all doors simultaneously.
•
Single Door
- unlocks selected door.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within two minutes of unlocking, they are locked
automatically. This function prevents the car from
being left unlocked unintentionally.
Unlocking with Volvo On Call
It is possible to remotely unlock the car with the
Volvo On Call* app.
See separate supplement for Volvo On Call.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
•
Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 245)
•
Alarm* (p. 257)
Indication on locking/unlocking the
car
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators con-
firm that locking/unlocking was correctly per-
formed.
It is possible to separately adapt the indication for
locking/unlocking, see the heading "Select how
the car confirms locking and unlocking" for set-
ting options.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
238
Exterior indication
Locking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
locking by flashing and retracting the door
mirrors
8
.
Unlocking
•
The car's hazard warning flashers indicate
unlocking by two flashes and extending the
door mirrors
8
.
All doors, tailgate and bonnet must be closed to
indicate the car is locked. If locking is performed
with only the driver's door closed
9
, the car will be
locked but indication will only occur after all
doors, tailgate and bonnet have been closed.
Lock and alarm indicator
The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel
show the status of the alarm system.
Long flash indicates locking of the car. When the
car is locked, this will be indicated by short, pul-
sating flashes.
Indication in lock buttons
Front doors
Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
of either front door indicates that all doors are
locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extin-
guish in both doors.
8
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
9
Does not apply to cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
239
In all doors*
Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button
for one of the doors indicates that the door in
question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its
lamp will extinguish while the others will continue
to illuminate.
Select how the car confirms locking
and unlocking
Different options for indicating locking/unlocking
can be set via the centre display.
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Select setting for
Audible Locking
Feedback and Visible Locking Feedback
respectively.
Read more about indication of locking/unlocking
in section "Approach lighting" and "Adjusting the
door mirrors".
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
•
Approach light duration (p. 144)
•
Adjusting the door mirrors (p. 149)
Locking/unlocking from the inside
The doors and tailgate can be locked and
unlocked from inside using the central locking
controls in the front doors. The lock controls* on
the rear doors each lock their own rear door.
Central locking
Locking/unlocking button with indicator lamp in the
front door.
–
Press the button to lock and the but-
ton to unlock.
Unlocking
–
Press the button to unlock all side doors
and the tailgate.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
240
A long press on the
button opens all the side
windows simultaneously - also called global
opening
10
.
Alternative unlocking method
Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the front
door.
–
Pull the opening handle on one of the front
doors and release.
>
If the
All Doors option is selected for the
Remote and Interior Unlock function
for the remote control key, all doors will be
unlocked. If the Single Door option is
selected, only this front door will be
unlocked and opened.
The options are selected in the settings view. For
more information, see the section "Locking/
unlocking from the outside".
Locking
–
Press the button - both front doors must
be closed.
> All doors and the tailgate are locked.
A long press on the
button closes all side
windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously.
Lock button* rear doors
Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their respec-
tive rear door.
To unlock the rear door:
–
Pull the door handle - the rear door unlocks
and opens.
Settings for automatic locking
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically
when the car starts to move. To change this set-
ting:
1.
Tap on
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Press
My Car Locking.
3.
Select
Auto Lock Doors While Driving to
deactivate/activate this function.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
•
Indication on locking/unlocking the car
(p. 237)
•
Child safety locks (p. 256)
10
Used, for example, to quickly air the car during hot weather.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
241
Deadlocks*
Deadlock means that all opening handles are
disengaged mechanically, which prevents door
opening from the inside when the car is locked
from the outside.
Deadlocks are activated with the remote control
key and in keyless locking (Passive Entry)*.
Deadlocks are activated with a delay of about
10 seconds after the doors have locked.
NOTE
If a door is opened within the delay time then
the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is
deactivated.
The car can only be unlocked with the remote
control key, keyless unlocking or the Volvo On
Call* app when deadlocks are activated.
The front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with
the detachable key blade, the alarm* will be trig-
gered. See the section "Alarm" for switching off
the alarm.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car with-
out first deactivating the deadlocks in order to
avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.
Temporarily deactivating the deadlock
function
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then the
deadlock function can be temporarily deactivated
with the
Reduced guard function. The proce-
dure is the same as with the temporary disen-
gagement of the alarm's movement and tilt
detectors*.
Press the
Reduced guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to deacti-
vate the deadlock function tem-
porarily.
After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the cen-
tre display and deadlocks are temporarily deacti-
vated in the subsequent locking of the car. Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are
switched off at the same time.
In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are
deactivated immediately, but when deadlocks are
temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a
maximum of 10 minutes after locking.
If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the
deadlock function must be deactivated again.
The system is reset the next time the engine is
started.
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Locking/unlocking from the outside (p. 235)
•
Locking/unlocking from the inside (p. 239)
•
Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
blade (p. 246)
•
Alarm* (p. 257)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
242
Locking/unlocking the tailgate
The tailgate can be locked/unlocked and
opened in different ways depending on the
equipment level of the car.
Unlocking the tailgate with the remote
control key
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed and the tail-
gate unlocked by using the remote control key's
button.
1.
Press the remote control key's
button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel extinguishes in order to show
that the alarm is not armed for the whole
of the car.
The alarm's level and movement sensors
and the sensors for opening the tailgate
are disconnected.
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed while the doors remain locked and
their alarm functions armed.
To open the tailgate, grip the rubber pres-
sure plate beneath the tailgate handle
and open the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within
2 minutes then it is relocked and the
alarm is re-armed.
2.
With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the
remote control key's
button
> The tailgate is unlocked and opened,
while the doors remain locked and their
alarm functions armed.
Keyless unlocking of the tailgate*
Rubber plate with pressure-sensitive surface.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock.
You simply need to have the remote control key
in the vicinity e.g. in a pocket or a bag.
1. To open the tailgate - lightly press on the
rubberised pressure plate beneath the tail-
gate handle.
> The lock is released.
NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
243
2. Lift by the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the rub-
berised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber
panel when opening the rear hatch - lift
the handle. Using too much force may
damage the electrical contacts on the rub-
ber panel.
WARNING
Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
Unlocking the tailgate from the inside
of the car
1.
Brief press on the button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate can be unlocked and opened
from the outside by grasping the rubber-
ised pressure plate.
2.
With the power operated tailgate option* -
Long press on the
button on the instru-
ment panel.
> The tailgate opens.
Locking with the remote control key
–
Press the remote control key's button.
> The lock and alarm indicator on the instru-
ment panel starts to flash - the car is
locked and the alarm* is armed.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
•
Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)
•
Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 250)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
244
Using private locking
The tailgate can be locked with the private lock-
ing function when the car is taken in for service,
left at a hotel or similar.
NOTE
The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a
minimum for the private locking function to be
activated.
Function button for private
locking. Depending on the cur-
rent status of the lock,
Private
locking unlocked or Private
locking locked is shown.
Enter the security code before using for
the first time
A security code needs to be selected during the
first time the function is used. It can then be used
to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN
code has been lost or forgotten. The security
code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN
codes set for the private locking function.
Save the security code in a safe place.
To create a security code:
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the desired security code.
> The security code is saved. The private
locking function is now ready to be acti-
vated.
If the system has been reset then the above pro-
cedure needs to be repeated.
Activate private locking
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock
the tailgate after locking and tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is locked. Confirmation of
locking takes place by means of a green
indicator being shown by the button in the
function view.
Deactivate private locking
1. Press the button for private locking in the
function view.
> A pop-up window is shown.
2. Enter the code that was used for locking and
tap on
Confirm.
> The tailgate is unlocked. Confirmation of
unlocking takes place by means of the
green indicator by the button in the func-
tion view extinguishing.
NOTE
If the PIN code has been lost/forgotten, or if
the wrong PIN code has been entered more
than three times, the security code can be
used to deactivate the private locking.
NOTE
If private locking is activated and the car is
unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On
Call* app, private locking will be deactivated
automatically.
Related information
•
Using the glovebox (p. 218)
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
245
Detachable key blade
The remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which a number of func-
tions can be activated and some operations car-
ried out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recom-
mended when ordering new key blades.
The key blade's application areas
Using the remote control key's detachable key
blade:
•
the left-hand
11
front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be acti-
vated with the remote control key.
•
all doors are emergency locked - see the
section "Locking/unlocking with detachable
key blade".
•
the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks
can be activated/deactivated - see the sec-
tion "Child safety locks".
The button-less key
12
(Key Tag) does not have a
detachable key blade. If necessary, use the
detachable key blade from the normal remote
control key.
Detaching the key blade
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Guide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Detach the key blade by angling it up.
Return the key blade to its intended position
in the remote control key after use.
Refit the shell by pressing it downward
until a clicking sound is heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking with the detachable key
blade (p. 246)
•
Child safety locks (p. 256)
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
11
This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive.
12
Supplied with cars equipped with the keyless locking/unlocking option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
246
Locking/unlocking with the
detachable key blade
Amongst other things, the detachable key blade
can be used to unlock the car from the outside -
e.g. if the remote control key's battery has
become discharged.
Unlocking
Pull out the front door handle on the left-
hand side
13
to its end position so that the
lock cylinder become visible.
Insert the key in the lock cylinder.
Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key
blade is pointing straight back.
Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting
position. Remove the key from the lock cylin-
der and release the handle so that the rear
section of the handle is resting against the
car again.
5. Pull out the handle.
> The door opens.
Locking will be performed in the same way, but
with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of
clockwise in step (3).
Switching off the alarm*
NOTE
When the door is unlocked using the key
blade and is then opened, the alarm is trig-
gered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
Deactivate the alarm as follows:
1. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the
tunnel console.
2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and
release it.
> The control automatically returns to its
starting position - the alarm signal stops
and the alarm switches off.
Locking
It is also possible to lock the car with the remote
control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the
event of a loss of power or if the key's battery
has become discharged.
The left-hand front door can be locked with its
lock cylinder and the detachable key blade.
Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead
have a lock switch on the end of each door which
must be depressed using the key blade - they are
then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent
them being opened from outside.
The doors can still be opened from the inside.
13
This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
247
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the
child safety locks.
–
Remove the detachable key blade from the
remote control key. Insert the key blade in
the hole for lock reset and press the key in
until the key bottoms, approx. 12 mm.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside. To return to position A, the inner
door handle must be opened.
The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock
button on the remote control key or with the cen-
tral locking button on the driver's door.
NOTE
•
A door's lock reset only locks that partic-
ular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with acti-
vated manual or electric child safety locks
cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside. A rear door that is locked in
this way can only be unlocked with the
remote control key or central locking but-
ton.
Related information
•
Detachable key blade (p. 245)
Power operated tailgate*
The car's tailgate can be opened/closed electri-
cally.
Opening/closing via a foot movement is also
available as an extended option - see the section
"Opening/closing the power operated tailgate
with foot movement" for more information.
Opening
The tailgate can be opened with its handle, with
foot movement*, a button on the instrument
panel or the remote control key.
Choose one of the following options to open the
tailgate:
•
Light press on the tailgate handle.
•
Long press on the instrument panel's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
•
Long press on the remote control key's
button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate
starts to open.
•
Foot movement* under the rear bumper.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
248
Opening/closing button on the instrument panel.
Closing
The tailgate can be closed via the instrument
panel's button, with foot movement*, with the
remote control key or the buttons
14
along the
bottom edge of the tailgate.
Choose one of the following options to close the
tailgate:
–
Long press on the instrument panel's
button or the remote control key's but-
ton.
> The tailgate closes automatically and
acoustic signals sound - the tailgate
remains unlocked.
–
Press the button
14
on the underside of
the tailgate to close.
Button for closing and locking on the underside of the
tailgate.
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate remains unlocked.
NOTE
The button is active 24 hours after the hatch
has been left open. Thereafter, it must be
closed manually.
Closing and locking
–
Press the button
14
on the underside of
the tailgate to close it and simultaneously
lock the tailgate and doors (all doors must be
closed for locking).
> The tailgate closes automatically - the tail-
gate and doors are locked, and the alarm*
is armed.
NOTE
If the remote key is not detected sufficiently
close to the tailgate, locking/unlocking will
not work. See the section "Remote key
range" for more information.
NOTE
When using key-free* blocking/closing, three
signals will sound if the key is not detected
sufficiently close to the tailgate. See the sec-
tions "Remote key range" and "Locks and
remote keys" for more information.
IMPORTANT
During manual tailgate operation, open or
close it slowly. Do not use force to open/
close it if there is resistance. It may be dam-
aged and stop working correctly.
14
A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
249
Cancel opening/closing
–
Cancel opening/closing in one of the follow-
ing ways:
•
Press the button on the instrument panel.
•
Press the remote control key's button.
•
Press the close button
14
along the bottom
edge of the tailgate.
•
Press the rubberised pressure plate
beneath the outside handle.
•
Using the foot movement* (see section
"Opening/closing power operated tailgate
with foot movement" for more informa-
tion).
> Tailgate movement will be interrupted and
the tailgate will stop and can then be
manoeuvred manually.
Programmable max. opening
The maximum opening position of the tailgate
can be adjusted, e.g. to suit a low ceiling height in
a garage.
To adjust max. opening:
1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open posi-
tion.
2.
Press the
button on the underside of
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two short acoustic signals sound to indi-
cate that the set position has been saved.
To reset max. opening:
–
Manually move the tailgate to its highest
possible position - press the
button on
the tailgate for at least 3 seconds.
> Two acoustic signals sound to indicate
that the set position has been cleared.
The tailgate will then assume its max.
position when opened.
NOTE
•
If the system has been operating continu-
ously for a long time, it is switched off to
avoid overload. It can be used again after
about 2 minutes.
Pinch protection
If something with sufficient resistance prevents
the tailgate from opening/closing then the pinch
protection is activated.
•
During opening - movement is interrupted,
the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal
sounds.
•
During closing - movement is interrupted, the
tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds
and the tailgate returns to the programmed
max. position.
WARNING
Observe the risk of trapping when opening/
closing. Before starting opening/closing,
check that there is nobody near to the tailgate
as trapping may have serious consequences.
Always operate the tailgate with caution.
Pre-tensioned springs
The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tail-
gate.
14
A car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*) has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
250
WARNING
Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the
power operated tailgate. They are pre-ten-
sioned with high pressure and can cause
injury if opened.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
•
Opening/closing the tailgate with foot move-
ment* (p. 250)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
Opening/closing the tailgate with
foot movement*
To facilitate the operation of the tailgate when
your hands are occupied, it can be opened/
closed by means of a forward kicking motion
under the rear bumper.
The sensor is positioned to the left of centre in the
bumper.
One of the car's remote control keys must be
within range
15
behind the car in order for open-
ing/closing to be possible. This also applies to an
already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental
opening e.g. in a car wash.
Operation
Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area.
15
See the section "Remote control key range" for more information.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
251
Opening/closing
NOTE
The foot-operated tailgate function is availa-
ble in two versions:
•
Opening and closing with foot movement
•
Only unlocking with foot movement (lift
up the tailgate manually to open it)
Note that the function for opening and clos-
ing with foot movement requires the "Power
operated tailgate"* option.
–
Make one slow, forward kicking motion
under the left part of the rear bumper. Then
take a step back. The bumper must not be
touched.
> A short acoustic signal sounds when
opening/closing is activated - the tailgate
is opened/closed.
If the tailgate is on open position then it is
always closed on activation via foot move-
ment.
The tailgate can also be closed via the instrument
panel's button, the remote control key or the but-
ton(s)
16
under the tailgate. For more information,
see the section "Power operated tailgate".
If several kicking motions take place without an
approved remote control key being located
behind the car, opening will not be possible until
after a certain delay.
Do not leave your foot positioned under the car
during the kicking motion. This could cause acti-
vation to fail.
Cancel opening/closing
–
Make one slow forward kicking motion when
opening/closing is in progress in order to
stop the movement of the tailgate.
The remote control key does not have to be in
the vicinity of the car to cancel opening/closing.
NOTE
There is a risk of reduced function, or no
function, if the rear bumper is loaded with
large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For
this reason, make sure you keep it clean.
NOTE
Pay attention to the possibility that the sys-
tem may be activated in a car wash or similar
if the remote key is within range.
Related information
•
Locking/unlocking the tailgate (p. 242)
•
Power operated tailgate* (p. 247)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
16
Only applies to a car equipped with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry)*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
252
Replacing the battery in the remote
control key
The battery in the remote control key needs to
be replaced when it has become discharged.
NOTE
All batteries have a limited service life and
must eventually be replaced (does not apply
to Key Tag). The service life of the battery var-
ies depending on how often the vehicle/key
is used.
The battery for the remote control key should be
replaced if:
the information symbol illuminates and
the message
Car key battery low
See Owner's manual is shown in the
driver display
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals
from the remote control key within 20 metres
(65 feet) of the car.
NOTE
Always try moving closer to the car and mak-
ing another unlock attempt.
The battery in the button-less key
17
(Key Tag)
cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered
from an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
A discharged Key Tag must be handed over
to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key
must be deleted from the car since it is still
possible to use it to start the car via back-up
start.
Opening and changing
Hold the remote control key with the
front visible and the Volvo logo facing the
right way - slide the button at bottom edge
by the key ring to the right. Slide the front
side's shell a few millimetres upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
17
This key is supplied with a car equipped with the keyless locking/entry option (Passive Entry*).
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
253
Turn the key, move the button to the side
and slide the back shell a few millimetres
upwards.
The shell will then come free and can be
lifted off the key.
Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the bat-
tery cover anticlockwise until the markings
meet at the OPEN text.
Carefully lift away the battery cover by press-
ing e.g. a fingernail into the recess.
Then prize the battery cover upwards.
The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then
carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching new batteries and their con-
tact surfaces with your fingers as this may
impair their function.
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
254
Install a new battery with the (+) side up.
Avoid touching the remote control key's bat-
tery contacts with your fingers.
Place the battery in the holder with the
edge down. Then slide the battery forwards
so that it fastens under the two plastic
catches.
Press the battery down so that it fastens
under the upper black plastic catch.
NOTE
Use batteries with the designation CR2032,
3 V.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that the batteries to be
used in the remote control key fulfil UN
Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, sub-
section 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or
replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop
fulfil the above criteria.
Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise
until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text.
Reposition the rear side's shell and press
it down until a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
properly positioned and securely attached.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
255
Turn the remote control key over and refit
the front side's shell by pressing it down until
a clicking sound can be heard.
Then slide the shell back sedan.
> A further click will indicate that the shell is
securely attached.
IMPORTANT
Make sure that exhausted batteries are dis-
posed of in a manner which is kind to the
environment.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
Immobiliser
The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection
system that prevents an unauthorised person
from starting the car.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key.
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the electronic immobiliser:
Symbol Message Specification
Car key not
found
See
Owner's
manual
Error reading the
remote control key
during starting -
place the key in the
cup holder near the
key symbol and try
again.
Remote-controlled immobiliser with
tracking system
18
The car is fitted with a system which makes it
possible to track and locate the car and to
remotely activate the immobiliser, which prevents
starting the engine. Contact your nearest Volvo
dealer for more information and assistance with
activating the system.
The following error message in the driver display
is related to the remote-controlled immobiliser
with tracking system:
Symbol Message Specification
Remotely
immobilised
Car not pos-
sible to start
The remote-con-
trolled immobiliser
with tracking sys-
tem is activated.
The car cannot be
started. Contact
Volvo On Call
Service Centre.
Related information
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Remote control key range (p. 232)
18
Only certain markets and in combination with Volvo On Call*.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
256
Child safety locks
The child safety locks prevent children from
being able to open a rear door from the inside.
There is an electric* and a manual lock.
Electric activation/deactivation*
The electric child safety locks can be activated/
deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0.
Activation/deactivation can be performed up to
2 minutes after switching off the engine, provided
that no door is opened. See the section "Ignition
position" for more information.
Button for electric activation/deactivation.
1. Start the engine or choose an ignition posi-
tion higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Activated and the but-
ton's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
When the electric child safety lock is active then
the rear:
•
windows can only be opened with the driver's
door control panel
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
To deactivate the locks:
–
Press the button in the driver's door control
panel.
> The driver display shows the message
Rear child lock Deactivated and the
button's lamp goes out - the locks are
deactivated.
The current setting is stored when the engine is
switched off - if the child safety locks are acti-
vated at engine shutdown, the function will
remain activated the next time the engine is
started.
Symbol Message Specification
Rear child
lock Acti-
vated
Child safety
locks are acti-
vated.
Rear child
lock Deacti-
vated
Child safety
locks are deacti-
vated.
Manual activation/deactivation
Manual child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with man-
ual door locks.
–
Use the remote control key's detachable key
blade to turn the knob. For more information,
see the section "Detachable key blade".
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
* Option/accessory.
257
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the out-
side and the inside.
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
•
Cars with an electric child safety lock do
not have a manual child lock.
Related information
•
Detachable key blade (p. 245)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Alarm*
The alarm alerts e.g. in the event of a break-in in
the car.
When armed, the alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened
19
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with
a tilt detector*)
•
the starter battery's cable is disconnected
•
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system,
the driver display shows the symbol
and the message
Alarm system
failure Service required. In which
case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or alter components
in the alarm system yourself. Any such
attempts may affect the terms of the insur-
ance.
NOTE
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also regis-
tered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if
the car is left with a window or the panoramic
roof* open or if the passenger compartment
heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/panoramic
roof when leaving the car. If the car's inte-
grated parking heater (or a portable electric
heater) shall be used - direct the airflow from
the air vents so that they are not pointing
upwards into the passenger compartment.
Alternatively, reduced alarm level can be used
- see the section further down in this article.
Arming the alarm
Lock and arm the car alarm as follows:
•
press the remote control key's lock button
•
touch in the marked area on the outside of
the door handle
20
•
push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate
20
.
If the car is equipped with a power-operated tail-
gate, the button on the underside of the tailgate
can also be used to lock the car and arm the car
alarm.
19
Applies to certain markets.
20
Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
258
Deactivate the alarm
Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows:
•
press the remote control key's unlock button
•
grip one of the door handles
20
•
push on the tailgate's rubberised pressure
plate
20
.
Switching off a triggered alarm
–
Press the remote control key's unlock button
or set the car in ignition position I by turning
the start knob clockwise and then releasing.
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from the
inside then the alarm is triggered.
Alarm signals
When the alarm has been triggered, the following
happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes
or until the alarm is switched off.
If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified,
the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times
21
.
Lock and alarm indicator
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the
alarm system's status:
•
LED not lit – alarm not armed.
•
The LED flashes once every other second –
alarm is armed.
•
After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED
flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds
or until ignition position I has been selected
by turning the start knob clockwise and
releasing it - the alarm has been triggered.
Reduced alarm level
Reduced guard means that the movement and tilt
detectors can be temporarily deactivated.
Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in
order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm -
e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during trans-
port on a car train or car ferry. The procedure is
the same as with the temporary disengagement
of the "Deadlock" function.
Press the Reduced guard
button in the centre display's
function view in order to switch
off the movement and tilt
detectors temporarily.
Related information
•
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 259)
•
Disarming the alarm* without working remote
control key (p. 259)
•
Deadlocks* (p. 241)
20
Only applies to a car with keyless locking/entry (Passive Entry*)
21
Applies to certain markets.
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
259
Automatic arming/rearming of the
alarm*
Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car
being left with the alarm disarmed unintention-
ally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control key
(which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors
or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then
the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is
relocked at the same time.
In certain markets, the alarm is re-armed auto-
matically after a certain delay after the driver's
door has been opened and closed without being
locked.
Related information
•
Alarm* (p. 257)
•
Disarming the alarm* without working remote
control key (p. 259)
Disarming the alarm* without
working remote control key
The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if
the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the
remote control key's battery is dead.
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable
key blade.
> The alarm is triggered.
The backup reader's location in the cup holder.
2. Place the remote control key in the backup
reader in the tunnel console's cup holder.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
> The alarm is deactivated.
Related information
•
Alarm* (p. 257)
•
Automatic arming/rearming of the alarm*
(p. 259)
•
Detachable key blade (p. 245)
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
Detection of unknown car
component*
The "Foreign Component Detection" function
can detect whether an unknown car component
has been connected to the car.
Each LED headlamp* is designed for the car. If
an unknown headlamp is connected, the driver
display shows a message
Unknown car part.
Service required, unknown car part found.
Volvo recommends contacting an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Book service and repair (p. 528)
LOCKS AND ALARM
* Option/accessory.
260
Type approval for the remote
control key system
Type approval for the remote control key system
can be read in the table.
Lock system keyless start (Passive
Start) and keyless locking/unlocking
(Passive Entry*)
CEM marking for the remote control key system. For
supplementary type approval number, see the table
below.
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250
Serbia P1614120100
Argentina CNC ID: C-14771
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
261
Country/Area Type approval
Brazil MT-3245/2015
Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015
Malaysia RAAT/37A/0315/S(15-0663)
Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396
Russia
The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15
DA0062437/11
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
262
Country/Area Type approval
Namibia TA-2016-02
South Africa TA-2014-1868
For more information about type approval for the
remote control key system, see
support.volvocars.com.
Remote control key
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
263
Country/Area Type approval
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8423
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
Serbia
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
264
Country/Area Type approval
The United Arab Emirates
Namibia TA-2015-102
South Africa TA-2015-432
LOCKS AND ALARM
}}
265
Key Tag
Country/Area Type approval
Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/107
Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015
Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015
Mexico IFETEL
Marca: HUF
Modelo (s): HUF8432
NOM-121-SCT1-2009
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones:
(1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia
perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier
interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada.
Oman
||
LOCKS AND ALARM
266
Country/Area Type approval
Serbia
The United Arab Emirates
DRIVER SUPPORT
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
270
Speed-dependent steering force
Speed related power steering causes the steer-
ing wheel force to increase with the speed of the
car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitiv-
ity.
On motorways the steering feels firmer. When
parking and at low speed steering is light and
requires only a slight effort.
NOTE
In certain situations the power steering may
become too hot and then needs to be tempo-
rarily cooled - during this time the power
steering operates with reduced power and
turning the steering wheel may then be per-
ceived to be slightly heavier.
In parallel with the temporarily reduced steer-
ing assistance, the driver display shows a
message.
Change the steering force level*
To select the steering force level, go to the "Drive
modes" section and see the description at the
alternative INDIVIDUAL under the heading
"Selectable drive modes".
For the car models without a drive mode control
with its INDIVIDUAL option, the selection of
steering force is instead made via the centre dis-
play's top view and the following search path:
Settings My Car Drive Modes
Steering force
Steering force selection cannot be accessed dur-
ing a turn if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph).
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
Stability system RSC
1
The stability system RSC minimises the risk of
overturning, for example during a sudden evasive
manoeuvre or if the car skids.
The RSC system registers if and how much the
car's lateral inclination changes. This information
is used to calculate the risk of the car overturn-
ing. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability con-
trol system engages, the engine torque is
reduced and one or more wheels are braked until
the car has regained its stability.
WARNING
Under normal driving conditions, the RSC sys-
tem improves the car's road safety, but this
must not be taken as a reason to increase
speed. Always follow the normal precautions
for safe driving.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
•
Safety (p. 56)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
271
Electronic Stability Control ESC
2
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) helps the
driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's
traction.
The activation of the ESC sys-
tem during braking may be
noticed as a throbbing sound.
The car may accelerate slower
than expected when the accel-
erator pedal is depressed.
WARNING
•
The stability system ESC is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
ESC is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
The ESC system consists of the following func-
tions:
•
Active Yaw Control
•
Spin Control
•
Traction control system
•
Engine Drag Control
•
Trailer stability assist
Active Yaw Control
The function checks the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the
car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during acceler-
ation.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers
power from the driving wheel that is spinning to
the one that is not.
Engine Drag Control
Engine Drag Control (EDC
3
) prevents involuntary
wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine
braking when driving in low gear on slippery road
surfaces.
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to
steer the car.
Trailer stability assist*
4
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA
5
) stabilises a car with
attached trailer in situations where snaking
occurs. Also see section "Trailer Stability Assist"
for more information.
NOTE
The TSA function is deactivated if sport mode
is activated.
Related information
•
Sport mode for electronic stability control
(p. 272)
•
Symbols and messages for electronic stabil-
ity control (p. 273)
•
Stability system RSC
1
(p. 270)
•
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 451)
1
Roll Stability Control
2
Electronic Stability Control
3
Engine Drag Control
4
Trailer stability assist is included when installing the Volvo genuine towbar.
5
Trailer Stability Assist
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
272
Sport mode for electronic stability
control
The ESC
7
system is always activated — it can-
not be switched off. However, the driver can
select Sport mode, which allows for a more
active driving experience.
In Sport mode the ESC system detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements
and cornering are more active than in normal
driving and then allows a certain degree of con-
trolled skidding with the rear section before ESC
intervenes and stabilises the car.
For example, if the driver stops a controlled skid
by releasing the accelerator pedal, the ESC sys-
tem intervenes and stabilises the car.
Sport mode also provides maximum traction if the
car has become bogged down or is driving on a
loose surface, such as sand or deep snow.
Select/deselect Sport mode
The Sport mode is activated/
deactivated in the centre dis-
play's function view.
–
Tap on the ESC Sport Mode button in
function view.
> Sport mode is activated/deactivated, a
green/grey indicator is displayed in the
button.
The driver display indicates Sport mode
by displaying this symbol with a con-
stant glow until the function is deacti-
vated or the engine is switched off. The
next time the engine is started, the ESC system
is back in its normal mode again.
Limitations for Sport mode
The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be
selected when one of the functions from speed
limiter, cruise control or adaptive cruise control is
activated.
Related information
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
7
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
273
Symbols and messages for
electronic stability control
A number of symbols and messages regarding
electronic stability control (Electronic Stability
Control -ESC) can be shown on the driver dis-
play.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Constant glow for
approx. 2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light. ESC system is being activated.
Constant glow. Sport mode is selected.
NOTE: The ESC system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced.
ESC
Temporarily off
ESC system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactiva-
ted automatically when the brakes have cooled.
See message in the driver display.
ESC
Service required
ESC system disengaged.
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
275
Speed limiter*
A speed limiter (SL
8
) can be likened to a reverse
cruise control - the driver regulates the speed
using the accelerator pedal but is prevented
from accidentally exceeding a pre-selected/set
maximum speed by the speed limiter.
Overview
Buttons and symbols for functions
9
.
: Activates the speed limiter from
standby mode and resumes stored maximum
speed
: Increases the stored maximum speed
: From standby mode - activates the
speed limiter and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the speed limiter to standby mode
: Reduces stored maximum speed
Marker for stored max speed
The car's current speed
Stored maximum speed
WARNING
•
The Speed Limiter function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
The driver must always pay attention to
traffic conditions and take action if the
Speed Limiter is not maintaining a suita-
ble speed.
•
The Speed Limiter is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Limitations
On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s
braking effect may be inadequate and hence the
stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this
case, the driver is alerted by the message
Speed
limit exceeded in the driver display.
NOTE
A text message that the maximum speed is
exceeded will be activated if the speed has
been exceeded by at least 3 km/h
(approx. 2 mph).
Related information
•
Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
(p. 277)
•
Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)
•
Automatic speed limiter* (p. 279)
•
Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
limiter (p. 280)
•
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
speed limiter (p. 281)
8
Speed Limiter
9
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
276
Activating and starting the Speed
limiter
The speed limiter function (SL
10
) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to reg-
ulate the speed.
Set the speed limiter in standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function for speed limiter
(4).
> Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter
is set in standby mode.
Start the Speed Limiter
The speed limiter cannot be activated until after
the engine has been started. The lowest maxi-
mum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h
(20 mph).
–
When the speed limiter is in standby mode
and the
symbol is shown - press the
steering wheel button
(2).
> The Speed Limiter starts and the current
speed is stored as the maximum speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
(p. 277)
•
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)
Managing speed for the Speed
limiter
The speed limiter (SL
11
) can be set to different
speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(3):
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
10
Speed Limiter
11
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
277
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
(p. 277)
•
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed
Limiter
The speed limiter (SL
12
) can be temporarily
deactivated so that it is set in standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it
in standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in
standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The speed limit markings and symbols in
the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - the speed limiter is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver can
exceed the maximum speed setting.
Reactivating the Speed Limiter from
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby
mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The driver display's speed limit markings
change colour from GREY to WHITE - the
car's speed is then limited again by the
last stored maximum speed.
or
–
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The Speed Limiter indicators and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now apply
its current speed as the maximum speed.
12
Speed Limiter
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
278
Temporary increase in speed with the
accelerator pedal
The speed limiter can also be temporarily overrid-
den with the accelerator pedal without the speed
limiter being set in standby mode - e.g. to be able
to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation.
In which case, proceed as follows:
1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
release it so that acceleration is interrupted
when the desired speed has been reached.
> In this case, the speed limiter is still acti-
vated and the driver display's symbol is
therefore WHITE.
2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the
temporary acceleration is finished.
> The car is then braked automatically
below the last stored maximum speed.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Switching off the speed limiter (p. 278)
Switching off the speed limiter
The speed limiter (SL
13
) can be deactivated.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> The speed limiter is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol and indicator
for speed limiter (4) are switched off -
which deletes the set/stored maximum
speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
(2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Activating and starting the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the Speed Limiter
(p. 277)
13
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
279
Automatic speed limiter*
The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL
14
) function
helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum
speed to the speed shown on the road signs.
The Speed Limiter function (SL
15
) can be
changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL).
The automatic speed limiter uses speed informa-
tion from the Road Sign Information
16
function to
automatically adapt the car's maximum speed.
WARNING
•
The ASL function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
Even if the driver clearly sees the speed-
related road sign, the speed information
from the Road Sign Information (RSI)
function to ASL may be incorrect – in
such cases the driver must intervene
him/herself and accelerate or brake to a
suitable speed.
•
ASL is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
•
See also the heading "Limitations for
Road Sign Information".
Is SL or ASL active?
Symbols in the driver display show which speed
limiter function is active:
Symbol SL ASL
A
✓ ✓
Sign symbol
B
after "70" = ASL is acti-
vated.
✓
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode.
B
See the following heading "ASL symbol" regarding the mean-
ing of the symbol's colour.
14
Automatic Speed Limiter
15
Speed Limiter
16
Road Sign Information – RSI
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
280
The ASL symbol
The sign symbol (displayed alongside
the stored speed, "70", in the centre of
the speedometer) can be shown in
three colours with the following mean-
ings:
Colour of sign
symbol
Meaning
Greenish yellow ASL is active
Grey ASL has been set in
standby mode
Amber/Orange ASL is in temporary standby
mode - e.g. due to a traffic
sign not being read.
Limitations of ASL
Automatic speed limitation takes place using
speed information from the RSI
16
function - not
from the speed limit road signs that the car
passes.
If RSI
16
cannot interpret and provide speed infor-
mation to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby
mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the
driver must intervene and brake to a suitable
speed.
The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI
16
func-
tion can once again interpret and provide speed
information to the ASL.
See also the heading "Limitations for Road Sign
Information".
Related information
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
limiter (p. 280)
•
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
speed limiter (p. 281)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
Activating/deactivating the
automatic speed limiter
The automatic speed limiter function (ASL
17
)
can be activated and deactivated as a supple-
ment to the speed limiter (SL
18
).
Activate ASL
The Speed Sign Assist but-
ton is located in the function
view of the centre display.
To activate the automatic speed limiter:
1.
Press the
Speed Sign Assist button.
> ASL is set in standby mode, a green indi-
cator appears on the button, and the
driver display shows a sign symbol in the
centre of the speedometer.
2.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> ASL is activated with the car’s current
speed.
16
Road Sign Information – RSI
17
Automatic Speed Limiter
18
Speed Limiter
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
281
Deactivate ASL
To deactivate the automatic speed limiter:
–
Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in
function view.
> ASL is deactivated and the button's indi-
cation becomes GREY - SL is activated
instead.
WARNING
After switching from ASL to SL the car will no
longer follow the signed speed limit but only
the maximum speed stored in memory.
Related information
•
Automatic speed limiter* (p. 279)
•
Changing the tolerance for the Automatic
speed limiter (p. 281)
Changing the tolerance for the
Automatic speed limiter
The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL
19
)
can be set for different tolerance levels.
It is possible to increase/decrease the signed
speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a
signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the
driver can instead choose to allow the car to
maintain 75 km/h (47 mph).
Buttons and symbols for functions
20
.
–
Press the steering wheel button (1)
until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the
speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h
(47 mph).
> After which, the car uses the selected tol-
erance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs
passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph).
The tolerance is followed until a road sign
with a lower or higher speed is passed -
then the car follows the new signed
speed limit instead and the tolerance is
deleted from the memory.
If the Road Sign Information* function is
activated, the signed speed limit will then
be shown with a RED indicator on the
speedometer.
The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the
speed setting is in the speed limiter.
NOTE
The maximum selectable tolerance is
+/- 10 km/h (5 mph).
Related information
•
Automatic speed limiter* (p. 279)
•
Activating/deactivating the automatic speed
limiter (p. 280)
19
Automatic Speed Limiter
20
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
282
•
Managing speed for the Speed limiter
(p. 276)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
Cruise control
The cruise control (CC
21
) helps the driver main-
tain an even speed, resulting in more relaxed
driving on motorways and long, straight roads in
regular traffic flows.
Overview
Buttons and symbols for functions
22
.
: Activates cruise control from standby
mode and resumes stored speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates cruise
control and stores current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes cruise control to standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Marker for stored speed
The car's current speed
Stored speed
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
21
Cruise Control
22
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
283
WARNING
•
The cruise control function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
Cruise control is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 283)
•
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 284)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 285)
•
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Activating and starting the Cruise
control
The cruise control function (CC
23
) must first be
selected and activated in order to be able to reg-
ulate the speed.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Set cruise control in standby mode
To set cruise control in standby mode:
–
Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym-
bol/function
(4).
> The symbol is shown and the cruise con-
trol can then be activated.
Activating/starting cruise control
In order to start the Cruise control from the
standby mode, the car's current speed must be
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
284
30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed
that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph).
To start the cruise control:
–
With the symbol/function displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise Control starts and the current
speed becomes the stored speed.
NOTE
Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds
below 30 km/h (20 mph).
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 284)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 285)
•
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286)
Managing speed for the Cruise
control
Cruise control (CC
24
) can be set to different
speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(3):
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the speed indicator (4) has moved to the
desired speed
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car's speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
(1), the speed stored will be
the car's speed when the button is depressed,
provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator
pedal at the moment when the button is
depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Using engine braking instead of the
foot brake
With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less
frequent application of the foot brake. On a
downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable
to start moving a little faster and limit the acceler-
ation by engine braking. In this case the driver
can temporarily disable foot brake application by
Cruise Control.
To do so, proceed as follows:
–
Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway
down and release.
> Cruise Control will disengage its auto-
matic foot braking and then uses engine
braking only.
23
Cruise Control
24
Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
285
Cruise control dependence on drive
mode
The cruise control's way of maintaining a speed
may vary depending on the selected drive
mode
25
.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
In ECO drive mode the cruise control's accelera-
tions and decelerations become smoother com-
pared to other drive modes to optimise fuel and
environmental economy. This can cause the car's
speed to be temporarily above or below the set
speed.
See supplementary information in "ECO drive
mode" under "Cruise control Eco Cruise".
Cruise control Dynamic Cruise
In Dynamic drive mode, the cruise control's accel-
erations and decelerations are felt more strongly
and seem more direct compared to other modes.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 283)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 285)
•
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise
control
Cruise control (CC
26
) can be temporarily deacti-
vated so that it is set in the standby mode and
can be reactivated later.
Deactivate Cruise Control and set in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To set cruise control in standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
WHITE to GREY - cruise control is now
temporarily deactivated and the driver
must then manually control the speed.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and
set in standby mode if:
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
•
the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer
than 1 minute
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set
in standby mode if:
•
wheels lose traction
•
engine speed is too low/high
•
brake temperature is too high
•
speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph).
The driver must then control the speed himself/
herself.
25
See supplementary information in the section "Drive modes".
26
Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
286
Reactivating cruise control from
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To start cruise control from standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the most recently stored speed again.
or
To start cruise control from standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> The cruise control markings and symbols
in the driver display change colour from
GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow
the current speed.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 283)
•
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 284)
•
Deactivating Cruise Control (p. 286)
Deactivating Cruise Control
Cruise control Cruise Control — CC can be
deactivated.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
287
Buttons and symbols for functions
27
.
To deactivate cruise control:
1.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Cruise control is set in standby mode.
2.
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶
(3) to change to another function.
> The driver display's symbol for cruise con-
trol
(4) is extinguished - which
deletes the set/stored speed.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
(2)
again.
> Another function is activated.
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Activating and starting the Cruise control
(p. 283)
•
Managing speed for the Cruise control
(p. 284)
•
Deactivating/reactivating the cruise control
(p. 285)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
Distance Warning*
The Distance Warning function
28
warns the
driver if the time interval to the vehicle ahead
becomes too short.
Distance warning is active at speeds
above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the
vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No
distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the time win-
dow to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the
preset value – the speed of the driver's vehi-
cle is not affected.
27
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
28
Distance Alert
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
288
Head-up display*
Symbol for Distance Warning on the windscreen
29
.
In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol
is shown on the windscreen for as long as the
time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value. However, this presupposes that
the
Show Driver Support function is activated
via settings in the car's menu system; see the
heading "Head-up display" for how this works.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
Related information
•
Activating and setting the time interval for
Distance warning* (p. 288)
•
Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 289)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Activating and setting the time
interval for Distance warning*
The Distance Warning
30
function can be set
with different time intervals or switched off.
On/Off
Press the Distance Alert but-
ton in the centre display's func-
tion view.
•
GREEN button indication - Distance Alert is
activated.
•
GREY button indication - Distance Alert is
deactivated.
Distance Alert is activated automatically each
time the engine is started.
Setting the time interval for Distance
warning
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
29
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
30
Distance Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
289
The same symbol is also shown when the adap-
tive cruise control function is activated.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
The set time window is also used by the
adaptive cruise control and Pilot Assist
functions.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Related information
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 289)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
Limitations of Distance Warning*
The Distance Warning function
31
may have limi-
tations in certain situations.
WARNING
•
The Distance Warning function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The vehicle's size may affect the ability to
detect, e.g. motorcycles, which could
mean that the warning lamp illuminates at
a shorter time window than set or that the
warning is temporarily absent.
•
Extremely high speeds can cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter time win-
dow than that set due to limitations in
radar unit range.
•
Distance Warning is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
31
Distance Alert
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
290
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Activating and setting the time interval for
Distance warning* (p. 288)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
Adaptive cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (ACC
32
) helps the
driver to maintain an even speed combined with
a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead.
An adaptive cruise control provides a more relax-
ing driving experience on long journeys on motor-
ways and long straight main roads in smooth traf-
fic flows.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead
33
.
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and
radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the
car, the speed is adapted automatically via the
preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road
is clear again the car returns to the selected
speed.
WARNING
•
The adaptive cruise control function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
The adaptive cruise control is not a sub-
stitute for the driver's attention and
judgement. The driver is always responsi-
ble for ensuring the car is driven in a safe
manner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Adaptive cruise control regulates the speed with
acceleration and braking. It is normal for the
brakes to emit a low sound when they are being
used to adjust the speed.
32
Adaptive Cruise Control
33
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
291
The adaptive cruise control aims to control the
speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand
sudden braking the driver must brake himself/
herself. This applies in case of large speed differ-
ences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly.
Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval
set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any
vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain
the speed set and stored by the driver. This also
takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead
increases and exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speed from 0 km/h up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box:
•
The Adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h
(20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
WARNING
•
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver is always
responsible and must intervene if the sys-
tem does not detect a vehicle ahead.
•
The adaptive cruise control does not
brake for humans or animals, and not for
small vehicles such as bicycles and
motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncom-
ing, slow or stationary vehicles and
objects.
•
Do not use the adaptive cruise control in
demanding situations, such as in city traf-
fic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with
a lot of water or slush on the road, in
heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on
winding roads or on slip roads.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control com-
ponents must only be performed at a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended.
Overview
Controls
Buttons and symbols for functions
33
.
: Activates the adaptive cruise control
from standby mode and resumes stored
speed
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates the
adaptive cruise control and stores current
speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes the adaptive cruise control to
standby mode
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
33
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
292
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Target vehicle indicator: ACC has detected
and is following a target vehicle at the preset
time interval
Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead
NOTE
In cars equipped with Adaptive Cruise Con-
trol*, it is possible to switch between cruise
control and Adaptive Cruise Control – see the
heading "Switch between CC and ACC".
Driver display
Indication of speeds
33
.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for the adaptive cruise
control".
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning
33
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Adaptive Cruise Control uses approx. 40% of the
capacity of the foot brake. If the car needs to be
braked more heavily than the adaptive cruise
control is capable of and the driver does not
brake, the warning lamp and acoustic warning are
activated to alert the driver that immediate inter-
vention is required.
33
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
293
WARNING
The adaptive cruise control only warns of
vehicles which its radar unit has detected -
hence a warning may not be given, or it may
be given with a certain delay.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires.
Head-up display*
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
33
.
In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
Related information
•
Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
•
Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
•
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 305)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
33
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
294
Activating and starting the Adaptive
cruise control*
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
34
) must first be
activated and then started if it is to control the
speed and distance.
Setting the adaptive cruise control in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
Immediately after the engine is started the Adap-
tive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set
it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as
follows:
–
Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to
scroll to the symbol/function
(4).
> The symbol is displayed and Adaptive
Cruise Control is set in standby mode.
Starting/activating the adaptive cruise
control
In order to start the ACC the following require-
ments apply:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
With the symbol/function (4) displayed,
press the steering wheel button
(1).
> Adaptive cruise control starts and the cur-
rent speed is stored, which is shown in
figures in the centre of the speedometer.
The time interval is only
adjusted to the vehicle ahead
by the ACC when the distance
symbol shows two vehicles.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
34
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
295
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
•
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
•
Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 305)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
Managing the speed of the Adaptive
cruise control*
The adaptive cruise control (ACC
35
) can be set
to different speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(3):
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Adaptive cruise control can follow another vehicle
at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for the
adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) -
even though it is capable of following another
vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than
30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored.
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
35
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
296
Manual gearbox
The Adaptive cruise control can follow another
vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for the adaptive
cruise control is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maxi-
mum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
•
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
•
Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 305)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
Setting the time interval for the
adaptive cruise control*
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
36
) can be
set to different time intervals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when the Dis-
tance Warning function is activated.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front
at a pre-set time interval.
When only one car is shown, there is no vehi-
cle within a reasonable distance ahead.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
The adaptive cruise control allows the time inter-
val to vary significantly in certain situations in
order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front
smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when
the distances are short, the adaptive cruise con-
trol increases the time interval slightly.
36
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
297
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If the adaptive cruise control does not
seem to respond with a speed increase
when activated, it may be because the
time window to the vehicle ahead is
shorter than the set time window.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Select how ACC shall maintain the
distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how the Adaptive cruise control should maintain
the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Selection is made via the drive mode control
DRIVE MODE.
Select one of the following alternatives:
•
Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
which means longer time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead.
•
Comfort - ACC focuses on following the set
time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
•
Dynamic - ACC focuses on following the set
time interval to the vehicle ahead more
closely, which in certain cases may mean
heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
More information can also be found under
"Cruise control Eco Cruise" in section "Drive
mode ECO".
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
•
Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
•
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
•
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
•
Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 305)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
298
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive
cruise control*
The Adaptive cruise control (ACC
37
) can be
temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the
standby mode and can later be reactivated.
Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and
set it in standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control
and set it in standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (2).
>
The
symbol on the driver display
changes colour from WHITE to GREY and
the stored speed in the centre of the
speedometer changes from BEIGE to
GREY.
WARNING
•
With the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode, the driver must intervene
and regulate both speed and distance to
the vehicle ahead.
•
When the adaptive cruise control is in
standby mode and the car comes too close
to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of
the short distance by the Distance Warn-
ing function instead.
Standby mode on driver intervention
The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deacti-
vated and set in standby mode if:
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear selector is moved to N position.
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
•
the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1
minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
37
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
299
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, e.g. Electronic Stability Control
ESC
38
. If any of the other systems stops working,
the adaptive cruise control is deactivated auto-
matically.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
•
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may occur if:
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and ACC
is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a
stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
•
the driver opens the door
•
the driver takes off the seatbelt
•
engine speed is too low/high
•
one or more wheels lose traction
•
brake temperature is high
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked).
Reactivating adaptive cruise control
from standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate ACC from standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
•
Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
•
Limitations of the adaptive cruise control*
(p. 302)
•
Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 305)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
38
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
300
Overtaking assistance with adaptive
cruise control* or Pilot Assist*
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
39
) or Pilot Assist
can assist the driver when overtaking other vehi-
cles.
How overtaking assistance works
When ACC or Pilot Assist is following another
vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to
overtake by activating the direction indicator
40
,
adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist helps by
accelerating the car towards the vehicle ahead
before the car reaches the overtaking lane.
The function then delays reducing speed in order
to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car
is approaching a slower vehicle.
The function remains active until the driver’s vehi-
cle has cleared the overtaken vehicle.
WARNING
Be aware that this function can be activated
in more situations than during overtaking, e.g.
when a direction indicator is used to indicate
a change of lane or exit to another road – the
car will then accelerate briefly.
Continuation for Overtaking Assistance
The following conditions must exist for Overtak-
ing Assistance to be activated:
•
there must be a vehicle in front (the “target
vehicle”)
•
your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h
(43 mph)
•
the stored speed for ACC or Pilot Assist
must be high enough for overtaking to take
place safely.
Starting Overtaking Assistance
To start the Overtaking Assistance:
–
Activate the direction indicator.
Use the left direction indicator in a car with
the steering wheel on the left, or the right
direction indicator in a car with the steering
wheel on the right.
> Overtaking Assistance is started.
Limitations for Overtaking Assistance
WARNING
When using the Overtaking Assistance Sys-
tem, the driver should be aware that there
may be undesired acceleration if the condi-
tions suddenly change.
Some situations should therefore be avoided,
such as if:
•
the car is approaching an exit for turn-of
that is in the same direction as overtaking
would normally occur.
•
the vehicle ahead slows down before the
driver's car has crossed over into the
overtaking lane
•
the traffic in the overtaking lane slows
down
•
a right-hand drive car is driven in a county
with left-hand traffic (or vice versa).
Situations of this kind can be avoided by tempo-
rarily setting ACC or Pilot Assist in standby mode.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
39
Adaptive Cruise Control
40
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
301
Change of target and automatic
braking with the Adaptive Cruise
Control
In combination with automatic gearbox, the
adaptive cruise control (ACC
41
) has functionality
for change of target and braking at certain
speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When adaptive cruise control is following another
vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will slow down
for the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is
changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary
vehicle, the adaptive cruise control will ignore
the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate
to the stored speed.
•
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged and set
in standby mode:
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the adaptive cruise control is uncertain
whether the target object is a stationary vehi-
cle or some other object, such as a speed
bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle ahead turns off so the adap-
tive cruise control no longer has a vehicle to
follow.
Automatic braking
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed about
3 seconds - if it takes longer before the car in
front starts moving again then the adaptive cruise
control is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
–
The Adaptive Cruise Control is reactivated in
one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> The Adaptive Cruise Control resumes fol-
lowing the vehicle ahead if it starts mov-
ing forward within 6 seconds.
NOTE
ACC can keep the car stationary for a maxi-
mum of 5 minutes. After this the parking
brake is applied and adaptive cruise control is
disengaged.
The parking brake must be released before
the adaptive cruise control can be reactivated.
41
Adaptive Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
302
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
reaching 0 km/h and Adaptive Cruise Control is
set in standby mode. This means that the brakes
are released and the car may start to roll - the
driver must therefore intervene and brake the car
himself/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
tion
•
the driver sets the adaptive cruise control in
the standby mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations the parking brake is applied
to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if the adaptive cruise control is
holding the car stationary with the foot brake and:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
ACC has kept the car stationary for more
than approx. 5 minutes
•
the brakes have overheated
•
the engine is switched off.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
•
Parking brake (p. 428)
Limitations of the adaptive cruise
control*
Adaptive cruise control (ACC
42
) may have limita-
tions in certain situations.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is
primarily intended for use when driving on level
road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in
which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake.
•
Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car
has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to
the car.
Miscellaneous
•
Drive mode
Off Road cannot be selected
when the adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
42
Adaptive Cruise Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
303
Related information
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Activating and starting the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 294)
•
Managing the speed of the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 295)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
•
Deactivating/activating the Adaptive cruise
control* (p. 298)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
the Adaptive Cruise Control (p. 301)
•
Change between Cruise control and adaptive
cruise control* (p. 303)
•
Symbols and messages for the Adaptive
cruise control* (p. 305)
Change between Cruise control and
adaptive cruise control*
In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC
43
)
the driver can change between Cruise Control
(CC
44
) and ACC.
A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise
control is active:
CC ACC
A A
Cruise control Adaptive cruise control
A
WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode
Changing from ACC to CC
Proceed as follows:
1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode
using steering wheel button
.
2.
Press the
Cruise control button in the cen-
tre display's function view - the button's indi-
cator changes colour from GREY to GREEN.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
ACC to CC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now switched off
and Cruise Control is set to standby
mode.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> Cruise control starts and stores the cur-
rent speed.
WARNING
Switching from ACC to CC means that the
car:
•
no longer maintains a preset time interval
to the vehicle ahead.
•
only follows the stored speed, and the
driver must therefore apply the brakes
when necessary.
If CC is active when the engine is switched off,
ACC will be activated automatically the next time
the engine is started.
Changing from CC to ACC
Proceed as follows:
1. Set cruise control to standby mode using the
steering wheel button.
43
Adaptive Cruise Control
44
Cruise Control
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
304
2.
Tap on the
Cruise control button in the
function view - the button's indicator
changes colour from GREEN to GREY.
> The symbol in the driver display changes
from
CC to ACC. Adap-
tive Cruise Control is now activated and
set to standby mode.
3.
Press the steering wheel button
.
> Adaptive cruise control starts and stores
the current speed, together with the pre-
set time interval to the vehicle ahead.
Related information
•
Cruise control (p. 282)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
305
Symbols and messages for the
Adaptive cruise control*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the adaptive cruise control (ACC
45
) can be
shown via the driver display and/or the head-up
display*.
Here are some examples
46
.
The previous illustration
47
shows that the adap-
tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to
follow.
The previous illustration
47
shows that the adap-
tive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h
(68 mph) and at the same time is following a
vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed.
45
Adaptive Cruise Control
46
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
47
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
306
Symbol Message Specification
The symbol is WHITE The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed.
Adaptive cruise
Unavailable
The symbol is GREY.
Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode.
Adaptive cruise
Service required
The symbol is GREY.
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
307
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car
between the lane's side markings using steering
assistance as well as to maintain an even speed,
combined with a preselected time interval to the
vehicle ahead.
How Pilot Assist works
The Pilot Assist function gives more comfortable
driving and a more relaxed driving experience
during, for example, long journeys on motorways
in even traffic flows.
The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the
vehicle ahead and detects side markings
48
.
Camera and radar unit
Distance readers
Readers, side markings
The driver selects the desired speed and a time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans
the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's
side markings on the road surface using the
camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is
maintained with automatic speed adjustment
whilst the steering assistance helps to position
the car in the lane.
Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into
account the speed of the preceding car and the
lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore
the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and
steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or
avoid an obstruction on the road.
If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambig-
uously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not
see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist tempo-
rarily deactivates steering assistance, but
resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again -
although the speed and distance control func-
tions remain active.
WARNING
Pilot Assist steering assistance is automati-
cally deactivated and is resumed without prior
warning.
The current status of steering
assistance is indicated by the
colour of the steering wheel's
symbol:
• GREEN steering wheel indi-
cates active steering assis-
tance
• GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indi-
cates deactivated steering assistance.
48
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
308
WARNING
•
The Pilot Assist function is supplementary
driver support intended to facilitate driv-
ing and make it safer – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to this
function to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
•
Pilot Assist must only be used if there are
clear lane lines painted on each side of
the lane. All other use involves increased
risk of contact with surrounding obstacles
that cannot be detected by the function.
•
Pilot Assist is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, positioned cor-
rectly in the lane, at the appropriate
speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration
and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used to adjust
the speed.
Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed
smoothly. In situations that demand sudden brak-
ing the driver must brake himself/herself. This
applies in case of large speed differences or if
the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the
limitations of the camera and radar unit, braking
may come unexpectedly or not at all.
Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in
the same lane at a time interval set by the driver.
If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front
then the car will instead maintain the speed set
and stored by the driver. This also takes place if
the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and
exceeds the stored speed.
The following applies for cars with automatic
gearbox:
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
•
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph).
The following applies for cars with manual gear-
box:
•
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at
speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to
200 km/h (125 mph).
•
Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from
30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h
(87 mph).
WARNING
•
Pilot Assist is not a collision avoidance
system. The driver must intervene if the
system does not detect a vehicle in front.
•
Pilot Assist does not brake for people,
animals, objects, small vehicles (e.g.
cycles and motorcycles), low trailers as
well as oncoming, slow or stationary vehi-
cles.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist in demanding sit-
uations, such as in city traffic, at junctions,
on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or
slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in
poor visibility, on winding roads, on slip
roads, or with a trailer connected to the
car.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of Pilot Assist internal compo-
nents must only be performed at a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
Round bends and when the road splits
Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should
therefore not await the steering assistance from
Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to
increase his/her own steering input, especially on
bends.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
309
When the car approaches an exit or if the lane
splits, the driver should steer towards the desired
lane so that Pilot Assist can specify the desired
direction.
Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in
the middle of the lane
When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to posi-
tion the car in between the lane markings and
therefore it is recommended to let the car find
the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a
driving experience as possible. The driver checks
that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and
always has the ability to adjust the position by
making his/her own steering corrections.
If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an
appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to
turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise
control.
Overview
Controls
Buttons and symbols for functions
48
.
: Activates Pilot Assist from standby
mode and resumes the stored speed and
time interval
: Increases the stored speed
: From standby mode - activates Pilot
Assist and stores the current speed
: From active mode - deactivates/
changes Pilot Assist to standby mode
◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive
cruise control
: Reduces stored speed
Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead
▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to
Pilot Assist
Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead
Function symbol
Symbols for target vehicle and time interval
to vehicles ahead
Symbol for activated/deactivated steering
assistance
48
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
310
Driver display
Indication of speeds
48
.
Stored speed
Speed of vehicle ahead.
Current speed of your car.
To see different combinations of symbols
depending on traffic situation - see the heading
"Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist".
Collision risk warning
Audio and symbol for collision warning
48
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
Pilot Assist uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's
capacity. If the car needs to be braked more
heavily than Pilot Assist is capable of and the
driver does not brake, the warning lamp and
acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver
that immediate intervention is required.
WARNING
Pilot Assist only gives warning about vehicles
detected by its camera and radar unit – there-
fore a warning may not occur or be delayed.
•
Never wait for a warning. Apply the
brakes when the situation requires!
48
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
311
Head-up display*
Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen
48
.
In cars equipped with a head-up display, the
warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing
symbol.
NOTE
Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light con-
trasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is
not looking straight ahead may make the vis-
ual warning signal in the windscreen difficult
to recognise.
Related information
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
(p. 313)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
Activating and starting the
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist must first be activated and then
started to be able to control speed and distance
and to give steering assistance.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that:
•
The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and
the driver's door must be closed.
•
There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle")
within reasonable distance in front of the car,
or the current speed must be at least
15 km/h (9 mph).
•
For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must
be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph).
48
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
312
With the Adaptive cruise control in standby
mode:
1.
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6).
>
The
symbol changes to Pilot Assist
in standby mode (8).
2.
Press the steering wheel button
(2).
> Pilot Assist is started and current speed is
stored, which is shown with figures in the
centre of the speedometer.
...or...
With the Adaptive cruise control started:
–
Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6).
> Pilot Assist is started.
Pilot Assist steering assistance
is only active when the steering
wheel symbol (2) has changed
from GREY to GREEN.
Pilot Assist only regulates the
time interval to the vehicle
ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle
(1) above the steering wheel symbol.
At the same time a speed
range is marked.
The higher speed is the
stored/selected speed and the
lower speed is that of the vehi-
cle ahead (target vehicle).
Hands on the steering wheel
In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s
hands must be on the steering wheel. If Pilot
Assist detects that the driver is not holding the
steering wheel, the driver is prompted to actively
steer the car via a text message and an acoustic
signal.
If Pilot Assist still cannot detect that the driver is
holding the steering wheel, the function shifts to
standby mode. Pilot Assist must then be restar-
ted with the steering wheel button
.
NOTE
Note that Pilot Assist only works when the
driver has hands on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist*
(p. 313)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
313
Managing the speed for
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be set to different speeds.
Setting/changing the stored speed
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
–
Change the set speed with short or long
presses on steering wheel button
(1) or
(3):
•
Short press: Each press changes the
speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h
(+/- 5 mph).
•
Press and hold: Release the button when
the set speed indicator (4) has moved to
the desired speed.
•
The speed set after the last button press is
stored in the memory.
If the driver increases the car’s speed using the
accelerator pedal before pressing the steering
wheel button
, the speed stored will be the
car’s speed when the button is depressed, provi-
ded the driver’s foot is on the accelerator pedal at
the moment when the button is depressed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph).
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
Pilot Assist is 30 km/h (20 mph) - even though it
is capable of following another vehicle down to 0
km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph)
cannot be selected/stored.
The maximum speed selectable is 200 km/h
(125 mph).
Manual gearbox
Pilot Assist can follow another vehicle at speeds
from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h
(125 mph).
The lowest programmable speed for Pilot Assist
is 30 km/h (20 mph) - the maximum speed is
200 km/h (125 mph).
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
314
Setting the time interval for
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be set with different time inter-
vals.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be selected
and shown in the driver display
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the time
interval. One line represents
about 1 second to the vehicle
in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds.
NOTE
When the symbol in the driver display shows
a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist fol-
lows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap.
When only one steering wheel is shown, there
is no vehicle within a reasonable distance
ahead.
Control for time interval.
Decrease time interval
Increase time interval
Distance indicator
–
Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to
increase or decrease the time interval.
> The distance indicator (3) shows the cur-
rent time interval.
In order to follow the vehicle ahead in a smooth
and comfortable way, Pilot Assist allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain conditions.
For example, at low speed, when the distances
become short, Pilot Assist increases the time
interval slightly.
NOTE
•
The higher the speed the longer the cal-
culated distance in metres for a given
time interval.
•
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
•
If Pilot Assist does not seem to respond
with a speed increase when activated, it
may be because the time window to the
vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time
window.
WARNING
•
Only use a time window that suits the
current traffic conditions.
•
The driver should be aware that short
time windows limit the amount of time
available to react and take action if an
unexpected traffic situation arises.
Select how Pilot Assist shall maintain
the distance* to the vehicle ahead
The driver can select different driving styles for
how Pilot Assist should maintain the preset time
interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made
via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
315
Select one of the following alternatives:
•
Eco - ACC focuses on optimal fuel economy,
which means longer time interval to the vehi-
cle ahead.
•
Comfort - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as
smoothly as possible.
•
Dynamic - Pilot Assist focuses on following
the set time interval to the vehicle ahead
more closely, which in certain cases may
mean heavier acceleration and braking.
See further information in the "Drive modes" sec-
tions.
More information can also be found under
"Cruise control Eco Cruise" in section "Drive
mode ECO".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
Deactivating/activating the
Pilot Assist*
Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so
that it is set in the standby mode and can be
reactivated later.
Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in
standby mode:
–
Press the steering wheel button (2).
> Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the
symbol (8) in the driver display changes
colour from WHITE to GREY and the
stored speed in the centre of the speed-
ometer changes from BEIGE to GREY.
...or...
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
316
–
Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3).
> Pilot Assist is switched off and changes
to the Adaptive cruise control in active
mode.
WARNING
•
With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the
driver must intervene and steer, regulat-
ing both speed and distance to the vehi-
cle ahead.
•
When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and
the car comes too close to a vehicle
ahead, the driver is warned of the short
distance by the Distance Warning func-
tion instead.
Standby mode on driver intervention
Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in
standby mode if:
•
the foot brake is used
•
the gear selector is moved to N position
•
the direction indicators are used for longer
than 1 minute.
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than the
stored speed for longer than 1 minute.
•
the clutch pedal is depressed for
approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with man-
ual gearbox.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelera-
tor pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect
the setting - the car returns to the last stored
speed when the accelerator pedal is released.
When the direction indicators are used, Pilot
Assist steering assistance is temporarily disen-
gaged. When this is no longer the case, steering
assistance is automatically reactivated if the
lane's side markings can still be detected.
Automatic standby mode
Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g.
stability control/anti-skid ESC
49
. If any of these
other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is
switched off automatically.
WARNING
With automatic standby mode, the driver is
warned via an acoustic signal and a message
on the driver display.
•
The driver must then regulate the car's
speed, apply the brakes as needed and
maintain a safe distance to other vehicles.
Automatic standby mode may occur if, for exam-
ple:
•
the driver opens the door
•
brake temperature is high
•
the driver's hands are not on the steering
wheel
•
the parking brake is applied
•
engine speed is too low/high
•
the driver takes off the seatbelt
•
one or more wheels lose traction
•
the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g.
snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio
waves are blocked)
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot
Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead
is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a
speed bump.
•
the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the
vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no
longer has a vehicle to follow.
•
speed is reduced to below 30 km/h
(20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual
gearbox.
49
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
317
Reactivating Pilot Assist from the
standby mode
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
To reactivate Pilot Assist:
–
Press the steering wheel button (1).
> The speed is then set to the most recently
stored speed.
WARNING
A significant increase in speed may follow
when the speed is resumed with the
steering wheel button.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
•
Distance Warning* (p. 287)
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
Change of target and automatic
braking with Pilot Assist*
In combination with automatic gearbox, Pilot
Assist has functionality for change of target and
braking at certain speeds.
Change of target
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there
may be stationary traffic in front.
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle at
speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes
target from a moving to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will slow down for the stationary vehicle.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
318
WARNING
When Pilot Assist is following another vehicle
at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h
(20 mph) and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, Pilot
Assist will ignore the stationary vehicle and
instead accelerate to the stored speed.
•
The driver must then intervene him/
herself and brake.
Automatic standby mode with change of
target
Pilot Assist is disengaged and set in standby
mode:
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the tar-
get object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
•
when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph)
and the vehicle in front turns off so the Pilot
Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Automatic braking
For shorter stops in connection with inching in
slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automati-
cally resumed if the stops do not exceed
approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the
vehicle in front starts moving again then Pilot
Assist is set in standby mode with automatic
braking.
–
Pilot Assist is reactivated in the following
way:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
> Pilot Assist resumes following the vehicle
ahead if it starts moving forward within
6 seconds.
NOTE
Pilot Assist can hold the car stationary for a
maximum of 5 minutes - then the parking
brake is applied and the function is disen-
gaged.
Before Pilot Assist can be reactivated, the
parking brake must be released.
Cessation of automatic braking
In some situations, automatic braking ceases on
coming to a standstill and Pilot Assist is set in
standby mode. This means that the brakes are
released and the car may start to roll - the driver
must therefore intervene and brake the car him-
self/herself to keep it stationary.
This may take place in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R posi-
tion
•
the driver sets Pilot Assist in the standby
mode.
Automatic activation of parking brake
In certain situations, the parking brake is applied
in order to keep the car stationary.
This takes place if Pilot Assist is holding the car
stationary with the foot brake and:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off his/her
seatbelt
•
Pilot Assist has kept the car stationary for
more than approx. 5 minutes
•
the brakes have overheated
•
the engine is switched off.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
319
Limitations of Pilot Assist*
The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in
certain situations.
The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help
the driver in many situations. But the driver is at
all times responsible for maintaining a safe dis-
tance to surrounding objects and a correct posi-
tion in the lane.
WARNING
In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering
assistance may have difficulty helping the
driver in the right way or it may be automati-
cally deactivated - in which case, the use of
Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of
such situations may be that:
•
the lane markings are worn, missing or
cross each other.
•
lane division is unclear, for example, when
the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in
the event of multiple sets of markings.
•
edges or other lines than lane markings
are present on or near the road, e.g.
kerbs, joints or repairs to the road sur-
face, edges of barriers, roadside edges or
strong shadows.
•
the lane is narrow or winding.
•
the lane contains ridges or holes.
•
weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain,
snow or fog or slush or impaired view with
poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet
road surface etc.
The driver should also note that Pilot Assist
has the following limitations:
•
High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary
obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers,
etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they
may be detected incorrectly as lane mark-
ings, with a subsequent risk of contact
between the car and such obstacles. The
driver must ensure him/herself that the
car is at a suitable distance from such
obstacles.
•
The camera and radar sensor does not
have the capacity to detect all oncoming
objects and obstacles in traffic environ-
ments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles
or objects which completely or partially
block the route.
•
Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians,
animals, etc.
•
The recommended steering input is force
limited, which means that it cannot always
help the driver to steer and keep the car
within the lane.
The driver always has the possibility of correcting
or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by
Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to
the desired position.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily
intended for use when driving on level road surfa-
ces. The function may have difficulty in keeping
the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when
driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case,
be extra attentive and ready to brake.
•
Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy
load or a trailer is connected to the car.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
320
NOTE
Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
Miscellaneous
•
Off Road drive mode cannot be selected
when Pilot Assist is activated.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist*
(p. 320)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
Symbols and messages for
Pilot Assist*
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display
and/or the head-up display*.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
321
Here are some examples
50
.
The previous illustration
51
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
The previous illustration
51
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since
the lane's side markings cannot be detected.
The previous illustration
51
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the
same time is following a vehicle ahead which is
keeping the same speed.
Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
50
In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph).
51
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
322
The previous illustration
51
shows that Pilot Assist
is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that
there is no vehicle ahead to follow.
Here too, Pilot Assist provides steering assis-
tance since the lane's side markings can be
detected.
Related information
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
•
Managing the speed for Pilot Assist* (p. 313)
•
Setting the time interval for Pilot Assist*
(p. 314)
•
Change of target and automatic braking with
Pilot Assist* (p. 317)
•
Deactivating/activating the Pilot Assist*
(p. 315)
•
Overtaking assistance with adaptive cruise
control* or Pilot Assist* (p. 300)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
Radar unit
The radar unit is used by several driver support
systems and has the task of sensing other vehi-
cles.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The radar unit is used by the following functions:
•
Distance Warning*
•
Adaptive cruise control*
•
Lane Keeping Aid
•
Pilot Assist*
•
City Safety
Modification of the radar unit could result in its
use being illegal.
51
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
324
Limitations of the radar unit
The radar unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Blocked unit
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.
52
.
The radar unit is placed inside the upper section
of the windscreen together with the car's camera
unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
If the driver display shows this symbol
with the message "
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual", it means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles in front of the car.
The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action:
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or cov-
ered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera
and radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
52
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
325
Cause Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals
or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered
road surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera
and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
Vehicle speed
The capacity of the radar unit to detect vehicles
ahead is reduced significantly if:
•
the speed of the vehicle ahead is signifi-
cantly different from that of your own car
Limited field of vision
The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In
some situations another vehicle is not detected,
or the detection is made later than expected.
The radar unit's field of vision.
Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting
vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle
that drives in between your car and the vehi-
cle ahead.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehi-
cles not driving in the centre of the lane can
remain undetected.
In bends, the radar unit may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from
view.
Low trailers
Low trailer in radar shadow.
Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit
to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver
should therefore be particularly careful when driv-
ing behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise
control or Pilot Assist is activated.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
326
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
screen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
•
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
Related information
•
Radar unit (p. 322)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of Distance Warning* (p. 289)
DRIVER SUPPORT
328
Type approval for radar units
Type approval for the car's radar units can be seen in the following table.
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Brazil
✓
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra
interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência
a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Modelo: L2C0055TR
1500-15-8065
EAN: 07897843840978
✓
Modelo: L2C0054TR
4122-14-8645
EAN: (01)07897843840855
Europe
✓ ✓
Hereby, Delphi Electronics & Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in
compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive
1999/5/EC. The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety /
2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA
The United Arab Emi-
rates
✓
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37536/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
✓
TRA
REGISTERED No: ER37357/15
DEALER No: DA37380/15
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
329
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Indonesia
✓
37295/POSTEL/2014
4927
✓
38806/SDPPI/2015
4927
Jordan
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
✓
Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3
Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD)
Korea
✓
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR
✓
Certification No.
MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR
Morocco
✓ ✓
AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC
NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014
DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
330
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Malaysia
✓
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998,
Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000.
To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for
“SIRIM Label Verification”.
Type Approval No.:
RALM/21A/0315/S(150520)
✓
Type Approval No.:
RALM/21A/0315/S(150618)
Moldavia
✓ ✓
1024
Singapore
✓ ✓
Complies with IDA Standards DA105753
South Africa
✓
TA-2014/1824
APPROVED
✓
TA-2014/2390
APPROVED
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
331
Market
ACC
A
BLIS
B
Symbol Type approval
Taiwan
✓
CCAB15LP0560T3
✓
CCAB15LP0680T0
A
ACC = Adaptive Cruise Control
B
BLIS = Blind Spot Information
Related information
•
Radar unit (p. 322)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
332
Camera unit
The camera unit is used by several driver sup-
port systems and has the task of for example
detecting lane lines or traffic signs.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The camera unit is used by the following func-
tions:
•
Adaptive cruise control*
•
Lane assistance*
•
Driver Alert Control*
•
Pilot Assist*
•
City Safety
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture
•
Road Sign Information*
•
Active main beam*
Related information
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Activating/deactivating main beam (p. 135)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
333
Limitations of the camera unit
The camera unit has certain limitations - which in
turn also limits those functions that use the unit.
Impaired vision
The camera has limitations similar to the human
eye, i.e. it can "see" worse in for example intense
snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms
and snow flurries. Under such conditions, the
functions of camera-dependent systems could be
significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriage-
way, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road
surfaces or unclear lane markings can also sig-
nificantly reduce camera function when it is used
to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and other vehicles.
Blocked unit
The marked area must be kept free from stickers,
objects, shade film, etc.
53
.
The camera unit is placed inside the upper sec-
tion of the windscreen together with the car's
radar unit.
IMPORTANT
Do not place, stick or mount anything on the
outside or inside of the windscreen in front of
or around the camera and radar unit — this
can interfere with camera and radar-depend-
ent functions.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
If the driver display shows this symbol
with the message
Windscreen
sensor Sensor blocked, see
Owner's manual, it means that the
camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehi-
cles in front of the car.
The following table presents examples of possi-
ble causes for a message being shown, along
with the appropriate action:
53
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
334
Cause Action
The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or
covered with ice or snow.
Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and
radar unit.
Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera
view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar
signals or camera view.
No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road
surface.
Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the cam-
era and radar unit.
Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light condi-
tions.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen clean in front of the
camera and radar unit.
High temperature
At very high temperatures the camera and radar
unit can temporarily be switched off for
about 15 minutes after the engine is started so
as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera
and radar unit restarts automatically when the
temperature has fallen sufficiently.
Damaged windscreen
IMPORTANT
If a crack, scratch or stone chip in the wind-
screen in front of one of the camera and
radar unit “windows” covers an area of
approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or
larger, a workshop must be contacted to have
the windscreen replaced – an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
If not rectified it can lead to reduced perform-
ance for the driver support systems that use
the camera and radar unit.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation of driver support systems
that use the radar unit, the following also
applies:
•
Volvo recommends against repairing
cracks, scratches or stone chips in the
area in front of the camera and radar unit.
Instead, the whole windscreen should be
replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact
an authorised Volvo workshop to verify
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
335
that the correct windscreen is ordered
and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved wind-
screen wipers must be fitted during
replacement.
IMPORTANT
When the windscreen is replaced, the camera
and radar unit must be recalibrated at the
workshop to ensure the functionality of all the
car’s camera and radar-based systems. An
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Maintenance
In order that the camera and radar unit shall
function correctly, the windscreen in front of the
unit must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and
be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the camera and
radar unit will reduce its function and may
prevent measurement.
This may mean that functions are reduced,
deactivated completely or give incorrect func-
tion response.
Related information
•
Camera unit (p. 332)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365)
•
Limitations of Pilot Assist* (p. 319)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
DRIVER SUPPORT
336
City Safety
City Safety uses visual, haptic and acoustic sig-
nals to alert the driver of any pedestrians,
cyclists, large animals and vehicles that appear.
The car then brakes automatically unless the
driver him/herself acts within a reasonable time.
Location of the radar unit
54
.
City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce colli-
sion speed.
City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at
risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal,
cyclist or a vehicle.
The City Safety function can help the driver to
avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g.
when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with
a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident.
The function helps the driver by automatically
braking the car in the event of an imminent risk
of collision if the driver does not react in time by
braking and/or swerving.
City Safety activates a short, sharp braking proce-
dure, normally stopping the car just behind the
vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well out-
side normal driving style and may be perceived as
uncomfortable.
City Safety is activated in situations where the
driver should have started braking earlier, which
is why it cannot help the driver in every situation.
City Safety is designed to be activated as late as
possible in order to avoid unnecessary interven-
tion.
The driver or passengers are not normally aware
of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation
where a collision is immediately imminent.
WARNING
•
The City Safety is supplementary driver
support intended to improve driving safety
– it cannot handle all situations in all traf-
fic, weather and road conditions.
•
The City Safety auto-brake function can
prevent a collision or reduce collision
speed, but to ensure full brake perform-
ance the driver should always depress the
brake pedal – even if the car auto-brakes.
•
The warning and steering assistance are
only activated if there is a high risk of col-
lision – you must therefore never wait for
a collision warning or for City Safety to
intervene.
•
The warning and brake intervention for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 70 km/h
(43 mph).
•
City Safety does not activate any auto-
brake functions in the event of heavy
acceleration.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
54
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
337
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
•
The driver is advised to read all sections
in the Owner's Manual that relate to City
Safety to learn about factors such as its
limitations and what the driver should be
aware of before using the system (see
the list of links at the end of this article).
Parameters for City Safety
City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a
cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by
reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake
function.
If the speed difference is greater than the follow-
ing specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake
function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates
the consequences of it.
Vehicles
For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the
speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph).
cyclists
For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by
up to 50 km/h (30 mph).
Pedestrians
For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by
up to 45 km/h (28 mph).
Large animals
In the event of a risk of a collision with a large
animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by
up to 15 km/h (9 mph).
The brake function for large animals is primarily
intended to reduce the force of the impact at
higher speeds and is most effective at speeds
above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at
lower speed.
Overview
Function overview
54
.
Acoustic warning signal in the event of a risk
of collision
Warning signal in the event of a risk of colli-
sion
Distance measurement with the camera and
radar unit
City Safety carries out three steps in the follow-
ing order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support
3. Auto Brake
The following text explains what happens during
the three steps:
1 - Collision warning
The driver is first warned of a potentially immi-
nent collision.
City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or
vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same
direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety
can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large ani-
mals that are crossing the road in front of the car.
In the event of a risk of collision with a pedes-
trian, large animal, cyclist or vehicle (including
vehicles described in the "City Safety in cross
traffic" section), the driver's attention is alerted by
means of a red flashing warning signal, an acous-
tic signal and a haptic warning in the form of a
brake pulse. At lower speeds or with hard braking
or acceleration there will be no haptic warning.
The brake pulse frequency varies according to
the car's speed.
54
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
338
2 - Brake support
If the risk of collision has increased further after
the collision warning then the brake support is
activated.
Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking
action if the system considers that the braking is
not sufficient to avoid a collision.
3 - Auto Brake
The automatic brake function is activated last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet started to
take evasive action and the risk of collision is
imminent then the automatic braking function is
deployed - this takes place irrespective of
whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then
takes place with full brake force in order to
reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force
if it is sufficient to avoid a collision.
In connection with automatic braking the seatbelt
tensioner may also be activated. For more infor-
mation see the "Seatbelt tensioner" section.
In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may
begin with light braking and then progress to full
brake action.
When City Safety has prevented a collision with a
stationary object, the car remains stationary in
anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the
car has been braked to avoid collision with a
slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to
match that of the vehicle in front.
NOTE
On cars with manual gearbox, the engine
stops when the Auto-brake function has stop-
ped the car, unless the driver has managed to
depress the clutch pedal beforehand.
The driver can always interrupt a braking inter-
vention by firmly depressing the accelerator
pedal.
NOTE
When City Safety brakes, the brake lights
come on.
When City Safety is activated and brakes the
vehicle, the driver display shows a text message
to the effect that the function is/has been active.
WARNING
City Safety must not be used as an excuse for
the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver relies solely on City Safety to do the
braking, there might be a risk of a collision
sooner or later.
Market limitation
City Safety is not available in all countries. If City
Safety does not appear in the centre display's
Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this
function.
Search path in the top view of the centre display:
•
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Related information
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
DRIVER SUPPORT
339
Setting the warning distance for City
Safety
City Safety is always activated but the driver can
select the warning distance for the function.
NOTE
The City Safety function cannot be deacti-
vated. It is activated automatically when the
engine/electric operation is started and
remains switched on until the engine/electric
operation is switched off.
The warning distance determines the sensitivity
of the system and regulates the distance at
which the visual, acoustic and haptic warnings
shall be triggered.
To select warning distance:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Under
City Safety Warning, select Late,
Normal or Early to set the desired warning
distance.
If the
Early setting produces too many warnings,
which could be perceived as irritating in certain
situations, the
Normal or Late warning distance
can be selected.
When warnings are perceived as being too fre-
quent or disturbing, the warning distance can be
reduced, which reduces the total number of
warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a
warning at a later stage.
The
Late warning distance should therefore only
be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driv-
ing.
WARNING
•
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test City Safety by driv-
ing at people, animals or vehicles - this
may cause severe damage and injury and
risk lives.
•
City Safety warns the driver when there is
a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten
the driver’s reaction time.
•
Even if the warning distance has been set
to
Early warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily.
•
With the warning distance set at
Early,
the warnings will come more in advance.
This may mean that the warnings come
more frequently than at the warning dis-
tance Normal, but it is recommended
since it can make City Safety more effec-
tive.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
DRIVER SUPPORT
340
Detection of obstacles with City
Safety
The obstructions that City Safety can detect are
vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians.
Vehicles
City Safety detects most vehicles that are either
stationary or moving in the same direction as your
car, as well as vehicles described in the "City
Safety in cross traffic" section.
In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a
vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear
lights must be working and clearly illuminated.
Cyclists
Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a
cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a cyclist must receive the
clearest possible information about the body and
bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the
bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and
lower body plus a normal human pattern of move-
ment.
If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are
not visible to the function's camera then the sys-
tem cannot detect a cyclist.
For the function to be able to detect a cyclist,
he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle
designed for adults.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations
and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured cyclists.
•
cyclists if the background contrast of the
cyclist is poor – warning and brake inter-
ventions may then be late or not occur at
all.
•
cyclists wearing clothing that obscures
the body outline.
•
bicycles loaded with large objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Pedestrians
Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedes-
trians with clear body outlines.
For optimal performance, the system function
that detects pedestrians must receive the clear-
est possible information about the body outline,
requiring the ability to identify the head, arms,
shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a nor-
mal human pattern of movement.
In order that it shall be possible to detect a
pedestrian there must be a contrast with the
background and this will be affected by such
things as clothes, the background and the
weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may
either be detected late or not at all, which may
mean that warnings and braking are late or omit-
ted.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
341
City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured pedestrians, people in
clothing that hides their body contour or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.).
•
pedestrians if the background contrast of
the pedestrians is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
•
pedestrians who are carrying larger
objects.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Large animals
Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as
large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with
clear body outline.
Optimal performance requires that the system
function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and
horse) must receive the clearest possible infor-
mation about the body outline, requiring the abil-
ity to identify the animal directly from the side in
combination with what is a normal pattern of
movement for the animal.
If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the
function's camera then the system cannot detect
the animal.
City Safety can also detect large animals in the
dark if they are illuminated by the car's head-
lamps.
WARNING
City Safety is supplementary driver support,
but it cannot detect all large animals in all sit-
uations and, for example, cannot see:
•
partially obscured large animals.
•
larger animals seen from the front or from
behind.
•
large animals that run or move quickly.
•
large animals if the background contrast
of the animals is poor - warning and
brake interventions may then be late or
not occur at all.
•
small animals such as dogs and cats, for
example.
The driver is always responsible that the vehi-
cle is driven correctly and with a safety dis-
tance adapted to the speed.
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
DRIVER SUPPORT
342
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
City Safety in cross traffic
City Safety can help the driver when turning and
crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at
an intersection.
Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming cross-
ing vehicles.
For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on
a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first
enter the sector (1) in which City Safety can ana-
lyse the situation.
The following further criteria must also be fulfil-
led:
•
your car must be travelling at no less than
4 km/h (3 mph)
•
your car must turn to the left in markets with
right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand
traffic)
•
the oncoming vehicle must have its head-
lamps switched on.
WARNING
•
The "City Safety in crossing traffic" func-
tion is supplementary driver support
intended to improve driving safety – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Warnings and brake interventions due to
a collision risk with an oncoming vehicle
often come very late.
•
Never wait for a collision warning or for
City Safety to intervene.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Limitations in cross traffic
In some cases City Safety may have difficulty
helping the driver deal with collision risks due to
oncoming cross traffic. Examples are:
•
stability control ESC intervenes in the event
of slippery driving conditions
•
if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
343
•
if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by some-
thing
•
if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps
switched off
•
if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpre-
dictable manner, for example, abruptly
changes lanes at a late stage.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
City Safety with evasive
manoeuvres
City Safety steering assistance can assist the
driver to steer away from a vehicle/obstacle
when it is not possible to avoid a collision by
braking alone.
Your car steers away
Slow moving/stationary vehicles or obstacles.
City Safety engages by amplifying the driver's
steering input, which only occurs after the driver
has begun an evasive manoeuvre - and then only
if the driver is not steering enough to avoid a col-
lision.
In parallel with the amplified steering input, the
brake system is also used to further amplify the
steering input. The function also helps to
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
344
straighten the car again after passing the obsta-
cle.
City Safety steering assistance can detect:
•
Vehicles
•
cyclists
•
Pedestrians
•
larger animals.
WARNING
•
The ability of City Safety to be able to
predict a specific situation is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Activate/deactivate
City Safety steering assistance cannot be deacti-
vated but is always activated.
Limitations for City Safety steering
assistance
City Safety may have limited functionality in cer-
tain situations and fail to intervene e.g.:
•
outside the speed range 50-100 km/h
(30-62 mph)
•
if the driver initiates an evasive manoeuvre
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
345
City Safety when evasive
manoeuvres are prevented
City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by
automatically braking the car earlier when it is
not possible to avoid a collision by only steering
away.
City Safety assists the driver by continuously
attempting to anticipate whether there are
"escape routes" to the side in case a slow or sta-
tionary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late
stage.
Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle
ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier.
Your car
Slow/stationary vehicle
City Safety does not intervene with the auto-
brake function as long as the driver him/herself
has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a
steering manoeuvre.
However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive
manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an
adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver
by automatically starting to brake at an earlier
stage.
WARNING
•
The ability of City Safety to be able to
predict a specific situation is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
City Safety is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
DRIVER SUPPORT
346
Limitations of City Safety
The City Safety function may have limitations in
certain situations.
Surroundings
Low objects
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for pro-
jecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary
lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bon-
net limit the function.
Skidding
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is
extended, which may reduce the capacity of City
Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the
anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC
55
will give the best possible braking force with
maintained stability.
Oncoming light
The visual warning signal in the windscreen may
be difficult to notice in the event of strong sun-
light, reflections, when sunglasses are being
worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead.
Heat
In the event of high passenger compartment
temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the
visual warning signal in the windscreen may be
temporarily disengaged.
The camera and radar unit's field of view
The camera's field of vision is limited, which is
why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehi-
cles in some situations cannot be detected, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others
and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late
or not at all.
If a text message in the driver display indicates
that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City
Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large
animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of
the car. This means that the functionality of City
Safety may be reduced.
However, an error message is not shown in all
situations where the windscreen sensors are
obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to
keep the area of windscreen in front of the cam-
era and radar unit clear.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City Safety
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
Driver intervention
Reversing
When your own car is reversing, City Safety is
temporarily deactivated.
Low speed
City Safety is not activated at very low speeds -
below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system there-
fore does not intervene in situations where your
car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly,
e.g. when parking.
Active driver
Driver commands are always prioritised, which is
why City Safety does not intervene or postpone
warning/intervention in situations where the
driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive
manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore
delay a collision warning and intervention in order
to minimise unnecessary warnings.
55
Electronic Stability Control
DRIVER SUPPORT
347
Miscellaneous
WARNING
•
Warnings and brake interventions could
be implemented late or not at all if a traf-
fic situation or external influences mean
that the camera and radar unit cannot
detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals
or vehicles correctly.
•
For vehicles to be detected at night, their
headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be
switched on and shining clearly.
•
The camera and radar unit has a limited
range for pedestrians and cyclists. The
system can provide effective warnings
and brake interventions as long as the
relative speed is below 50 km/h
(30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving
vehicles, warnings and brake interven-
tions are effective at vehicle speeds up to
70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for
large animals is less than 15 km/h
(9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle
speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The
warning and brake intervention for large
animals is less effective at lower speeds.
•
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles and large animals could be dis-
engaged due to darkness or poor visibil-
ity.
•
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated
at vehicle speeds exceeding 70 km/h
(43 mph).
•
Do not place, stick or mount anything on
the outside or inside of the windscreen in
front of or around the camera and radar
unit — this can interfere with camera-
dependent functions.
•
Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of
the camera sensor may reduce its func-
tionality, fully deactivate it or give incor-
rect function response.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
•
Messages for City Safety (p. 348)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
DRIVER SUPPORT
348
Messages for City Safety
A number of messages regarding City Safety
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
City Safety
Automatic intervention
When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated
in connection with a text message being shown.
City Safety
Reduced functionality Service
required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Detection of obstacles with City Safety
(p. 340)
•
City Safety with evasive manoeuvres (p. 343)
•
City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are
prevented (p. 345)
•
City Safety in cross traffic (p. 342)
•
Limitations of City Safety (p. 346)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
349
Rear Collision Warning
The Rear Collision Warning (RCW) function can
help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle
approaching from behind.
RCW is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
The RCW can warn the driver in a vehicle
approaching from behind that a collision is immi-
nent by rapidly flashing the direction indicators.
If, at a vehicle speed below 30 km/h (20 mph),
the RCW function detects that the car is in dan-
ger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt ten-
sioners may tension the front seatbelts and the
Whiplash Protection System safety system is
activated.
Immediately before the collision, RCW may also
activate the foot brake in order to reduce the for-
ward acceleration of the car during the collision.
However, the foot brake is only activated if the
car is stationary. The foot brake releases immedi-
ately if the accelerator pedal is depressed.
Limitations
In certain cases the RCW may have difficulty
helping the driver in the event of a collision risk.
This can be for example:
•
if the vehicle approaching from the rear is
detected too late
•
if the vehicle approaching from the rear
changes lane at the last moment
•
if the vehicle approaching from the rear has a
speed exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).
NOTE
In certain markets, RCW does not give a
warning with the direction indicators due to
local traffic regulations - in such cases, this
part of the function is deactivated.
NOTE
The warning with direction indicators for Rear
Collision Warning is deactivated if the warn-
ing distance for collision warning in the City
Safety function is set at the lowest level
"
Late".
The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking
functions are, however, still active.
Related information
•
City Safety (p. 336)
•
Setting the warning distance for City Safety
(p. 339)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
•
Whiplash Protection System (p. 57)
BLIS*
The BLIS
56
function is designed to give a warn-
ing of vehicles diagonally behind and to the side
of your car so as to give assistance in heavy traf-
fic on roads with several lanes in the same direc-
tion.
BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of:
•
vehicles in the car's blind spot
•
quickly approaching vehicles in the left and
right lanes closest to the car.
Location of BLIS lamp
57
.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
350
Principle of BLIS
Zone in blind spot
Zone for quickly approaching vehicle.
The BLIS function is active at speeds
above 10 km/h (6 mph).
The system is designed to react when:
•
your car is overtaken by other vehicles
•
another vehicle is quickly approaching your
car.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a
quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indica-
tor lamp on the door mirror on the affected side
illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver acti-
vates the direction indicator on the same side as
the warning, the indicator lamp will change over
from a constant glow to flashing with a more
intense light.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If
the car is overtaken on both sides at the
same time then both lamps illuminate.
WARNING
•
The BLIS function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
The responsibility for changing lanes
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
•
BLIS is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
Related information
•
Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 351)
•
Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351)
•
Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
56
Blind Spot Information Systems
57
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
351
Activate/deactivate BLIS*
The BLIS
58
function can be activated/deacti-
vated.
Location of BLIS lamp
59
.
Indicator lamp
The function is activated/deactivated using
the BLIS button in the centre display's func-
tion view.
–
Tap on the BLIS button in function view.
> BLIS is activated/deactivated - a green/
grey indicator is shown in the button.
If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the
function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator
lamps blinking once.
If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was
switched off, it will continue to be deactivated
when the engine is next started and no indicator
lights will then be illuminated.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351)
•
Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
Limitations of BLIS*
The BLIS
60
function may have limitations in cer-
tain situations.
Examples of limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
•
The BLIS function is automatically deacti-
vated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is con-
nected to the car's electrical system.
•
For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
WARNING
•
BLIS does not work on sharp bends.
•
BLIS does not work when the car is
reversing.
Sensors
The sensors for BLIS are located inside each
corner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) func-
tion.
58
Blind Spot Information
59
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
60
Blind Spot Information
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
352
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
61
.
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 351)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
•
Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
•
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)
Cross Traffic Alert*
CTA
62
is a driver support that supplements
BLIS
63
and is designed to warn of traffic cross-
ing behind the car when it is reversing.
Principle of CTA.
CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the
approach of crossing traffic during reversing,
such as when reversing out of a parking space.
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In
favourable conditions it may also be able to
detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and
pedestrians.
CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if
reverse gear has been selected.
61
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
353
If CTA has sensed that something is approaching
from the side, this is also indicated with:
•
an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the
left-hand or right-hand speaker according to
the direction from which the object
approaches.
•
an illuminated icon in the PAS
64
graphics on
the screen.
•
an icon on the Park assist camera top view.
Illuminated icon for CTA in the PAS graphics on the
screen
65
.
WARNING
•
The Cross Traffic Alert function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The responsibility for reversing the car
safely and using good judgement always
rests with the driver.
•
Cross Traffic Alert is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Related information
•
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353)
•
Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
•
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
Park Assist* (p. 378)
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic
Alert*
The CTA
66
function can be deactivated.
On/Off
Press the Cross Traffic Alert
button in the centre display's
function view.
•
GREEN button indication - CTA is activated.
•
GREY button indication - CTA is deactivated.
CTA is activated automatically each time the
engine is started.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
•
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 354)
•
Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
62
Cross Traffic Alert
63
Blind Spot Information
64
Park Assist
65
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
354
Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert
The CTA
67
function may have limitations in cer-
tain situations.
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations
but has some limitations. For example, the CTA
sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehi-
cles or obstructing obstacles.
Here are some examples of situations where
CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and
approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind”
on one side.
Blind CTA sector.
Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”.
However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it
makes with the obstructing vehicle/object
changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases.
Examples of further limitations:
•
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
reduce the functions and deactivate alerts.
•
CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is connected to the
car's electrical system.
•
For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle
rack, luggage carrier or similar should be
mounted on the car's towbar.
Sensors
The sensors for CTA are located inside each cor-
ner of the rear wing/bumper. The sensors are
also used by the BLIS
68
function.
Keep the surface clean - on both the left and right-hand
sides of the car
69
.
•
To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces
in front of the sensors must be kept clean.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the
area of the sensors.
66
Cross Traffic Alert
67
Cross Traffic Alert
68
Blind Spot Information
69
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
355
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions' com-
ponents or repainting the bumpers must only
be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
•
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353)
•
Messages for BLIS* and Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 356)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
356
Messages for BLIS* and Cross
Traffic Alert*
A number of messages regarding BLIS
70
and/or
CTA
71
can be shown in the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Message Specification
Blind spot sensor
Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Blind spot system off
Trailer attached
BLIS and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
•
Activate/deactivate BLIS* (p. 351)
•
Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
•
Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert*
(p. 353)
•
Managing messages in the driver display and
the centre display (p. 107)
70
Blind Spot Information
71
Cross Traffic Alert
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
357
Road Sign Information*
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
72
)
helps the driver to observe speed-related road
signs and certain prohibition signs as the car
passes them.
Examples of readable signs
73
.
RSI provides information about such things as
current speed, when a motorway or road is star-
ting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or
when the direction of travel is one-way.
In the case where both a sign for motorway/dual
carriageway and a sign for the speed limit are
passed, RSI selects to show a sign symbol for
motorway/dual carriageway. The new speed limit
is shown directly with a line in the driver display's
speed scale.
WARNING
•
The Road Sign Information function is
supplementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Road Sign Information is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Activate/deactivate RSI
The Road Sign Information function is selectable
- the driver can select On or Off.
Press the
Road Sign
Information button in the cen-
tre display's function view.
•
GREEN button indication - RSI is activated.
•
GREY button indication - RSI is deactivated.
Related information
•
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 358)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 360)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 361)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
72
Road Sign Information
73
Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
358
Sign display with Road Sign
Information
The Road Sign Information function (RSI
74
) reg-
isters and shows road signs in different ways
depending on the sign and the situation.
Example
75
of detected speed information.
When RSI detects a road sign with an imposed
speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a
symbol plus an indication in red on the speedom-
eter.
An additional
75
sign, such as
"no overtaking", may be shown
together with the speed limit
symbol.
If the driver enters a road
marked with a no-entry sign at
the roadside, the symbol for
this sign
75
flashes on and off
on the driver display as a warn-
ing.
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*
then information from the map is also used to
determine whether the car is being driven in the
wrong direction.
The driver can also get an acoustic warning when
driving towards a no-entry entrance if the
Audio
Warning function is activated - see the heading
"Activating/deactivating the acoustic warning" in
the section "Activating/deactivating Road Sign
Information".
Speed limit or end of motorway
When RSI detects an "indirect speed limit sign"
stating the end of the current speed limit - e.g. at
the end of a motorway - a symbol appears with
the corresponding road sign in the driver's dis-
play.
Example of indirect speed limit sign
75
:
End of all restrictions.
End of motorway.
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
10-30 seconds and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Changed speed limit
When passing a direct speed limit sign when a
speed limit changes, a symbol with the corres-
ponding road sign appears in the driver's display.
Example of direct speed limit
sign
75
.
74
Road Sign Information
75
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
359
The driver display symbol extinguishes after
about 5 minutes and remains so until the next
speed related sign is passed.
Sensus Navigation
If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation,
speed information is read from the navigation
unit in the following cases:
•
On detection of signs that indirectly indicate
a speed limit, such as motorway, dual car-
riageway and city limit signs.
•
If a previously detected speed sign is
assumed not to apply any longer, but no new
sign has been detected.
NOTE
If a downloaded third-party app is used for
navigation then there is no support for speed-
related information.
Additional signs
Examples of additional signs
75
.
Sometimes different speed limits are signed for
the same road - an additional sign then indicates
the circumstances under which the different
speeds apply. The road section may be particu-
larly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog,
for example.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
If the car has a trailer attached and you pass a
speed sign with the additional sign “trailer”, the
indicated speed will appear on the driver display.
Some speed limits only apply
after a certain distance or at a
certain time of day. The driver's
attention is drawn to this fact
by means of a symbol for an
additional sign below the speed
symbol. The additional symbol
in the driver display will show either “DIST” or
“TIME”.
A symbol for additional sign in
the form of an empty frame
under the driver display's speed
symbol
75
means that the RSI
has detected an additional sign
with supplementary information
for the current speed limit.
Sign for "School" and "Children at play"
If the warning sign
75
for
"School" or "Children at play"
is included in the satellite navi-
gator's map data
76
, the driver
display shows a sign of this
type.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 360)
75
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples.
76
Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
360
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 361)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
Road Sign Information with Speed
Warning and Settings
The subfunction
Speed Limit Warning for
RSI
77
is selectable - the driver can select On or
Off.
Speed Limit Warning alerts the driver when the
applicable speed limit or set "speed limit" is
exceeded. The warning is repeated once if the
driver does not reduce speed.
The speed warning is given by
the driver display symbol
78
showing the applicable maxi-
mum permitted speed tempo-
rarily flashing when this speed
is exceeded.
A speed warning is always
given if the speed limit is
exceeded in connection with
speed camera information.
Activating/deactivating speed warnings
The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is acti-
vated as follows:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
(see description for "speed limit selector "
under following heading)
77
Road Sign Information
78
Road signs are market-dependent - the illustration in these instructions only show one example.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
361
Adjust the limit for Speed Warning
The driver can select to receive a warning at a
lower or higher speed than the signed speed.
Select limit for speed warning as follows:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select
Speed Limit Warning.
> The function is activated and a speed limit
selector appears.
3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by press-
ing the up/down arrows on the screen.
Note that the function does not
give any consideration to
selected limit adjustment when
the driver display shows the
speed camera symbol.
Acoustic warning On/Off
It is also possible to receive an acoustic warning
in connection with Speed Warning.
Change setting for acoustic warning as follows:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe
Road Sign Information in the centre
display's top view.
2.
Select/deselect
Audio Warning to activate/
switch off the acoustic warning.
With the
Audio Warning function activated, the
driver is also warned when driving towards one-
way traffic/no-entry entrance.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 358)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 361)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
Road Sign Information with Speed
Camera Information*
A car equipped with RSI
79
and Sensus
Navigation* can provide information on an
upcoming speed camera in the driver display.
Speed camera warning in the driver display
80
.
If the car exceeds a detected
speed limit, the driver can be
warned when the car
approaches a speed camera,
provided that the navigation
maps for the area in question
contain information on speed
cameras.
For more information about Speed warnings in
connection with speed cameras - see section
"Road Sign Information with Speed Warning and
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
362
Settings" and "Road Sign Information limita-
tions".
NOTE
Information about speed cameras in the navi-
gation maps is not available for all markets/
areas.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 358)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 360)
•
Limitations of Road Sign Information*
(p. 362)
Limitations of Road Sign
Information*
The Road Sign Information (RSI
81
) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
Examples of what can reduce the RSI are as fol-
lows:
•
Faded signs
•
Signs positioned on bends
•
Rotated or damaged signs
•
Signs positioned high above the roadway
•
Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned
signs
•
signs completely or partly covered with frost,
snow and/or dirt
•
digital road maps
82
are out-of-date, inaccu-
rate or have no speed information
83
.
NOTE
The RSI function may interpret some types of
bicycle rack, connected to the electrical
socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In
such cases, the driver display may show incor-
rect speed information.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
•
Road Sign Information* (p. 357)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Warning
and Settings (p. 360)
•
Sign display with Road Sign Information
(p. 358)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
79
Road Sign Information
80
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model and market/area.
81
Road Sign Information
82
In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation.
83
Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
363
Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is
intended to attract the driver's attention when he
or she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if the
driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep.
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deterio-
rating driving ability and it is primarily intended for
major roads. The function is not intended for city
traffic.
The function is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as
the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph).
A camera detects the edge markings painted on
the carriageway and compares the alignment of
the road with the driver’s steering wheel move-
ments.
When driving behaviour starts
to become inconsistent, the
driver is alerted by this symbol
in the driver display, together
with the text message
Time
for a break soon?.
If driving behaviour does not improve but
becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is
alerted by the same symbol in the driver display,
combined with an acoustic signal and the text
message
Time to take a break.
If the
Rest Stop Guidance function is activated
in Sensus Navigation*, suggestions for a suitable
location for a break are also shown with the
Time to take a break warning.
The warnings are repeated after a time if driving
behaviour has not improved.
WARNING
•
The Driver Alert Control function is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
facilitate driving and make it safer – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Driver Alert Control should not be used to
extend a period of driving. The driver
should instead plan for breaks at regular
intervals and make sure they are well
rested.
•
Driver Alert Control is not a substitute for
the driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
WARNING
An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be
taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often
not aware of his/her own condition.
If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued:
•
Stop the car safely as soon as possible
and rest.
Studies have shown that it is just as danger-
ous to drive while tired as it is to drive under
the influence of alcohol or other stimulants.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
364
Related information
•
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 364)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365)
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert
Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be
activated/deactivated.
On/Off
To change settings in DAC:
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
3.
Select/deselect
Alertness Warning to acti-
vate/deactivate DAC.
Select rest stop guidance in the event
of a warning
It is possible to select whether rest stop guid-
ance shall be activated or deactivated. With the
guidance activated, a suggestion of a suitable
rest stop is shown automatically at the same time
as DAC gives a warning.
To select Rest Stop Guidance:
1.
Press
Settings in the centre display's top
view.
2.
Select
My Car IntelliSafe Driver Alert
Control
3.
Select/deselect
Rest Stop Guidance to
activate/deactivate the function.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
•
Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
365
Limitations of Driver Alert Control
The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may
have limitations in certain situations.
In some cases the system may issue a warning
despite driving ability not deteriorating, for exam-
ple:
•
in strong side winds
•
on rutted road surfaces.
WARNING
In some cases, driving behaviour is not affec-
ted despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using
the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the
driver not getting a warning from DAC.
It is therefore important to always stop and
take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue,
whether the DAC function ha given a warning
or not.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
•
Driver Alert Control (p. 363)
•
Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control
(p. 364)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
Lane Keeping Aid
The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
84
) is
to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car
accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways
and similar major routes.
Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its
lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the
steering wheel.
Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed
range 65-200 km/h (40-125 mph) on roads with
clearly visible side lines.
On narrow roads the function may be unavailable,
in which case it goes into standby mode. The
function becomes available again when the road
is wide enough.
A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
366
Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane.
Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations
85
.
Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in
accordance with the following:
•
Assist
86
activated: When the car is
approaching a lane line, LKA will actively
steer the car back into its lane by applying a
slight torque to the steering wheel.
•
Warning
86
activated: If the car is about to
cross a lane line, the driver is warned by
means of vibrations in the steering wheel.
NOTE
When a direction indicator is switched on,
there are no steering corrections or alerts
from Lane assistance.
WARNING
•
The Lane Keeping Aid function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Steering assistance
In order for LKA to function, the driver’s hands
must be on the steering wheel. The system moni-
tors this continuously.
If the driver does not keep
his/her hands on the steering
wheel, the driver display shows
this symbol and the following
message, to prompt the driver
to actively steer the car:
•
Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering
84
Lane Keeping Aid
85
The steering wheel vibration varies - the longer the car remains outside the lane lines, the longer the vibration.
86
See the heading "Assistance alternatives for LKA" in the section "Activating/Deactivating Lane Keeping Aid".
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
367
If the driver does not then start to steer, the sym-
bol is shown again, combined with a warning
sound and this message:
•
Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering
applied
If the driver then still does not follow the prompt
to start steering, LKA is set in standby mode -
the function will then be unavailable until the
driver starts to steer the car again.
Lane assistance does not intervene
Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside
curves.
In some situations, lane assistance allows lane
lines to be crossed without intervening with either
steering assistance or a warning - e.g. when
using the direction indicators or cutting bends.
Limitations
In certain demanding conditions Lane assistance
may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In
such cases it is recommended to switch off this
function.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
road works
•
winter road conditions
•
poor road surface
•
a very “sporty” driving style
•
poor weather with reduced visibility
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane lines
•
roads with unclear or non-existent line mark-
ings.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
Related information
•
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 368)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 369)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
368
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping
Aid
The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA
87
) function is
selectable - the driver can select On or Off - and
certain subfunctions can be selected.
On/Off
Press the Lane Keeping Aid
button in the centre display's
function view.
•
GREEN button indication - LKA is activated.
•
GREY button indication - LKA is deactivated.
Select assistance option for LKA
The driver can select how LKA should react if the
car leaves its lane.
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
In the event of
Lane Keeping Aid Mode,
select how LKA should react:
•
Assist - the driver is given steering assis-
tance without a warning.
•
Both - the driver is given both a warning
and steering assistance.
•
Warning — warning to driver only.
Related information
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 369)
87
Lane Keeping Aid
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
369
Symbols and messages for lane
assistance
A number of symbols and messages regarding
Lane assistance (LKA
88
) can be shown on the
driver display.
Symbol in the driver display
Lane assistance is visualised by
symbols in the driver display
depending on the situation.
Here are some examples of
symbols and the situations in
which they are shown:
Available
Available — the lane lines in the symbol are white.
Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane
lines.
Unavailable
Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are grey.
The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines,
the speed is too low or the road is too narrow.
Indication of steering assistance/warning
Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the sym-
bol are in colour.
Lane assistance indicates that the system is giv-
ing a warning and/or attempting to steer the car
back into the lane.
88
Lane Keeping Aid
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
370
Symbols and messages
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Driver support system
Reduced functionality Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
Lane Keeping Aid
Apply steering
The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on
the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car.
Lane Keeping Aid
Standby until steering applied
LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 368)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
371
Assistance upon risk of collision
The
Collision Avoid. Assistance function is
designed to help the driver reduce the risk of the
car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or collid-
ing with another vehicle or obstacle by actively
steering the car back into its lane and/or swerv-
ing.
The Collision Avoid. Assistance function con-
sists of three subfunctions:
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision*
After automatic engagement, the driver display
indicates that this has occurred via a text mes-
sage:
•
Collision avoidance
assistance: Automatic intervention
NOTE
It is always the driver who decides how much
the car should steer – the car can never take
command.
Activating/deactivating Assistance in
the event of a collision risk
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to switch it off:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
ture
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Related information
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Symbols and messages for assistance upon
risk of collision (p. 372)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
372
Symbols and messages for
assistance upon risk of collision
A number of symbols and messages regarding
the function can be shown on the driver display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
Collision Avoid. Assistance
Automatic intervention
When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system
has been activated.
Windscreen sensor
Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual
The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
373
Steering assistance upon risk of
lane departure
The subfunction's task is to help the driver
reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the
road by actively steering the car back onto the
road.
The function is active within the speed range
65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
A camera scans the edges of the road and the
painted side markings. If the car is about to leave
the side of the road, the car is steered back onto
the road and if the steering intervention is not
enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also acti-
vated.
The function does not intervene however with
steering assistance or braking if the direction
indicators are used and if the function detects
that the driver is actively driving the car, activation
of the function will be delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates
that this has occurred via a text message:
•
Collision avoidance
assistance: Automatic intervention
Level of steering assistance
The function has two activation levels:
•
Steering assistance only
•
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Steering assistance only
Intervention with steering assistance.
Steering assistance with brake intervention
Intervention with steering assistance and braking.
Brake intervention helps in situations where
steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The
brake force is adapted automatically depending
on the situation at the time of road run-off.
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of run-off risk
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to switch it off:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
ture
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
374
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of running off the road
In certain demanding conditions the function may
have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such
cases it is recommended to switch off this func-
tion.
Examples of such conditions are:
•
road works
•
winter road conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surface
•
a very “sporty” driving style
•
poor weather with reduced visibility
•
roads with unclear or non-existent side mark-
ings
•
sharp edges or lines other than the lane's
side markings.
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" subfunction is supplementary
driver support intended to improve driving
safety – it cannot handle all situations in
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
•
The function cannot detect barriers, rails
or similar obstacles at the side of the
road.
•
"Steering assistance at risk of lane
departure" is not a substitute for the driv-
er's attention and judgement. The driver
is always responsible for ensuring the car
is driven in a safe manner, at the appro-
priate speed, with an appropriate distance
to other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
•
Symbols and messages for lane assistance
(p. 369)
•
Symbols and messages for assistance upon
risk of collision (p. 372)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
375
Steering assistance upon risk of
head-on collision
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is drifting into the
oncoming lane.
The function can assist by guiding the car back to its
own lane.
Oncoming vehicles
Your car
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
If the car is about to leave its own lane while an
oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same
time, the function can help the driver to steer the
car back into its own lane.
The function does not intervene with steering
assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if
the function detects that the driver is actively
driving the car, activation of the function will be
delayed.
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates
that this has occurred via a text message:
•
Collision avoidance
assistance: Automatic intervention
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of
oncoming collision" subfunction is sup-
plementary driver support intended to
improve driving safety – it cannot handle
all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance in the event of a collision
risk with oncoming
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to switch it off:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
ture
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
376
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of head-on collision
The function may have limited functionality in cer-
tain situations and fail to intervene:
•
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
•
on roads where the lane does not have clear
lane markings
•
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph).
Other demanding situations can include:
•
road works
•
winter road conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surface
•
a very “sporty” driving style
•
poor weather with reduced visibility.
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 368)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision* (p. 376)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
Steering assistance upon risk of
rear-end collision*
The subfunction can help a distracted driver who
does not notice that the car is about to leave its
own lane while an oncoming vehicle is
approaching at the same time, either from
behind or in the blind spot.
The function can assist by steering the car back to its
own lane.
Other vehicle in the blind spot
Your car
If the car is about to leave its own lane while
another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another
vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane
at the same time, the function can help the driver
to steer the car back into its own lane.
The function can even assist if the driver inten-
tionally changes lanes using direction indicators
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
377
without noticing that another vehicle is approach-
ing.
The function is active within the speed range
60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly
visible lane markings/lines.
After automatic engagement, the driver indicates
that this has occurred via a text message:
•
Collision avoidance
assistance: Automatic intervention
Activating/deactivating Steering
assistance upon risk of rear-end
collision
The function can be selected - the driver can
choose to have it On or Off.
Proceed as follows to switch it off:
1.
Select
Settings My Car IntelliSafe in
the centre display's top view.
2.
Deselect
Collision Avoidance Assistance.
> The function is then disengaged.
NOTE
When the Collision Avoid. Assistance
function is deactivated, all subfunctions are
switched off:
•
Steering assistance at risk of lane depar-
ture
•
Steering assistance at risk of oncoming
collision
•
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end
collision
Even though it is possible to deactivate the
function, it is advisable for the driver to always
have it activated since it improves driving
safety in most cases.
Limitations for steering assistance
upon risk of rear-end collision
In certain situations the function may have limited
functionality and fail to intervene e.g.:
•
for small vehicles, such as motorcycles
•
if the majority of the car has steered into the
adjacent lane
•
on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-exis-
tent lane markings
•
outside the speed range 60-140 km/h
(37-87 mph).
Other demanding situations can include:
•
road works
•
winter road conditions
•
narrow roads
•
poor road surface
•
a very “sporty” driving style
•
poor weather with reduced visibility.
WARNING
•
The "Steering assistance at risk of rear-
end collision" subfunction is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to improve
driving safety – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
Steering assistance is only activated if
there is a high risk of collision – you must
therefore never wait for the function to
intervene.
•
The function is not a substitute for the
driver's attention and judgement. The
driver is always responsible for ensuring
the car is driven in a safe manner, at the
appropriate speed, with an appropriate
distance to other vehicles, and in accord-
ance with current traffic rules and regula-
tions.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
378
NOTE
The function uses the car's camera unit,
which has some general limitations, see the
"Limitations for camera unit" section.
NOTE
The function uses the car's radar unit, which
has some general limitations, see the section
"Limitations for radar unit".
In addition to the camera and radar unit, the func-
tion uses the car's rear-facing radar, which has
certain general imitations that a driver should be
aware of - see section "Limitations for BLIS" for
more information.
Related information
•
Lane Keeping Aid (p. 365)
•
Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid
(p. 368)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of lane depar-
ture (p. 373)
•
Steering assistance upon risk of head-on
collision (p. 375)
•
Limitations of the camera unit (p. 333)
•
Limitations of the radar unit (p. 324)
•
Limitations of BLIS* (p. 351)
Park Assist*
Park Assist Pilot assists the driver when
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the
distance to obstacles through acoustic signals
combined with graphics on the centre display.
Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors.
The centre display shows an overview of the rela-
tionship between the car and detected obstacles.
The highlighted sector indicates the location of
the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a
highlighted sector box, the shorter the distance
between the car and detected obstacle.
The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the
faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the
audio system is muted automatically.
The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to
the sides is active when the car is moving but
stops after the car has been stationary for
approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obsta-
cles behind is also active when the car is station-
ary.
At a distance within 30 cm from an obstacle
behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant
and the active sensor's field closest to the car
symbol is filled.
The volume of the parking assistance signal can
be adjusted while the signal is sounding by
means of the [>II] knob on the centre console.
Adjustment can also be performed in the top
view's
Settings menu option.
NOTE
•
Acoustic warnings are only given for
objects directly on the vehicle's route.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
379
WARNING
•
The Park Assist function is supplemen-
tary driver support intended to facilitate
driving and make it safer – it cannot han-
dle all situations in all traffic, weather and
road conditions.
•
The parking sensors have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
•
The Park Assist system is not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Backwards
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The sensors for reverse are activated if the car
rolls backward without a gear engaged or when
the gear lever is moved to reverse position.
The measuring range starts approx. 1.5 metres
( 5 ft) behind the car.
When reversing with a hitched trailer, parking
assistance backward is deactivated automatically.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike car-
rier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine
trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to
be switched off manually in order that the
sensors do not react to them.
Along the sides
Parking assistance side sensors are activated
automatically when the engine is started. They
are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 30 cm (1 ft)
from the sides. The acoustic signal for obstacles
on the sides comes from the side loudspeakers.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
380
Forwards
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary
depending on car model.
The front parking assistance sensors are acti-
vated automatically when the engine is started.
The front sensors are active at speeds
below 10 km/h (6 mph).
The measuring range starts approx. 80 cm
(2.5 ft) in front of the car.
NOTE
Parking assistance is deactivated when the
parking brake is applied or P mode is
selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
IMPORTANT
When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember
that these must not obscure the sensors - the
auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an
obstacle.
Related information
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 380)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
•
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 383)
•
Park assist camera* (p. 384)
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
Activating/deactivating Park Assist
Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/
deactivated.
On/Off
The front and side parking assistance sensors
are activated automatically when the engine is
started. The rear sensors activate if the car rolls
backwards or if reverse gear in engaged.
The function is activated/deac-
tivated in function view in the
centre display.
Park Assist Pilot can also be
activated/deactivated from the
camera views.
–
Tap on the Park Assist button in function
view.
> Park Assist Pilot is activated/deactivated,
a GREEN/GREY indicator is displayed in
the button.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 378)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
•
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 383)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
381
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot function cannot detect
everything in all situations and may therefore
have limited functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
cles.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low
barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and
are then temporarily not detected by the sen-
sors - the pulsating tone may then unexpect-
edly stop instead of changing over to the
expected constant tone.
The sensors cannot detect high objects, such
as projecting loading docks.
•
In such situations, pay extra attention and
manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly
slowly or stop the current parking
manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of
damage to vehicles or other objects since
information from the sensors is not
always reliable in such situations.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance
system may produce incorrect warning sig-
nals that are caused by external sound
sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies
that the system works with.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust
noises from motorcycles, etc.
NOTE
Since a towbar is configured with the car's
electrical system, towbar protrusion is
included when the function measures the dis-
tance to an object behind the car.
Maintenance
Location of the parking sensors
89
.
For Park Assist Pilot to work optimally, its sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car
shampoo.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may
cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or
no function.
89
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
383
Symbols and messages for Park
Assist Pilot*
Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can
be shown in the driver display and/or the centre
display.
The following table shows some examples.
Symbol Message Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for
obstacles/objects.
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning nee-
ded
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 378)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 380)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
384
Park assist camera*
The park assist camera helps the driver when
manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obsta-
cles with a camera image and graphics in the
centre display.
Overview
The parking assistance camera is a support func-
tion which is activated automatically when reverse
gear is selected or manually via the centre dis-
play.
Example of camera view
90
.
Zoom
91
- zoom in/out
360° view* - activate/deactivate all cameras
PAS* - activates/deactivates Park Assist
Pilot
Lines - activates/deactivates park assist
lines
Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar
assist line*
92
CTA* - activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert
WARNING
•
The parking camera function is supple-
mentary driver support intended to facili-
tate driving and make it safer – it cannot
handle all situations in all traffic, weather
and road conditions.
•
The parking cameras have blind spots
where obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
•
Objects/obstacles on the display screen
may be closer to the car than they appear
to be on the screen.
•
The parking cameras are not a substitute
for the driver's attention and judgement.
The driver is always responsible for
ensuring the car is driven in a safe man-
ner, at the appropriate speed, with an
appropriate distance to other vehicles,
and in accordance with current traffic
rules and regulations.
Camera views
The function can display a composite 360° view
and separate views for each of the four cameras:
rear, front, left or right camera view.
90
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
91
The park assist lines are switched off when zooming in.
92
Not available in all markets.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
385
360° view*
The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approxi-
mate coverage area.
The function activates all parking cameras,
whereupon the four sides of the car are shown
simultaneously in the centre display, which helps
the driver to observe what is around the car when
manoeuvring at slow speeds.
From the 360° view, each camera view can be
activated separately:
•
Press the screen for the desired “field of
vision” of the camera, e.g. in front of/above
the front camera.
The cameras that are active are indicated at the
top of the screen in the selected view.
If the car is also equipped with
Park Assist
System
* then distance to detected obstacles is
illustrated with fields in different colours.
The cameras can be activated automatically or
manually, see article "Starting the Park assist
camera".
Backwards
The backwards-facing camera
90
is fitted above the reg-
istration plate.
The backward-facing camera shows a wide area
behind the car. For certain models, part of the
bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in
some cases.
Objects shown in the centre display may appear
slightly tilted — this is normal.
Forwards
The forwards parking camera
90
is located in the grille.
The front camera can be helpful on an exit road
with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there
are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to
25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front
camera is switched off.
If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and
the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within
1 minute after the forward-facing camera has
been extinguished, the camera is reactivated.
90
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
386
The sides
The side cameras
90
are positioned in each door mirror.
The side cameras show what is along each side
of the car.
Related information
•
Park assist lines and fields for the park assist
camera* (p. 386)
•
Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 388)
•
Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 389)
•
Park Assist* (p. 378)
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
•
Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 352)
Park assist lines and fields for the
park assist camera*
The Park assist cameras indicate the position of
the car in relation to its surroundings by display-
ing lines on the screen.
Park assist lines
Example
93
of park assist lines.
Park assist lines show the intended route for the
car's external dimensions with the current steer-
ing wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking,
reversing into tight spaces and when connecting
a trailer.
The lines on the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and respond
directly to steering wheel movements, showing
the driver the path the car will take - also when
the car is turning.
These park assist lines include the car's most
protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and
corners.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is not
connected electrically to the car, the park
assist lines on the display show the route
the car will take – not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no park assist lines
when a trailer is connected electrically to
the car's electrical system.
•
Park assist lines are not shown when
zooming in.
90
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
93
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
387
IMPORTANT
•
Remember, that with the rear camera
view selected, the monitor only displays
the area behind the car. Be aware of the
sides and front of the car when manoeu-
vring in reverse.
•
The same applies vice versa - note what
happens to the rear parts of the car when
the front camera view is selected.
•
Note that the park assist lines show the
shortest route. Therefore, pay extra
attention to the car's sides so that they
do not go against/over something when
the steering wheel is turned when driving
forward or that the front sweeps against/
over something when the steering wheel
is turned when reversing.
Park assist lines in 360° view*
360° view with park assist lines
93
.
With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown
behind, in front of and at the side of the car
(depending on the direction of travel):
•
When driving forwards: Front lines
•
When reversing: Side lines and reversing
lines.
With front or rear camera selected, the park
assist lines appear regardless of the car's direc-
tion of travel.
With one side camera selected, the park assist
lines only appear when reversing.
Towbar assist line*
Towbar with park assist line
93
.
Towbar - activates the towbar assist line.
Zoom - zoom in/out.
The camera can facilitate connecting up to a
trailer by showing an assist line representing the
towbar's intended "path" to the trailer.
1.
Press
Towbar (1).
> The park assist lines for the towbar's
intended "path" appear - the car's park
assist lines disappear simultaneously.
Park assist lines for both car and towbar
cannot be shown at the same time.
2.
Press
Zoom (2) when a more precise
manoeuvring is required.
> The camera view zooms in.
93
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
388
Sensor field from Parking assistance*
If the car is equipped with Parking assistance
then the distance is shown in the 360° view with
coloured fields for each sensor that registers an
obstacle.
Sensor fields backwards and forwards
The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car
symbol
93
.
The fields for the front and reversing sensors
change colour as the distance to the obstacle
decreases — from yellow through orange to red.
Colours of front and
reversing fields
Distance (metres)
Yellow 0,6–1,5
Orange 0,4–0,6
Red 0–0,4
Sensor field to the sides
The side fields are only shown in orange.
Colour of side fields Distance (metres)
Orange 0–0.3
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 384)
•
Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 388)
•
Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 389)
Starting the Park assist camera*
The park assist camera starts automatically
when reverse gear is engaged or manually with
one of the centre display's function buttons.
Camera view when reversing
When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows
the 360° view if it or any of the side views was
the last used camera view, otherwise the rear
view is shown.
Camera view for manual camera start
Start the parking camera with
this button in the centre dis-
play's function view.
The screen initially shows the last used camera
view. However, after each engine start, the previ-
ously shown side view is replaced by the 360°
view and the previously shown zoomed rear view
is replaced by the rear view.
Automatic deactivation of camera
The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph)
to avoid distracting the driver - it reactivates auto-
matically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph)
within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed
has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph).
93
The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
389
Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h
(9 mph) and not reactivated.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 384)
•
Park assist lines and fields for the park assist
camera* (p. 386)
•
Limitations for park assist camera* (p. 389)
Limitations for park assist camera*
The park assist camera cannot detect everything
in all situations and may therefore have limited
functionality.
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of the park assist camera's limitations:
WARNING
Pay additional attention
while reversing when this
symbol is shown if a trailer,
bicycle rack or similar is
mounted and electrically
connected to the car.
The symbol indicates that
the parking assistance sensors rearward are
switched off and will not warn of any obsta-
cles.
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on
the rear of the car could obscure the cam-
era's view.
Blind sectors
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only
looks like a relatively small part of the image is
obscured, it could be a relatively large sector that
is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go
undetected until the car is very close to the
obstacle.
There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of
vision.
In 360° view obstacles/objects can “vanish” in
the gaps between the individual cameras.
Defective camera
If a camera sector is black and
contains this symbol then it
means that the camera is out
of order. The following illustra-
tion shows an example.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
390
The car's left-hand camera is out of order.
Black camera sector
A black camera sector is also shown in the fol-
lowing instances, but then without the symbol for
defective camera:
•
open door
•
open tailgate
•
folded-in door mirror.
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions. Because
of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness
and quality. Poor light conditions can result in
reduced image quality.
Maintenance
Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm
water and car shampoo - be careful not to
scratch the lenses.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow and
ice to ensure optimum function. This is partic-
ularly important in poor light.
Related information
•
Park assist camera* (p. 384)
•
Park assist lines and fields for the park assist
camera* (p. 386)
•
Starting the Park assist camera* (p. 388)
•
Symbols and messages for Park assist cam-
era* (p. 391)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
391
Symbols and messages for Park
assist camera*
Symbols and messages for Park assist camera
can be shown in the driver display and/or the
centre display.
The following table shows examples.
Symbol Message Specification
The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and
field marks for obstacles/objects.
The camera is disengaged.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
392
Symbol Message Specification
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning
needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist* (p. 378)
•
Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot*
(p. 380)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 381)
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
393
Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
94
) helps the driver to park
in or leave a parking space.
PAP checks first if a space is sufficiently big and
thereafter helps the driver to turn the steering
wheel and manoeuvre the car into the space.
The centre display indicates with symbols, graph-
ics and text the various operations to be carried
out and when to do so.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving and
make it safer – it cannot handle all situa-
tions in all traffic, weather and road condi-
tions.
•
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
•
keep a close watch around the car
•
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
•
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
•
control and maintain a safe speed
•
brake and stop.
Types of parking situations
PAP can be used for the following different park-
ing situations.
Parallel parking
The principal of parallel parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned in the space by means
of driving forward/backward.
Using the
Park Out function, a parallel-parked
car can also be assisted by PAP to leave the
parking space - see the heading "Leaving a park-
ing space" in the section "Parking with Park
Assist Pilot".
94
Park Assist Pilot
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
394
Perpendicular parking
Principle for perpendicular parking.
The PAP function parks the car using the follow-
ing steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space and then
positioned in the space by means of driving
forward/backward.
NOTE
A perpendicular-parked car cannot be assis-
ted by the PAP
Park Out function to leave a
parking space - the function must only be
used for a parallel-parked car.
Related information
•
Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 397)
•
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
Parking with Park Assist Pilot*
Park Assist Pilot (PAP
95
) helps the driver park
via three steps. The function can also help the
driver to leave a parking space.
NOTE
The PAP function measures the space and
steers the car - the driver's task is to:
•
keep a close watch around the car
•
follow the instructions in the centre dis-
play
•
select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping"
sound indicates when the driver should
change gear
•
control and maintain a safe speed
•
brake and stop.
Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the cen-
tre display's screen when the different steps are
to be performed.
PAP can be activated if the following criteria are
met once the engine has been started:
•
No trailer is attached to the car
•
Speed must be lower than 30 km/h
(20 mph).
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
395
NOTE
The distance between the car and parking
spaces should be 0.5-1.5 metres (1.6-5.0 ft)
while PAP is searching for a parking space.
Parking
PAP parks the car using the following steps:
1. A parking space is identified and measured.
2. The car is reversed into the space.
3. The car is positioned into the space - the
system may then request that the driver
changes gear.
Finding and measuring parking spaces
The function can be activated
in the centre display's function
view.
It can also be accessed from
the camera views.
Principle for parallel parking.
Principle for perpendicular parking.
Proceed as follows:
1. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for
parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for
perpendicular parking.
2.
Tap on the
Park In button in function view.
> PAP searches for a parking space and
checks whether it is big enough.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when the
graphic and message on the centre display
state that a suitable parking space has been
found.
> A pop-up window is shown.
4.
Select
Parallel parking or Perpendicular
parking and select reverse gear.
NOTE
PAP searches the area for parking, displays
instructions and guides the car in on its pas-
senger side. But if required the car can also
be parked on the driver's side of the street:
•
Activate the direction indicator to the
driver's side - then the system searches
for a parking space on that side of the
car instead.
95
Park Assist Pilot
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
396
Reversing in to the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Perform the following to reverse the car into the
parking space:
1. Check that the area behind the car is clear,
then engage reverse gear.
2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching
the steering wheel - and no faster than
7 km/h (4 mph).
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
NOTE
•
Keep your hands away from the steering
wheel when the PAP function is acti-
vated.
•
Make sure that the steering wheel is not
hindered in any way and can rotate freely.
•
To achieve optimum results - wait until
the steering wheel is fully turned before
starting to drive backward/forward.
Positioning the car in the parking space
Parallel.
Perpendicular.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Move the gear selector into the D position,
wait until the steering wheel has been turned
and drive slowly forward
DRIVER SUPPORT
}}
* Option/accessory.
397
2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly back-
wards.
4. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display.
The function is deactivated automatically and the
graphics and message show that parking is com-
plete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct
the car’s position. Only the driver can determine
whether the car is properly parked.
IMPORTANT
The warning distance is shorter when the
sensors are used by PAP compared with
when Park Assist uses the sensors.
Leaving a parking space
NOTE
When leaving a parking space, the Park Out
function must only be used for a parallel-
parked car - it does not work for a perpendic-
ular-parked car.
The Park Out function is acti-
vated in the centre display's
function view.
Proceed as follows:
1.
Tap on the
Park Out button in function view.
2. Use the direction indicator to select the
direction in which the car should leave the
parking space.
3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed
by the graphic and message on the centre
display - follow the instructions in the same
way as for the parking procedure.
Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when
the function is completed - the driver may then
need to turn the steering wheel back to the maxi-
mum steering angle in order to leave the parking
space.
If PAP considers that the driver can leave the
parking space without any extra manoeuvring
then the function will be stopped, even if the
driver may consider that the car is still in the
parking space.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 397)
•
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot*
The Park Assist Pilot (PAP
96
) function cannot
detect everything in all situations and may there-
fore have limited functionality.
WARNING
•
The PAP function is supplementary driver
support intended to facilitate driving – it
cannot handle all situations in all traffic,
weather and road conditions.
•
Be particularly aware of people and ani-
mals near the car.
•
Bear in mind that the front of the car may
swing out towards oncoming traffic dur-
ing the parking manoeuvre.
•
Objects situated higher than the sensor
detection area are not included when cal-
culating the parking manoeuvre, which
could cause PAP to swing into the park-
ing space too early – such parking
spaces should be avoided for this reason.
•
PAP is not a substitute for the driver's
attention and judgement. The driver is
always responsible for ensuring the car is
driven in a safe manner, at the appropri-
ate speed, with an appropriate distance to
other vehicles, and in accordance with
current traffic rules and regulations.
||
DRIVER SUPPORT
398
A driver should be aware about the following
examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations:
Parking is discontinued
A parking sequence will be discontinued:
•
if the driver moves the steering wheel
•
if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h
(4 mph)
•
if the driver presses
Cancel in the centre
display
•
when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic
stability control are engaged - e.g. when a
wheel loses grip on a slippery road.
Where applicable, a message in the centre dis-
play states the reason for a parking sequence
being discontinued.
IMPORTANT
Under certain circumstances, PAP is unable
to find parking spaces - one reason for this
may be the fact that there is interference with
the sensors from external sound sources
which emit the same ultrasound frequencies
as those with which the system works.
Examples of such sources include horns, wet
tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and
exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will
reduce their function and may prevent meas-
urement.
Driver responsibility
The driver should bear in mind that the PAP is an
aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function.
The driver must therefore be prepared to inter-
rupt a parking step.
There are also a few details to bear in mind while
parking, e.g.:
•
PAP bases itself on the locations of vehicles
already parked nearby - if they are inap-
propriately parked, your own car's tyres and
wheel rims may be damaged by contact with
the kerb.
•
PAP is designed for parking on straight
streets - not sharp curves or bends. For this
reason, make sure the car is parallel to the
parking space when PAP measures the
space.
•
Parking spaces on narrow streets are not
always feasible, since the space required for
manoeuvring may not be sufficient.
•
The driver is responsible for determining
whether the space selected by PAP is suita-
ble for parking.
•
Use approved tyres
97
with the correct tyre
pressure - this affects the ability of PAP to
park the car.
•
Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to
measure the parking space incorrectly.
•
Do not use PAP if snow chains or a spare
wheel are fitted.
•
Do not use PAP if cargo items are protruding
from the car.
•
Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed
or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is
protruding more than other parked cars.
IMPORTANT
Changing to another approved wheel rim
and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed
tyre circumference, which means that the
PAP system's parameters may then need to
be updated. Consult a workshop - an author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended.
96
Park Assist Pilot
97
"Approved tyres" refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
399
Maintenance
PAP sensor locations
98
.
For the PAP function to work correctly, its sen-
sors must be cleaned regularly with water and car
shampoo.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
•
Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394)
•
Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 400)
98
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
DRIVER SUPPORT
* Option/accessory.
400
Messages for Park Assist Pilot*
Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP
99
) can be
shown in the driver display and/or the centre dis-
play.
The following table shows examples.
Message Specification
Park Assist System
Sensors blocked, cleaning needed
One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible.
Park Assist System
Unavailable Service required
The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended.
A text message can be cleared by briefly press-
ing the
button, located in the centre of the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Related information
•
Park Assist Pilot* (p. 393)
•
Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394)
•
Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 397)
99
Park Assist Pilot
STARTING AND DRIVING
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
402
Alcohol lock*
The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the
car from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence of
alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
The car has an interface for the electrical con-
nection of the different makes and models of
alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The inter-
face facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives
the option of an integrated function including
messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's
main display. For information about a specific
alcohol lock, please refer to its owner's manual.
WARNING
The alcohol lock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Bypass of the alcohol lock*
In the event of an emergency situation or the
alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car.
For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the sep-
arate instructions for that specific lock.
Activating the bypass function (Bypass)
NOTE
All bypass activation is logged and saved in
the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit.
It is not possible to undo a bypass.
The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass
instead?, is shown in the screen:
–
Select Bypass by pressing once on the O
button on the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad.
> The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the
car can be started.
The number of bypasses possible before service
is required is selected during alcohol lock instal-
lation.
Related information
•
Before starting the engine with the alcohol
lock (p. 402)
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
Before starting the engine with the
alcohol lock
The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
To bear in mind
In order to obtain correct function and as accu-
rate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes
before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alco-
hol in the washer fluid may result in an incor-
rect measurement result.
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
Related information
•
Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 402)
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
403
Ignition positions
The car's electrical system can be set in different
levels/positions and in this way make the differ-
ent functions available.
In order to facilitate the use of a limited number
of functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different
levels - 0, I and II. These levels are described
with the denomination "ignition position"
throughout the owner's manual.
The following table shows the functions available
in each ignition position/level:
Level Functions
0
•
Odometer, clock and temperature
gauge are illuminated.
•
The power seats* can be adjusted.
•
The power windows can be used.
•
The centre display is started and
can be used.
•
The infotainment system can be
used.
The functions are time-controlled in
this ignition position and are switched
off automatically after a period of time.
I
•
Panorama roof, power windows,
12V socket in the passenger com-
partment, Bluetooth, navigation,
phone, ventilation fan and wind-
screen wipers can be used.
•
Power seats can be adjusted.
•
12 V sockets in the cargo area
can be used.
•
The infotainment system is started
automatically if it was running
when the car was left.
Power is taken from the battery in
this ignition position.
Level Functions
II
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate
for 5 seconds.
•
Several other systems are acti-
vated. However, heating in seat
cushions and the rear window can
only be activated after the car has
been started.
This ignition position consumes a
lot of current from the battery and
should therefore be avoided!
Selecting ignition position
Start knob in the tunnel console.
•
Ignition position 0 - Unlock the car and
store the remote control key inside the car.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
404
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or
the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear
changing, when these ignition positions are to
be selected.
•
Ignition position I - Turn the start knob
clockwise and release it. The control auto-
matically returns to its starting position.
•
Ignition position II - Turn the start knob
clockwise and hold it in position for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
•
Back to ignition position 0 - To return to
ignition position 0 from position I and II -
Turn the start knob clockwise and release.
The control automatically returns to its star-
ting position.
Related information
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
•
Switching off the car (p. 405)
•
Driver display (p. 88)
Starting the car
The car is started using the start knob in the tun-
nel console when the remote control key is in
the passenger compartment.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
WARNING
Before starting:
•
Fasten the seatbelt.
•
Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mir-
rors.
•
Make sure that the brake pedal can be
fully depressed.
The remote control key is not physically used
when starting the car since it is equipped with
support for keyless starting (Passive start).
To start the car:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car. For cars with Passive Start, the key
needs to be located in the front part of the
passenger compartment. With keyless lock-
ing/unlocking of the car*, the key can be
anywhere in the car.
2.
Hold the brake pedal depressed
1
fully. For
cars with automatic gear changing, make
sure that gear position P or N is selected.
For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure
that the gear lever is in neutral position or
that the clutch pedal is depressed.
3. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it.
The control automatically returns to its star-
ting position.
NOTE
For diesel-engined cars, there may be a slight
delay before starting is initiated.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its over-
heating protection triggers.
1
If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise.
STARTING AND DRIVING
405
Backup reader's location in the tunnel console.
If the message Car key not found is shown in
the driver display when starting, place the remote
control key on the backup reader in the cup
holder. Then try to start again.
NOTE
When the remote control key is placed in the
cup holder, make sure that no other car keys,
metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g.
mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers)
are in the cup holder. Several car keys close
to each other in the cup holder can cause
interference with each other.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts -
wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the bat-
tery is allowed to recover.
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
WARNING
Always take the remote control key out from
the car when leaving the car and make sure
the car's electrical system is in ignition posi-
tion 0 - especially if there are children in the
car.
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is done in order that the
emissions system can reach normal operating
temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects the
environment.
Related information
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Switching off the car (p. 405)
•
Remote control key (p. 230)
•
Replacing the battery in the remote control
key (p. 252)
Switching off the car
The car is switched off using the start knob in
the tunnel console.
Start knob in the tunnel console.
To switch off the car:
–
Turn the start knob clockwise and release it -
the car is switched off. The control automati-
cally returns to its starting position.
If the gear selector for cars with an automatic
gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls:
–
Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the
car is switched off.
Related information
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
STARTING AND DRIVING
406
Steering lock
The steering lock makes steering difficult if the
car is e.g. taken unlawfully. A mechanical noise
can be perceived when the steering lock locks
or unlocks.
Activating the steering lock
The steering lock is activated when the car is
locked from the outside and the engine is
switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the
steering lock will lock automatically after a while.
Deactivating the steering lock
The steering lock is deactivated when the car is
unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked,
the steering lock will deactivate if the remote
control key is inside the passenger compartment
and the car is started by turning the start knob
clockwise to unlock the steering lock.
Related information
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
•
Switching off the car (p. 405)
•
Steering wheel (p. 129)
Using jump starting with another
battery
If the starter battery is discharged then the car
can be started with current from another battery.
Attachment points for the jump leads.
When jump starting the car, the following steps
are recommended to avoid short circuits or other
damage:
1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition
position 0.
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of
12 V.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another car
- switch off the donor car's engine and make
sure that the two cars do not touch each
other.
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's positive terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover
(2).
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive jump-starting point
(2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps
to the donor battery's negative terminal (3).
8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's negative jump-starting point
(4).
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed
securely so that there are no sparks during
the starting attempt.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow
it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly
higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
407
11. Start the engine in the car with the dis-
charged battery.
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the connections between cable
and car during the starting attempt. There is a
risk of sparks forming.
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order -
first the black and then the red.
Make sure that none of the black jump lead's
clamps comes into contact with the car's
positive jump-starting point/donor battery's
positive terminal or the clamp connected to
the red jump lead.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
Related information
•
Starter battery (p. 550)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Starting the car (p. 404)
•
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 535)
Gearbox
The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain
(power transmission) between engine and drive
wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change
the gear ratio depending on speed and power
requirements.
There are two main types of gearbox, manual and
automatic.
The manual gearbox has six gears and the auto-
matic gearbox has eight. The number of gear
changes means that the engine's torque and
power range can be used effectively. In the auto-
matic gearbox, two of the gears are overdrive
gears that save fuel when driving at constant
engine speed.
It is also possible to select gears manually with
the automatic gearbox. The driver display respec-
tively shows which gear or gear position is cur-
rently in use.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system com-
ponents, the working temperature of the
gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of over-
heating, a warning symbol illuminates in the
driver display and a text message is shown -
follow the recommendation given.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
408
Symbols in the driver display
If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver
display shows a symbol and a message.
Symbol Specification
Information or error message for
gearbox. Follow the recommenda-
tion given.
Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow
the recommendation given.
Reduced performance/Acceler-
ation performance reduced.
In the event of a temporary power-
train fault, the car can go into a
Limp home mode with reduced
engine power to prevent damage
to the powertrain.
Related information
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 408)
•
Manual gearbox (p. 410)
•
Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
Gear positions for automatic
gearbox
With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses
the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox
also has a manual gearshift mode.
Gear positions in the driver display
The driver display shows the gear selector's posi-
tion:
P, R, N, D or M.
In manual gearshift mode, the gear being used is
also shown.
Gear positions
Park position - P
Select the P position when the car is parked or
when starting the engine. The car must be sta-
tionary when the park position is selected.
To be able to move the gear selector from the
park position, the brake pedal must be depressed
and the ignition position must be II.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P
position is engaged. Apply the parking brake first
when the car is parked.
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
NOTE
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
Reverse position - R
Select position R to reverse. The car must be sta-
tionary when reverse position is selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is sta-
tionary with the gear selector in N position.
To be able to change from the neutral position to
another gear position, the brake pedal must be
depressed and the ignition position must be II.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
409
Drive position - D
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and
down takes place automatically based on the
level of acceleration and speed. The car must be
stationary when changing gear from R position to
D position.
Manual gearshift mode - M
The manual gearshift mode can be selected at
any time while driving. The car engine-brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released.
Select manual gearshift mode by moving the
gear selector sideways from position D to the
end position at "±". The driver display shows
which gear is engaged at the time.
•
Press the gear selector forwards to "+"
(plus) to change up one step and release it.
•
Press the gear selector backwards to "–"
(minus) to change down one step and
release it.
manual gearshift mode in the driver display
2
.
The gearbox automatically shifts down if the
speed decreases to a level lower than appropri-
ate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking
and stalling.
To return to automatic gear changing, press the
gear selector sideways to the end position at D.
Kick-down
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kick-
down.
If the accelerator is released from the kick-down
position, the gearbox automatically changes up.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration
is needed, such as for overtaking.
Safety function
To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gear-
box control program has a protective downshift
inhibitor.
The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kick-
down which would result in an engine speed high
enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens
if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at
high engine speed – the original gear remains
engaged.
When kick-down is activated the car can change
one or more gears at a time depending on
engine speed. The car changes up when the
engine reaches its maximum speed in order to
prevent damage to the engine.
Related information
•
Gearbox (p. 407)
•
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*
(p. 413)
•
Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
•
Gear selector inhibitor (p. 412)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
2
The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on the car's equipment.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
410
Manual gearbox
With a manual gearbox, the driver selects a suit-
able gear manually, according to speed and
power requirements at the time.
Changing gear
Neutral position (N)
The manual gearbox has six gears; the shifting
pattern is shown on the gear lever.
•
Depress the clutch pedal fully during each
gear change.
•
Take your foot off the clutch pedal between
gear changes.
Reverse gear inhibitor
The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibility
of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear
during normal forward travel.
•
Follow the gearing pattern on the gear lever
and start from neutral position, N, before
moving it to the R position.
•
Engage reverse gear only when the car is
stationary.
During parking
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when parking
on a slope - leaving the car in gear is not suf-
ficient to hold the car in all situations.
Related information
•
Gearbox (p. 407)
•
Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
Gear shift indicator*
The gear shift indicator in the driver display
shows the current gear during manual gearshift-
ing and when it is appropriate to engage the
next gear for optimum fuel economy.
For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is
important to drive in the right gear and to change
gear in good time.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
411
With automatic gearbox
The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in
the driver display and uses an up arrow to indi-
cate when shifting to a higher gear is recom-
mended.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
With manual gearbox
An up-arrow indicates a recommended change to
a higher gear, and a down-arrow a recommended
change to a lower gear.
Gear shift indicator in the 12-inch driver display*.
Gear shift indicator in the 8-inch driver display.
Related information
•
Gearbox (p. 407)
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 408)
•
Manual gearbox (p. 410)
STARTING AND DRIVING
412
Gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental
changing between different gear positions in an
automatic gearbox.
There are two different types of gear selector
inhibitor - mechanical and automatic.
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions are
locked with a latch that is released with the inhib-
itor button on the gear selector.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can
be moved forwards or backwards between P, R,
N and D.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special
safety systems.
From park position - P
To be able to move the gear selector from the P
position, the brake pedal must be depressed and
the ignition position must be II.
From neutral position - N
If the gear selector is in the N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from the N
position to another gear position, the brake pedal
must be depressed and the ignition position must
be II.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a dis-
charged battery, the gear selector must be
moved to the N position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment in
front of the gear selector. Locate the hole
with a spring-loaded button in the bottom of
the compartment.
Press a small screwdriver into the hole and
hold.
Move the gear selector to position N and
release the button.
4. Put the rubber mat back in place.
Related information
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 408)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
413
Changing gear with steering wheel
paddles*
The steering wheel paddles are a complement
to the gear selector and make it possible to
change gear manually without releasing hands
from the steering wheel.
Activating the steering wheel paddles
To be able to change gear with the steering
wheel paddles they must first be activated:
–
Pull one of the paddles toward the steering
wheel.
> A figure in the driver display indicates cur-
rent gear.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles.
Manual gearshift mode
In gear position M the steering wheel paddles are
automatically activated.
Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel
paddles in manual gearshift mode.
Changing gear
To change gear one step:
–
Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards
the steering wheel - and release.
"-": Selects the next lower gear.
"+": Selects the next higher gear.
A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle
provided that the engine speed does not leave
the permitted range.
After each gear change the figure in the driver
display changes to show the current gear.
Deactivating the function
Manual deactivation in gear position D.
–
Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by
pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the
steering wheel and holding in place until the
figure in the driver display for the current
gear extinguishes.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
414
Automatic deactivation
In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are
deactivated after a short time if they are not used.
This is indicated by means of the figure for the
current gear extinguishing.
The exception is during engine braking - then the
paddles are activated for as long as engine brak-
ing is in progress.
In gear position M there is no automatic deactiva-
tion.
Related information
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 408)
•
Gear shift indicator* (p. 410)
Start/Stop
With the Start/Stop function, the engine
switches off temporarily when the car has stop-
ped e.g. at traffic lights or in a traffic queue, and
then starts again automatically when the journey
is resumed.
Start/Stop is one of several energy-saving func-
tions intended to reduce fuel consumption, which
in turn helps to reduce exhaust emissions.
The system makes it possible to adopt an envi-
ronmentally-conscious driving style by allowing
the car to engine auto-stop when possible.
Related information
•
Using the Start/Stop function (p. 414)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 416)
Using the Start/Stop function
The Start/Stop function temporarily switches off
the engine when stationary and then restarts it
automatically when the journey is resumed.
The Start/Stop function is available when the
engine is started and can be activated if certain
conditions have been met. The driver display indi-
cates whether the function is available, active or
unavailable, see heading "Symbols in driver dis-
play" below.
All of the car's normal systems such as lighting,
radio, etc. work normally, even when the engine is
auto-stopped. However, some equipment may
have its output temporarily reduced, e.g. the cli-
mate control system's fan speed or extremely
high volume on the audio system.
Auto-stop
The following is required for the engine to auto-
stop:
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
415
With automatic gearbox
•
Stop the car with the foot brake and then
keep your foot on the brake pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
With manual gearbox
•
Declutch, set the gear lever in neutral posi-
tion and release the clutch pedal - the
engine stops automatically.
In drive mode
Eco or Comfort
3
, the engine may
auto-stop before the car is completely stationary.
With the
Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist func-
tion activated, the engine will autostop after
approximately three seconds.
See the section "Conditions for Start/Stop func-
tion".
Autostart
The following is required for the engine to auto-
start:
With automatic gearbox
•
Release the brake pedal - the engine will
autostart and you can continue driving. On an
uphill gradient hill start assist (HSA)
engages, which prevents the car from rolling
backwards.
•
When the
Auto hold function is activated,
auto-start is delayed until the accelerator
pedal is depressed.
•
When the
Adaptive cruise or Pilot Assist
function are activated, the engine will autos-
tart when the accelerator pedal is depressed,
or by pressing the
button on the left
keypad of the steering wheel.
•
Maintain foot pressure on the brake pedal
and depress the accelerator pedal - the
engine auto-starts.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
With manual gearbox
•
With the gear lever in neutral position:
Depress the clutch pedal or depress the
accelerator pedal - the engine starts.
•
On a downhill gradient: Release pressure on
the brake pedal slightly so that the car
begins to roll - the engine will auto-start after
a slight speed increase.
Symbols in the driver display
With 12-inch driver display*
•
The text
READY is shown in the tachometer
when the function is available.
•
A pointer in the tachometer points to
READY when the function is active and the
engine is auto-stopped.
•
The text
READY is greyed out when the
function is not available.
•
No text is shown when the function is deacti-
vated.
The function is active and the engine is auto-stopped.
3
Normal start mode.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
416
With 8-inch driver display
The symbol is shown in the lower edge of the
speedometer.
Symbol Specification
White symbol: The function is avail-
able.
Beige symbol: The function is
active and the engine is auto-stop-
ped.
The function is not available, the
conditions are not fulfilled.
No symbol is shown when the
function is deactivated.
Deactivating the function
In certain situations it may be desirable to tempo-
rarily deactivate the function.
Deactivate using the Start/
Stop function button in the
centre display's function view.
The indication in the button is
switched off when the function
is deactivated.
The function is deactivated until
•
it is reactivated
•
the drive mode is changed to
Eco or
Comfort
•
the next time the car is started.
Related information
•
Start/Stop (p. 414)
•
Conditions for the Start/Stop function
(p. 416)
•
Hill start assist (p. 431)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
•
Adaptive cruise control* (p. 290)
•
Activating and starting the Pilot Assist*
(p. 311)
Conditions for the Start/Stop
function
For the Start/Stop function to work requires that
a number of conditions are met.
If any condition is not met, this will be indicated in
the driver display. See the section "Using the
Start/Stop function".
The engine does not auto-stop
The engine does not auto-stop in the following
cases:
•
The car has not reached approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) after starting.
•
After a number of repeated auto stops,
speed must again exceed approx. 10 km/h
(6 mph) before the next auto stop.
•
The driver has unfastened the seatbelt.
•
The capacity of the starter battery is below
the minimum permissible level.
•
The engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
•
The ambient temperature is under -5 °C or
above approx. 30 °C.
•
the windscreen's electric heating is activated.
•
The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
•
the car is reversed.
•
The starter battery's temperature is below or
above the permitted limit values.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
417
•
The driver makes sweeping steering wheel
movements.
•
The road is very steep.
•
The bonnet is opened.
•
When driving at high altitudes when the
engine has not reached operating tempera-
ture.
•
The ABS system has been activated.
•
In the event of heavy braking (even without
the ABS system having been activated).
•
Many starts during a short period of time
have activated the starter motor's thermal
protection.
•
The exhaust system's particulate filter is full
4
.
•
A trailer is connected electrically to the car’s
electrical system.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
•
The gearbox is not at normal operating tem-
perature.
•
The gear selector is in ± position.
The engine does not auto-start
In the following cases the engine does not auto-
start after having auto-stopped:
With automatic gearbox:
•
The driver is unbelted, the gear selector is in
P position and the driver's door is open - a
normal start must take place.
With manual gearbox:
•
The driver is unrestrained.
•
A gear is engaged without declutching.
Involuntary stop with manual gearbox
If a start-up fails and the engine stops, proceed
as follows:
1. Check that the driver side's seatbelt is locked
in the seatbelt buckle.
2. Depress the clutch pedal again - the engine
starts automatically.
3. In certain cases the gear lever must be set in
neutral position. A message is shown in the
driver display - follow the recommendation
given.
The engine auto-starts without the
brake pedal having been released
In the following cases, the engine auto-starts
even if the driver does not take his/her foot off
the brake pedal:
•
High humidity in the passenger compartment
forms misting on the windows.
•
The environment in the passenger compart-
ment deviates from the set values.
•
There is a temporarily high current take-off
or starter battery capacity drops below the
lowest permissible level.
•
Repeated pumping of the brake pedal.
•
The bonnet is opened.
•
The car starts to roll or increase speed
slightly if the car auto-stopped without being
completely stationary.
The following applies to automatic gearbox:
•
The driver's seatbelt buckle is opened with
the gear selector in D or N position.
•
The gear selector is moved from D to posi-
tion R or ±.
•
The driver's door is opened with the gear
selector in D position - a "ping" sound and
text message indicate that the ignition is on.
WARNING
Do not open the bonnet when the engine has
auto-stopped. Switch off the engine normally
before lifting up the bonnet.
4
Applies to cars with diesel engines.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
418
Related information
•
Start/Stop (p. 414)
•
Using the Start/Stop function (p. 414)
•
Support battery (p. 553)
Drive modes*
Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving
characteristics in order to enhance the driving
experience and facilitate driving in special situa-
tions.
Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly
have access to the car's numerous functions and
settings for different driving needs. The following
systems are adapted to obtain the best possible
driving characteristics in each respective drive
mode:
•
Steering
•
Engine/gearbox
5
/all-wheel drive*
•
Brakes
•
Air suspension* and shock absorption
•
Driver display
•
Start/Stop function
•
Climate settings
Select the drive mode that best suits the current
driving conditions. Remember that not all drive
modes are available in all situations.
Selecting drive mode
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
> The selected drive mode is indicated in
the driver display.
A message is shown when a drive mode is unse-
lectable.
5
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
419
For example:
•
Cannot be selected because gear is in
manual
•
Cannot be selected due to low battery
•
Cannot be selected due to low
temperature
•
Cannot be selected due to limitations
•
Cannot be selected because speed is
too high
.
Selectable drive modes
COMFORT
•
This is the car's normal mode.
When the car starts, it is in Comfort mode and
the Start/Stop function is activated. These set-
tings mean that the car feels comfortable, the
steering is light, the shock absorption is soft and
body's movement is smooth.
This drive mode is the certification mode for car-
bon dioxide emissions.
ECO
•
Adapt the car for more energy-efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving with the
Eco mode.
The drive mode means e.g. that the Start/Stop
function is activated, the ground clearance is
lower to reduce wind resistance and the output
of certain climate settings is reduced.
The driver display has an ECO gauge that facili-
tates fuel-efficient driving.
More information on this drive mode is found in
the section "Drive mode ECO".
OFF ROAD
•
Maximise the car's traction when driving in
difficult terrain and on poor roads.
The drive mode provides high ground clearance,
steering is light, all-wheel drive and the function
for low speed control with hill descent control
(Hill Descent Control) are activated. Start/Stop
function is deactivated.
The drive mode can only be activated at low
speeds and the speedometer shows the range
for speed limitation. If this speed is exceeded, Off
road mode is suspended and another drive mode
is activated.
In the Off road mode the driver display has a
compass between the speedometer and tachom-
eter.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
NOTE
If the car is switched off in OFF ROAD mode,
and therefore has high ground clearance, the
car is lowered next time it is started.
IMPORTANT
The OFF ROAD drive mode must not be used
while driving with a trailer without trailer con-
nector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to
the air bellows.
DYNAMIC
•
Dynamic mode means that the car has sport-
ier characteristics and faster response to
accelerating.
The gear changes become faster and more dis-
tinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with
greater traction.
Steering response is faster, shock absorption is
harder and a low ground clearance means that
the body follows the roadway in order to reduce
roll during cornering.
Start/Stop function is deactivated.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
420
INDIVIDUAL
•
Adapting a drive mode according to individ-
ual preferences.
Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust
the settings according to the desired driving cha-
racteristics. These settings are saved in an indi-
vidual driver profile.
An individual drive mode is only available if it is
first activated in the centre display.
Settings view
6
for individual drive mode.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Individual Drive Mode and
select
Individual Drive Mode.
3.
In
Presets, select a drive mode to start from:
Eco, Comfort or Dynamic.
Possible adjustments apply to settings for:
•
Driver Display
•
Steering force
•
Powertrain Characteristics
•
Brake Characteristics
•
Suspension Control
•
ECO Climate
•
Start/Stop.
Related information
•
Speed-dependent steering force (p. 270)
•
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423)
•
Start/Stop (p. 414)
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
•
All-wheel drive* (p. 425)
•
Hill descent control* (p. 434)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
6
The figure is schematic, the layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
421
Drive mode ECO
Driving mode ECO mode optimises the car's
driving characteristics for more fuel efficient and
environmentally-conscious driving.
Use this drive mode to save fuel and the environ-
ment.
The following properties are adapted for Eco driv-
ing:
•
Gearbox gearshift points
7
.
•
Engine management and response from the
accelerator pedal.
•
The Eco Coast
7
freewheel function is acti-
vated and engine braking is deactivated
when the accelerator pedal is released at
speeds between 65 and 140 km/h
(40 and 87 mph).
•
Some of the climate control system's set-
tings work at reduced power or are deacti-
vated.
•
The level control function* provides a low
ground clearance in order to reduce wind
resistance.
•
The driver display shows information in an
ECO gauge which facilitates environmentally-
conscious and fuel-efficient driving.
Selecting ECO mode
The Eco mode is deactivated when the engine is
switched off, and it must therefore be activated
after each time the engine is started. The driver
display shows ECO when the function is acti-
vated.
With drive mode control*
1.
Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE.
> A pop-up menu is opened in the centre
display.
2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the
desired drive mode is highlighted.
3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly
on the touch screen to confirm the selection.
In the centre display's function view
A car without drive mode con-
trol has a function button for
Driving mode ECO in the
centre display's function view.
–
Press the button in order to activate the
function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Free-wheel function Eco Coast
7
The freewheel function Eco Coast means in prac-
tice that engine braking ceases, meaning in turn
that the car's kinetic energy is used to freewheel
for longer distances. When the driver releases
the accelerator pedal the gearbox is automatically
disengaged from the engine whose speed is
reduced to idling speed with reduced consump-
tion.
The function is best used where it is possible to
freewheel a long way, e.g. roads with a slight
downhill gradient or when there is a predictable
speed reduction to freewheel into a zone with a
lower speed limit.
7
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
422
Activating the freewheel function
The function is activated when the accelerator
pedal is fully released, in combination with the
following parameters:
•
Drive mode
Eco is activated.
•
The gear selector is in D position.
•
Speed within the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
•
The road's downhill gradient is not steeper
than approx. 6%.
The driver display shows
COASTING when the
freewheel function is being used.
Limitations
The freewheel function is not available if:
•
Engine and/or gearbox are not at normal
operating temperature.
•
The gear selector is moved from the D posi-
tion and the manual position.
•
The speed is outside the range of
approx. 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph).
•
The road's downhill gradient is steeper than
approx. 6%.
•
Manual gear changing is performed with the
steering wheel paddles*.
Deactivating and switching off the freewheel
function
In certain situations it may be desirable to deacti-
vate or switch off the function in order to use
engine braking. Examples of such situations may
be on steep downhill gradients or before an
imminent overtaking manoeuvre - in order to be
able to do it in the safest way possible.
Deactivate the freewheel function as follows:
•
Actuate the accelerator or brake pedal.
•
Move the gear selector to manual position.
•
Changing gear with steering wheel paddles*.
Switch off the freewheel function as follows:
•
Change drive mode*, or switch off the
Driving mode ECO in the function view.
Even without the freewheel function, it is possible
to freewheel for short distances. This, in turn,
reduces consumption. However, for the best fuel
economy it is better to have the freewheel func-
tion activated and be able to freewheel for longer
distances.
Cruise control Eco Cruise
When using the cruise control in the Eco drive
mode, the car's acceleration and deceleration will
be lower compared to other drive modes, which
enables further fuel savings. This means that the
car's speed can be slightly above or below the
set speed.
•
On a smooth road, the car's speed can devi-
ate from the set speed when the cruise con-
trol is active and the car free-rolls.
•
On a steep uphill slope, the car's speed
drops until a downshift is made
7
, then
reduced acceleration starts in order to
achieve the set speed.
•
On a downhill slope where the car free-rolls,
the car's speed can be slightly above or
below the set speed. The function uses nor-
mal engine braking to maintain the set
speed. The foot brake is also used if neces-
sary.
ECO gauge in the driver display
The ECO gauge indicates how fuel-efficient the
driving is:
•
With fuel-efficient driving, the gauge shows a
low value with the pointer in the green zone.
•
With non-fuel-efficient driving, e.g. during
heavy braking or heavy acceleration, the
gauge shows a high value.
The ECO gauge also has an indicator to show
how a reference driver would drive the car under
the same driving conditions. This is indicated with
the short pointer on the gauge.
7
Only cars with automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
423
Eco gauge in the 12-inch driver display*.
Eco gauge in the 8-inch driver display.
ECO climate control
In the Eco drive mode, ECO climate control is
activated automatically in the passenger com-
partment in order to reduce energy consumption.
NOTE
When the ECO function is activated, several
parameters in the climate control system's
settings are changed, and several electricity
consumer functions are reduced. Certain set-
tings can be reset manually, but full function-
ality is only regained by switching off the ECO
function or adapting
Individual* drive mode
with full climate functionality.
In the event of difficulties due to misting, press
the button for max. defroster which has normal
functionality.
Related information
•
Economical driving (p. 444)
•
Start/Stop (p. 414)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Setting the time interval for the adaptive
cruise control* (p. 296)
•
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
Level control* and shock absorption
Level control regulates the car's suspension and
shock absorption characteristics automatically to
ensure the best comfort and functionality while
driving. It is also possible to adjust the level
manually in order to facilitate loading or entry
and exit.
Air suspension and shock absorption
The system is adapted according to the selected
drive mode and according to the speed of the
car. Using the air suspension, the car's ground
clearance is adjusted to a lower level at higher
speeds, which reduces wind resistance and
increases stability. Shock absorption is normally
set for the best possible comfort and is regulated
continuously depending on the road surface, the
car's acceleration, braking and cornering.
The driver display indicates
when level control is in pro-
gress.
The level cannot be regulated when the bonnet
or any side door is open.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
424
Settings for level control
Entry assistance
The car can be lowered to facilitate entry and exit.
Activating entry assistance via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Mirrors and Easy Entry.
3.
Select
Easy Entry and Exit Suspension
Control.
> When the car is parked and switched off,
the car is lowered (level control stops if a
door is opened and there may be a cer-
tain delay before level control resumes
after the door has been closed). When the
car is started and begins to move, the car
will rise to the height setting for the drive
mode selected.
Deactivation of air suspension and level
control
In certain cases, the function must be deacti-
vated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*.
The difference in level created by raising the car
with a jack can otherwise cause problems for the
air suspension.
Deactivating the function via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Loading mode
Use the buttons in the cargo area to regulate the
height of the car's rear section and facilitate
loading/unloading or when connecting/discon-
necting a trailer. See the section "Loading".
During parking
During parking, make sure you allow adequate
space above and below the car since the car's
ground clearance may vary e.g. depending on the
outside temperature, how the car is loaded, the
use of loading mode or the drive mode that is
selected after starting.
The level may also be adjusted a period after the
car is parked. This is to compensate for any
height changes that may occur due to tempera-
ture changes in the air springs when the car
cools down.
During transport
During transport of the car on a ferry, train or
truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres
and not around other parts of the chassis.
Changes in the air suspension may occur during
transport, which could affect the lashing nega-
tively.
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
425
All-wheel drive*
All-wheel drive, AWD (All Wheel Drive), means
that the car is driving all four wheels at the same
time, which improves traction.
To achieve the best possible traction and prevent
wheel spin the motive force is distributed auto-
matically to the wheels with the best grip. The
system continuously calculates the need for tor-
que to the rear wheels, and can immediately
redistribute up to half of the motor's torque to the
rear wheels.
All-wheel drive also has a stabilising effect at
higher speeds. Under normal driving conditions,
the majority of power is transmitted to the front
wheels. When stationary, the all-wheel drive is
always engaged in preparation for maximum trac-
tion during acceleration.
All-wheel drive characteristics vary depending on
the selected drive mode*.
Related information
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Low speed control* (p. 433)
Brake functions
The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed
or prevent the car from rolling.
Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car
is equipped with several automatic brake assist
functions. These can assist the driver by not
needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal
when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on
an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill
gradient.
Depending on the car's equipment, the following
auto braking functions are available:
•
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto
Hold)
•
Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist)
•
Auto braking after a collision
•
City Safety
•
Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control)*
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 425)
•
Parking brake (p. 428)
•
Hill descent control* (p. 434)
•
Hill start assist (p. 431)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
•
Auto braking after a collision (p. 428)
Foot brake
The foot brake is part of the brake system.
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a
brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will
engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will
therefore be needed to produce the normal brak-
ing effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted by a
brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the engine
is running.
If the foot brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal will feel stiff and a
higher pedal pressure must be used to brake the
car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy
load the brakes can be relieved by using engine
braking in manual gearshift mode. Engine braking
is most efficiently used if the same gear is used
downhill as up. Use drive mode
Off Road* for
increased engine braking while driving on steep
downhill gradients at low speeds.
Anti-lock braking system
The car has anti-lock brakes, Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS), which can prevent the wheels
from locking while braking and allows maintained
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
426
steering control. Vibration may be felt in the
brake pedal when this is engaged and this is nor-
mal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automat-
ically after the car has been started when the
driver releases the brake pedal. A further auto-
matic test of the system may be made at low
speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the
brake pedal.
Braking on wet roads
When driving for a prolonged period of time in
heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may
be delayed slightly when next using the brakes.
This may also be the case after a car wash. It is
then necessary to depress the brake pedal more
forcefully. You should therefore maintain a
greater distance to the vehicles in front.
Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or
using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs,
enabling them to dry faster and protecting them
against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic
situation when braking.
Braking on salted roads
When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may
form on the brake discs and brake linings. This
may extend braking distance. You should there-
fore maintain a greater safety distance to vehi-
cles in front. In addition, make sure you do the
following:
•
Brake now and again to remove any layer of
salt. Make sure that other road users are not
put at risk by the braking.
•
Gently depress the brake pedal after finish-
ing driving and before starting your next trip.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in
the Service and Warranty Booklet.
New and replaced brake linings and brake discs
do not provide optimal braking effect until they
have been "worn in" a few hundred kilometres.
Compensate for the reduced braking effect by
depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recom-
mends only fitting brake linings that are approved
for your Volvo.
IMPORTANT
The wear on the brake system's components
must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about the
procedure or engage a workshop to carry out
the inspection - an authorised Volvo work-
shop is recommended.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
Check the brake fluid level. If the
level is low, fill with brake fluid and
check for the cause of the brake
fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when
the engine is started: Automatic
function check.
Constant glow for more than 2
seconds: Fault in the ABS system.
The car's normal brake system is
still working, but without the ABS
function.
WARNING
If both the warning lamps for brake fault and
ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault
has occurred in the brake system.
•
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake
system checked - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
•
If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive fur-
ther before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid
must be investigated.
STARTING AND DRIVING
427
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Brake assistance (p. 427)
•
Brake lights (p. 140)
•
Emergency brake lights (p. 427)
Emergency brake lights
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about heavy braking. The func-
tion means that the brake light flashes instead of
- as in normal braking - shining with a constant
glow.
The emergency brake lights are activated during
heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at
high speeds. After emergency braking to a low
speed, the brake lights return from flashing to the
normal constant glow. The car's hazard warning
flashers are activated at the same time. These
flash until the driver accelerates the car to a
higher speed again or switches off the hazard
warning flashers.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 425)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 140)
•
Brake lights (p. 140)
Brake assistance
The brake assist system, BAS (Brake Assist
System), helps to increase brake force during
braking, thereby shortening the braking distance.
The system detects the way in which the driver
brakes and increases brake force where neces-
sary. The brake force can be boosted up to the
level when the ABS system is engaged. The
function is suspended when the pressure on the
brake pedal decreases.
NOTE
When BAS is activated the brake pedal low-
ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold)
the brake pedal as long as necessary.
When the brake pedal is released, all braking
ceases.
Related information
•
Foot brake (p. 425)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
428
Auto braking after a collision
In the event of a collision in which the activation
level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt ten-
sioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large
animal is detected, the car's brakes are automat-
ically applied. This function is to prevent or
reduce the effects of any subsequent collision.
After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no
longer possible to control and steer the car. In
order to avoid or mitigate a possible further colli-
sion with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's
path, the auto braking system is activated auto-
matically and brakes the car in a safe manner.
Brake lights and hazard warning lights are acti-
vated during braking. When the car has stopped,
the hazard warning lights continue to flash and
the parking brake is applied.
If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk
of being hit by following traffic, the system can be
overridden by the driver depressing the accelera-
tor pedal.
The function assumes that the brake system is
intact after the collision.
See also the sections "Rear Collision Warning"
and "Blind Spot Information".
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Seatbelt tensioner (p. 59)
•
Airbags (p. 63)
•
Rear Collision Warning (p. 349)
•
BLIS* (p. 349)
Parking brake
The parking brake prevents the car from rolling
away from stationary by means of mechanically
locking/blocking two wheels.
The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel
console between the seats.
A faint electric motor noise can be heard when
the electrically-operated parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during the
automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake is
applied then it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is
applied when the car is moving then the normal
foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four
wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear
wheels when the car is almost stationary.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
429
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Using the parking brake (p. 429)
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 431)
Using the parking brake
Use the parking brake to prevent the car from
rolling from stationary.
Applying the parking brake
1. Pull the control upward.
> The symbol in the driver display illumi-
nates when the parking brake is applied.
2. Check that the car is stationary.
Symbol in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. Read the mes-
sage on the driver display.
Automatic application
The parking brake is applied automatically:
•
if the Auto hold function (automatic braking
when stationary) is activated and the car has
been stationary for approx. 5 minutes.
•
when gear position P is selected on a steep
hill
8
.
•
when the car is switched off and the "Auto-
matic activation of parking brake" is acti-
vated
9
.
Emergency brake
In an emergency, the parking brake can be
applied when the car is in motion by pulling and
holding up the control. Braking stops when the
control is released.
NOTE
An acoustic signal sounds while emergency
braking is active at high speeds.
8
Applies to automatic gearbox.
9
See heading "Settings for parking brake".
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
430
Releasing the parking brake
Releasing manually
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
2. Press the control down.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Depress the brake pedal firmly.
3. Start the car.
4. With automatic gearbox:
Select gear position D or R and depress the
accelerator pedal.
With manual gearbox:
Engage a suitable gear, release the clutch
and depress the accelerator pedal.
> The parking brake releases and the sym-
bol in the driver display extinguishes.
NOTE
When the car is first started, the parking
brake can be released automatically without
the seatbelt fastened.
Parking on a hill
WARNING
Always use the parking brake when parking
on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the
automatic transmission's P position is not suf-
ficient to hold the car stationary in all situa-
tions.
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car
to roll backward when the parking brake is
released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid
this by pulling the control upwards while driving
the car away. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
Settings for parking brake
Automatic activation of the parking brake is
selected via the centre display.
Automatic activation when the car is switched off:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
and deselect/select the func-
tion
Auto Activate Parking Brake.
Related information
•
Parking brake (p. 428)
•
In the event of a fault in the parking brake
(p. 431)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
STARTING AND DRIVING
431
In the event of a fault in the parking
brake
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not
possible to release or apply the parking brake
after several attempts.
An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving
with the parking brake applied.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault
is rectified then the wheels must be turned as if
parking on a hill
10
and the gear selector must be
in position P, or engage first gear if the car has a
manual gearbox.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking
brake can neither be released nor applied. Con-
nect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too
low.
Replacing the brake linings
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electrically-
operated parking brake - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
If the symbol flashes, it indicates a
fault has occurred. See the mes-
sage in the driver display.
Fault in brake system. See the
message in the driver display.
Information message in driver dis-
play.
Message examples:
•
Parking brake Service required
•
Parking brake System overheated
•
Parking brake Not released
•
Parking brake Cannot hold car
•
Parking brake Temporarily unavailable
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Using the parking brake (p. 429)
•
Parking brake (p. 428)
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 406)
Hill start assist
Hill start assist, Hill Start Assist (HSA), prevents
the car from rolling backwards when starting on
an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it pre-
vents the car from rolling forwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal
to accelerator pedal.
The temporary braking effect releases after sev-
eral seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Hill start assist is available even if the function for
automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold) is
deactivated.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
10
See section "Using the parking brake".
STARTING AND DRIVING
432
Automatic braking when stationary
Automatic braking when stationary (Auto hold)
means that the driver can release the brake
pedal while maintaining braking effect when the
car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction.
Function
When the car has stopped, the brakes are acti-
vated automatically. The function can use either
foot brake or parking brake to hold the car sta-
tionary and it works on all gradients. When the
accelerator pedal is depressed again, the brakes
are released.
When braking to a stop on a downhill or uphill
gradient - depress the brake pedal a bit harder
before releasing to ensure that the car does not
roll at all.
When stationary or when is the car is switched
off, the parking brake is applied after approx. 5
minutes.
Automatic deactivation
The function is deactivated automatically:
•
when the driver's door is open and the driv-
er's seatbelt is unfastened.
Switch for automatic brake
An indicator in the button illuminates when the function
is activated.
Activate or deactivate Auto hold with the switch
in the tunnel console. The function remains deac-
tivated until it is reactivated.
If the function is active and holds the
car with the foot brake (A-symbol illu-
minated) then the brake pedal must be
depressed at the same time as the
button is depressed in order to deactivate.
When the function is deactivated, hill start assist
(HSA) remains active to prevent the car from roll-
ing backwards when starting on an uphill gradi-
ent.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the foot brake to
keep the car stationary.
The symbol is illuminated when the
function uses the parking brake to
keep the car stationary.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Hill start assist (p. 431)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
433
Low speed control*
The low speed control function Low Speed
Control (LSC) facilitates and improves traction
for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces,
such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer
on a launch ramp.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
The function is adapted for off-road driving and
driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx.
40 km/h (25 mph).
With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel
drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheel-
spin and provides better traction on all wheels.
The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order
to facilitate traction and speed control at low
speed.
The function is activated together with Hill
Descent Control (HDC) which means that the
speed down steep downhill gradients can be
controlled with the accelerator pedal and it
reduces the need to use the brake pedal. The
system facilitates a low and even speed while
driving on steep downhill gradients.
Activating low speed control, LSC
The function is activated in different ways
depending on the car's equipment.
With drive mode control*
•
Select the Off Road drive mode in order to
activate the function.
•
Select a different drive mode in order to
deactivate.
In the centre display's function view
A car without drive mode con-
trol has a function button for
low speed control with
Hill
Descent Control in the centre
display's function view.
–
Press the button in order to activate the
function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Hill descent control* (p. 434)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
434
Hill descent control*
Hill descent control, Hill Descent Control
(HDC), is a low speed function with enhanced
engine braking. The function makes it possible
to increase or reduce vehicle speed on steep
downhill gradients using only the accelerator
pedal, without using the foot brake.
In a car with drive mode control*, the function is
included in the Off Road drive mode.
Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driv-
ing at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep
downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The
driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but
can instead focus on steering.
WARNING
HDC does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility
for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely.
Function
Hill descent control allows the car to roll at
inching speed both forward and backward, assis-
ted by the brake system. The speed can be
increased by using the accelerator pedal. When
the accelerator pedal is then released the car
slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of
the gradient of the hill and without the need for
the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are
switched on when the function is operating.
The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed,
or stop the car at any time by using the foot
brake.
The function is activated together with Low
Speed Control (LSC) which facilitates driving and
improves traction for driving off-road and on slip-
pery surfaces. The systems are designed for use
at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
Activating hill descent control, HDC
Hill descent control only works at low speeds.
The function is activated in different ways
depending on the car's equipment.
With drive mode control*
•
Select the Off Road drive mode in order to
activate the function.
•
Select a different drive mode in order to
deactivate. If the drive mode is changed while
driving on a steep downhill gradient, the
braking effect will gradually decrease.
In the centre display's function view
A car without drive mode con-
trol has a function button for
low speed control with
Hill
Descent Control in the centre
display's function view.
–
Press the button in order to activate the
function.
> An indicator in the button illuminates
when the function is activated.
Points to remember when driving with HDC
With automatic gearbox
•
HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and
with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear
changing.
•
It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or
higher with manual gear changing.
With manual gearbox
•
HDC only brakes in 1st gear or with reverse
gear (R). There is no active braking in higher
gears despite the function not being deacti-
vated until approx. 40 km/h (25 mph).
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
435
NOTE
When LSC with HDC is activated, the feel of
the accelerator pedal and engine response
are changed.
NOTE
The driving mode is not designed to be used
on public roads.
NOTE
The function is deactivated when driving at
higher speeds and must be reactivated at a
lower speed, if required.
Related information
•
Brake functions (p. 425)
•
Low speed control* (p. 433)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
Driving in water
Driving in water means that the car is driven
through deep water on a water-covered road-
way. Driving in water must be carried out with
great caution.
The car can be driven through water to a maxi-
mum depth of 40 cm (15.7 inches) at no more
than walking speed. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing water.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed and
do not stop the car. When the water has been
passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and
check that full brake function is achieved. Water
and mud for example can make the brake linings
wet resulting in delayed brake function.
•
If necessary, clean the contacts for the elec-
tric heater and trailer coupling after driving in
water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over the
sills for any long period of time - this could
cause electrical malfunctions.
IMPORTANT
•
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
•
If water enters the transmission, it
reduces the lubricating ability of the oil,
which shortens the service life of related
systems.
•
Damage to any component, engine,
transmission, turbocharger, differential or
its internal components caused by flood-
ing, hydrostatic locking or oil shortage, is
not covered by the warranty.
•
In the event of the engine stalling in
water, do not try restart - tow the car from
the water to a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Risk of
engine breakdown.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 453)
•
Recovering the car (p. 454)
STARTING AND DRIVING
436
Overheating in the engine and drive
system
Under special conditions, for example hard driv-
ing in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk
that the engine and drive system may overheat -
in particular with a heavy load.
•
In the event of overheating, the engine's
power may be limited temporarily.
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of
the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system becomes too high then a warning
symbol is illuminated and the driver display
shows the message
Engine temperature
High temperature Stop safely. Stop the
car in a safe way and allow the engine to run
at idling speed for several minutes and cool
down.
•
If the message
Engine temperature High
temperature Turn off engine or Engine
coolant Level low, turn off engine is
shown, stop the car and switch off the
engine.
•
In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an
alternative gear shift program will be
selected
11
. In addition, a built-in protection
function is activated that, amongst other
things, illuminates a warning symbol and the
driver display shows the message
Transmission warm Reduce speed to
lower temperature or Transmission hot
Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the
recommendation given, reduce speed or stop
the car in a safe way and allow the engine to
run at idling speed for several minutes to
enable the gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning may
be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately you
stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a time after the engine has been
switched off.
Symbols in the driver display
Symbol Specification
High engine temperature. Follow
the recommendation given.
Low level, coolant. Follow the rec-
ommendation given.
Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled.
Follow the recommendation given.
Related information
•
Topping up coolant (p. 540)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
•
Preparations for a long trip (p. 437)
11
Applies to automatic gearbox.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
437
Overloading the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the starter
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the igni-
tion position II when the car is switched off.
Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less
power.
Also, be aware of different accessories that load
the electrical system. Do not use functions which
use a lot of power when the car is switched off.
Examples of such functions are:
•
ventilation fan
•
headlamps
•
windscreen wiper
•
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low, the message
12 V Battery Low charge, will soon enter
power save mode is shown in the driver display.
The energy-saving function then shuts down cer-
tain functions or reduces certain functions such
as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.
–
In which case, charge the starter battery by
starting the car and then running it for at
least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is
more effective during driving than running
the engine at idling speed while stationary.
Related information
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Starter battery (p. 550)
Preparations for a long trip
Before a driving holiday or some other type of
long journey, it is important to check the car's
functions and equipment particularly carefully.
Check that:
•
the engine is working normally and that fuel
consumption is normal
•
there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid)
•
brake force during braking is optimal
•
all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level
if the car is heavily laden
•
the tyres have sufficient tread depth and
pressure. Change to winter tyres when driv-
ing to areas where there is a risk of snowy or
icy road surfaces.
•
starter battery charging is good
•
the wiper blades are in good condition
•
a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are
located in the car - legally required in certain
countries.
Related information
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 590)
•
Checking the tyre pressures (p. 506)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
•
Winter driving (p. 438)
•
Economical driving (p. 444)
•
Settings for car modem* (p. 488)
•
Recommendations for loading (p. 219)
•
Pilot Assist* (p. 307)
•
Speed limiter* (p. 275)
•
Road Sign Information with Speed Camera
Information* (p. 361)
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
•
Driving in water (p. 435)
•
Alarm* (p. 257)
•
Level control* and shock absorption (p. 423)
•
Warning triangle (p. 523)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512)
•
Spare wheel* (p. 520)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
438
Winter driving
For winter driving it is important to perform cer-
tain checks of the car in order to ensure that it
can be driven safely.
Check the following in particular before the cold
season:
•
The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol.
This mixture protects the engine against
frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid
health risks, different types of glycol must not
be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent
condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting
in cold weather and also reduce fuel con-
sumption while the engine is cold. Read
more about suitable oils in the section
"Adverse driving conditions for engine oil".
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the starter
battery and its capacity is reduced by the
cold.
•
Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice
forming in the washer fluid reservoir.
Slippery driving conditions
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recom-
mends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is
a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement
in certain countries. Studded tyres are not
permitted in all countries.
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under con-
trolled conditions to learn how the car reacts.
Related information
•
Topping up coolant (p. 540)
•
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 586)
•
Starter battery (p. 550)
•
Winter wheels (p. 521)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
•
Replacing a wiper blade (p. 548)
•
Parking climate* (p. 200)
•
Activating/deactivating defrost of windows
and door mirrors (p. 188)
•
Drive modes* (p. 418)
•
Foot brake (p. 425)
•
All-wheel drive* (p. 425)
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
439
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
and refuelling
The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler
system.
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
The car must be unlocked for the fuel filler flap to
be opened.
In the driver display, the arrow
next to the tank symbol indi-
cates which side of the car the
fuel filler flap is located.
1. Open the fuel filler flap with a gentle press
on the rear of the flap.
2. After refuelling is finished - close the flap
with a gentle press.
Refuelling at a petrol station
Refuelling is carried out as follows.
1. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler
flap.
2. Choose fuel that is approved for use in the
car in accordance with the identifier
12
on the
inside of the fuel filler flap. See information
on approved fuels and the identifier in the
sections on "Petrol" and "Diesel" respec-
tively.
3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler open-
ing. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps
before refuelling is started.
4. Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump
nozzle cuts out the first time.
> The tank is full.
NOTE
Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
Filling with a fuel can
13
When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
1. Open the fuel filler flap.
2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening.
The filler pipe has two opening caps. The
funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps
before filling can be started.
Label
Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is
in a filling station area.
12
The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by the
end of 2018 at the latest.
13
Only applies to a car with diesel engine.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
440
Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Related information
•
Handling of fuel (p. 440)
•
Petrol (p. 441)
•
Diesel (p. 442)
•
Fuel gauge (p. 97)
Handling of fuel
Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that rec-
ommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect
engine power and fuel consumption.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting
fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of
water for at least 15 minutes and seek medi-
cal attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioe-
thanol and mixtures of them and diesel are
highly toxic and could cause permanent injury
or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical atten-
tion immediately if fuel has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be igni-
ted.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star-
ting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone when
refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark
build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to
fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels
which are not recommended will invalidate
Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary
service agreements; this is applicable to all
engines.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel grade are factors that could
affect the car's performance.
Related information
•
Petrol (p. 441)
•
Diesel (p. 442)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 439)
•
Economical driving (p. 444)
STARTING AND DRIVING
441
Petrol
Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a petrol engine.
Only use petrol from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must
fulfil the EN 228 standard.
Identifier for petrol
The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand-
ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat-
est.
These are the identifiers that apply for current
standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine:
E5 is a petrol with maximum
2.7% oxygen and maximum
5 volume % ethanol.
E10 is a petrol with maximum
3.7% oxygen and maximum
10 volume % ethanol.
IMPORTANT
•
Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by
volume ethanol is permitted.
•
EN 228 E10 petrol (max
10 percent by volume ethanol) is
approved for use.
•
Ethanol higher than E10 (max.
10 percent by volume ethanol) is not per-
mitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted.
Octane rating
•
95 RON can be used for normal driving.
•
98 RON is recommended for optimum per-
formance and minimum fuel consumption.
When driving in temperatures above +38 °C, fuel
with the highest octane rating is recommended
for optimum performance and fuel economy.
IMPORTANT
•
Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damag-
ing the catalytic converter.
•
Fuel containing metallic additives must
not be used.
•
Do not use any additives which have not
been recommended by Volvo.
Related information
•
Handling of fuel (p. 440)
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 439)
STARTING AND DRIVING
442
Diesel
Diesel is a type of engine fuel that is intended for
cars with a diesel engine.
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers.
Never use fuel of dubious quality. Diesel fuel
must fulfil the EN 590 or SS 155435 standard.
Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants in
the fuel, such as excessively high volumes of sul-
phur and metals.
Identifier
The identifier in accordance with the CEN stand-
ard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel
filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel
pumps and their nozzles at filling stations
throughout Europe by the end of 2018 at the lat-
est.
This is the identifier that applies for current
standard fuel in Europe. Diesel with the following
identifiers may be used in cars with diesel
engine:
B7 is diesel with maximum
7 volume % fatty acid methyl
ester (FAME).
At low temperatures (lower than 0 °C) a paraffin
precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may
lead to ignition problems. The fuel qualities that
are sold must be adapted for season and climate
zone, but for extreme weather conditions, old fuel
or moving between climate zones, paraffin precip-
itate may occur.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled.
When refuelling, check that the area around the
fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent
and water.
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel must:
•
fulfil the EN 590 and/or SS 155435
standards
•
have a sulphur content not exceeding
10 mg/kg
•
have a maximum of 7 vol % FAME
14
(B7).
IMPORTANT
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
Special additives
•
Marine diesel fuel
•
Heating oil
•
FAME
15
and vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations and
generate increased wear and engine damage
that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.
Related information
•
Empty tank and diesel engine (p. 443)
•
Diesel particulate filter (p. 443)
14
Fatty Acid Methyl Ester
15
Diesel fuel with maximum 7 vol % FAME (B7) is permitted.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
443
Empty tank and diesel engine
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel starva-
tion, the fuel system needs a few moments to
carry out a check.
Before starting the engine after the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel - proceed as follows:
1. The remote control key must be inside the
car.
2.
Put the car in the ignition position II - turn
the start knob clockwise without pressing the
brake pedal or clutch pedal for cars with
manual gearbox, and hold the start knob for
approx. 4 seconds. Then release the knob,
which automatically returns to its starting
position.
3. Wait approx. one minute.
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake pedal
and turn the start knob clockwise again.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a risk
of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Points to remember when filling with a
fuel can
When filling diesel with a fuel can, use the funnel
located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Make sure you insert the funnel's pipe firmly into
the filler pipe. The filler pipe has an openable
cover and the funnel's pipe must be slid past the
cover before filling can begin.
Related information
•
Diesel (p. 442)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 590)
Diesel particulate filter
Diesel powered cars have a particle filter for
effective emission control.
Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in
the diesel particle filter during normal driving.
When these conditions have been met, regenera-
tion starts to burn off the particles and empty the
filter. To start regeneration, the engine must have
reached normal operating temperature. Regener-
ation of the particulate filter is automatic and nor-
mally takes 10-20 minutes.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power may
be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporar-
ily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating tempera-
ture more quickly.
IMPORTANT
If the filter is completely filled with particles, it
may be difficult to start the engine and the fil-
ter is non-functional. Then there is a risk that
the filter will need to be replaced.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
444
When driving short distances at low
speeds in a diesel car
The capacity of the diesel emission control sys-
tem is affected by how the car is driven. It is
important to drive varying distances at different
speeds to achieve optimal performance.
Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold
climates) frequently, where the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature, can lead to
problems that can eventually cause a malfunction
and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is
mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu-
larly drive at higher speeds to allow the diesel
emission control system to regenerate.
•
The car should be driven on A-roads at
speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at
least 20 minutes between each refuel.
Related information
•
Diesel (p. 442)
Economical driving
Drive economically and eco-consciously by driv-
ing smoothly, thinking ahead, and adjusting your
driving style and speed to the prevailing condi-
tions.
•
For lower fuel consumption, activate Eco
drive mode.
•
Use the Eco Coast
16
freewheel function -
engine braking will cease and the car's
kinetic energy can be used to freewheel for
longer distances.
•
Drive in the highest gear
17
possible, adapted
to the current traffic situation and road -
lower engine speeds result in lower fuel con-
sumption. Use the gear shift indicator.
•
Drive at a steady speed and keep a good dis-
tance to other vehicles and objects to mini-
mise braking.
•
High speed results in increased fuel con-
sumption - the wind resistance increases
with speed.
•
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select ECO
tyre pressure for best results.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption -
seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer.
•
Remove unnecessary items from the car -
the greater the load the higher the consump-
tion.
•
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and space box increase wind
resistance, leading to higher consumption -
remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Avoid driving with open windows.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important
systems such as the power steering and
brake servo.
Related information
•
Drive mode ECO (p. 421)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
•
Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions
(p. 590)
•
Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 25)
16
See the section "Drive mode ECO".
17
Applies to driving with manual gear changing.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
445
Towing bracket*
The car can be equipped with a towing bracket
that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer after
the car.
There may be different towing bracket variants
available for the car; contact a Volvo dealer for
more information.
For information on towing capacity and towball
load, see the section "Towing capacity and tow-
ball load".
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
IMPORTANT
The towball needs regular cleaning and lubri-
cation with grease in order to prevent wear.
NOTE
When a hitch with a vibration damper is used,
the towball must not be lubricated.
This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack
that is clamped in around the towball.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
•
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 582)
•
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 451)
•
Towing bracket specifications* (p. 447)
•
Extendable/retractable towing brackets*
(p. 445)
Extendable/retractable towing
brackets*
The extendable/retractable towing hitch is
always easily accessible and simple to extend or
retract as needed. In the retracted position, the
towing hitch is completely concealed.
WARNING
Follow the instructions for retracting and
extending the towing bracket carefully.
Extending the towing hitch
WARNING
Avoid standing close to the bumper in the
centre behind the car when extending the
towing hitch.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
446
1. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/
retracting the towbar is located on the right-
hand side at the rear of the cargo area. An
indicator lamp in the button must illuminate
with a constant orange glow for the exten-
sion function to be active.
2. Press and release the button - extension
might not start if the button is pressed for
too long.
> The towbar extends out and down in an
unlocked position - the indicator lamp
flashes orange.
WARNING
Do not press the extend/retract button if a
trailer is attached to the towing bracket.
NOTE
The towbar must finish the extension proce-
dure before it can then be moved to locked
position. This procedure may take several
seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked
position, wait a few seconds and try again.
3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it
is secured and locked in place - the indicator
lamp illuminates with a constant orange
glow.
> The towbar is ready for use.
WARNING
Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable
in the intended bracket.
NOTE
Power save mode activates after a while and
the indicator lamp goes out. The system is
reactivated by closing and opening the tail-
gate. This applies when retracting or extend-
ing the towing bracket.
If the car detects a connected trailer electri-
cally, the indicator lamp stops illuminating
with a constant glow.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
* Option/accessory.
447
Retracting the towing hitch
IMPORTANT
Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in
the electrical socket when retracting the tow-
ing bracket.
1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the but-
ton on the right-hand side at the rear of the
cargo area - retraction might not start if the
button is pressed for too long.
> The towing bracket automatically lowers in
an unlocked position - the indicator lamp
in the button flashes orange.
2. Lock the towing bracket by moving it back to
its retracted position, where it is locked.
> The indicator lamp will now illuminate with
a constant glow if the towing bracket is
correctly retracted.
Related information
•
Towing bracket* (p. 445)
•
Towing bracket specifications* (p. 447)
Towing bracket specifications*
Dimensions and mounting points for the towing
bracket.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
448
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A 1041.3
B 90
C 875
D 437,5
E See the image above
F 283.5
G Ball centre
Related information
•
Towing bracket* (p. 445)
Driving with a trailer
When driving with a trailer, there are a number of
points that are important to think about regar-
ding the towing bracket, the trailer and how the
load is positioned in the trailer.
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The
total of the weight of the passengers and all
accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's pay-
load by a corresponding weight.
The car is supplied with the necessary equipment
for towing a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that the
weight on the towing bracket complies with
the specified maximum towball load. Towball
load is calculated as part of the car's payload.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recom-
mended pressure for a full load. For more
information on tyre pressure, see the section
"Approved tyre pressures".
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than usual
when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven at
least 1000 km (620 miles).
•
The brakes are loaded much more than usual
on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift
to a lower gear when shifting manually and
adjust your speed.
•
Follow the regulations in force for the permit-
ted speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
The maximum indicated trailer weight only
applies to heights up to 1000 metres above
sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the
engine output and the vehicle's climbing abil-
ity are reduced due to the reduced air den-
sity, and the maximum trailer load must
therefore be reduced. The weight of the car
and trailer must be decreased by 10% for
each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) (or part
thereof).
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more
than 12%.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
Trailer connector
An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket
has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin
connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo.
Make sure the cable does not drag on the
ground.
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
449
IMPORTANT
When the engine is switched off, the constant
battery voltage to the trailer connector can be
switched off automatically so as not to drain
the starter battery.
Trailer weights
Information about Volvo's permitted trailer
weights is available in the article "Towing
capacity and towball load".
WARNING
Follow the stated recommendations for trailer
weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be
difficult to control in the event of sudden
movement and braking.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer weights
are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle
regulations can further limit trailer weights
and speeds. Towbars can be certified for
higher towing weights than the car can
actually tow.
Level control*
The car's system for level control endeavours to
maintain a constant height regardless of load (up
to the maximum permissible weight). When the
car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly,
which is normal.
When driving in hilly terrain and hot
climates
Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk
of overheating when towing a trailer. In the event
of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in
the driver display together with a message, see
section "Overheating in the engine and drive sys-
tem".
The following only applies to cars with automatic
gearbox.
The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear
related to load and engine speed.
Steep inclines
Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher
gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not
always a good idea to drive at a high gear with
low engine speed.
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3.
Select gear position P.
4. Release the brake pedal.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car
with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the brake pedal fully.
2.
Select gear position D.
3. Releasing the parking brake.
4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off.
Related information
•
Towing bracket* (p. 445)
•
Trailer lamps (p. 450)
•
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 582)
•
Trailer Stability Assist* (p. 451)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
•
Low speed control* (p. 433)
•
Overheating in the engine and drive system
(p. 436)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
450
Trailer lamps
When connecting a trailer - check that all the
trailer lamps work before departure.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators
or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display
shows a symbol and a message. Other lamps on
the trailer must be checked manually by the
driver before departure, see the heading "Check-
ing trailer lamps".
Symbol Message
•
Trailer turn indicator Right
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer turn indicator Left
turn indicator malfunction
•
Trailer brake light Malfunc-
tion
If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is
broken, the driver display symbol for direction
indicators will also flash more quickly than nor-
mal.
Rear fog lamp on trailer
When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp
may not light up on the car. In such cases, the
rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer.
Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check
therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear
fog lamp to travel safely.
Checking trailer lamps*
Automatic checking
After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possi-
ble to check that the trailer lamps are working via
an automatic lamp activation. The function helps
the driver check that the trailer lamps are working
before starting off.
The engine must be switched off to perform the
check.
1. When a trailer is connected to the towing
bracket, the
Automatic Trailer Lamp
Check message is shown in the driver dis-
play.
2. Confirm the message by pressing the right-
hand steering wheel keypad's O button.
> The lamp check starts.
3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality.
> All trailer lamps start to flash - then the
lamps are switched on one at a time.
4. Visually check that all lamps available on the
trailer are operational.
5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash
again.
> The check is complete.
Switching off automatic checking
The automatic checking function can be switched
off in the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Deselect
Automatic Trailer Lamp Check.
Manual checking
If the automatic checking is switched off then it is
possible to start the check manually.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Lights and Lighting.
3.
Select
Manual Trailer Lamp Check.
> The lamp check starts. Exit the car to
check lamp functionality.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
•
Towing bracket* (p. 445)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
451
Trailer Stability Assist*
The function of the trailer stability assist (TSA
18
)
is to stabilise cars with attached trailers in situa-
tions where they begin snaking. The function is
included in the stability system ESC
19
.
Reasons for snaking
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs
at high speeds. But, there is a risk of it occurring
at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the
load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road sur-
face or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even
impossible to suppress. This makes the car/
trailer combination difficult to control and there is
a risk that you could, for example, end up in the
wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
Trailer Stability Assist function
The trailer stability assist function continually
monitors car movements, particularly lateral
movements. If snaking is detected, the front
wheels are individually braked. This serves to sta-
bilise the car/trailer combination. This is often
enough to help the driver regain control of the
car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time that
trailer stability assist comes into action, the car/
trailer combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been
gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combi-
nation is stable once again, the system stops
regulating and the driver once again has full con-
trol of the car.
NOTE
The stability function is deactivated if the
driver selects Sport mode by deactivating
ESC via the menu system in the centre dis-
play.
The trailer stability assist may fail to engage if the
driver uses severe steering wheel movements to
try to rectify the snaking because in such a situa-
tion the system cannot determine whether it is
the trailer or the driver that is causing the snak-
ing.
When trailer stability assist is
operating, the ESC symbol
flashes in the driver display.
Related information
•
Driving with a trailer (p. 448)
•
Electronic Stability Control ESC (p. 271)
18
Trailer Stability Assist
19
Electronic Stability Control (Electronic stability control)
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
452
Towing eye
Use the towing eye for towing. The towing eye is
screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover
on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or
rear.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a towing bracket,
there is no rear mounting for a towing eye.
Fitting the towing eye
1.
Take out the towing eye from the foam block
under the floor hatch in the cargo area.
Front: Remove the cover.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
Rear: Remove the cover - press on the mark-
ing with a finger and, at the same time, fold
out the opposite side/corner using a coin or
similar.
> The cover pivots around its centre line and
can then be removed.
4. Screw the towing eye right in until it stops.
Tighten the towing eye firmly e.g. using the
wheel wrench*.
IMPORTANT
It is important that the towing eye is firmly
screwed into place - right in until it stops.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to
its place.
Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.
STARTING AND DRIVING
}}
453
The towing eye may be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible.
If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too
steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is
inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you
try to pull it up using the towing eye.
If necessary, raise the car by using the recovery
vehicle's lifting device. Do not use the towing eye.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 453)
•
Recovering the car (p. 454)
Towing
During towing, the car is towed by another vehi-
cle by means of a towline.
Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for
towing before the towing begins.
Preparations and towing
1. Activate the car's hazard warning flashers.
2. Secure the towline in the towing eye.
3. Deactivate the steering lock by unlocking the
car.
NOTE
In ignition position II the steering lock is
deactivated if the car has been unlocked. See
section “Ignition position” for more informa-
tion.
4.
Set the car in ignition position II by turning
the start knob clockwise and holding the
start knob in position for approx. 4 seconds.
Then release the knob, which automatically
returns to its starting position.
To reach level II without starting the engine -
do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch
pedal for cars with manual gearbox, when
selecting the ignition position.
5.
Move the gear selector to neutral position N
and release the parking brake.
If the battery voltage is too low, the parking
brake cannot be disengaged. Connect a
donor battery if the battery voltage is too low.
> The towing vehicle can now start towing.
6. Keep the towline taut when the towing vehi-
cle reduces speed by holding your foot gen-
tly pressed on the brake pedal - thereby
avoiding unnecessary jerking.
7. Be prepared to brake to stop.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be towed with
the wheels rolling forward.
•
Do not tow cars with automatic transmis-
sion at speeds higher than 80 km/h
(50 mph) or for distances in excess of 80
km.
WARNING
•
Check that the steering lock is unlocked
before towing.
•
Ignition position II must be active - in
ignition position I all airbags are deacti-
vated.
•
Always keep the remote control key in the
car when it is being towed.
||
STARTING AND DRIVING
* Option/accessory.
454
WARNING
The brake servo and power steering do not
work when the engine is switched off - the
brake pedal needs to be depressed
about 5 times more heavily and the steering is
considerably heavier than normal.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to jump start the engine. Use
a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged
so much that the engine cannot be started; see
section "Jump starting with another battery".
IMPORTANT
The catalytic converter may be damaged dur-
ing attempts to tow-start the engine.
Related information
•
Warning triangle (p. 523)
•
Towing eye (p. 452)
•
Recovering the car (p. 454)
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 406)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Recovering the car
For recovery, the car is taken away with the help
of another vehicle.
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye can be used to pull the car up
onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform.
Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is
equipped with air suspension, this must be disa-
bled before the car is raised. Deactivating the
function via the centre display.
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
The car's position and ground clearance deter-
mine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a
flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehi-
cle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance
under the car is inadequate, then the car may be
damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should
then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting
device.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind
the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up
onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing on
roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out
of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery
assistance.
IMPORTANT
Note that the car must always be transported
with the wheels rolling forward.
Related information
•
Towing (p. 453)
•
Towing eye (p. 452)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
456
Audio and media
The audio and media system consists of media
player and radio. You can also connect a phone
via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play
music wirelessly in the car. When the car is con-
nected to the Internet you can also use apps for
media playback.
Control the functions with your voice, steering
wheel keypad or the centre display. The number
of speakers and amplifiers depends on which
audio system the car is equipped with.
System updating
The audio and media system is continuously
improved. When the car is online there is the
option to download updates for optimal function-
ality, see the section "System updates" and
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Apps (p. 456)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
System updates (p. 531)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 491)
Apps
Applications (apps) facilitate access to some of
the car's services.
Application view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by
market and model.)
Some basic apps are always available. When the
car is online it is possible to download more. The
apps that are available to download vary, but can
include Internet radio and music services.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
457
Certain apps are only available for use if the car
is connected to the Internet.
–
Tap on an app in the app view to launch it.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
•
Changing settings for apps (p. 173)
Audio settings
The audio system is preset for optimal sound
reproduction, but can be adapted according to
needs.
The volume is normally adjusted with the volume
control below the centre display or with the right-
hand steering wheel keypad.
Setting for optimal sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum
sound reproduction by means of digital signal
processing. This calibration takes into account
loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combi-
nation of car model and audio system. There is
also a dynamic calibration that takes into account
the setting of the volume control and vehicle
speed.
Audio settings are described in the correspond-
ing section in the owner information. To access
the settings, open the top view and tap on
Settings Sound.
Active noise reduction*
Certain cars are equipped with an active noise
reduction function that suppresses engine noise
in the passenger compartment via the audio sys-
tem. Microphones in the car's roof detect disrup-
tive noise and the audio system outputs anti-
noise in order to dampen the noise.
Microphones in the car's roof.
NOTE
Do not cover the car's microphones.
Related information
•
Audio settings for media (p. 469)
•
Settings for voice recognition (p. 115)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
•
Audio and media (p. 456)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
458
Radio
It is possible to listen to the AM and FM bands
and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is
online it is also possible to listen to Internet
radio.
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
Related information
•
Changing and searching radio stations
(p. 458)
•
Digital radio (p. 461)
•
RDS radio (p. 460)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Settings for radio (p. 462)
Changing and searching radio
stations
The radio automatically compiles a station list of
the radio stations within the area that are trans-
mitting the strongest signals.
Starting the radio
1.
Open the required frequency band (e.g.
FM)
from the app view.
2. Select station.
Changing lists within the frequency
band
1.
Press
Library.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
459
2.
Select playback from
Stations, Favourites,
Genres or Ensembles
1
.
3. Tap on the desired station from the list.
Favourites — only plays back selected favourite
channels, see heading “Favourites” below.
Genres — only plays back channels broadcast-
ing the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop
or classical.
Changing stations within the selected
list
–
Press on or under the centre dis-
play or the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist.
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
–
Tap on to add or remove a channel to or
from frequency band favourites and Radio
Favourites.
When a favourite is saved from a station list, the
radio will automatically search for the best fre-
quency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual
station search, the radio does not automatically
change to a stronger frequency.
To choose among favourites within the frequency
band, see the heading “Changing lists within the
frequency band” above. To choose from among
all favourites, see the heading “Radio Favourites”
below.
Radio Favourites
Radio Favourites shows saved
favourites from all frequency
bands.
1.
Open the app
Radio favourites from the
app view.
2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start
listening.
When you remove a favourite, it will also be
removed from frequency band favourites.
Changing radio band
–
Return to the app view and press the
required frequency band (e.g.
FM) or open
the app view with the right steering wheel
keypad and select from there.
Searching for radio stations
The parameters you can search on depend on
the frequency band selected:
•
AM — station and frequency.
•
FM — station, genre and frequency.
•
DAB - ensembles and stations.
1.
Press
Library.
2.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
3. Enter the search terms.
> Searching takes place with each input of
a character and the search results are
shown by category.
1
Only applies to digital radio (DAB).
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
460
Manual tuning
On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no
longer changes frequency automatically when
reception is poor.
–
Press Manual tuning, pull the control or
press
or . With a long press, the
search jumps to the next available station in
the frequency band. It is also possible to use
the right keypad on the steering wheel.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Digital radio (p. 461)
RDS radio
With RDS (Radio Data System) the radio can
automatically change to the strongest transmit-
ter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic
information and to search for certain programme
types.
RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM
transmitter in such a network sends information
that gives an RDS radio the following functions:
•
Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter
if reception in the area is poor.
•
Search for programme category, e.g. pro-
gramme types or traffic information.
•
Receive text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or only
selected parts of its functionality.
When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the
radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio
source currently in use. For example, if the CD
player is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when the
set programme type is no longer broadcast. To
go back earlier, press
on the right-hand
steering wheel keypad or tap
Cancel in the cen-
tre display.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Settings for radio (p. 462)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
461
Digital radio
Digital radio (Digital Audio Broadcasting, DAB)
is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The
radio supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB (Digital
Multimedia Broadcasting).
The radio can be operated
using voice recognition, the
steering wheel keypad or the
centre display.
The digital radio app is
launched from app view in the
centre display.
Digital radio plays back in the same way as FM
and AM, see section "Changing and searching
for radio stations". Besides the options to select
playback from
Stations, Favourites and
Genres, there is also the option to select play-
back from subchannels and Ensembles. An
ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel
group) broadcasting on the same frequency.
In the cases where the radio channel transmits
its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside
the station name (download time varies).
DAB subchannel
Secondary components are usually named sub-
channels. These are temporary and can contain
e.g. translations of the main programme into
other languages. Subchannels are indicated with
an arrow symbol in the channel list.
Related information
•
Changing and searching radio stations
(p. 458)
•
Linking between different radio bands FM
and DAB (p. 461)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Settings for radio (p. 462)
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
Linking between different radio
bands FM and DAB
The function enables the digital radio to switch
from a channel with poor or no reception to the
same channel in another channel group (ensem-
ble) with better reception, within DAB and/or
between DAB and FM.
DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Media DAB.
3.
Tick/untick
DAB To DAB Handover and/or
DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/
deactivate the respective functions.
Related information
•
Digital radio (p. 461)
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Settings for radio (p. 462)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
462
Settings for radio
Settings for the different radio bands.
The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be
temporarily interrupted by tapping on
in the
right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping
on
Cancel in the centre display.
Drag down the top view and select Settings
Media and the desired radio band. Activating/
deactivating functions.
AM/FM
•
Show Broadcast Information — shows
information on programme content, artists,
etc.
•
Freeze Program Name — select to stop
the programme service name from scrolling
continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 sec-
onds.
•
News - interrupts the current media play-
back and broadcasts news. Playback of pre-
vious media source is resumed when the
news broadcast is finished.
•
Traffic Announcements - interrupts the
current media playback and broadcasts infor-
mation about traffic disruptions. Playback of
previous media source is resumed when the
message is finished.
•
Local Interruptions — interrupts the cur-
rent media playback and broadcasts informa-
tion about traffic disruptions in the neigh-
bourhood. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
The
Local Interruptions function is a geo-
graphically restricted version of the Traffic
Announcements function. The Traffic
Announcements function must be acti-
vated at the same time.
•
Alarm - interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is fin-
ished.
DAB
•
Sort Services - selection for how channels
will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by
service number.
•
DAB To DAB Handover - starts the func-
tion for linking within DAB. If reception of a
radio channel is lost, another channel is
found automatically in another channel group
(ensemble).
•
DAB To FM Handover - starts the function
for linking between DAB and FM. If reception
of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM
frequency is searched for automatically.
•
Select Announcements — select the
types of messages to be received while DAB
is playing. Selected messages will interrupt
the current media playback to play back the
message. Playback of previous media source
is resumed when the message is finished.
Alarm - interrupts the current media play-
back and sends alerts about major accidents
and disasters. Playback of previous media
source is resumed when the message is fin-
ished.
Traffic Flash — receives information about
traffic disruptions.
News Flash — receives news.
Transport Flash — receives information
about public transport, e.g. ferry and train
timetables.
Warning/Services — receives information
about incidents of lower significance than
the Alarm function, e.g. power failures.
•
Show Broadcast Information — select to
show radio text or selected types of radio
text, e.g. artist.
•
Show Program Related Images — select
whether or not to show images for pro-
grammes on the screen.
Related information
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
Digital radio (p. 461)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
463
Media player
The media player can play back audio from the
CD player*, from external audio sources via the
USB port or via Bluetooth. It can also play video
via the USB port.
When the car is connected to the internet, it is
also possible to listen to web radio, audio books
and music services via apps.
The radio is operated in the media player and is
described in a separate section.
The media player is operated
from the centre display, but
several functions can be oper-
ated using the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad or voice con-
trol.
Related information
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Apps (p. 456)
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
CD player* (p. 467)
•
Media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 467)
•
Media via USB port (p. 468)
•
video (p. 469)
Media playback
The media player is controlled from the centre
display. Several functions can also be operated
using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or
voice control.
The media player also operates the radio, which
is described in a separate section.
Starting the media source
Application view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by
market and model.)
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
464
CD*
1. Insert a CD.
2.
Open the app
CD from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
USB memory
1. Insert the USB memory.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Select what to play back.
> Playback begins.
Mp3 player and iPod
®
NOTE
To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app
(not USB).
When an iPod is used as audio source, the
car's audio and media system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod player's
own menu structure.
1. Connect media source.
2. Start playback from the connected media
source.
3.
Open the app (
iPod, USB) from the app
view.
> Playback begins.
Bluetooth connected device
1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source.
2. Connect media source.
3. Start playback from the connected media
source.
4.
Open the app
Bluetooth from the app view.
> Playback begins.
Internet media
1. Connecting the car.
2. Open the app from the app view.
> Playback begins.
video
1. Connect media source.
2.
Open the app
USB from the app view.
3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play
back.
> Playback begins.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is described in a separate section.
Controlling and changing media
The media player can be oper-
ated by voice recognition, from
the steering wheel keypad or
the centre display.
Volume - turn the control knob under the centre
display or press
on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad in order to increase or
decrease the volume.
Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the
song being played back, the physical button
under the centre display or
on the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad.
Change track/song - tap on the desired track in
the centre display, press on
or under
the centre display or on the steering wheel's
right-hand keypad.
Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis
in the centre display and drag sideways, or press
and hold
or under the centre display or
on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
465
Changing media - select from previous sources
in the app, in the app view, press on the desired
app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand
keypad via the app menu
.
Library - tap on the button to
play back from the library.
Shuffle - tap on the button to
shuffle the playback order.
Similar - tap on the button in
order to use Gracenote to
search for similar music on the
USB device and to create a
playlist from it. The playlist can
contain a maximum of 50
songs.
Change device - tap on the
button in order to switch
between USB devices when
several are connected.
Settings for video
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing
Settings
Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio
Language, Off and Subtitle Language.
Playing back DivX
®
This DivX Certified
®
device must be registered in
order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-
Demand (VOD) films.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap
Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the
registration code.
3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and
to complete the registration.
Related information
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
•
Apps (p. 456)
•
Searching media (p. 466)
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 468)
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
•
CD player* (p. 467)
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Gracenote
®
(p. 466)
•
video (p. 469)
•
Audio settings for media (p. 469)
•
TV* (p. 470)
•
Apple CarPlay* (p. 471)
•
Android Auto* (p. 473)
•
Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
466
Gracenote
®
Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles
and associated images, which are shown during
playback.
Gracenote MusicID
®
is a standard for music rec-
ognition.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Media Gracenote®.
3. Select settings for Gracenote data:
•
Gracenote® Online Search - searches in
Gracenote's online database for playing
media.
•
Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects
how to display Gracenote data if there are
more than one search results.
1 - the file's original data are used.
2 - Gracenote data are used.
3 - Gracenote or original data can be
selected.
•
None - no results are shown.
Updating Gracenote
The content of the Gracenote database is upda-
ted continuously. Download the latest update for
optimal functionality. For information and down-
load, see support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 491)
Searching media
It is possible to search by artist, composer, song
titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, with
an online connected car, podcasts (digital media
via Internet).
1.
Press
.
> Search view with keyboard is opened.
2. Enter the search terms.
3.
Press
Search.
> Connected devices are searched and the
search results are listed by category.
Swipe sideways across the screen to show each
category separately.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
467
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
CD player*
The media player can play back CD discs with
audio files. See technical specifications for sup-
ported formats.
Disc insert and eject slot.
Disc eject button.
Related information
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
Media via Bluetooth
®
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth
®
and can wirelessly play audio files
from external devices with Bluetooth
®
, such as
mobile phones and PDAs.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
(p. 468)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
468
Connecting a device via Bluetooth
®
Connect a Bluetooth
®
device with the car in
order to stream media and use as Internet con-
nection if it is available.
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth
®
technology, but not all of them are
fully compatible with the car. For compatibility,
see support.volvocars.com.
The procedure for connecting a media device is
the same as for connecting a phone.
Related information
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Media via Bluetooth
®
(p. 467)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Media player (p. 463)
Media via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system.
Devices with rechargeable batteries are
recharged when connected via USB and the igni-
tion is in position I, II or the engine is running.
The content of the external source can be loaded
more quickly if it only consists of compatible for-
mats. Video files can also be played back via the
USB port.
Some MP3 players have their own file systems
that are not supported by the audio system.
Related information
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
video (p. 469)
•
Apple CarPlay* (p. 471)
•
Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
Connecting a device via USB port
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod
®
or MP3
player, can be connected to the audio system via
one of the ports in the tunnel console. Allow the
cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped
when the lid is closed.
The phone must be connected to the USB port
with white frame (when there are two USB ports)
when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*.
USB ports in the tunnel console.
Related information
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Media via USB port (p. 468)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
469
video
Videos on USB-connected devices can be
played back using the media player.
No picture is shown when the car starts to move,
but only the audio is played back. The picture is
shown again when the car is stationary.
See section "Technical specifications for media"
for supported video formats.
Related information
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Technical specifications for media (p. 475)
Audio settings for media
Changing the audio settings for music and other
playback.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap on
Sound and select settings:
•
Tone — personal settings for bass, treble,
equaliser, etc.
•
Balance - balance between right/left
loudspeakers and balance between front/
rear loudspeakers.
•
System Volumes – adjusts volume in
the various systems of the car. For exam-
ple, Voice Control, Park Assist and
Phone Ringtone.
Sound experience*
Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall.
With the Sound Experience app, there are
more audio playback options, e.g. playback with
concert hall feel. The settings replace any
choices made for audio settings.
Related information
•
Audio settings (p. 457)
•
Media player (p. 463)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
470
TV*
2
No images are shown once the car reaches a
certain speed but the sound will be heard the
whole time. The picture returns once more when
the car is almost or completely stationary.
The TV is controlled from the centre display. Sev-
eral functions can also be controlled from the
right keypad on the steering wheel or with voice
recognition.
Related information
•
Using the TV* (p. 470)
Using the TV*
3
Start the TV
1.
Open the app
TV from the app view.
2. Select a channel.
Change or search for TV channels
The TV automatically searches for the channels
with best reception.
Change the list of visible channels
1.
Press
Library
2.
Select playback from
TV-channels or
Favourites.
3. Select the desired channel.
Change channel from selected list
–
Press on or under the centre dis-
play or on the steering wheel keypad.
> The highlight moves up or down one
place in the selected playlist
You can also change stations from the centre
display.
Favourites
A TV channel can be saved as a favourite:
–
Tap on in order to add/remove a chan-
nel to/from the favourites list.
TV guide
A programme guide is available with information
about TV programmes for up to 48 hours.
–
Tap on Guide to show information about TV
programmes.
NOTE
If the car is moved within the country, e.g.
from city to city, it is not certain that
Favourites are available since the frequency
may have changed.
Change the format of the TV picture
Tapping on Picture format enables you to
choose which format the TV picture should be
shown in.
1.
Auto - The TV picture is shown in the image
format being transmitted.
2.
Auto fill - The TV picture is maximised with-
out cropping.
Settings for TV
The option to make certain settings is available,
both in the top view or when TV-viewing takes
place in full screen mode.
2
Applies to certain markets.
3
Applies to certain markets.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
471
With the video player in full screen mode, or by
opening the top view and pressing
Settings
Media TV, the following can be adjusted:
•
Subtitle Language
•
Audio Language
NOTE
The system only supports TV broadcasts in
the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2 or
MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T/T2
standard. The system does not support ana-
logue broadcasts.
Related information
•
TV* (p. 470)
•
Voice recognition control of radio and media
(p. 116)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Navigating in the centre display's views
(p. 40)
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 491)
Apple CarPlay*
Apple CarPlay gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions, send/
receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay
focused on your driving. Apple CarPlay works
with selected Apple devices.
If the car is not already equipped with
Apple CarPlay then it is possible to install it after-
wards. Contact a Volvo dealer to install
Apple CarPlay.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on
Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/.
Using apps that are not compatible with
Apple CarPlay may sometimes mean that the
connection between an iPhone and the car is
broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible
for the content in Apple CarPlay.
When using map navigation via Apple CarPlay
there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
up display, but only in the centre display.
The Apple CarPlay apps can be controlled via the
centre display, mobile phone or with the steering
wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain
functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled
using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel
button
starts voice control using Siri and a
short press activates the car's own voice control.
If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel
button
depressed.
By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge
the following: Apple CarPlay is a service
provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not
responsible for Apple CarPlay or its
features/applications. When using Apple
CarPlay, certain information from your car
(including its position) is transferred to your
iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are
fully responsible for your and any others
person’s use of Apple CarPlay.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
•
Using Apple CarPlay* (p. 472)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
472
Using Apple CarPlay*
To use Apple CarPlay, Siri voice control must be
activated in your phone. The phone must also
have an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the
mobile network.
Connect an iPhone and start
Apple CarPlay
NOTE
Apple CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth
is deactivated. A phone or media player con-
nected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore
not be available when Apple CarPlay is active.
An alternative Internet source must be used
to connect to the Internet for the car's apps.
Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2. Read the information in the pop-up message
and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on
Accept to connect.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Starting Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay is started according to the follow-
ing after an iPhone has been connected.
1. Connect an iPhone to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
>
If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the subview with
Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible
apps are shown.
2. If the subview with Apple CarPlay is not
opened, tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app
view.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Apple CarPlay runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
Apple CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the
Apple CarPlay icon in the app view.
Switch the connection between
Apple CarPlay and iPod
Apple CarPlay to iPod
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Continue to
Communication Apple
CarPlay
.
3. Untick the box for the Apple device that shall
no longer start Apple CarPlay automatically
when the USB cable is connected.
4. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
5.
Open the app
iPod from the app view.
iPod to Apple CarPlay
1.
Tap on
Apple CarPlay in the app view.
2. Read the information in the pop-up message
and then tap on
OK.
3. Disconnect and connect the Apple device to
the USB port.
> The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
•
Settings for Apple CarPlay* (p. 473)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
473
Settings for Apple CarPlay*
Settings for Apple device connected with Apple
CarPlay.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Continue to
Communication Apple
CarPlay
and select setting:
•
Tick the box - Apple CarPlay starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
•
Untick the box - Apple CarPlay does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Apple devices can be stored in
the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset is required in order to delete the
list; see the section "Resetting settings in the
settings menu".
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap on
Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
•
Voice Control
•
Navi Voice Guidance
•
Phone Ringtone
Related information
•
Apple CarPlay* (p. 471)
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
Android Auto*
Android Auto gives you the option to listen to
music, make phone calls, get directions and use
car-adapted apps from an Android device.
Android Auto works with selected Android devi-
ces.
Information about which apps are supported and
which phones are compatible is available on the
website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party
apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is
not responsible for the content in Android Auto.
Android Auto is started from the app view. After
Android Auto has been started once, the applica-
tion will be started automatically the next time the
device is connected. Automatic start can be
deactivated under settings.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
474
NOTE
When a phone is connected to Android Auto
it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to
another media player. Bluetooth is active
while Android Auto is being used.
When using map navigation via Android Auto
there is no guidance in the driver display or head-
up display, but only in the centre display.
Android Auto can be controlled via the centre
display using the steering wheel's right-hand key-
pad or voice control. A long press on the steering
wheel button
starts voice recognition control
and a short press deactivates.
By using Android Auto, you acknowledge
the following: Android Auto is a service
provided by Google Inc. under its terms and
conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for
Android Auto or its features or applications.
When you use Android Auto, your car
transfers certain information (including its
location) to your connected Android phone.
You are fully responsible for your and any
other person’s use of Android Auto.
Starting Android Auto
The first time an Android is connected
1. Connect the Android to the USB port. In the
cases where there are two USB ports, the
one with the white frame around the port
must be used.
2. Read the information in the pop-up message
and then tap on
OK.
3.
Tap on
Android Auto in the app view.
4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap
on
Accept to connect.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
5. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Previously connected Android
1. Connect the phone to the USB port.
>
If the setting for automatic start is
selected - the subview with Android Auto
is opened and compatible apps are
shown.
2.
If the setting for automatic start is not
selected - open the
Android Auto app from
the app view.
> The subview with Android Auto is opened
and compatible apps are shown.
3. Tap on the desired app.
> The app starts.
Android Auto runs in the background if another
app is started in the same subview. To show
Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the
Android Auto icon in the app view.
Related information
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
•
Connecting a device via USB port (p. 468)
•
Settings for Android Auto* (p. 475)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
475
Settings for Android Auto*
Settings for a phone that has been connected
the first time with Android Auto.
Automatic start
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Android Auto
and select setting:
•
Tick the box - Android Auto starts auto-
matically when the USB cable is con-
nected.
•
Untick the box - Android Auto does not
start automatically when the USB cable is
connected.
A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored
in the list. When the list is full and a new device is
connected the oldest one is deleted.
A factory reset is required in order to delete the
list; see the section "Resetting settings in the
settings menu".
System volumes
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Tap on
Sound System Volumes and
make the settings for the following:
•
Voice Control
•
Navi Voice Guidance
•
Phone Ringtone
Related information
•
Android Auto* (p. 473)
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
Technical specifications for media
Compatible file formats, audio specifications
and USB.
Audio files
For-
mat
File extension Codec
MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III,
MPEG2 Layer III,
MP3 Pro (mp3
compatible),
MP3 HD (mp3
compatible)
AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4
part III Audio),
HE-AAC (aacPlus
v1/v2)
WMA .wma WMA8/9,
WMA9/10 Pro
WAV .wav LPCM
FLAC .flac FLAC
Video files
Format File extension
MP4 .mp4, m4v
MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
476
Format File extension
AVI .avi
AVI (DivX) .avi, divx
ASF .asf, .wmv
MKV .mkv
Subtitles
Format File extension
SubViewer .sub
SubRip .srt
SSA .ssa
DivX
®
DivX certified devices have been tested for high-
quality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you
see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play
DivX films.
Profile DivX Home Theater
Video codec DivX, MPEG-4
Resolution 720x576
Bit rate 4.8Mbps
Frame rate 30 fps
File extension .divx, .avi
Max file size 4 GB
Audio codec MP3, AC3
Subtitles XSUB
Special func-
tions
Multiple subtitles, multiple
audio, resume play
Reference Meets all requirements of
the DivX Home Theater pro-
file. Visit divx.com for more
information and software
tools to convert your files
into DivX Home Theater
video.
Storage on USB device
In order for the system to read the USB device
correctly, the following specifications must be fol-
lowed. No folder structure will be shown in the
centre display during playback.
Max number
Files 15000
Folders 1000
Folder levels 8
Playlists 100
Items in a playlist 1000
Subfolders No limit
Technical specification for USB
connector
•
Type A socket
•
Version 2.0
•
Voltage supply 5 V
•
Current supply max. 2.1 A
Related information
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Media playback (p. 463)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
477
Phone
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth can be
connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-
free system.
The audio and media system acts as a handsfree,
with the facility to remotely control a selection of
the mobile phone's functions. The mobile phone
can still be operated with its own keys if it is con-
nected to the car.
When a mobile phone has been paired with the
car and connected, it can be used make calls,
send/receive messages, stream media and used
as an Internet connection.
The phone is operated from the
centre display, but some opera-
tions are also available via voice
recognition and the app menu,
which are accessed from the
right-hand steering wheel key-
pad.
Overview
Microphone.
Mobile phone.
Phone operation from centre display.
Keypad for operating phone functions that
are shown in the driver display and voice rec-
ognition.
Driver display.
Related information
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Connecting/disconnecting the phone
(p. 479)
•
Managing phone calls (p. 480)
•
Managing text messages (p. 481)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
•
Settings for text messages (p. 483)
•
Bluetooth
®
settings (p. 483)
•
Voice recognition (p. 113)
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
•
Media player (p. 463)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
478
Connect phone
Connect a Bluetooth-activated phone to the car
to make calls, send/receive messages, stream
media and connect the car to the Internet.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices con-
nected at once, in which case one of them can
only be streaming media. The most recently con-
nected phone will automatically be connected to
make calls, send/receive messages, stream
media and provide an Internet connection. To
change the use of the phone, see section
"Bluetooth settings".
Connection is performed once per device. After
connection, the Bluetooth device no longer
needs to be visible/searchable but only needs to
have Bluetooth activated. To connect the car to
the Internet via a phone, tethering must be acti-
vated on the phone. A maximum of 20 connected
Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car.
There are two options for connecting. Either
search the phone from the car or search the car
from the phone.
Option 1 - search phone from car
1. Make the phone searchable/visible via
Bluetooth.
2. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
3. Open the subview for phone.
•
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on
Add phone.
•
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on Add phone.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The
list is updated as new devices are
detected.
4. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
5. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the phone. In which case,
choose to accept in both places.
6. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
Option 2 - search car from phone
1. Open the subview for phone.
•
If there is no phone connected to the car,
tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
•
If there is a phone connected to the car,
tap on
Change . In the pop-up win-
dow, tap on
Add phone Make car
discoverable
.
2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
3. To connect the car to the Internet via the
phone’s Bluetooth, activate tethering (porta-
ble/personal hotspot) via Bluetooth on the
phone.
4. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices.
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
5. Select the name of the car on the phone.
6. Check that the specified number code in the
car matches that in the external device. In
which case, choose to accept in both places.
7. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any
options for phone contacts and messages.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
479
NOTE
•
The message function must be activated
in certain phones.
•
Not all mobile phones are fully compati-
ble and may therefore not show contacts
and messages in the car.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then the connection may be broken. In which
case, delete the phone from the car and then
connect again.
Compatible phones
Many phones on the market now have wireless
Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully
compatible with the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Connecting/disconnecting the phone
(p. 479)
•
Bluetooth
®
settings (p. 483)
•
Managing phone calls (p. 480)
•
Managing text messages (p. 481)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
Connecting/disconnecting the
phone
Connect, change or disconnect a connected
phone.
Connecting the phone automatically
It is only the two last connected phones that can
be connected automatically.
1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before set-
ting the car in ignition position I.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) in the phone must be activated.
2.
Set the car in ignition position I or higher.
> The phone will connect.
Connect the phone manually
1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone.
To connect the car to the Internet at the
same time, tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) in the phone must be activated.
2. Open the subview for phone.
> Connected phones are listed.
3. Tap on the name of the phone to be con-
nected.
> The phone will connect.
Disconnecting the phone
–
Deactivate Bluetooth on the phone.
When the phone is out of range of the car it is
automatically disconnected. If disconnection
occurs during an active call then the call can be
continued on the phone.
Changing phones
1. Open the subview for phone.
2.
Press
Change .
> Available Bluetooth devices are listed.
3. Tap on the phone to be connected.
Removing a phone
1. Open the subview for phone.
2.
Press
Settings Communication
Bluetooth Devices.
> A list of connected Bluetooth devices is
displayed.
3. Tap on the phone to be removed.
4.
Tap on
Remove device and confirm your
selection.
> The phone is no longer connected with
the car.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
•
Bluetooth
®
settings (p. 483)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
480
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
Managing phone calls
Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Generic illustration.
Making phone calls
1. Open the subview for phone.
2. Select call from: call history, enter number
using the keypad or via the contact list. It is
possible to search or browse in the contact
list. Tap on
in the contact list in order to
add a contact under
Favourites.
3.
Tap on
Call or .
4.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
You can also make calls from the call log via the
app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand
steering wheel keypad .
Making multi-party calls
During a call:
1.
Press
Add call.
2. Choose to make a call from the call log,
favourites or the contact list.
3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on
alongside the contact in the contact list.
4.
Tap on
Swap call to switch between the
parties.
5.
Tap on
End call to end the active call.
Conference calls
During an active multi-party call:
1.
Tap on
Join calls to merge the active multi-
party call.
2.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
Incoming phone calls
Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver dis-
play and the centre display. Manage the call on
the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the
centre display.
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
Incoming phone call during an active call
1.
Tap on
Answer/Reject.
2.
Tap on
End call to end the call.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
481
Private call
–
During the current call, press Privacy and
select setting:
•
Switch to mobile phone - the hands-
free function is disconnected and the call
continues on your mobile phone.
•
Driver focused - the microphone in the
roof on the passenger side is switched off
and the call continues with the car's
handsfree function.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
Managing text messages
Message handling in the car for a Bluetooth-
connected phone.
In some phones, the message function must be
activated. Not all mobile phones are compatible.
In such cases, they cannot display contacts and
messages in the car. For compatibility, see
support.volvocars.com.
Managing text messages in the centre
display
Text messages are only shown in the centre dis-
play if the setting is selected; see the section
"Settings for text messages".
Press Messages in the app
view to manage text messages
in the centre display.
Reading a text message in the centre display
–
Press Read out to get the message read
aloud.
Sending text messages in the centre display
1. It is not possible to reply to a message or
create a new message.
•
Reply to message — tap on the contact
whose message you wish to reply to, then
tap on
Answer.
•
To create a new message – press
Create
new and then +. Select a contact or enter
a number.
2. Compose the message.
3.
Press
Send.
Managing text messages in the driver
display
Text messages are only shown in the driver dis-
play if the setting is selected; see the section
"Settings for text messages".
Reading a new text message in the driver
display
–
To have the message read aloud – select
Read out with the steering wheel keypad.
Dictating a reply in the driver display
After the text message is read aloud, a brief reply
can be created through dictation.
–
Press Answer with the steering wheel key-
pad. A dictation dialogue starts. For this func-
tion to work, the car must be connected to
the Internet.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
482
Message notification
For notification settings, see section "Settings for
text messages".
Related information
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Settings for text messages (p. 483)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
•
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
Managing the phone book
Contact handling in the car for a Bluetooth-con-
nected phone.
Browse between the letters and to find
a matching contact. Depending on existing
contacts in the phone book, only matching
letters are shown.
Search contacts - tap on to search for
a phone number of name in the contact list.
Favourites - tap on to add/remove a
contact to/from the favourites list.
NOTE
Only contacts from an active Bluetooth-con-
nected phone are shown in the centre display.
Up to 3000 contacts can be shown.
Sorting
The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order
where special characters and numbers are sorted
under
. The sort order can be made by first or
last name, see the section "Settings for phone"
for more information.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Voice recognition control of the phone
(p. 116)
•
Using the application menu in the driver dis-
play (p. 104)
•
Using the keyboard in the centre display
(p. 49)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
483
Settings for phone
Settings for connected phone.
Phone
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Phone and
select settings:
•
Ringtones - select ringtone. It is possible
to use a ringtone from the phone or the
car. Some phones are not fully compatible
and their ringtones may therefore not be
available for use in the car. For compatibil-
ity, see support.volvocars.com.
•
Sort order for contacts - select sort
order of contact list.
For call notifications in the head-up display*,
see section "Head-up display".
Related information
•
Settings for text messages (p. 483)
•
Bluetooth
®
settings (p. 483)
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Head-up display* (p. 110)
Settings for text messages
Settings for text messages on connected phone.
Message
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Text Messages
and select settings:
•
Notification in centre display - shows
message notifications in the centre dis-
play's status bar.
•
Notification in driver display - shows
notifications in the driver display. When
notifications in the driver display are
active, it is possible to manage incoming
messages with the steering wheel's right-
hand keypad.
•
Text message tone - select tone for
incoming text message.
Related information
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Managing text messages (p. 481)
•
Settings for phone (p. 483)
Bluetooth
®
settings
Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices.
Bluetooth
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Bluetooth
Devices
and select settings:
•
Add device - starts the pairing of a new
device.
•
Previously paired devices - lists con-
nected devices.
•
Remove device - removes the connected
device.
•
Allowed services for this device - sets
device usage options: calling, sending/
receiving messages, streaming media and as
Internet connection.
•
Internet connection - connects the car to
the Internet via the device's Bluetooth con-
nection.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Phone (p. 477)
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Media player (p. 463)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
484
Online car*
An online car provides the ability to use e.g.
Internet radio and music services via apps as
well as contact dealers in the car and download
software.
The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with
the car's built-in modem*.
When the car is connected to the Internet, its
Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) can be
shared to allow other devices to use the Internet
connection
4
.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
Related information
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
•
Apps (p. 456)
•
Book service and repair (p. 528)
•
System updates (p. 531)
•
Volvo ID (p. 23)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 486)
Connecting the car
Connect the car to the phone via Bluetooth,
Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem*.
The mobile phone and network operator must
support tethering (sharing the Internet connec-
tion) and the plan must include data.
NOTE
Data is transferred when using the internet
(data traffic), which can have a cost.
Activation of data roaming can result in fur-
ther charges.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
NOTE
When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible
to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi
or car modem*.
NOTE
When using Android Auto, it is possible to
connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi,
Bluetooth or car modem*.
4
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
485
Read Terms and Conditions for Services and
Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com before connecting.
Connecting with Bluetooth
See Connecting a phone.
Connecting with Wi-Fi
1. Activate tethering (portable/personal hot-
spot) on the mobile phone.
2.
Press
Settings in top view.
3.
Continue to
Communication Wi-Fi.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Wi-Fi.
5. Tap on the network name of the network to
be connected.
6. Enter the network password.
7. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
> The car connects to the network.
Note that certain phones switch off tethering
after the contact with the car has been discon-
nected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the
next time it is used. The tethering in the phone
therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it
is used.
When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved
for future use. When the maximum number of
saved phones (50) is reached, the first con-
nected phones are deleted. To show the list of
saved networks or manually delete saved net-
works, go to Settings Communication
Wi-Fi Saved networks.
For network connection requirements, see the
section “Technology and security for Wi-Fi”.
Connecting with car modem*
5
When the car is connected to the Internet via the
car modem, Volvo On Call services will use this
connection.
1.
Fit a personal SIM card into the holder by the
floor on the passenger side.
2.
Press
Settings in top view.
3.
Press
Communication Car Modem
Internet
.
4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for
Car modem Internet.
5. If another connection source has been used
in the past - confirm the option to change
connection.
6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code.
> The car connects to the network.
5
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
486
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Connect phone (p. 478)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 488)
•
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 488)
•
No or poor connection (p. 487)
•
Settings for car modem* (p. 488)
•
Bluetooth
®
settings (p. 483)
•
Apple CarPlay* (p. 471)
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot
When the car is connected to the Internet, its
Internet connection can be shared to allow other
devices to use the Internet connection.
6
The network operator (SIM card) must support
tethering (sharing of the Internet connection).
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Car Wi-Fi
Hotspot
.
3.
Tap on
Network name and name the
shared connection.
4.
Tap on
Password and select a password to
be entered on connecting devices.
5.
Tap on
Frequency band and select the fre-
quency on which the hotspot is to transmit
data. Note that selection of frequency band
is not available in all markets.
6. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the
box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot.
7. If Wi-Fi has previously been used as a con-
nection source, confirm the option to change
connection.
> It is now possible for external devices to
connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hot-
spot).
NOTE
Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in fur-
ther charges from your network operator.
Contact your network operator about the cost
for data traffic.
Connection status is indicated by the symbol in
the centre display's status bar.
6
This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
487
Press
Connected devices to see a list of the
currently connected devices.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 488)
•
Symbols in the centre display's status bar
(p. 45)
•
No or poor connection (p. 487)
No or poor connection
Factors affecting the network.
The amount of data transferred is dependent on
the services or apps in use in the car. For exam-
ple, streaming audio can require large amounts of
data which requires a good connection and good
signal strength.
Mobile phone to car
The speed of the connection may vary depending
on the location of the mobile phone in the car.
Move the mobile phone handset closer to the
centre display in order to increase the signal
strength. Ensure that there is no source of inter-
ference in between.
Mobile phone to network
The speed of the mobile network varies depend-
ing on the coverage in the present location. Poor
network coverage may occur, for example in tun-
nels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or
indoors. The speed also depends on the agree-
ment you have with your network.
NOTE
In the event of problems with data traffic, con-
tact your network operator.
Restarting the phone
If there are problems with the connection then it
may help to restart the phone.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
488
Remove Wi-Fi network
Removing a network that is not to be used.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Continue to
Communication Wi-Fi
Saved networks.
3.
Tap on
Forget alongside the network to be
removed.
4. Confirm the selection.
> The car will no longer connect to the net-
work in future.
Remove all networks
All networks can be removed simultaneously by
restoring factory settings. Please note that all
user data and system settings are reset to origi-
nal factory settings.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
•
Resetting settings in the settings menu
(p. 169)
Wi-Fi technologies and security
Possible network types to connect to.
It is only possible to connect to the following
types of network:
•
Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz
7
.
•
Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n.
•
Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP.
The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle
Wi-Fi devices inside the car.
If several devices operate on the frequency at the
same time then it may result in reduced perform-
ance.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Connecting the car (p. 484)
•
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 486)
•
No or poor connection (p. 487)
Settings for car modem*
8
The car is equipped with a modem that can be
used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also
possible to share the Internet connection via
Wi-Fi.
1.
Press
Settings in top view.
2.
Press
Communication Car Modem
Internet
and select settings:
•
Car modem Internet - select whether to
use the car modem as Internet connection.
•
Data usage - tap on Reset resets the
counters for received and sent data volume.
•
Network
Select network operator
- automatic or
manual selection of network operator.
Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car
modem will attempt to connect to the Inter-
net when the car is abroad and outside its
home network. Note that this may result in
heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement
for data traffic abroad with your network pro-
vider in your home country.
•
SIM card PIN
7
Selection of frequency is not available on all markets.
8
Only cars with Volvo On Call.
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
* Option/accessory.
489
Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be
entered.
Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code
shall be required for access to the SIM card.
•
Send request code — used e.g. to top up
or check the balance on a prepaid card.
Functionality depends on the provider.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Sharing Internet via Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 486)
Downloading, updating and
uninstalling apps
Once the car is connected, it is possible to
download new apps, update existing apps or
uninstall apps.
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
When downloading using a mobile phone,
note the data download costs.
The apps are managed via
Download Centre in applica-
tion view.
To be able to download, update
or uninstall apps, the car must
be online.
Downloading an app
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
New apps in order to open a list of
apps that are available but not installed in
the car.
3. Tap anywhere on the row for an app in order
to expand in the list and get more informa-
tion about the app.
4.
Select
Install in order to start the download
and installation of the desired app.
> The status of the download and installa-
tion is shown while it is in progress.
A message is shown if a download cannot
be started for the moment. The app will
remain in the list and it is possible to try to
start a download again.
Cancelling a download
–
Tap on Abort to cancel a download in pro-
gress.
Note that only the download can be cancelled —
installation cannot be cancelled once it has
begun.
Updating apps
If an app is being used during an ongoing update,
it will be restarted in order for the installation to
be completed.
Update all
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
Install all.
> Updating is started.
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
490
Update some
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all available updates.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Install.
> Updating is started.
Uninstalling an app
An app that is being used must be closed in
order for the uninstallation to be completed.
1.
Open the app
Download Centre.
2.
Select
Application updates in order to
open a list of all installed apps.
3.
Locate the desired app and select
Uninstall
in order to start the uninstallation of the app.
> When the app has been uninstalled, it dis-
appears from the list.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Radio (p. 458)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
System updates (p. 531)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
491
License agreement for audio and
media
A license is an agreement granting a right to
conduct some activity or to make use of another
person's right under the terms and conditions of
the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's
agreements with manufacturers/developers.
Bowers & Wilkins
Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of
the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of
B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark
of DuPont.
Dirac Unison
®
Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in
frequency, time and space for the best possible
bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful
reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of
specific performance venues. Using advanced
algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeak-
ers digitally based on acoustic high-precision
measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra,
it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in
perfect unison.
DivX
®
DivX
®
, DivX Certified
®
and associated logotypes
are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are
used under licence.
This DivX Certified
®
device can play back DivX®
Home Theater video files up to 576p (includ-
ing .avi, .divx). Download free software on
www.divx.com to create, play back and stream
digital video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified
®
device must be registered in order to
play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand
(VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating
the DivX VOD section in the device's settings
menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on
how to complete the registration.
Patent numbers
Protected by one or more of the following US
patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052.
Gracenote
®
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
492
Parts of the content are copyright © of
Gracenote or its suppliers.
Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype,
"Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of
Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other coun-
tries.
Gracenote
®
End User License Agreement
This program or device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA
("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote
("Gracenote software") activates this program to
perform disc and/or file identification and obtain
music-related information, including name, artist,
track and title ("Gracenote data") from online
servers or embedded databases (together called
"Gracenote servers") and in order to perform
other actions. You may only use Gracenote data
in accordance with the intended end-user func-
tions for this program or this device.
You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote
software and Gracenote servers for your own
personal non-commercial use. You agree not to
assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote
software or any Gracenote data to any third party.
YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT
GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS
EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
You agree that your non-exclusive right to use
Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace-
note servers will be terminated if you violate
these restrictions. If your license is terminated
you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data,
Gracenote software and Gracenote servers.
Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote
data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote
servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote
will under no circumstances have any obligation
to pay you for any information you provide. You
agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the com-
pany's rights under this agreement against you
directly in its own name.
The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to
track enquiries for statistical purposes. The pur-
pose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to enable the Gracenote service to count enqui-
ries without knowing anything about who you are.
Additional information is available on the web
page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Grace-
note service.
The Gracenote software and everything included
in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is".
Gracenote provides no undertakings or warran-
ties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the
Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote serv-
ers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data
from the Gracenote servers or to change data
categories for any reason that Gracenote deems
sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Grace-
note software or Gracenote servers are fault-free
or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote
servers will operate without interruption. Grace-
note has no obligation to provide you with new,
improved or additional data types or categories
that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the
company reserves the right to discontinue its
services at any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES,
EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROP-
ERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUAR-
ANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH
YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE
WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CON-
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST
PROFITS OR REVENUES.
© Gracenote, Inc. 2009
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from clib2
and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source
(Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994),
and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990,
1993), The Regents of the University of
California. All or some portions are derived from
material licensed to the University of California by
American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix
System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced
herein with the permission of UNIX System
Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
493
source and binary forms, with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met: Redistributions of
source code must retain the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution. Neither the name of the
<ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample
Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January
26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The
Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon
Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created
by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein.
All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of this software and
associated documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction,
including without limitation the rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Software is
furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions: The above copyright notice including
the dates of first publication and either this
permission notice or a reference to http://
oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice,
the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings in this Software
without prior written authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
This software is based in parts on the work of the
FreeType Team.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Linux software
This product contains software licensed under
GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU
Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc.
You have the right of acquisition, modification,
and distribution of the source code of the GPL/
LGPL software.
You may download Source Code from the
following website at no charge: http://
www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/
download/TVM_8351_013
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
494
The website provides the Source Code "As Is"
and without warranty of any kind.
By downloading Source Code, you expressly
assume all risk and liability associated with
downloading and using the Source Code and
complying with the user agreements that
accompany each Source Code.
Please note that we cannot respond to any
inquiries regarding the source code.
camellia:1.2.0
Copyright (c) 2006, 2007
NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone
Corporation). All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer as
the first lines of this file unmodified.
2. Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice, this list
of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
Unicode: 5.1.0
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data
files and any associated documentation (the
"Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation (the "Software") to
deal in the Data Files or Software without
restriction, including without limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software,
and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or
Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a)
the above copyright notice(s) and this permission
notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or
Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s)
and this permission notice appear in associated
documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in
each modified Data File or in the Software as
well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or Software that the data or software
has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE
PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE
OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT
OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR
SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not be used in advertising
or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
495
dealings in these Data Files or Software without
prior written authorization of the copyright holder.
Declaration of Conformity for
Bluetooth
®
module
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
496
Country/
Area
Brazil:
Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode
causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário.
Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br
EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Type of equipment: Audio Navigation Unit
Hereby, Mitsubishi Electric Corporation declares that this Audio Navigation Unit is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EG.
The Uni-
ted Arab
Emirates:
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
497
Country/
Area
Kazakh-
stan:
Model name: NR 0V
Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation
Exporting country: Japan
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
498
Country/
Area
China:
1.
■ 使用频率2.4 - 2.4835 GHz
■ 等效全向辐射率(EIRP) 天线增益 10dBi 时≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ①
■ 最大率谱密度 天线增益 10dBi 时≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ①
■ 载频容限20 ppm
■ 帯外发射率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP)
■ 杂散发射(辐射)率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外)
•
≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz)
•
≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz)
•
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz)
•
≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz)
•
≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz)
2.不得擅自更改发射频率大发射率(包括额外装射频率放大器)，不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线
3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业产生有害干扰一旦发现有干扰现象时，应立即停止使用，并采措施消除干扰后方可继续
使用
4.使用微率无线电设备，必须忍各种无线电业的干扰或工业科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰
5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用
AUDIO AND MEDIA
}}
499
Country/
Area
Korea:
B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재)
이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로
가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든
지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다.
해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다.
Malaysia
This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards)
Regulations 2000.To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”.
Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth)
Model: NR-0V
Type Approval No.:
RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067)
||
AUDIO AND MEDIA
* Option/accessory.
500
Country/
Area
Mexico:
Taiwan:
低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法
第十二條
經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機，非經許可，公司商號或使用者均不得擅自
變更頻率加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能
第十四條
低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信；經發現有干擾現象時，應
立停用，改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用前項合法通信，指依電信法規定作業之無線
電通信低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備
之干擾
Related information
•
Audio and media (p. 456)
•
Media player (p. 463)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Gracenote
®
(p. 466)
•
Sensus - online connectivity and entertain-
ment (p. 29)
AUDIO AND MEDIA
501
Terms and conditions for services
and Customer Privacy Policy
Read the terms and conditions for services and
the Customer Privacy Policy at
support.volvocars.com.
Terms & Conditions for Services
Volvo is committed to offering you the absolute
best services to ensure that it is as safe, comfort-
able and pleasant as possible for you to drive
your Volvo. Volvo offers a wide range of services,
from assistance in emergency situations to navi-
gation in various infotainment services.
Read these terms and conditions ("Service Terms
and Conditions") carefully before using the serv-
ices - support.volvocars.com.
Customer Privacy Policy
This policy applies for the processing of customer
data and personal data. The purpose of the policy
is to provide our existing, previous and prospec-
tive customers with a general understanding of:
•
The circumstances in which we gather and
process your personal data.
•
The types of personal data we gather.
•
The reason we gather your personal data.
•
How we handle your personal data.
This policy can be read in its entirety at
support.volvocars.com.
Related information
•
License agreement for audio and media
(p. 491)
•
License agreement for the driver display
(p. 98)
•
Type approval for radar units (p. 328)
WHEELS AND TYRES
WHEELS AND TYRES
504
Tyres
Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is
to carry load, provide grip on the road surface,
dampen vibration and protect the wheel from
wear.
The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characte-
ristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure
and speed rating are important for how the car
performs.
Recommended tyres
On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo origi-
nal tyres that have the VOL
1
marking on the side
of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to
the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is there-
fore important that the new tyres also have this
marking in order for the car's driving characteris-
tics, comfort and fuel consumption to be main-
tained.
New tyres
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin
to harden at the same time as the friction
capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For
this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible
when you replace them. This is especially impor-
tant with regard to winter tyres. The last four dig-
its in the sequence mean the week and year of
manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is stated
with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre in the
figure was manufactured in week 07 of 2017.
Tyre age
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem undam-
aged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are
hardly ever or never used. The function can
therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that
are stored for future use. Examples of external
signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for
use are cracks or discoloration.
Wear and maintenance
Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear.
Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road con-
dition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear.
To avoid differences in tread depth and to pre-
vent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front
and rear wheels can be switched with each other.
A suitable distance for the first change is approx.
5000 km and then at 10000 km intervals.
Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo work-
shop is contacted for checking if you are uncer-
tain about tread depth. If significant differences in
wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between
tyres have already occurred, then the least worn
tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Under-
steer is normally easier to correct than oversteer,
and leads to the car continuing forwards in a
straight line rather than having the rear end skid-
ding to one side, resulting in possible complete
loss of control over the car. This is why it is
important for the rear wheels never to lose grip
before the front wheels.
WARNING
A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control
over the car.
1
There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
505
Storage
Wheels with tyres fitted must be stored lying
down or hanging up - never standing up.
Related information
•
Checking the tyre pressures (p. 506)
•
Tyres' rotation direction (p. 505)
•
Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 506)
•
Tyre monitoring* (p. 507)
•
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512)
•
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 525)
Tyres' rotation direction
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to
only turn in one direction have the direction of
rotation marked with an arrow.
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
The tyre must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions, never
between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. If
the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking
characteristics and capacity to force rain and
slush out of the way are adversely affected. Tyres
with the greatest tread depth should always be
fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk
of skidding).
NOTE
Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the
same type and dimension, and also the same
make.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 504)
WHEELS AND TYRES
506
Tread wear indicators on the tyres
Tread wear indicators show the status of the
tyre's tread depth.
A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation
across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread
pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters
TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread
depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16"), the tread will
be level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth pro-
vide very poor grip in rain and snow.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 504)
Checking the tyre pressures
Tyres with the correct air pressure increase driv-
ing safety, save fuel and extend the service life of
the tyres.
Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natu-
ral phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies
depending on ambient temperature. Inadequate
tyre pressure increases fuel consumption, short-
ens tyre lifespan and impairs the car's driving
characteristics. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure
that is too low could result in the tyres overheat-
ing and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects
travelling comfort, road noise and driving charac-
teristics.
Recommended tyre pressure
The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which
pressures the tyres should have at different loads
and speed conditions.
Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure
For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of
up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures
can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. How-
ever, the lower comfort pressures are recom-
mended instead if optimum noise and travelling
comfort are desired.
Checking the air pressure
1. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Carry out
the check on cold tyres, which means that
the tyres should have the same temperature
as the outside temperature. After several few
kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and
the pressure increases.
2. If necessary, inflate so that the air pressure
corresponds with the approved tyre pressure
in accordance with the tyre pressure label.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
507
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 504)
•
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 509)
•
Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
Tyre monitoring*
The tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a
warning with an indicator symbol in the driver
display when the pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
If the symbol first flashes for approximately one
minute and then changes to a constant glow, it
may indicate that the system cannot detect or
warn of low tyre pressure as intended.
Symbol Specification
•
The symbol illuminates in the
event of low tyre pressure.
•
The symbol flashes for approxi-
mately one minute and then
changes over to illuminating
with a constant glow in the
event of a fault in the ITPMS
system.
System description
ITPMS measures differences in rotation speed
between the different wheels via the ABS system
in order to be able to determine whether they
have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pres-
sure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed
and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By com-
paring the tyres with each other the system can
determine whether one or more tyres have pres-
sure that is too low.
When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator
symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the
display and a message is shown, see also the
heading "Message in the driver display" below.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
508
General information on the tyre monitoring
system
In the information below, the tyre monitoring sys-
tem is referred to generically as TPMS.
Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be
checked once a month. When checking, the tyre
should be cold and have the air pressure recom-
mended by the car manufacturer specified on the
tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If
the car has tyres of a different size than that rec-
ommended by the manufacturer, find out what
the correct air pressure level is for these.
As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped
with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS),
which shows when the air pressure in one or
more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol
for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres
as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air
pressure.
Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is
too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which
can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also
reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life,
and can affect car handling and stopping ability.
Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre
maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to
maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for
low tyre pressure has not been reached so that
the indicator symbol illuminates.
The car is also equipped with a TPMS system
fault indicator, which indicates when the system
is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system
fault indicator is combined with the indicator sym-
bol for low tyre pressure. When the system
detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display
will flash for about one minute and then remain
illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when
the car is started until the fault has been rectified.
When the symbol is illuminated, the system's abil-
ity to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be
affected.
A TPMS system fault can occur for several rea-
sons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or
changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from
functioning correctly.
Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS
after changing one or more tyres in order to
ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly
with TPMS.
Messages in the driver display
The following messages may be shown when the
indicator symbol is illuminated:
•
Tyre pressure low Check tyres, calibrate
after fill
•
Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable
•
Tyre pressure system Service required.
If the system cannot determine which tyre has
low pressure, all four tyres will be indicated in the
centre display.
To bear in mind
•
Always calibrate the system after a wheel
change or tyre pressure adjustment. See the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side door
pillar for Volvo's recommended tyre pres-
sures.
•
The system does not replace normal tyre
maintenance.
•
There is no option to deactivate ITPMS.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 504)
•
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 509)
•
Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 511)
•
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 510)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
509
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre
monitoring system*
With the system for tyre monitoring, Indirect Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), tyre pres-
sure status can be viewed in the centre display.
Checking status
1.
Open the
Car status app in the app view.
2.
Tap on
TPMS to show the status of the
tyres.
Status indication
The graphics show the status for each tyre
2
.
Green tyre:
•
The tyre pressure is above the limit value for
a warning.
Yellow tyre:
•
The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and
check/rectify the tyre pressure as soon as
possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the tyre pres-
sure has been adjusted.
All tyres yellow:
•
The pressure is too low in two or more tyres.
Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures as
soon as possible. Calibrate ITPMS after the
tyre pressures have been adjusted.
All tyres grey:
•
Calibration in progress.
•
Unknown status.
Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph)
may be required for the system to become active.
All tyres grey and a message:
•
Tyre pressure system Temporarily
unavailable. The indicator symbol flashes
and changes to constant glow after approx. 1
minute. The system is currently unavailable,
activated shortly.
•
Tyre pressure system Service required.
The indicator symbol flashes and changes to
constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The
system is not working correctly, contact an
authorised Volvo workshop (recommended).
Related information
•
Tyre monitoring* (p. 507)
•
Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 511)
•
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 510)
•
Car status (p. 528)
2
The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software.
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
510
Rectifying low tyre pressure with
tyre monitoring*
When the tyre monitoring system, Indirect Tyre
Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS), gives a
warning, the tyre pressure in one or more of the
car's tyres is too low.
Check and rectify the tyre pressure
when the indicator symbol for ITPMS is
illuminated and the message
Tyre
pressure low is shown. Calibrate
ITPMS after the tyre pressure has been adjusted.
1. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with
a tyre pressure gauge.
2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure as
indicated on the tyre pressure label on the
door pillar on the driver's side.
3. Recalibrate the ITPMS system, see the sec-
tion "Calibrating tyre monitoring".
4. Drive the car at a speed above 35 km/h
(22 mph).
Note that the ITPMS symbol does not extin-
guish until the low tyre pressure has been
rectified and new calibration has been per-
formed.
NOTE
To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure
should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres"
means the tyres are the same temperature as
the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours
after the car has been driven). After a few kil-
ometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the
pressure increases.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
WARNING
•
Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre
failure, which could result in the driver
losing control of the car.
•
The system cannot indicate sudden tyre
damage in advance.
Related information
•
Tyre monitoring* (p. 507)
•
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 509)
•
Calibrating tyre monitoring* (p. 511)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
•
Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
511
Calibrating tyre monitoring*
In order for the Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System (ITPMS) to work correctly, a reference
value for the tyre pressure must be determined.
This must be performed each time the tyres are
changed or the tyre pressure is changed.
For example, when driving with a heavy load or at
high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre
pressure should be adjusted in accordance with
Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. Fol-
lowing which, the system must be recalibrated.
1. Switch off the car.
2. Inflate the tyres to the desired pressure in
accordance with the tyre pressure label on
the door pillar on the driver's side.
3. Start the car.
4.
Open the
Car status app in the app view.
5.
Press
TPMS.
NOTE
The car must be stationary when calibration is
started.
6.
Press
Calibrate.
7.
Tap on
OK to confirm that the tyre pressure
in all four tyres has been checked and
adjusted.
8. Drive the car.
Calibration is performed when the car is
driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph).
Calibration is interrupted temporarily if the
engine is switched off, but is resumed auto-
matically in the background when the car is
driven again.
> When sufficient data has been collected
to enable the system to detect low tyre
pressure, the tyres in the centre display
change colour from grey to green. The
system provides no additional confirma-
tion that the calibration is complete.
If calibration fails, a message is shown:
Calibration unsuccessful. Please try
again..
NOTE
Remember that the TPMS system must be
recalibrated at each tyre change or if the tyre
pressure is adjusted. New reference values
must be stored for the system to work cor-
rectly.
Related information
•
Tyre monitoring* (p. 507)
•
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 509)
•
Rectifying low tyre pressure with tyre moni-
toring* (p. 510)
WHEELS AND TYRES
512
Emergency puncture repair kit
The emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary
Mobility Kit (TMK), is used to seal a puncture as
well as to check and adjust the air pressure.
The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor
and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works
as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid effectively
seals tyres punctured in the tread.
The puncture repair kit has limited capacity to
seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do
not use the puncture repair kit on tyres that have
larger slits, cracks or similar damage.
NOTE
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in
the tread.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Location
The puncture repair kit is located in the foam
block under the floor in the cargo area.
Sealing fluid bottle
The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the
bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on
the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally
hazardous waste.
The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced after
use. Volvo recommends that the replacement is
performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The bottle with sealing fluid contains 1.2-
Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
•
Harmful if ingested.
•
Could result in allergic reaction in the
event of skin contact.
•
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
•
Store out of the reach of children.
WARNING
•
In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immedi-
ately with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If
the discomfort persists then the eye
should be examined by a doctor.
Related information
•
Using the emergency puncture repair kit
(p. 513)
•
Inflate tyres with the compressor from the
emergency puncture repair kit (p. 516)
•
Tyres (p. 504)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
513
Using the emergency puncture
repair kit
Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture
repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK).
Overview
Electrical cable
Air hose
Pressure reducing valve
Protective cap
Label, maximum permitted speed
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Pressure gauge
Sealing fluid bottle
Switch
Connecting
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed
in a trafficked location.
If the puncture was caused by a nail or simi-
lar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to
seal the hole.
2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted
speed that is affixed on one side of the com-
pressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a
reminder to observe the speed limit. You
should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit
has been used.
3.
Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off),
and locate the electrical cable and the air
hose.
4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the
compressor, and unscrew the cork from the
sealing fluid bottle.
NOTE
Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The
seal is broken automatically when the bottle is
screwed in.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
514
5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bot-
tle holder.
> The bottle and the bottle holder are
equipped with a reverse catch to prevent
sealant leakage. When the bottle is
screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from
the bottle holder again. Bottle removal
must be performed at a workshop, Volvo
recommends an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
WARNING
•
In the event of skin contact with the seal-
ing fluid, it must be washed off immediately
with soap and plenty of water.
•
Sealing fluid that makes contact with an
eye must be rinsed away immediately with
eye wash fluid or with plenty of water. If the
discomfort persists then the eye should be
examined by a doctor.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap.
Check that the pressure reducing valve on
the air hose is fully screwed on, and screw in
the air hose's valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread.
7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
NOTE
Make sure that none of the other 12 V sock-
ets is in use when the compressor is operat-
ing.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the com-
pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness
arise then the compressor must be switched
off immediately. The journey should not be
continued. Call roadside assistance for recov-
ery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an
authorised tyre centre.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the
pressure drops after approximately
30 seconds.
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
The compressor must not be operated for
longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
515
10. Switch off the compressor to check the pres-
sure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pres-
sure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is
3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pres-
sure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then
the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Call roadside assis-
tance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo rec-
ommends an authorised tyre centre.
11. Switch off the compressor and detach the
electrical cable.
12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and
refit the dust cap on the tyre.
13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area.
14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km
(2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h
(50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal
the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check.
NOTE
Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during
the first few rotations of the tyre.
WARNING
Make sure that nobody is standing near the
car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto
them when the car is driven away. The dis-
tance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet).
15.
Follow-up inspection
Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and
screw in the valve connection to the bottom
of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor
must be switched off.
16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre
is insufficiently sealed. The journey should
not be continued. Call roadside assistance
for recovery.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar
(19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with the
tyre pressure label on the driver's side
door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa). Release air
using the pressure reducing valve if the
tyre pressure is too high.
17. If the tyre needs to be inflated:
1. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
2. Start the compressor and inflate the tyre
to the pressure specified in accordance
with the tyre pressure label.
3. Switch off the compressor.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
516
18. Remove the tyre sealing equipment.
Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order
to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing
fluid.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with
a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
19. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be
replaced after use. Volvo recommends that
this replacement is performed by an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the
nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise
the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.
WARNING
•
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair
kit has been used.
•
Maximum mileage with tyres containing
sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles).
•
Volvo recommends visiting an authorised
Volvo workshop as soon as possible for
inspection of the sealed tyre. The staff
there can determine whether or not the
tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be
replaced.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512)
Inflate tyres with the compressor
from the emergency puncture repair
kit
The car's original tyres can be inflated using the
compressor in the emergency puncture repair
kit.
1. The compressor must be switched off. Make
sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and
take out the electrical cable and the air hose.
2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the
air hose's valve connection to the bottom of
the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that
the pressure reducing valve on the air hose
is fully screwed in.
3. Connect the electrical cable to the closest
12 V socket and start the car.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running
in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient
ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to
position I (On).
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
517
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must not
run for more than 10 minutes.
5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on
the tyre pressure label on the driver side door
pillar. Release air using the pressure reduc-
ing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.
6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air
hose and the electrical cable.
7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
•
Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 512)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
When changing wheels
The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter
wheels or a spare wheel.
Follow the relevant instructions for removing and
fitting wheels.
When changing to another tyre
dimension
Check that the tyre dimension is approved for
use on the car.
Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updat-
ing the software at each change of tyre dimen-
sion. A software download may be necessary
both when changing to larger and smaller dimen-
sions, and also when switching between summer
and winter wheels.
Related information
•
Removing a wheel (p. 518)
•
Fitting the wheels (p. 519)
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 593)
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
•
Winter wheels (p. 521)
•
Spare wheel* (p. 520)
•
Wheel bolts (p. 520)
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
518
Removing a wheel
Instructions for removing a wheel when chang-
ing wheels.
1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the
hazard warning lights if a tyre is being
changed in a trafficked location.
2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear
position P, or engage first gear if the car has
a manual gearbox.
Applies to cars with
Leveling Control*: If
the car is equipped with air suspension, this
must be disabled before the car is raised
with a jack*.
Deactivate the function via the top view of
the centre display by pressing
Settings
My Car Parking Brake and Suspension
and selecting Disable Leveling Control.
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that the
threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is
free from dirt.
3.
Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools
for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted
in the foam block.
Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
4. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground to
prevent them from rolling. Use heavy wooden
blocks or large stones for example.
5. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* to the stop position.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye must be screwed all the way
into the wheel bolt wrench*.
6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts with the intended tool.
7. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlock-
wise with the wheel wrench*.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
519
WARNING
Never position anything between the ground
and the jack, nor between the jack and the
car's jacking point.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and level.
8. When raising the car, it is important that the
jack* or lifting arms are fitted in the intended
points on the car's underbody. The triangle
markings in the plastic cover indicate the
locations of the jacking/lifting points. There
are two jacking points on each side of the
car. There is a recess for the jack at each
point.
Crank up the jack* so that it makes contact
with the car's jacking point. Check that the
head of the jack is correctly positioned in the
jacking point so that the bump in the centre
of the head fits into the jacking point hole
and the base is positioned vertically below
the jacking point. Also make sure you turn
the jack so that the crank is as far away from
the side of the car as possible, at which point
the jack's arms are perpendicular to the
direction of the car.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
gers must stand in a safe place.
9. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove
the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 517)
•
Raise the car (p. 533)
•
Fitting the wheels (p. 519)
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
Fitting the wheels
Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing
wheels.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised on
the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack. If a wheel must be
changed in a trafficked environment, passen-
gers must stand in a safe place.
1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel
and hub.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the
wheel bolts.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
520
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is impor-
tant that the wheel bolts are tightened prop-
erly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 ft.lbs.). Check
the tightening torque with a torque wrench.
5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts.
NOTE
•
After a tyre has been inflated, always refit
the dust cap in order to avoid damage to
the valve from gravel, dirt, etc.
•
Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust
caps can rust and become difficult to
unscrew.
Related information
•
Removing a wheel (p. 518)
•
When changing wheels (p. 517)
•
Spare wheel* (p. 520)
Wheel bolts
Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the
hubs.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm (103 ft. lbs.). Overtightening or loose
tightening may damage the nuts and the
bolts.
Only use rims that are tested and approved by
Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories.
Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts
with a torque wrench.
Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel
bolts.
Locking wheel bolts*
In the foam block under the cargo area floor
there is space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 517)
Spare wheel*
The spare wheel, the Temporary spare type, can
be used to temporarily replace a punctured nor-
mal wheel.
The spare wheel is located under the cargo area
floor and is attached by two straps. The foam
block contains all tools for changing a wheel, see
the section "Tool kit".
The car's handling may be altered by the use of
the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be
replaced by a normal wheel as soon as possible.
The spare wheel is smaller than the regular
wheel, which will affect the car's ground clear-
ance. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
machine wash the car.
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
521
•
Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre
pressure for the spare wheel.
•
On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear
axle can be disconnected.
•
If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, it
is not possible to use snow chains at the
same time.
•
The spare wheel must not be repaired.
IMPORTANT
•
Never drive faster than 80 km/h
(50 mph) with a spare wheel on the car.
•
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.
Taking out the spare wheel
1. Fold up the cargo area floor, from the rear
and forwards.
2. Undo the straps and lift out the spare wheel.
Storing the punctured tyre
1. Take out the wheel bag enclosed in the foam
block and put the wheel in the bag.
2. Put the tools back in their right place in the
foam block and lower the cargo area floor.
3. Place the punctured tyre in the cargo area.
Related information
•
Removing a wheel (p. 518)
•
Fitting the wheels (p. 519)
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
•
Jack* (p. 523)
Winter wheels
Winter wheels are adapted for winter road con-
ditions.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular
dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on
engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the
correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four
wheels.
NOTE
Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which
wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable.
Tips for changing to winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are changed,
mark which side of the car they were mounted
on, for example L for left and R for right.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for
500-1000 km so the studs settle properly into
the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the
studs, a longer service life.
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
522
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low tempera-
tures place considerably higher demands on tyres
than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recom-
mends not to drive on winter tyres that have a
tread depth of less than 4 mm.
Snow chains
Volvo recommends that snow chains are not
used on wheel dimensions greater than
18 inches.
Mounting instructions are supplied with Volvo
original snow chains.
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h (30 mph) with
snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent
chains designed for the car model, and tyre
and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow
chains are permitted.
In the event of uncertainty about the show
chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised
Volvo workshop should be contacted. The
wrong snow chains may cause serious dam-
age to the car and lead to an accident.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 517)
Tool kit
Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel
changes or similar are found in the car's cargo
area.
The foam block under the cargo area floor con-
tains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool
for removing the plastic caps from the wheel
bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts.
If the car is equipped with spare wheel* then a
jack* and wheel wrench* are included, as well as
a package* with disposable gloves and a bag for
the damaged wheel.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 517)
•
Jack* (p. 523)
•
Warning triangle (p. 523)
•
First aid kit (p. 524)
•
Towing eye (p. 452)
WHEELS AND TYRES
}}
* Option/accessory.
523
Warning triangle
Use the warning triangle to warn other road
users if the car is stationary in traffic.
Also activate the hazard warning flashers.
Storage spaces
The warning triangle is located in the compart-
ment on the inside of the tailgate.
Folding up the warning triangle
Open the hatch by first turning the knob a
quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from
its brackets in the top and bottom edges.
Press the latch that secures the warning tri-
angle slightly to the right and remove the
case.
Remove the warning triangle from the case,
unfold it and put the ends together.
Fold out the warning triangle's support legs.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning
triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suita-
ble place with regard to traffic.
Make sure that the warning triangle and case are
properly secured in their storage space and that
the hatch is fully closed after use.
Related information
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
•
Hazard warning flashers (p. 140)
Jack*
Use the jack to raise the car when changing a
wheel.
Only use the original jack when fitting a spare
wheel or when changing between summer and
winter wheels. The jack's thread must always be
well greased.
IMPORTANT
The tools and jack* must be stored in the
intended location in the car's cargo area
when not in use.
The jack needs to be cranked together to the
correct position in order to have space.
NOTE
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture, changing to win-
ter/summer wheels, etc. Only the jack for the
specific car model may be used to raise the
car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or
for a longer time than is required just to
change a wheel, use of a garage jack is rec-
ommended. In this instance, follow the
instructions for use that come with the equip-
ment.
||
WHEELS AND TYRES
* Option/accessory.
524
Applies to cars with level control*
If the car is equipped with air suspension then
this must be deactivated before the car is raised
with the jack.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
1.
Press on
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Parking Brake and
Suspension
.
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
Related information
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
•
Raise the car (p. 533)
First aid kit
The first aid kit contains first aid equipment.
Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap on
the right-hand side of the cargo area.
Related information
•
Tool kit (p. 522)
Dimension designation for wheel
rim
Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in
accordance with the examples in the table
below.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for
example: 7.5Jx18x50.5.
7,5 Rim width in inches
J Rim flange profile
18 Rim diameter in inches
50,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface against
the hub)
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 504)
•
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 525)
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 593)
WHEELS AND TYRES
525
Dimension designation for tyre
Designations for tyre dimension, load index and
speed rating.
The car has an approval for the complete vehicle
with certain combinations of wheel rims and
tyres.
Designation of dimensions
All tyres have a dimension designation, such as:
235/60 R18 103 V.
235 Tyre width (mm)
60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre
width (%)
R Radial ply
18 Rim diameter in inches
103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre
load, tyre load index (LI)
V Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case
240 km/h (149 mph).)
Load index
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a
load index (LI). The car's weight determines the
load capacity required of the tyres. The lowest
permitted load index is specified in a load index
table.
Speed rating
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol),
must at least correspond with the car's top
speed. The table below shows the maximum per-
mitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The
only exception to these regulations is winter
tyres
3
, where a lower speed rating may be used.
If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be
driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for
example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of
160 km/h (100 mph).) The top speed at which
the car can be driven depends on road condi-
tions, not the speed rating of the tyres.
NOTE
The maximum permitted speed is specified in
the table.
Q 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on win-
ter tyres)
T 190 km/h (118 mph)
H 210 km/h (130 mph)
V 240 km/h (149 mph)
W 270 km/h (168 mph)
Y 300 km/h (186 mph)
WARNING
The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and
speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each
respective engine variant are shown in the
table, "Load index and speed rating". If a tyre
with too low a load index or speed rating is
used, it may overheat and be damaged.
Related information
•
Tyres (p. 504)
•
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 524)
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 593)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
•
Load index and speed rating (p. 594)
3
Both those with metal studs and those without.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
528
Volvo service programme
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible,
follow the Volvo service programme as specified
in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo
workshop to perform the service and mainte-
nance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel,
special tools and service literature to guarantee
the highest quality of service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Related information
•
Servicing the climate control system
(p. 542)
•
Book service and repair (p. 528)
Car status
The car's general status can be shown in the
centre display along with the opportunity to book
service
1
.
The Car status app is started
from app view in the centre dis-
play and has four tabs:
•
Messages - saved status messages
•
Status - checking the oil level
•
TPMS - checking the tyre pressure
•
Appointments - booking of service and
repair work
1
.
Related information
•
Managing messages saved from the driver
display and centre display (p. 108)
•
Checking tyre pressure with the tyre monitor-
ing system* (p. 509)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 539)
•
Book service and repair (p. 528)
Book service and repair
2
Manage service, repair and booking information
directly from your online car.
The information is handled in the
Car status
app, which is opened from the app view in the
centre display.
This service provides, for certain markets, a con-
venient way to book service and workshop visits
directly from your car. Vehicle data is sent to your
dealer, who can prepare the workshop visit. The
dealer will get back to you with a booking sug-
gestion. For certain markets, the system will
remind you of a scheduled appointment time as it
approaches and the navigation system
3
can also
guide you to the workshop when the time comes.
You also have information on your dealer availa-
ble in the car and can contact your workshop at
any time.
Before the service can be used
Volvo ID
•
Create a Volvo ID, see section "Volvo ID".
•
Register the Volvo ID for your car, see sec-
tion "Volvo ID". If a Volvo ID already exists,
use the same e-mail address that was used
when the Volvo ID was created.
1
Applies to certain markets.
2
Applies to certain markets.
3
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
529
Changing contact address
If you would like to change to another e-mail
address, you can contact a Volvo dealer.
Selecting a Volvo dealer
Select the Volvo dealer you would like to contact
for service and repairs by going to
www.volvocars.com and logging in.
Prerequisite for booking from car
For the car to send and receive booking informa-
tion, it must be connected to the Internet, see
section "Online car".
Using the service
When it is time for service, and in some cases
when the car is in need of repair, a message will
appear in the driver display and at the top of the
centre display. The service date is determined by
how much time has passed, hours that the
engine has been running, or distance driven
since the last service.
Book service or repair
Fill in the appointment request when desired or
when a message stating that service or repairs
are needed is shown in the driver display and at
the top of the centre display.
Filling in and sending an appointment
request.
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Request appointment button.
4.
Make sure that the correct
Volvo ID is filled
in.
5.
Make sure that the desired
Workshop is
filled in.
6. Fill in information for the workshop in the
field Tap to write information to the
workshop, e.g. if there is anything you would
like done during the workshop visit or any
other important information to your work-
shop.
7.
Press the
Send appointment request but-
ton.
> You will receive an appointment sugges-
tion to your car within a couple of days.
4
.
You will also receive the same communi-
cation via e-mail and when you go to
www.volvocars.com and log in.
In certain markets, once you have sent the
appointment request, the message that
the car needs service is extinguished in
the driver display.
8.
Press the
Cancel request button to cancel
your request.
The appointment request contains vehicle data
when it is sent from your car to the workshop via
your Internet connection. This information facili-
tates planning for the workshop.
4
This time frame may vary depending on market.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
530
Accept the appointment suggestion
The car will retrieve appointment suggestions via
your Internet connection when it is available.
When the car has received an appointment sug-
gestion, a message will be shown at the top of
the centre display.
1. Tap the message.
2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap
on the
Accept button. Otherwise press
either of the Send new proposal or
Decline buttons.
When an appointment suggestion is accepted,
the reply will be sent to the workshop via your
Internet connection.
Sending vehicle data
You can send vehicle data at any time from your
car, e.g. if you book a workshop visit and want to
help your workshop with better basic information.
The vehicle data sent is the last saved (last time
the car was running).
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Send car data button.
> A message that vehicle data are being
sent is shown at the top of the centre dis-
play. You can cancel data transmission by
tapping the X in the activity indicator.
The vehicle data are sent via your Internet
connection.
See workshop information
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press the
Appointments button.
3.
Press the
Workshop information button.
> A pop-up window with information on your
dealer will open.
4. Call your dealer if you like, or tap on the
address or GPS coordinates to start naviga-
tion to your workshop
3
.
Booking information and vehicle data
When you decide to book a service or send data
from your car, the booking information and vehi-
cle data will be sent via your Internet connection
5
.
The vehicle data make it easier for your workshop
to plan your next visit.
The vehicle data consists of information in the
following areas:
•
service requirement
•
time since last service
•
function status
•
fluid levels
•
meter reading
•
the car's vehicle identification number (VIN
6
)
•
the car's software version
•
the car's diagnostics data.
3
Applies to Sensus Navigation*.
5
Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost.
6
Vehicle Identification Number.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
531
Related information
•
Volvo ID (p. 23)
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Car status (p. 528)
Remote updates
Several of the car's systems can be updated
from the centre display with an online car.
The Download Centre app is
started from app view in the
centre display and enables:
•
searching for and updating system software
•
updating map data for Sensus Navigation*
•
downloading, updating and uninstalling apps.
Related information
•
System updates (p. 531)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
System updates
System updates are intended for the Internet-
connected and infotainment components of the
car. If system software updates are available, the
updates can be made all at once or one at a
time.
System updates are handled
via the
Download Centre app
in the centre display's applica-
tion view. A tap on the button
starts a download application in
the home view's bottom sub-
view. If no search for available
updates has been performed since the last time
the infotainment system was started, a search is
performed. No search is performed if a software
installation is in progress. An icon in the down-
load application's button
System updates
shows how many updates are available. A tap on
the button shows a list of updates that can be
installed in the car. For more information and
answers to common questions regarding function
and to download certain system updates, go in to
support.volvocars.com.
For system updates to be possible, the car must
be connected to the Internet, see section "Online
car".
Searching for software updates is activated when
the car is supplied from the factory.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
532
NOTE
Data download may affect other services that
transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect
on other services is experienced as disruptive
then the download can be interrupted. Alter-
natively, it may be appropriate to switch off or
interrupt other services.
NOTE
An update can be interrupted when the igni-
tion is switched off and the car is left.
However, the update does not have to be
completed before the car is left, this is
because the update is resumed the next time
the car is used.
Update all system software
–
Select Install all at the bottom of the list.
If no list is desired, then Install all can be
selected at the System updates button instead.
Update individual system software
programs
–
Select Install for the software required.
Cancelling the download
–
Tap on X in the activity indicator that has
replaced the button
Install at the start of the
download.
Note that only the download can be cancelled,
when the installation phase has started, this can-
not be cancelled.
Background search for software
updates
The function can be deactivated via the centre
display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
System Download Centre.
3.
Deselect
Auto Software Update.
If an update is available, the message
New
software updates available is shown in the
centre display's status bar. A tap on the message
starts a download application in the home view's
bottom subview. As soon as the download appli-
cation has started, an icon in the download appli-
cation's button System updates shows how
many updates are available.
Related information
•
Online car* (p. 484)
•
Downloading, updating and uninstalling apps
(p. 489)
•
Remote updates (p. 531)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
533
Raise the car
When raising the car it is important that the car
jack or the workshop/garage jack is fitted to the
intended points on the car’s underbody.
For cars with level control*, air suspension, if fit-
ted, must be switched off before the car is raised.
Switch off the function via the centre display:
1.
Press
Settings in the top view.
2.
Press
My Car Suspension .
3.
Select
Disable Leveling Control.
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a jack
is selected other than the one recommended
by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with
the equipment.
The normal car jack is only designed for occa-
sional, short-term use, such as when chang-
ing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel, use
of a garage jack is recommended. In this
instance, follow the instructions for use that
come with the equipment.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
534
The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red).
If the car is raised with a workshop jack, it must
be positioned under one of the four lifting points.
Ensure that the workshop jack is positioned so
that the car cannot slide off the jack. Make sure
the jack plate is equipped with a rubber pad so
that the car will be stable and not be damaged.
Always use axle stands or similar.
Related information
•
When changing wheels (p. 517)
•
Jack* (p. 523)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
535
Opening and closing the bonnet
The bonnet can be opened using the handle in
the passenger compartment and a handle under
the bonnet.
Open the bonnet
Pull the handle near the foot pedals to
release the bonnet from its fully closed posi-
tion.
Sweep from left to right in the opening under
the bonnet, move the handle up and to the
side to release the bonnet from the bonnet
lock's catch and lift the bonnet.
Warning - bonnet not closed
When the bonnet is released, the warn-
ing symbol and the graphics in the
driver display will light up and an
acoustic reminder will sound. If the car
starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will
repeat.
For more information on graphics, see section
"Door and seatbelt reminder".
NOTE
If the warning symbol is lit or the warning sig-
nal is heard despite the bonnet being closed
properly, contact an authorised Volvo work-
shop.
Close the bonnet
1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall
from its own weight.
2. When the bonnet stops against the lock
catch, push the bonnet to close it completely.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path
under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise
there is a risk of personal injury.
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed. The bonnet must engage at both
sides audibly.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
536
Bonnet completely closed.
WARNING
Never drive with an open bonnet!
If there are any signs that the bonnet is not
properly closed whilst driving, stop immedi-
ately and close it.
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 536)
•
Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 61)
Engine compartment overview
The overview shows some service-related com-
ponents.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
537
The appearance of the engine compartment may differ
depending on model and engine variant.
Coolant expansion tank
Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driv-
er's side)
Washer fluid filler pipe
7
Central electrical unit
Air filter
Engine oil filler pipe
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment, behind
the radiator) may start or continue to operate
automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after
the engine has been switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop - an authorised Volvo workshop is rec-
ommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine
is hot.
WARNING
The ignition system works at a very high and
hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system
must always be in ignition position 0 when
work is being performed in the engine com-
partment.
Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil
when the car's electrical system is in ignition
position II or when the engine is hot.
Related information
•
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 535)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
•
Topping up coolant (p. 540)
•
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 556)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 539)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can be
applied.
Volvo recommends:
7
Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
538
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of low/
high oil level or low oil pressure. Certain engine
variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the
driver display's warning symbol for low oil pres-
sure
is used. Other variants have an oil
level sensor, when the driver is informed via the
driver display's warning symbol and display
texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact
a Volvo dealer for more information.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance
with the intervals specified in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is per-
mitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions,
Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade
than the one specified.
Related information
•
Checking and filling with engine oil
(p. 539)
•
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 586)
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 585)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
539
Checking and filling with engine oil
The oil level is detected with the electronic oil
level sensor.
Filler pipe
8
.
In some cases, oil may need to be topped up
between service intervals.
No action with regard to engine oil level needs to
be taken until a message is shown in the driver
display.
WARNING
If this symbol is shown together
with the message
Engine oil level
Service required, visit a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is
recommended. The oil level may be too high.
IMPORTANT
If this symbol is shown together
with a message about low oil level,
such as
Engine oil level low
Refill 1 litre for example, then only
fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart).
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold
due to the risk of fire.
Check the oil level
1.
Open the
Car status app from the app view
in the centre display.
2.
Press
Status to show the oil level.
Graphics for oil level in the centre display.
The oil level is checked using the electronic oil
level gauge in the centre display when the engine
is switched off.
The oil level should be checked regularly.
NOTE
The system cannot directly detect changes
when the oil is filled or drained. The car must
have been driven approx. 30 km (approx.
20 miles) and have been stationary for
5 minutes with the engine switched off and
on level ground before the oil level indication
is correct.
8
Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
540
NOTE
If the right conditions for measuring the oil
level (time after engine shutdown, the car's
inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not
met, then the message
No value available
will be shown in the centre display. This does
not mean that there is something wrong in
the car's systems.
Related information
•
Engine oil (p. 537)
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 585)
•
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 586)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
•
Car status (p. 528)
Topping up coolant
The coolant cools the internal combustion
engine to the correct operating temperature. The
heat that is transferred from the engine to the
coolant can be used to heat the passenger com-
partment.
When topping up the coolant, follow the instruc-
tions on the packaging. Never top up with water
only. The risk of freezing increases with both too
little and too much coolant concentrate.
If there is coolant under the car, if there is cool-
ant smoke, or if more than 2 litres have been
filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of
engine damage due to a defective cooling sys-
tem when attempting to start the car.
WARNING
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the expan-
sion tank cap slowly to gently release the
overpressure.
Coolant expansion tank, left-hand drive car.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
541
Screw off the cap in the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and
top up with coolant. The coolant level must
not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Coolant expansion tank, right-hand drive car.
Grip the hatch's handle and lift/jiggle the
hatch from the plastic cover.
Screw off the cap on the expansion tank and
top up with coolant. The coolant level must
not exceed the yellow MAX mark inside the
expansion tank.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
IMPORTANT
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides and
other salts may cause corrosion in the
cooling system.
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
water. In the event of any doubt about
water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in
accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing cool-
ing system components, flush the cooling
system clean with approved quality water
or flush with ready-mixed coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a well-
filled cooling system. Otherwise, tempera-
tures that are too high may occur result-
ing in the risk of damage (cracks) in the
cylinder head.
Related information
•
Coolant — specifications (p. 587)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
542
Servicing the climate control system
The air conditioning system must only be serv-
iced and repaired by an authorised workshop.
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent
tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used dur-
ing leak detection.
Volvo recommends that you contact an author-
ised Volvo workshop.
Cars with R134a refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with R1234yf refrigerant
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Related information
•
Volvo service programme (p. 528)
Bulb replacement
The bulb in the halogen headlamp can be
replaced by the driver.
Halogen headlamps are not available for all
models and markets. Contact a Volvo dealer for
more information.
An LED
9
type lamp must be replaced by a work-
shop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom-
mended.
NOTE
For information about bulbs not covered in
this article, contact a Volvo dealer or a certi-
fied Volvo service technician.
The dipped beam bulb becomes accessible when
the headlamp's round rubber cover is removed.
Contact a workshop
10
if faults occur in other
lamps. This also applies to the bulbs for reversing
9
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
10
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
543
lights. If a fault occurs in LED
11
lamps, the entire
lamp unit usually must be replaced.
WARNING
The car's electrical system must be in ignition
position 0 when replacing bulbs.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken
bulb has been replaced then we recommend
visiting an authorised Volvo workshop.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
Lamps, front (car with halogen
headlamps)
Indicator
Daytime running lights/position lamps
Main beam
Dipped beam
Front fog lamps/cornering lights* (LED
11
)
Lamps, rear
Position lamps (LED
11
)
Direction indicator (LED)
Position lamps (LED)
Fog lamp (LED)
Reversing lamps (LED)
Brake light (LED)
Brake light - central, high-level (LED)
Related information
•
Replacing the dipped beam bulb (p. 544)
•
Replacing the main beam lamp (p. 545)
11
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
544
•
Replacing daytime running light bulb/posi-
tion lamp bulb, front (p. 545)
•
Replacing the front direction indicator bulb
(p. 546)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 546)
•
Ignition positions (p. 403)
Replacing the dipped beam bulb
The dipped beam bulb in halogen headlamps
can be replaced by the driver.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp's round rubber cover.
2. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3. Detach the bulb by pushing it gently upwards
and pulling it straight out.
4. Fit a new bulb in the socket. The bulb's guide
pin must be aimed straight upwards.
5. Press in the connector.
6. Refit the headlamp's round rubber cover.
Related information
•
Bulb replacement (p. 542)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 546)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
545
Replacing the main beam lamp
The main beam lamp in halogen headlamps can
be replaced by the driver.
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with
your fingers. Grease from your fingers is
vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector
and then causing damage.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Detach the bulb by turning the bulb holder
upward and then pulling straight out.
2. Carefully prize the plastic cover at the con-
nector's lock lug so that the lock lug relea-
ses.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Replace the bulb.
5. Fit the bulb in the socket and turn downward.
Related information
•
Bulb replacement (p. 542)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 546)
Replacing daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb, front
The bulb for the daytime running light/position
lamp in halogen headlamps can be replaced by
the driver.
NOTE
The bulb for the daytime running light/posi-
tion lamp is easier to access if the main beam
bulb is detached. The main beam bulb is fitted
diagonally above the daytime running light
bulb/position lamp bulb. Detach the main
beam bulb by rotating its bulb holder upwards
and then pulling straight out.
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Pull the bulb holder for the daytime running
light bulb/position lamp bulb straight out.
2. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
546
3. Replace the bulb.
4. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
5. If the main beam bulb's bulb holder has been
removed, fit it into the socket and screw in.
Related information
•
Bulb replacement (p. 542)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 546)
Replacing the front direction
indicator bulb
The direction indicator bulb in halogen head-
lamps can be replaced by the driver.
Before the bulb can be replaced, the plastic
cover over the headlamp must be removed; see
the section "Bulb replacement".
Left-hand headlamp.
1. Press the catches together and pull the bulb
holder straight out.
2. Replace with a new bulb holder with bulb.
3. Fit the bulb holder into the socket and press
it into place.
Related information
•
Bulb replacement (p. 542)
•
Bulb specifications (p. 546)
Bulb specifications
The specifications apply to bulbs in halogen
headlamps. Contact a workshop
12
if faults occur
in other lamps.
Function
W
A
Type
Dipped beam 55 H7
Main beam 65 H9
Front direction indicators 24 PWY24W
daytime running lights/
position lamps, front
21/5 W21/5W
A
Watt
Related information
•
Bulb replacement (p. 542)
12
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
547
Wiper blades in service position
The windscreen wiper blades must be in service
position (vertical position) when, for example,
they are being replaced.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades
(e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen)
they must be in service position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the service
position, make sure that they are not frozen
down.
Activating/deactivating service mode
Service mode can be activated/deactivated when
the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers
are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated
via the function view:
Press the
Wiper Service
Position button. The light indi-
cator in the button illuminates
when the service position is
activated. Upon activation, the
wipers move to standing
straight up. To deactivate the
service mode, press Wiper Service Position
again. The light indicator in the button extin-
guishes when the service position is deactivated.
The wiper blades also exit service position if:
•
Windscreen wiping is activated.
•
Windscreen washing is activated.
•
Rain sensor activated.
•
The car is driven away.
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the wind-
screen before the activation of wiping, wash-
ing or the rain sensor, as well as before driv-
ing. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the
bonnet.
Related information
•
Replacing a wiper blade (p. 548)
•
Filling washer fluid (p. 549)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
•
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
548
Replacing a wiper blade
The wiper blades sweep water away from the
windscreen and rear window. Together with the
washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure
visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window
wiper blades can be replaced.
Replacing a windscreen wiper blade
1. Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service
position.
2.
Set the wiper blade in removal position by
angling it out from the arm until a click sound
can be heard.
3.
Press and hold the lock button located
on the wiper blade mounting and at the
same time pull the blade straight out
par-
allel with the wiper arm.
4. Slide in the new wiper blade until the lock
button engages.
5. Angle the blade in towards the arm until a
click sound is heard. The blade is then no
longer in the removal position and can be
moved again.
6. Check that the wiper blade is firmly installed.
7. Fold the wiper arm back towards the wind-
screen.
The wiper blades are different lengths.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than on
the passenger side.
Replacing the wiper blade, rear window
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever to
detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into place. You
should hear a click. Check that it is firmly
installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
IMPORTANT
Check the blades regularly. Neglected main-
tenance shortens the service life of the wiper
blades.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
549
Related information
•
Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 567)
Filling washer fluid
Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps
as well as the windscreen and rear window.
Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when
the temperature is under the freezing point.
Filling of washer fluid takes place in the reservoir
with a blue cap. The reservoir is used for wind-
screen washer, rear window washer and head-
lamp washers*
NOTE
When approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir the message
Washer fluid
Level low, refill is shown in the driver display
together with the symbol
.
Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended
by Volvo - with frost protection during cold
weather and below freezing point.
IMPORTANT
Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent
with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8,
in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral
water).
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the
temperature is below freezing to avoid freez-
ing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
Volume:
•
Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres.
•
Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres.
Related information
•
Windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 146)
•
Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 535)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
550
Starter battery
The electrical system is single-pole and uses the
chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
The starter battery is used to start up the electri-
cal system and drive the starter motor as well as
other electrical equipment in the car.
The starter battery should be replaced by a
workshop
13
.
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator.
The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery
(Absorbed Glass Mat), designed for the carbon
dioxide reducing functions Start/Stop and regen-
erative charging, and to support the functionality
of the car's different systems.
The service life and function of the starter battery
is influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving condi-
tions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the starter battery when
the engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the starter battery
are correctly connected and properly tight-
ened.
WARNING
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can
be formed if a jump lead is connected
incorrectly, and this can be enough for
the battery to explode.
•
Do not connect the jump leads to any
fuel system component or any moving
part. Be careful of hot engine parts.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid, which
can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact with
eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large
quantities of water. If acid splashes into
the eyes - seek medical attention imme-
diately.
•
Never smoke near the battery.
When connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger, use the car's charging points in
the engine compartment. The battery terminals
on the car's starter battery in the cargo area must
not be used.
During charging, both the starter battery and the
support battery are charged.
Positive charging point
Negative charging point
IMPORTANT
When charging the starter battery and the
support battery, only use a modern battery
charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast
charging function must not be used since it
may damage the battery.
13
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
551
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotain-
ment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or
the message in the driver display about the
starter battery's state of charge may be tem-
porarily inapplicable, following the connection
of an external starter battery or battery
charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and cli-
mate. Battery starting capacity decreases
gradually with time and therefore needs to be
recharged if the car is not used for a longer
time or when it is only driven short distances.
Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition, at
least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom-
mended or that the battery is connected to a
battery charger with automatic trickle charg-
ing.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
The starter battery is located in the cargo area.
The following table shows specifications for the
starter battery.
Battery
H7 AGM
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start
capacity
A
- CCA
B
(A)
800
Size , L×W×H
(mm)
315×175×190
(12.4×6.9×7.5 inches)
Capacity (Ah) 80
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
552
Volvo recommends entrusting battery replace-
ment to an authorised Volvo workshop.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM
14
type must be fit-
ted.
IMPORTANT
If the starter battery is replaced, make sure
you replace it with a battery with the same
cold starting capacity and type as the original
battery (see the label on the battery).
NOTE
The starter battery's container size must be
consistent with the dimensions for the origi-
nal battery.
Related information
•
Symbols on the batteries (p. 552)
•
Support battery (p. 553)
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 406)
Symbols on the batteries
There are information and warning symbols on
the batteries.
Use protective goggles.
Further information in the
owner's manual for the car.
Store the battery out of the
reach of children.
The battery contains corro-
sive acid.
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Risk of explosion.
Must be taken for recycling.
NOTE
An expended starter battery or support bat-
tery must be recycled in an environmentally
safe manner since it contains lead.
Related information
•
Starter battery (p. 550)
•
Support battery (p. 553)
14
Absorbed Glass Mat.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
553
Support battery
Cars with Start/Stop function, in addition to the
starter battery, are equipped with a support bat-
tery.
Cars with the Start/Stop function are equipped
with two 12 V batteries - one extra powerful
starter battery for starting and one support bat-
tery that helps during the Start/Stop function's
starting sequence.
The support battery is located in a box next to the strut
tower.
The following table shows specifications for the
support battery.
Voltage (V) 12
Cold start capacity
A
-
CCA
B
(A)
170
Size, L×W×H (mm)
150×90×130
(5.9×3.5×5.1
inches)
Capacity (Ah) 10
A
According to EN standard.
B
Cold Cranking Amperes.
IMPORTANT
When replacing the starter battery or support
battery, a battery of AGM
15
type must be fit-
ted.
NOTE
•
The higher the current take-off in the car,
the more the alternator must be working
and the batteries charging = Increased
fuel consumption.
•
When the capacity of the starter battery
has fallen below the lowest permissible
level then the Start/Stop function is dis-
engaged.
Temporarily reduced Start/Stop function due to
high current take-off means:
•
The engine auto-starts without the driver lift-
ing his/her foot from the foot brake pedal.
The support battery normally requires no more
service than the normal starter battery. A work-
shop should be contacted in the event of ques-
tions or problems - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the Start/Stop function may temporarily
cease to work after the connection of an
external starter battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the car's
starter battery must never be used for
connecting an external starter battery or
battery charger - only the car's negative
charging point may be used as the
grounding point.
15
Absorbed Glass Mat.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
554
NOTE
If the starter battery has been discharged so
much that the car has no normal electrical
functions and the engine is then jump-started
with an external battery or a battery charger,
the Start/Stop function will continue to be
activated. If the Start/Stop function then
auto-stops the engine shortly after, there is a
great risk that engine auto-start will fail due
to insufficient battery capacity, because the
battery has not had the opportunity to
recharge.
If the car has been jump-started, or if there is
insufficient time to charge the battery with a
battery charger, the recommendation is to
temporarily deactivate the Start/Stop function
until the battery has been recharged by the
car. In an outside temperature of approx.
+15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to
be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a
lower outside temperature, the charging time
may increase to 3-4 hours. The recommenda-
tion is to charge the battery using an external
battery charger.
Related information
•
Starter battery (p. 550)
•
Start/Stop (p. 414)
•
Using jump starting with another battery
(p. 406)
•
Symbols on the batteries (p. 552)
Fuses
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
If an electrical component or function does not
work, it may be because the component's fuse
was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the
same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in
the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an
authorised Volvo workshop for checking.
Location of central electrical units
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
electrical units under the glovebox change sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Related information
•
Replacing a fuse (p. 555)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
555
Replacing a fuse
All electrical functions and components are pro-
tected by a number of fuses in order to protect
the car's electrical system from damage by short
circuiting or overloading.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to
see whether the curved wire has blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse
of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an
amperage higher than that specified when
replacing a fuse. This could cause significant
damage to the electrical system and possibly
lead to fire.
Related information
•
Fuses (p. 554)
•
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 556)
•
Fuses under glovebox (p. 559)
•
Fuses in cargo area (p. 563)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
556
Fuses in engine compartment
Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine
and brake functions, amongst other things.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
557
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box also provides space for several
spare fuses.
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that shows
the location of the fuses.
•
Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-54 are of
the "Micro" type.
•
Fuses 31-34 and 38-45 are of the "MCase"
type and should be replaced by a work-
shop
16
.
Function
A
A
- -
- -
- -
Ignition coils (petrol); Spark
plugs (petrol)
15
Solenoid for engine oil pump;
Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda
sond, centre (petrol); Lambda
sond, rear (diesel)
15
Function
A
A
Vacuum regulators; Valve; Valve
for output pulse (diesel)
7.5
Engine control module; Actuator;
Throttle unit; EGR valve (diesel);
Position sensor for turbo (die-
sel); Valve for turbocharger (pet-
rol)
20
Engine Control Module (ECM) 5
- -
Solenoids (petrol); Valve; Ther-
mostat for engine cooling sys-
tem (petrol); EGR cooling pump
(diesel); Glow control module
(diesel)
10
Control module for spoiler roller
cover; Control module for radia-
tor roller cover; Relay coils for
output pulse (diesel)
5
Lambda-sond, front; Lambda-
sond, rear (petrol)
15
Engine Control Module (ECM) 20
Starter motor 40
Function
A
A
Starter motor Shunt
Fuel filter heater (diesel) 30
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
- -
12 V socket in tunnel console,
front
15
12 V socket in tunnel console,
by legroom for second seat row
15
12 V socket in cargo area*
15
- -
Left-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
15
16
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
558
Function
A
A
Right-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
15
- -
Heated windscreen* left-hand
side
Shunt
Heated windscreen* left-hand
side
40
Headlamp washers*
25
Windscreen washers 25
Transmission control module 15
Horn 20
Siren*
5
Control module for brake system
(valves, parking brake)
40
Windscreen wipers 30
Rear window washer 25
Heated windscreen* right-hand
side
40
Parking heater*
20
Function
A
A
Control unit for brake system
(ABS pump)
40
- -
Heated windscreen* right-hand
side
Shunt
Supplied when the ignition is
switched on: Engine control
module; Transmission compo-
nents; Electric steering servo;
Central electronic module; Con-
trol module for brake system
5
- -
Right-hand headlamp 7.5
Right-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
15
- -
- -
Module for controlling battery
engagement
5
Airbags 5
Function
A
A
Left-hand headlamp 7.5
Left-hand headlamp, certain
variants of LED
B
15
Accelerator pedal sensor 5
A
Ampere
B
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
Related information
•
Replacing a fuse (p. 555)
•
Fuses under glovebox (p. 559)
•
Fuses in cargo area (p. 563)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
559
Fuses under glovebox
Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst
other things, the 230 V socket, displays and
door modules.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
560
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
561
Positions
•
Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are
of the "Micro" type.
•
Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
17
.
Function
A
A
- -
230 V socket in tunnel console, by
legroom for second seat row*
30
- -
Movement detector*
5
Media player 5
Driver display 5
Keypad in centre console 5
Sun sensor 5
- -
- -
Steering wheel module 5
Function
A
A
Module for start knob and for park-
ing brake control
5
Steering wheel module for heated
steering wheel*
15
- -
- -
- -
- -
Control module for climate control
system
10
Steering lock 7.5
Diagnostic socket OBDII 10
Centre display 5
Fan module for climate control sys-
tem, front
40
USB HUB 5
Function
A
A
Controls lighting; Interior lighting;
Dimming of interior rearview mir-
ror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad
in tunnel console, by legroom for
rear seat*; Power front seats*; Con-
trol panels in rear doors
7.5
Control module for driver support
functions
5
Panorama roof with sun blind*
20
Head-up display*
5
Passenger compartment lighting 5
- -
Display in roof console (Seatbelt
reminder/Indicator for airbag on
the front passenger seat)
5
- -
Humidity sensor 5
Door module in right-hand rear
door
20
Fuses in cargo area 10
17
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
* Option/accessory.
562
Function
A
A
Control module for online con-
nected car: Control module for
Volvo On Call
5
Door module in left-hand rear door 20
Audio control module (amplifier)
(certain variants)
40
- -
Module for multi-band antenna 5
Modules for seat comfort (mas-
sage) front*
5
- -
Rear window wiper 15
Control module for fuel pump 15
- -
- -
Seat heating, driver's side front 15
Seat heating, passenger side front 15
Coolant pump 10
- -
Function
A
A
Door module in left-hand front door 20
Control module for suspension
(active chassis)*
20
- -
Sensus control module 10
- -
- -
Door module in right-hand front
door
20
- -
TV* (certain markets)
5
Primary fuse for fuses 53 and 58 15
A
Ampere
Related information
•
Replacing a fuse (p. 555)
•
Fuses in engine compartment (p. 556)
•
Fuses in cargo area (p. 563)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
563
Fuses in cargo area
Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other
things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt ten-
sioners.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
564
The central electrical unit is located on the right-hand side.
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that
facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting
of fuses.
The fuse box in the engine compartment also
provides space for several spare fuses.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
565
Positions
•
Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro"
type.
•
Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the
"MCase" type and should be replaced by a
workshop
18
.
Function
A
A
Rear window defroster 30
- -
Compressor for air suspension*
40
Lock motor for backrest on rear
right-hand side
15
- -
Lock motor for backrest on rear
left-hand side
15
- -
Control module for reduction of
nitrous oxides (diesel)
30
Power operated tailgate*
25
Electrically operated front passen-
ger seat*
20
Function
A
A
Towbar control module*
40
Seatbelt pretensioner module,
right-hand side
40
Internal relay coils 5
Control module for reduction of
nitrous oxides (diesel)
15
Module for detecting foot move-
ment* (for opening the power oper-
ated tailgate)
5
Alcohol lock 5
- -
Towbar control module*
25
Power driver seat*
20
Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-
hand side
40
Parking camera*
5
- -
- -
- -
Function
A
A
- -
Control module for airbags and
seatbelt tensioners
5
- -
Seat heating left-hand side rear*
15
- -
Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*:
control module, exterior reversing
sound
5
- -
Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5
Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol,
certain engine variants)
5
- -
All Wheel Drive (AWD) control
module*
15
Seat heating right-hand side rear*
15
- -
A
Ampere
18
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
567
Cleaning the exterior
The car should be washed as soon as it
becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier
to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly.
It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps
the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil
separator. Use car shampoo.
Handwashing
The following steps are good to remember when
washing the car:
•
Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This
can cause the detergent or wax to dry and
have an abrasive effect.
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork
as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain
chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork
very quickly. For example, use soft paper or
sponge soaked in plenty of water. An author-
ised Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
•
Wash the underbody, including wheel hous-
ings and bumpers.
•
Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt
has been removed so as to reduce the risk of
scratches from washing. Do not spray directly
onto the locks.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on
very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the
surfaces must not be hot from the sun.
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap
solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a
water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of
water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce
the risk of water drying stains which may
need to be polished out.
•
After the car has been washed, tar from
asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get
rid of the last spots after the car has been
washed.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a work-
shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality.
Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but
use water and a non-scratching sponge
instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear
lamps may temporarily have condensation on
the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exte-
rior lighting is designed to withstand this.
Condensation is normally vented out of the
lamp housing when the lamp has been
switched on for a time.
IMPORTANT
•
Make sure that the panoramic roof and
sun visor are closed before washing the
car.
•
Never use polishing agent with abrasive
properties on the panoramic roof.
•
Never use wax on the rubber mouldings
around the panoramic roof.
IMPORTANT
Remember to remove dirt from the drain
holes in the doors and in the sills after wash-
ing the car.
Automatic car wash
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way
of washing the car, but it cannot reach every-
where. Washing the car by hand is recommended
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
568
to achieve a good result, or to supplement auto-
matic car washes with washing by hand.
NOTE
The car must only be washed by hand over
the first few months. This is because the paint
is more delicate when it is new.
IMPORTANT
Before driving the car into an automatic car
wash, deactivate the functions for automatic
braking when stationary and automatic park-
ing brake application. If these functions are
not deactivated, the brake system will jam
when the car is stationary and the car will not
be able to move.
In car washes where the car is towed through
with rolling wheels, the following applies:
1. Drive into the automatic car wash.
2. Deactivate the function for Automatic brak-
ing when stationary using the switch in the
tunnel console.
3. Deactivate the function for automatic appli-
cation of parking brake via the centre dis-
play's top view.
4.
Move the gear lever to position N.
5. Switch off the engine by turning the start
knob in the tunnel console clockwise. Hold
the knob in place at least 4 seconds.
> The car is ready for the automatic car
wash.
IMPORTANT
•
Before washing the car, make sure that
the automatic rain sensor is deactivated,
otherwise there is the risk of it starting
and damaging the wiper arms.
•
Make sure that the door mirrors are
retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured,
antennas retracted or removed, otherwise
they risk being damaged by the auto-
matic car wash.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use sweep-
ing movements and make sure that the nozzle
does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface
of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks.
Testing the brakes
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush. The
heat from the friction causes the brake linings to
warm up and dry. Do the same thing after starting
in very damp or cold weather.
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the car,
including the parking brake, to ensure that
moisture and corrosion do not attack the
brake linings and reduce braking perform-
ance.
Wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as
well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair
the service life of wiper blades.
When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service
position.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regu-
larly with a lukewarm soap solution or car
shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When
using such a cleaning agent the instructions
must be followed carefully.
Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH
value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause
discolouration of anodised aluminium compo-
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
569
nents*, as illustrated. We advise against use of
abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated.
Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with
a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
IMPORTANT
Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent
with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than
11.5. This may result in discolouration of ano-
dised aluminium parts such as roof rack and
around the side windows.
Never use metal polishing agent on anodised
aluminium parts, this can result in discoloura-
tion and destroy the surface treatment.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by
Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the sur-
face and cause stains on chrome-plated alumi-
nium rims.
Related information
•
Polishing and waxing (p. 569)
•
Wiper blades in service position (p. 547)
•
Automatic braking when stationary (p. 432)
•
Using the parking brake (p. 429)
•
Gear positions for automatic gearbox
(p. 408)
•
Rustproofing (p. 570)
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or
to give the paintwork extra protection. The car
does not need to be polished until it is at least
one year old. However, the car can be waxed
during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in
direct sunlight, the surface being polished
should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F).
•
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
and tar stains using tar remover or white spi-
rit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
•
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and rubber,
only rub with light pressure if it is necessary.
Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear
away or damage the glossy surface layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive must
not be used.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
570
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo
should be used. Other treatment such as pre-
serving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or
similar could damage the paintwork. Paint-
work damage caused by such treatments is
not covered by Volvo warranty.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 567)
•
Paint damage (p. 573)
•
Repairing paint damage (p. 573)
Rustproofing
The car has effective protection against corro-
sion.
Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of
modern metallic protective coatings on the sheet
metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-
protected and minimised metal overlap, and
shielding plastic components, abrasion protection
and supplemental rust inhibitor in exposed areas.
This combination guarantees that the body will
remain free from corrosion problems over time. In
the chassis, exposed components of the wheel
suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast
aluminium.
Inspection and maintenance
The car's anti-corrosion protection normally
requires no maintenance, but a good way to fur-
ther reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the
car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solu-
tions must always be avoided on glossy trim com-
ponents. Any stone chips should be rectified as
soon as they are discovered.
Related information
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 567)
•
Paint damage (p. 573)
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and
treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming
is important prior to using cleaning agents.
IMPORTANT
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g.
dark jeans and suede garments) may
stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is
important to clean and treat these parts
of the upholstery as soon as possible.
•
Never use strong solvents such as
washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit to
clean the interior, since this may damage
the upholstery as well as other interior
materials.
•
Never spray the cleaning agent directly
onto components that have electrical but-
tons and controls. Wipe them instead
using a moistened cloth containing the
cleaning agent.
•
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage
the fabric upholstery.
Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery
Never scrape or rub a stain since this risks
destroying the upholstery. Never use strong stain
removers since this risks destroying the colour of
the upholstery.
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
* Option/accessory.
571
Leather upholstery*
Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve
its original appearance.
Leather upholstery is a natural product that
changes and acquires a beautiful patina over
time. Regular cleaning and treatment are
required in order that the properties and colours
of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a
comprehensive product – Volvo Leather Care Kit/
Wipes – for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance with
the instructions, preserves the leather's protective
coating.
To achieve best results, Volvo recommends
cleaning and application of the protective cream
one to four times per year (or more if required).
Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from
Volvo dealers.
Cleaning the leather upholstery
1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge
and squeeze until a foam is created.
2. Use the sponge on the stain in a circular
motion.
3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the
sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain
without scrubbing.
4. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the
leather to dry thoroughly
Protecting the leather upholstery
1. Apply a small amount of leather protective
agent to a cloth and then apply it to the
leather in light circular motions.
2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes.
Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more
resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radia-
tion.
Leather steering wheel
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the
leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We
recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for
cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove
dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth and a
neutral soapy solution.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the
leather on the steering wheel.
Interior plastic, metal and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly mois-
tened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is
recommended for cleaning interior parts and sur-
faces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers.
IMPORTANT
Do not use solvent that contains alcohol
when cleaning the glass for the driver display.
Seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special
textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo
dealers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before
allowing it to retract.
Inlay mats and floor mat
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of
the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vac-
uum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Each inlay
mat is secured with pins.
Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay
mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each
pin.
WARNING
Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and
check before setting off that the mat by the
driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in
the pins so that it does not get caught adja-
cent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recom-
mended by Volvo dealers.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
572
Related information
•
Cleaning the centre display (p. 572)
Cleaning the centre display
Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect
the centre display's performance and readability.
Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre
cloth.
Home button for the centre display.
1. Turn off the centre display with a long press
on the home button.
2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth
supplied or use another microfibre cloth of
equivalent quality. The screen should be
wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth
with small circular movements. If necessary,
lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean
water.
3. Activate the display with a short press on the
home button.
IMPORTANT
The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre
display must be free from sand and dirt.
IMPORTANT
When cleaning the centre display, only use
gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pres-
sure can damage the screen.
IMPORTANT
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the centre display. Do not use win-
dow cleaning agent, other cleaning agents,
aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or
cleaning agent containing abrasive.
Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tis-
sue paper, these can scratch the centre dis-
play.
Related information
•
Cleaning the interior (p. 570)
•
Overview of the centre display (p. 33)
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
}}
573
Paint damage
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproof-
ing and should therefore be checked regularly.
The most common types of paintwork damage
are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the
edges of wings, doors and bumpers.
Colour code
The colour code label is located on the car's door
pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
Exterior colour code
Any secondary exterior colour code
It is important that the correct colour is used.
Touching up minor paintwork damage
To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork
should be rectified immediately.
NOTE
When repairing the paintwork, it must be
clean and dry and at a temperature of at least
15°C.
Materials that may be needed
•
Primer
19
- a special adhesive primer in a
spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated
bumpers.
•
Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray
cans or as touch-up pens/sticks
20
.
•
Masking tape.
•
fine sand paper
19
.
NOTE
When paint is repaired the surface must be
clean and dry. The temperature of the surface
should be at least 15 °C (60 °F).
Related information
•
Repairing paint damage (p. 573)
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Rustproofing (p. 570)
Repairing paint damage
When repairing paint damage, the car must be
clean, dry and have a temperature of over 15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the dam-
aged surface. Then remove the tape to
remove any loose paint.
If the damage is down to the metal, use of a
primer is appropriate. In the event of damage
to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used to give better results - spray
into the lid of the spray can and brush on
thinly.
19
If required.
20
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
||
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
574
2. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very
fine polishing agent may be carried out
locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven
edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly
and left to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with
a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer
has dried.
For scratches, proceed as described above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the
undamaged paintwork.
Touch-up pens and spray paints are available
from Volvo dealers.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down to
the meal and an undamaged layer of paint
remains in place, fill in with base coat and
clear coat as soon as the surface has been
cleaned.
Related information
•
Paint damage (p. 573)
•
Cleaning the exterior (p. 567)
•
Type designations (p. 576)
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
576
Type designations
The decals in the car contain information such
as chassis number, type designation, colour
code, etc.
Label location
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle iden-
tification and engine numbers can facilitate all
contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding
the car and when ordering spare parts and
accessories.
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
577
Decal for type designation, vehicle identifica-
tion number, permissible maximum weights and
code designation for exterior colour and type
approval number. The decal is positioned on the
door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand
rear door is opened.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R1234yf.
Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant
R134a.
Label for parking heater.
Decal for engine code and the engine's serial
number.
Label for engine oil.
||
SPECIFICATIONS
578
Decal for gearbox type designation and serial
number.
Decal for the car's identification number - VIN
(Vehicle Identification Number).
Further information on the car is presented in the
registration document.
NOTE
It is not intended that the decals illustrated in
the owner's manual should be exact replicas
of those in the car. They are included to show
their approximate appearance and locations
in the car. The information that applies to your
particular car can be found on the decal on
the car.
Related information
•
Air conditioning — specifications (p. 588)
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
579
Dimensions
Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be
read in the table.
Dimensions mm inches
A
Ground clearance
A
207 8.2
B Wheelbase 2865 112,8
C Length 4688 184,6
D Load length, floor,
folded seat
1746 68,7
E Load length, floor 960 37,8
F Height 1658 65,3
Dimensions mm inches
G Load height 776 30,6
H Front track
1653
B
1649
C
1655
D
1668
E
65,1
B
64,9
C
65,2
D
65,7
E
Dimensions mm inches
I Rear track
1657
B
1653
C
1659
D
1673
E
65,2
B
65,1
C
65,3
D
65,9
E
J Load width, floor 1010 39,8
K Width 1902 74,9
||
SPECIFICATIONS
580
Dimensions mm inches
L Width including door
mirrors
2117 83,3
M Width including folded-
in door mirrors
1999 78,7
A
For kerb weight + 2 people. Varies slightly depending on tyre
dimension, chassis alternative, etc.).
B
Applies to cars with 17/19 inch wheels.
C
Applies to cars with 20 inch wheels.
D
Applies to cars with 21 inch wheels.
E
Applies to cars with 22 inch wheels.
SPECIFICATIONS
581
Weights
Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a
label in the car.
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories, and
towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence
the load capacity and are not included in the kerb
weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight -
Kerb weight.
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to cars
in the standard version - i.e. a car without
extra equipment or accessories. This means
that for every accessory added the loading
capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly
by the weight of the accessory.
Examples of accessories that reduce load
capacity are the different equipment levels
(e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well
as other accessories such as towbar, load
carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary
lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille,
carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer-
taining the kerb weight of your own particular
car.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be
visible when the right-hand rear door is opened.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 100 kg.
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Towing capacity and towball load (p. 582)
SPECIFICATIONS
582
Towing capacity and towball load
Towing capacity and towball load for driving with
a trailer can be read in the tables.
Max. weight braked trailer
NOTE
The use of a stabiliser hitch on the towing
bracket is recommended for trailers heavier
than 1800 kg.
Engine
Engine code
A
Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg)
T5 AWD B4204T23 Automatic 2400 110
T5 AWD B4204T20 Automatic 2400 110
T6 AWD B4204T27 Automatic 2400 110
D4 AWD D4204T14 Automatic 2400 110
D5 AWD D4204T23 Automatic 2400 110
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
IMPORTANT
When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to
exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight
(including towball load) by a maximum of 100
kg, provided that speed is limited to 100
km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements
for the vehicle combination, such as speed,
etc. must be observed.
SPECIFICATIONS
584
Engine specifications
Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each
respective engine alternative can be found in the
table below.
NOTE
Not all engines are available in all markets.
Engine
Engine code
A
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque
(Nm/rpm)
No. of cylinders
T5 AWD B4204T23 187/5500 254/5500 350/1500–4800 4
T5 AWD B4204T20 183/5500 249/5500 350/1500-4500 4
T6 AWD B4204T27 235/5700 320/5700 400/2200-5400 4
D4 AWD D4204T14 140/4250 190/4250 400/1750-2500 4
D5 AWD D4204T23 173/4000 235/4000 480/1750-2250 4
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 585)
•
Coolant — specifications (p. 587)
SPECIFICATIONS
585
Engine oil — specifications
Engine oil grade and volume for each respective
engine alternative can be read in the table.
Volvo recommends:
Engine
Engine code
A
Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter
(litres)
T5 AWD B4204T23 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.6
T5 AWD B4204T20 approx. 5.6
T6 AWD B4204T27 approx. 5.6
D4 AWD D4204T14 Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 approx. 5.2
D5 AWD D4204T23 approx. 5.2
A
The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine.
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Adverse driving conditions for engine oil
(p. 586)
•
Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 539)
•
Engine oil (p. 537)
SPECIFICATIONS
586
Adverse driving conditions for
engine oil
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor-
mally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long jour-
neys:
•
towing a caravan or trailer
•
in mountainous regions
•
at high speeds
•
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or hotter
than +40 °C.
The above also apply to shorter driving distances
at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection for
the engine.
Volvo recommends:
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are filled
with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil
at the factory. The choice of oil has been
made very carefully with regard to service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption and
environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in order
that the recommended service intervals can
be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil
for both filling and oil change, otherwise there
is a risk of the service life, starting characte-
ristics, fuel consumption and environmental
impact of the car being affected.
If engine oil of the prescribed grade and vis-
cosity is not used, engine related components
may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation
disclaims any liability for any such damage.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are car-
ried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Engine oil — specifications (p. 585)
•
Engine oil (p. 537)
SPECIFICATIONS
587
Coolant — specifications
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water
1
, see the packag-
ing. Consult a Volvo dealer if unsure.
To prevent health risks, do not mix different types
of glycol.
Transmission fluid — specifications
Under normal driving conditions, the transmis-
sion fluid does not need to be changed during
its service life. However, it may be necessary in
adverse driving conditions.
Automatic gearbox
Prescribed transmission fluid:
AW1
Brake fluid — specifications
The medium in a hydraulic brake system is
called brake fluid, and it is used to transfer pres-
sure from e.g. a brake pedal via a master brake
cylinder to one or more slave cylinders, which in
turn act on a mechanical brake.
Prescribed grade: Volvo Original Dot 4 class 6
or equivalent.
NOTE
It is recommended that brake fluid is changed
or filled by an authorised Volvo workshop.
Related information
•
Engine compartment overview (p. 536)
1
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
SPECIFICATIONS
588
Fuel tank - volume
The fuel tank's filling capacity can be read in the
table below.
Engine Litres
(approx.)
Petrol:
T6 AWD
(B4204T27)
D5 AWD
(D4204T23)
71
other 60
Diesel:
60
Related information
•
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap and refu-
elling (p. 439)
Air conditioning — specifications
The car's climate control system uses a freon-
free refrigerant, either R1234yf or R134a
depending on market. Information about which
refrigerant the car's climate control system uses
is printed on a decal located on the inside of the
bonnet.
Prescribed grades and volumes of fluids and
lubricants in the air conditioning system can be
read in the tables below.
A/C decal
Decal for R134a
Decal for R1234yf
SPECIFICATIONS
589
Symbol explanation R1234yf
Symbol Meaning
Caution
Mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Lubricant type
A trained and certified technician is
required in order to service the
mobile air conditioning system
(MAC)
Flammable refrigerants
Refrigerant
Cars with refrigerant R134a
Weight Prescribed grade
700 g (1.54 lbs) R134a
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R134a. This system must only
be serviced and repaired by an authorised
workshop.
Cars with refrigerant R1234yf
Weight Prescribed grade
650 g R1234yf
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressur-
ised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with
SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe
Service and Containment of Refrigerants
Used in Mobile A/C System), service and
repair of the refrigerant system must only be
performed by trained and certified technicians
in order to ensure the safety of the system.
Compressor oil
Volume Prescribed grade
125 ml (4.23 fl. oz.) PAG SP-A2
Evaporator
IMPORTANT
The A/C system's evaporator must never be
repaired or replaced with a previously used
evaporator. A new evaporator must be certi-
fied and labelled in accordance with SAE
J2842.
Related information
•
Servicing the climate control system (p. 542)
•
Type designations (p. 576)
SPECIFICATIONS
590
Fuel consumption and CO2
emissions
The fuel consumption for a vehicle is measured
in litres per 100 km and CO2 emissions are
measured in gram CO2 per km.
Explanation
gram CO
2
/km
litres/100 km
urban driving
motorway driving
mixed driving
manual gearbox
automatic gearbox
NOTE
If the consumption and emission data is miss-
ing then it is included in the enclosed supple-
ment.
T5 AWD
A
(B4204T23)
211 9,3 142 6,2 167 7,3
T5 AWD
B
(B4204T23)
208 9.2 139 6,1 164 7,2
T6 AWD (B4204T27)
222 9.7 150 6,6 176 7,7
D4 AWD
A
(D4204T14)
155 5,8 125 4,8 136 5,2
SPECIFICATIONS
}}
591
D4 AWD
B
(D4204T14)
150 5,8 123 4,7 133 5,1
D5 AWD (D4204T23)
159 6,1 136 5,2 144 5,5
A
Does not apply to the low-emission variant.
B
Only applies to the low-emission variant.
The fuel consumption and emission values in the
above table are based on special EU driving
cycles (see below), which apply for cars with kerb
weight in basic version and without extra equip-
ment. The car's weight may increase depending
on its equipment level. This, along with how heav-
ily the car is loaded, increases its fuel consump-
tion and CO2 emissions.
There are several reasons for fuel consumption
that is higher than the values in the table. Exam-
ples of these include:
•
If the car is equipped with extra equipment
that affects its weight.
•
Driving style.
•
If the customer chooses wheels other than
those mounted as standard on the basic ver-
sion of the model, as this could increase roll-
ing resistance.
•
High speed causes increased air resistance.
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
A combination of the examples above could
increase consumption considerably.
There may be huge deviations in fuel consump-
tion if comparing to the EU driving cycles (see
below), which are used in the certification of the
car and on which consumption figures in the
table are based. For further information, please
refer to the referenced regulations.
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combina-
tion with fuel quality are factors that consider-
ably increase the car's fuel consumption.
EU driving cycles
The official fuel consumption figures are based
on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory
environment ("EU driving cycles"), all in accord-
ance with EU Regulation no 692/2008 and
715/2007 (Euro 5 / Euro 6) and UN ECE
Regulation no 101. Since the driving cycles are
also used for quality control, there are stringent
requirements for test repeatability. Testing is
therefore conducted in a controlled manner and
only with the car's basic functions (e.g. air condi-
tioning, radio, etc. switched off). The results of the
official figures are therefore not naturally repre-
sentative of what the customer sees in actual
use.
The regulations cover the driving cycles "Urban
driving" and "Motorway driving":
||
SPECIFICATIONS
592
•
Urban driving – the measurement starts
with a cold start of the engine. The driving is
simulated.
•
Motorway driving – the car is accelerated
and braked at speed of 0-120 km/h
(0-75 mph). The driving is simulated.
The official value for mixed driving, which is
shown in the table, is a combination of the results
from the "Urban driving" and "Motorway driving"
driving cycles in accordance with legal require-
ments.
To determine the carbon dioxide emissions (CO
2
emissions) during the two driving cycles, the
exhaust gases were collected. These were then
analysed to determine the value for CO
2
emis-
sions.
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Weights (p. 581)
•
Economical driving (p. 444)
SPECIFICATIONS
593
Approved wheel and tyre sizes
In certain countries not all approved sizes are
indicated by the registration document or other
documents. The following table shows all
approved combinations of wheel rims and tyres.
✓ = Approved
Engine man/
aut
235/65R17
A
7,5x17x50,5
235/60R18
7,5x18x50,5
235/55R19
7,5x19x50,5
255/45R20
8x20x52.5
255/40R21
8,5x21x49,5
265/35R22
B
9x22x43
T5 AWD (B4204T20) aut
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
T5 AWD (B4204T23)
C
aut
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
T5 AWD (B4204T23)
D
aut
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
- -
T6 AWD (B4204T27) aut -
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
D4 AWD (D4204T14)
C
aut
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
D4 AWD (D4204T14)
D
aut
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
- -
D5 AWD (D4204T23) aut -
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
A
235/65 R17 is not approved when the car is equipped with 18" brakes. Check with your Volvo dealer how your car is equipped.
B
Only in combination with wheel arch extension.
C
Does not apply to the low-emission variant.
D
Only applies to the low-emission variant.
Related information
•
Load index and speed rating (p. 594)
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 525)
•
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 524)
SPECIFICATIONS
594
Load index and speed rating
The table below shows the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine man/
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)
A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)
B
T5 AWD B4204T20 aut 98 V
T5 AWD B4204T23 aut 98 V
T6 AWD B4204T27 aut 98 V
D4 AWD D4204T14 aut 98 H
D5 AWD D4204T23 aut 98 V
A
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
B
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table.
Related information
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 593)
•
Approved tyre pressures (p. 595)
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Dimension designation for tyre (p. 525)
•
Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 524)
SPECIFICATIONS
595
Approved tyre pressures
Approved tyre pressures for each engine alterna-
tive can be found in the table.
NOTE
All engines, tyres or combinations of these
are not always available in all markets.
Engine Tyre size Speed
(km/h)
Load, 1-3 persons Max. load
ECO pressure
A
Front
(kPa)
B
Rear
(kPa)
Front
(kPa)
Rear
(kPa)
Front/rear
(kPa)
All engines
235/65 R17
235/60 R18
235/55 R19
255/45 R20
255/40 R21
265/35 R22
0 - 160
C
230 230 270 270 270
160+
D
250 250 270 270 -
Temporary Spare Tyre
max. 80
E
420 420 420 420 -
A
Economical driving.
B
In certain countries the "bar" unit is used alongside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
C
0 - 100 mph
D
100+ mph
E
max 50 mph
Related information
•
Type designations (p. 576)
•
Checking the tyre pressures (p. 506)
•
Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 593)
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
597
1, 2, 3 ...
4WD 425
A
A/C (Air conditioning) 184
ABS
anti-lock brakes 425
ACC – Adaptive cruise control 290, 301
Accessories and extra equipment 23
Active bending lights 138
Active main beam 135
Active Park Assist 393
function 393
Limitations 397
operation 394
Symbols and messages 400
Active Yaw Control 271
Adapting driving characteristics 270, 418
Adaptive Cruise Control 290, 301
change cruise control functionality 303
fault tracing 302
function 290
managing speed 294, 295
overtaking 300
radar sensor 322
setting the time interval 296
standby mode 298
temporary deactivation 298
Additional heater (Auxiliary heater) 209
Adjusting the steering wheel 130
Aerial
location 234
Airbag 63
Activating/deactivating 65
driver's side 63
passenger side 63, 65
Airbag, see Airbag 63
Air conditioning 184
Air conditioning, fluid
volume and grade 588
Air conditioning system 176, 180
repair 542
Air distribution 191
Air vents 191, 193
change 192
defrosting 188
Recirculation 191
table of options 195
Air quality 178, 179
allergies and asthma 179
passenger compartment filter 179
Air recirculation 191
Alarm 257
automatic re-arming 259
deactivation 259
reduced alarm level 257
Alcohol lock 402
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 179
All Wheel Drive, (AWD) 425
All Wheel Drive (AWD) 425
Android Auto 473
settings 475
Apple CarPlay 471, 472
Applications
settings 173
Approach lighting 144
Apps 456
download, update and uninstall 489
Assistance at risk of collision 371
Audio and media 456
Audio settings 457, 483
media 469
phone 483
play media 463
Text message 481
Auto climate control 183
Automatic brake 432
after collision 428
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
598
Automatic car washes 567
Automatic engine stop
auto-stop 414
Automatic gearbox 408
oil 587
trailer 448
Automatic relocking 237
Automatic speed limiter 279, 280, 281
Auxiliary heater 209
AWD, All Wheel Drive 425
B
Backrest
front seat, adjusting 119, 120, 122
rear seat, lowering 126
Bag holder 221
Battery 406, 550
jump starting 406
maintenance 550
overload 437
start 550
support 553
symbols on the battery 552
warning symbols 552
BLIS 349, 351
Bluetooth
connect 468
connect car to Internet 484
phone 477
settings 483
Bonnet, opening 535
Book service and repair 528
Brake assist
after collision 428
Brake fluid
grade 587
Brake functions 425
Brake light 140
Brakes 425
Anti-lock braking system, ABS 425
automatic when stationary 432
brake assist system, BAS 427
brake light 140
brake system 425
emergency brake lights 427
handbrake 428, 429, 431
Brake system
fluid 587
bulbs, specifications 546
C
Camera sensor 346
Camera unit 332
Car care 567
Leather upholstery 571
Car functions
in centre display 47
Cargo area 219
electrical socket 214
lighting 143
mounting points 221
protective net 224
Cargo cover 222
Cargo grille 226
Car holiday 437
Car key battery low 252
Car modem
connect car to Internet 484
settings 488
Car status 528
Tyre pressure 509
Car upholstery 570
Car washing 567
Catalytic converter
Recovery 454
CD player 467
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
599
central locking 239
Centre display
change settings 46
cleaning 572
climate control 181
Keyboard 49, 53
messages 105
operation 36, 40
overview 33
symbols in status bar 45
Checking the engine oil level 539
Checking the level 423
Child safety 71
Child safety locks 256
Child seat 71
i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points 78
lower mounting points 74
positioning/fitting 71
table for location 76
table of i-Size 82
table of ISOFIX 79
Upper mounting points 74
City Safety in crossing traffic 342
City Safety with evasive manoeuvre 343
City Safety with obstructed evasive
manoeuvre 345
City Safety™ 336, 339, 340, 346, 348
Cleaning
automatic car wash 567
car washing 567
centre display 572
Fabric upholstery 570
rims 569
seatbelts 571
upholstery 570
Clean Zone Interior Package 179
Climate control 176, 180
auto-regulation 183
centre display 181
experienced temperature 177
fan control 187
Parking 200
rear seat 182
sensors 177
temperature control 185
voice control 117
zones 176
Climate control system
Refrigerant 588
Clock, adjustment 97
CO
2
emissions 590
Collision 56, 58, 63, 69
Collision warning 336
Collision warning system
Pedestrian detection 340
Radar sensor 322
Colour code, paint 573
Combined instrument panel 88
settings 92
Compass 152
calibration 153
Condensation in headlamps 567
Controls lighting 132
Coolant 587
Coolant, filling 540
Cooling system
overheating 436
Cornering lights 139
Corner Traction Control 271
Cover
cargo area 222
Crash, see Collision 56
Cross Traffic Alert – CTA 352, 353, 354
Cruise control 282, 283
deactivate 286
managing speed 283, 284
temporary deactivation 285
CTA – Cross Traffic Alert 352, 353, 354
Cyclist detection 340
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
600
CZIP (Clean Zone Interior Package) 179
D
DAB Radio 461
Data
recording 22
Data link connector 23
Daytime running lights 134
Deadlock 241
deactivation 241
Defrosting 188
Diesel 442
run out of fuel 443
Diesel particle filter 443
Digital radio (DAB) 461
Dimensions 579
Towing bracket 447
dipped beam 134
Dipstick, electronic 539
Direction indicator 141
Direction indicators 141
direction of rotation 505
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor 412
Display lighting 132
Distance Warning 287, 288
Limitations 289
Door mirrors 149
automatic dimming 150
resetting 150
Drive-E
Environmental philosophy 25
Driver Alert Control 363
operation 364
Driver display
application menu 103
messages 105
Driver performance 164
Driver profile 169, 171, 172
edit 171
select 170
Drivetrain
Gearbox 407
Driving
cooling system 436
with a tailer 448
Driving economy 444
Driving in water 435
Driving mode 418
Driving with a trailer
towball load 582
towing capacity 582
E
ECO mode 421
Economical driving 421, 444
ECO pressure 506, 595
Electrical socket 214
Electrical system 550
Electric parking brake 428
low battery voltage 431
Emergency equipment
first aid kit 524
warning triangle 523
Emergency puncture repair 512, 516
action 513
inflating the tyres 516
rechecking 513
Emergency puncture repair kit 513
location 512
overview 513
sealing fluid 512
Emissions of carbon dioxide 590
Engine
deactivate 405
overheating 436
start 404
Start/Stop 414
Engine braking, automatic 434
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
601
Engine compartment
coolant 540
Engine oil 537
overview 536
Engine drag control 271
Engine oil 537, 586
adverse driving conditions 586
filter 537
grade and volume 585
Engine oil, filling 539
Engine specifications 584
Engine temperature
high 436
Environment 25
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 305
see Messages and symbols 305, 320
Error messages in BLIS 356
Ethanol content
maximum 10 percent by volume 441
External dimensions 579
F
Fan
Air distribution 192
Air vents 193
Control 187
Fault tracing for the camera sensor 333
Ferry transport 423
First aid 524
First aid kit 524
Flooded road 435
Fluids, capacities 549, 588
Fluids and oils 587, 588
Fog lamp
front 138
rear 139
Foot brake 425, 427
Four-C 423
Front seat
Climate control 181
Fan 187
heating 197
Temperature 185
Ventilation 198
Front seat, manual 119
Front seat, power 120, 122
adjusting seat 120, 124
massage 122
memory function 121
multi-function control 122
FSC, ecolabelling 32
Fuel 440, 441, 442
fuel consumption 590
identifier 441, 442
fuel gauge 97
Fuelling
filling 439
Fuel tank
volume 588
Fuel vapour 440
Fuse box 554
Fuses
changing 555
General 554
in cargo area 563
in engine compartment 556
under glovebox 559
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
602
G
Gearbox 407
automatic 408
manual 410
Gear positions
automatic gearbox 408
Gear selector inhibitor 412
Gear shift indicator 410
Glass
laminated/reinforced 32
Glovebox 218
Gracenote
®
466
Gross vehicle weight 581
GSI - Gear selector assistance 410
H
Handbrake 428, 429
Hazard warning flashers 140
HDC 434
Headlamp beam
height adjustment 132
Headlamp control 131
Headlamp levelling of headlamps 132
head restraint 125
Heated washer nozzles 147
Heater 207
auxiliary heater 209
parking heater 208
Heating
seats 197
steering wheel 199
Windows 188
Height adjustment 423
High engine temperature 436
Hill descent control 434
Hill Descent Control 434
Hill start assist
Hill Start Assist (HSA) 431
Hill Start Assist 431
HomeLink
®
158
Home safe light duration 144
Horn 129
I
IAQS (Interior Air Quality System) 179
IC (Inflatable Curtain) 68
ID, Volvo 23
Ignition position 403
Immobiliser 255
Immobilizer
Immobiliser 255
Indicator symbols 93
Individual drive mode 418
Inflatable curtain 68
Inflatable Curtain 68
Information display 88, 92
Infotainment system (Audio and media) 456
Instrument lighting 132
Instrument overview
left-hand drive car 84
right-hand drive car 85
Instruments and controls 84, 85
IntelliSafe
Driver support 28
Interior Air Quality System 179
Interior lighting 141
Interior rearview mirror 151
automatic dimming 151
Intermittent wiping 145
Internet, see Internet-connected car 484
Internet-connected car
book service and repair 528
system updates 531
iPod
®
, connection 468
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
603
ITPMS - Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring
System 507, 509, 510, 511
J
Jack 523
Journey statistics 164
Jump starting 406
K
Kerb weight 581
Key 172, 230, 233, 237
Keyboard 49, 53
Keypad in the steering wheel 129
Key tag 230
L
Labels
location of 576
Laminated glass 32
Lamps 542
trailer 450
Lane assistance
operation 368
Lane assistance – Lane Keeping Aid
(LKA) 365, 368, 369
Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) 365, 368, 369
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 571
License agreement 491
Lifting tool 523
Lighting
active bending lights 138
approach lighting 144
automatic lighting, passenger compart-
ment 142
Automatic main beam 135
bulbs, specifications 546
controls 131, 141
controls lighting 132
cornering lights 139
daytime running lights 134
dipped beam 134
display lighting 132
fog lamp 138
headlamp levelling 132
home safe lighting 144
instrument lighting 132
in the passenger compartment 141
main beam 135
position lamps 133
rear fog lamp 139
Lighting, bulb replacement 542
daytime running lights/position lamps
front 545
dipped beam 544
direction indicators front 546
main beam 545
Limitations for Driver Alert Control 365
Limp home 407
Loading
General 219
load retaining eyelets 221
long load 220
Loading hooks 221
Load retaining eyelets
cargo area 221
Lock
locking 235, 239
unlocking 235, 239
Lockable wheel bolts 520
Lock confirmation 237
Locking/unlocking
tailgate 242, 244
Low battery voltage
Battery 437
Lowering the rear section 220
Low speed control 433
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
604
M
Main beam 135
Maintained climate comfort 200
start/shut-off 204
maintenance
Rustproofing 570
Manual gearbox 410
Max. roof load 581
Media player 463
compatible file formats 475
voice control 116
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control 305
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 348
Messages in BLIS 356
Messages in displays 105
manage 107
saved 108
Meters
fuel gauge 97
Metric, Imperial, US 96
Mileage 161
Misting
condensation in headlamps 567
Mobile phone, see Phone 478
Mood lighting 143
N
Net
cargo area 224
O
octane rating 441
Oil, see also Engine oil 585, 586
Oil level low 539
Online car 484
book service and repair 528
connect car 484
no or poor connection 487
system updates 531
Options/accessories 19
Output 584
outside temperature gauge 96
Overheating 436, 448
Overtaking Assistance 300
Owner's manual 19
ecolabelling 32
in centre display 15, 16
Owner information 14
Owner’s Manual in mobile 18
P
PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch) 65
Paddle on the steering wheel 129
Paintwork
colour code 573
damage and touch-up 573
Panorama roof
opening and closing 155
pinch protection 158
sun blind 154
ventilation position 155
PAP - Active Park Assist 393
Park Assist 378, 381, 383
function 378, 380
Park assist camera 384, 386, 389, 391
settings 388
Park assist camera's limitations 389
Park assist lines for Park assist camera 386
Parking brake 428, 429, 431
Parking climate 200
Symbols and messages 206
Parking heater 208
Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch 65
Passenger compartment filter 179
Passenger compartment heater (Parking
heater) 208
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
605
Passenger compartment interior 212
electrical socket 214
Sun visor 219
tunnel console 212
Passenger compartment lighting
automatic 142
Petrol grade 441
Phone 477
Calls 480, 482
connect 478
text message 481
voice control 116
Pilot Assist 307, 311, 313, 314, 315,
317, 319, 320
overtaking 300
Pinch protection, panorama roof 158
PIN code 488
Pocket park assist - PAP 393
Polishing 569
Position lamp 133
Power operated tailgate 247, 250
Power panorama roof 154
Power save mode 437
Power seat 120, 122
Power windows 148
resetting 149
Preconditioning 200
start/shut-off 201
Timer 202
Protective grille 226
Pump up tyre 516
Puncture 512
Q
Queue Assist 307, 313, 320
Queue assistance 307, 313, 320
R
Radar sensor 290, 322
Limitations 324
Radar unit 322
Radio 458
change and search for radio station 458
DAB 461
settings 462
voice control 116
Rain sensor 145
Raising the car 533
Raising the rear section 220
Rear seat
Climate control 181, 182
Fan 187
head restraint 125
heating 197
lowering the backrest 126
Temperature 185
Rearview and door mirrors
compass 152, 153
door 149
electrically retractable 150
heating 188
interior 151
rear window
heating 188
Washers 147
Wiper 147
Recommendations during driving 437
Recommendations for loading 219
Recovery 454
Red Key 233
Refrigerant 542
climate control system 588
Refuelling 439
Regeneration 443
Remote control, HomeLink
®
programmable 158
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
606
Remote control immobiliser 255
Remote control key 172, 230, 233, 237
battery replacement 252
connect to driver profile 172
detachable key blade 245
loss 230
range 232
Remote control key system, type approval 260
Remote updates 531
Resetting, trip meter 163
Resetting the door mirrors 150
Resetting the power windows 149
Restore settings 173
Retractable power door mirrors 150
Retractable towing bracket 445
Road run-off protection 373
Road sign information 357
Limitations 362
operation 358, 360, 361
Roll Stability Control 270
Roof load, max. weight 581
RSC (Roll Stability Control) 270
Run out of fuel
diesel 443
Rustproofing 570
S
Safety 56
pregnancy 56
Safety mode 69
start/movement 70
Sealing fluid 512
Seat, see Seats 119
Seatbelt 58
buckle/unbuckle 60
pregnancy 56
seatbelt reminder 61
seatbelt tensioner 59
Seatbelt, see Seatbelts 58
Seatbelt reminder 61
Seatbelt tensioner 59
Seats
heating 197
manual front seat 119
memory function front seat 121
power front seat 120, 122
Ventilation 198
whiplash protection 57
sensors
Air quality 179
Climate control 177
Sensus
connection and entertainment 29
Sensus Navigation 359
Service position 547
Service programme 528
Set time interval 288
Settings 165
Categories 166
Resetting 169
settings menu 165
system settings 168
Side airbag 68
Side Impact Protection System 68
SIM card 488
SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) 68
Skidding 438
Ski hatch 222
slippery driving conditions 438
Soot filter 443
spare wheel 520
Speed camera 361
Speed limiter 275, 279
deactivation 278
getting started 276
temporary deactivation 277
Speed ratings, tyres 525
Spin control 271
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
607
Stabiliser
trailer 451
Stability and traction control system 271, 273
operation 272
Stability system 271
Stains 570
Start/Stop 414, 416
function and operation 414
the engine does not stop 416
Starting the engine 404
after collision 70
Start the car 404
Steering assistance at risk of collision 371
Steering assistance at risk of head-on colli-
sion 375
Steering assistance at risk of rear-end col-
lision 376
Steering force, speed related 270
Steering force level, see Steering force 270
Steering lock 406
Steering wheel 129, 130
heating 199
keypad 129
paddle 129
steering wheel adjustment 130
Steering wheel paddles 413
Stickers
location of 576
Stone chips and scratches 573
Stop/start function 414
Storage spaces 212
glovebox 218
tunnel console 212
Sun blind
panorama roof 154
Sun visor 219
Support battery 553
Switching off the engine 405
Switch off engine 405
Symbols
indicator symbols 93
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control 305
centre display status field 45
Collision Warning with Auto Brake 348
parking climate 206
Symbols and messages for Assistance at
risk of collision 372
System
updates 531
T
Tailgate
Locking/unlocking 242, 244
opening/closing with foot movement 250
power 247, 250
Temperature
Control 185
experienced 177
Temporary spare
spare wheel 520
Through-load hatch 222
Tools 452, 522
Towbar
foldable 445
Towing 453, 454
Towing bracket 445
specifications 447
Towing capacity and towball load 582
Towing eye 452
Traction control 271
Traffic information 462
Trailer 451
cable 448
driving with a trailer 448
snaking 451
Trailer stability assist 271, 451
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
608
Transmission 407
Transmission oil
grade 587
Tread 506
Tread depth 506, 521
Tread wear indicators 506
Trip computer 161, 163, 164
Trip meter 161
Trip meter, resetting 163
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control 302
TSA - trailer stability assist 271, 451
Tunnel console 212
Tunnel detection 134
TV 470
Type approval
radar system 328
remote control key system 260
Type designations 576
Tyre dimension 517, 525
Tyre load index 525
Tyre monitoring 507
Tyre pressure label 506
Tyre pressure monitoring
Calibrate 511
low tyre pressure 510
Tyre pressure table 595
Tyres 504
dimensions 593
direction of rotation 505
installation 519
pressure 506, 595
puncture repair 512
removal 518
specifications 593, 594, 595
storage 504
tread depth 521
tread wear indicators 506
tyre pressure monitoring 507
tyre pressure table 595
winter tyres 521
U
Unit standard
Trip computer 163
Unknown car part 259
Unlocking
from the outside 235
with key blade 246
USB
connect car to Internet 484
jack for connecting media 468
V
Vanity mirror
lighting 142
Ventilation 191, 192, 193
seats 198
Vibration damper 445
Video 468, 469
settings 463
Voice control
Climate control 117
map navigation 118
phone 116
radio and media 116
settings 115
Voice recognition 113
VOL marking 504
Volvo ID 23
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
609
W
Warning lamp
Adaptive Cruise Control 290
stability and traction control system 271
Warning lamps
Airbags – SRS 95
alternator not charging 95
Fault in brake system 95
Low oil pressure 95
Parking brake applied 95
seatbelt reminder 95
starter battery not charging 95
Warning 95
Warning sound
Parking brake 431
Warning symbols 95
Safety 56
Warning triangle 523
Washer fluid 549
Washer nozzles, heated 147
Washers
Headlamps 146
rear window 147
washer fluid, filling 549
windscreen 146
Waxing 569
Weights
kerb weight 581
Wheel bolts 520
lockable 520
Wheel change 517
Wheel rim, dimensions 524
Wheel rims
cleaning 569
Wheels
installation 519
removal 518
snow chains 521
Wheels and tyres
approved dimensions 593
tyre load index and speed rating 525, 594
whiplash protection 57
Whiplash Protection System 57
WHIPS (Whiplash Protection System) 57
Wi-Fi
connect car to Internet 484
delete network 488
share internet connection, hotspot 486
technology and security 488
Windows and glass 32
Windscreen
heating 188
projected image 110
Windscreen washing 146
Windscreen wiper 145
rain sensor 145
Winter driving 438
Winter tyres 521
Winter wheels 521
Wiper blades
changing 548
Service position 547
Wipers and washing 145
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
610
TP 23034 (English), AT 1717, MY18, Copyright © 2000-2017 Volvo Car Corporation
